Navigation Amendment Act 1979

No. 98 of 1979

An Act to amend the Navigation Act 1912, and for related purposes.

BE IT ENACTED by the Queen, and the Senate and House of Representatives of the Commonwealth of Australia, as follows:

PART I—PRELIMINARY

Short title, &c.

1. (1) This Act may be cited as the Navigation Amendment Act 1979.

(2) The Navigation Act 1912 is in this Act referred to as the Principal Act.

Commencement

2. (1) Sections 1, 2 and 3, sub-section 4(1), section 6, sub-sections 10(2) and 11(2), sections 17, 18, 21, 22, 23, 24 and 25, sub-section 26(2), sections 27, 28, 29 and 30, sub-section 32(1), sections 43 and 45, sub-sections 49(1) and 51(1), sections 54, 56, 59, 60 and 62, sub-section 65(3), sections 69 and 71, sub-sections 72(2) and 73(2), sections 74, 76, 77, 78 and 79, sub-sections 82(2) and 83(3), sections 85 and 86, sub-section 87(2), section 88, sub-section 89(1), sections 90, 91, 98, 100, 102 and 103, sub-sections 104(1) and (2) and sections 105, 106, 107, 108 and 109 shall come into operation on the day on which this Act receives the Royal Assent.

(2) Section 63, sub-sections 81(2) and 83(2) and section 99 of this Act shall be deemed to have come into operation immediately after the commencement of sections 5, 6, 7 and 9 of the Navigation Act 1972.

(3) Sections 57, 58, 61 and 64 of this Act shall be deemed to have come into operation on the day on which the Historic Shipwrecks Act 1976 came into operation but the amendments made by sections 58 and 61 of this Act do not apply in relation to a wreck situated in waters (including waters above the continental shelf of Australia) adjacent to the coast of a State until the Historic Shipwrecks Act 1976 applies in relation to those waters.

(4) Sub-sections 32(2), 38(1) and 49(2) and sections 50 and 94 shall come into operation on a date to be fixed by Proclamation for the purposes of this sub-section, being a date not earlier than the date on which the Convention on the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea, 1972, enters into force for Australia.

(5) Section 16, sub-sections 65(1) and (2), section 96 and sub-sections 104(3), (4) and (5) shall come into operation on a date to be fixed by Proclamation for the purposes of this sub-section, being a date not earlier than 6 months after the ratification by Australia of the Convention referred to in section 104.

(6) Section 31, sub-section 32(3), sections 33, 34, 35, 37, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 46 and 47, sub-section 51(2) and sections 93 and 110 shall come into operation on such date as is, or such respective dates as are, fixed by Proclamation for the purposes of this sub-section, being a date or dates, as the case may be, not earlier than the date on which the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974, enters into force for Australia.

(7) Sub-sections 32(4) and 38(2) and sections 48 and 95 shall come into operation on such date as is fixed by Proclamation for the purposes of this sub-section, being a date not earlier than the date on which the International Convention for Safe Containers enters into force for Australia.

(8) Section 80, sub-sections 81(1), 82(1) and 83(1) and sections 84, 97 and 111 shall come into operation on a date to be fixed by Proclamation, being a date not earlier than the date on which the International Convention on Tonnage Measurement of Ships, 1969, enters into force for Australia.

(9) Sub-section 73(1) of this Act shall come into operation on the day on which the Crimes at Sea Act 1979 comes into operation or, if that Act has come into operation before the day on which this Act receives the Royal Assent, that sub-section shall be deemed to have come into operation on the day on which that Act came into operation.

(10) The remaining provisions of this Act shall come into operation on such date as is, or such respective dates as are, fixed by Proclamation.

PART II—AMENDMENTS OF PRINCIPAL ACT

Application of Act

3. Section 2 of the Principal Act is amended by omitting This Act and substituting Except in so far as the application of this section is expressly excluded by a provision of this Act, this Act.

Interpretation

4. (1) Section 6 of the Principal Act is amended

(a) by omitting from the definition of equipment in sub-section (1) apparatus for preventing or extinguishing fires and substituting fire prevention, detecting and extinguishing appliances, inert gas systems, echo-sounding devices, mechanical pilot hoists;

(b) by omitting from sub-section (1) the definition of Government ship and substituting the following definition:

“‘Government ship means a ship

(a) that belongs to the Commonwealth or a State or Territory;

(b) the beneficial interest in which is vested in the Commonwealth or a State or Territory; or

(c) that is for the time being demised or sub-demised to, or in the exclusive possession of, the Commonwealth or a State or Territory,

and includes a ship that belongs to an arm of the Defence Force, but does not include a ship that belongs to the Australian Shipping Commission;;

(c) by omitting from sub-section (1) the definition of the Merchant Shipping Act and substituting the following definition:

“‘the Merchant Shipping Act means the Imperial Act known as the Merchant Shipping Act, 1894, as amended, or otherwise affected in its operation, by the provisions of any other Imperial Act or of any Act, in so far as that Act as so amended, or otherwise affected in its operation, is part of the law of the Commonwealth;;

(d) by adding at the end of the definition of this Act in sub-section (1) and, except to the extent that the regulations provide otherwise, includes orders made under this Act or in pursuance of the regulations; and

(e) by adding at the end thereof the following sub-section:

(4) Unless the contrary intention appears, a reference in this Act (except in Division 3 or 4 of Part VII) to the owner of a ship or vessel shall, in the case of a ship or vessel that is operated by a person other than the owner, be read as including a reference to the operator..

(2) Section 6 of the Principal Act is amended by omitting from sub-section (1) the definition of superintendent and substituting the following definition:

“‘superintendent

(a) in relation to a port in respect of which a notice under section 13a is in force—means a person who is the superintendent, or a deputy superintendent, at the port by virtue of the notice; and

(b) in relation to any other port, being a port at which there is a Collector—means that Collector;.

(3) Section 6 of the Principal Act is amended by adding at the end thereof the following sub-section:

(5) Unless the contrary intention appears, a reference in a provision of this Act to a prescribed country shall be read as a reference to a country prescribed for the purposes of that provision, and includes

(a) a colony, overseas territory or protectorate of a country so prescribed; and

(b) a territory for the international relations of which a country so prescribed is responsible..


(4) Section 6 of the Principal Act is amended by adding at the end thereof the following sub-section:

(6) Unless the contrary intention appears, a reference in this Act to the certificates of a master, officer or seaman shall be read as a reference to the certificates or other documents issued under, or having effect for the purposes of, this Act that are evidence that the master, officer or seaman, as the case may be, is a qualified master, officer or seaman, as the case may be, of any designation..

Repeal of section 6f

5. Section 6f of the Principal Act is repealed.

6. After section 7 of the Principal Act the following section is inserted:

Intra-State vessels

8. (1) In this section

inter-State voyage means a voyage (other than an overseas voyage) in the course of which the vessel concerned travels between

(a) a port in a State and a port in another State;

(b) a port in a State and a Port in a Territory; or

(c) a port in a Territory and a port in another Territory,

whether or not the vessel travels between two or more ports in any one State or Territory in the course of the voyage;

overseas voyage means a voyage in the course of which the vessel concerned travels between

(a) a port in Australia and a port outside Australia;

(b) a port in Australia and a place in the waters above the continental shelf of a country other than Australia;

(c) a port outside Australia and a place in the waters above the continental shelf of Australia;

(d) a place in the waters above the continental shelf of Australia and a place in the waters above the continental shelf of a country other than Australia; or

(e) ports outside Australia,

whether or not the vessel travels between two or more ports in Australia in the course of the voyage.

(2) A reference in section 187, 191 or 332 to an intra-State vessel shall be read as a reference to a vessel that is proceeding on a voyage other than an overseas voyage or an inter-State voyage.

(3) A vessel shall, for the purposes of this section, be deemed to be proceeding on a voyage from the time when it is got under way for the purpose of proceeding on the voyage until the time when it is got under way for the purpose of proceeding on another voyage..

7. Section 13a of the Principal Act is repealed and the following section is substituted:

Superintendents

13a. The Minister may, by notice in the Gazette, appoint a person specified or described in the notice to be the superintendent, or a deputy superintendent, at a port in Australia..

8. (1) Before Division 3 of Part II of the Principal Act the following Division is inserted:

Division 2a—The Manning of Ships

Minimum complement of ships

14. (1) Subject to this section, the Minister may, having regard to such principles as are prescribed for the purposes of this sub-section, by order, require a ship, or each ship included in a class of ships to carry a qualified master of a specified designation and to carry not less than

(a) a specified number of qualified officers of specified designations; and

(b) a specified number of qualified seamen of specified designations.

(2) Until such date as is fixed by Proclamation for the purposes of this sub-section, the Minister shall not make an order under sub-section (1) of this section unless he has obtained a report on the proposed order from a committee of advice appointed under section 424.


(3) On and after the date fixed for the purposes of sub-section (2), the Minister shall not exercise his powers under sub-section (1) except to the extent that it appears to him necessary or expedient in the interests of safety or the protection of the marine environment.

(4) An order under sub-section (1) may require a ship, or each ship included in a class of ships, to carry a master of a different designation and to carry different crews

(a) for different voyages;

(b) for the carriage of different cargoes;

(c) for the performance (whether in port or at sea) of different operations done by, or in relation to, the ship; and

(d) according to whether the ship is in port or at sea.

(5) Nothing in this section shall be construed as preventing more than one order under sub-section (1) from applying in relation to a ship.

(6) The Minister may, by instrument in writing, exempt a ship, or ships included in a class of ships, from the application of an order under sub-section (1).

(7) An exemption under sub-section (6)

(a) is subject to such conditions (if any) as are specified in the exemption; and

(b) may be confined to a particular period or to one or more particular voyages or operations.

(8) If an order under sub-section (1) is contravened or not complied with in relation to a ship, or a condition that is applicable to a ship by virtue of an exemption under sub-section (6) is contravened or not complied with, the master and the owner of the ship are each guilty of an offence punishable upon conviction by a fine not exceeding $1,000.

(9) Where a ship does not carry a master of such designation, and such officers and seamen, as it is required to carry by virtue of an order under sub-section (1) or the conditions of an exemption under sub-section (6)

(a) the Minister may cause the ship to be detained for the purpose of preventing it from going to sea; or

(b) the Minister may, by notice in writing addressed to the master or owner of the ship and served in accordance with the regulations, require that a specified operation by, or in relation to, the ship shall not commence or shall cease within a time specified in the notice, as the case may be.

(10) Nothing in this section shall be construed as preventing the service under paragraph (9) (b) of more than one notice in respect of a ship.

(11) If a notice under paragraph (9)(b) is contravened or not complied with in relation to a ship, the master and owner of the ship are each guilty of a further offence punishable upon conviction by a fine not exceeding $5,000.

(12) Section 426 applies to orders made under sub-section (1) of this section.

(13) In the preceding provisions of this section, a reference to a ship

(a) shall be read as a reference to

(i) a ship registered in Australia;

(ii) a ship (other than a ship registered in Australia) engaged in the coasting trade; or

(iii) a ship (other than a ship registered in Australia or engaged in the coasting trade) licensed under section 288 to engage in the coasting trade and operated by any of the following (whether or not in association with any other person, firm or company, being a person, firm or company of any description), namely

(A) a person who is a resident of, or has his principal place of business in, Australia;

(B) a firm that has its principal place of business in Australia; or

(C) a company that is incorporated, or has its principal place of business, in Australia; and

(b) shall be read as including a reference to a ship that is intended to be constructed or is in the course of construction and in either case is intended to become a ship of a kind referred to in sub-paragraph (a)(i), (ii) or (iii)..

(2) If this section comes into operation before the commencement of sub-section 10 (1), section 14 of the Principal Act as amended by sub-section (1) of this section has effect until the commencement of sub-section 10(1) as if

(a) the reference in sub-section (1) to a qualified master were a reference to a duly certificated master;

(b) the reference in that sub-section to qualified officers were a reference to duly certificated officers; and

(c) the reference in that sub-section to qualified seamen were a reference to appropriately rated seamen.

Repeal of sections 14 and 14a

9. Sections 14 and 14a of the Principal Act are repealed.

10. (1) Division 3 of Part II of the Principal Act is repealed and the following Division is substituted:

Division 3—Qualifications of Masters, Officers and Seamen

Regulations with respect to qualifications of masters, officers and seamen

15. (1) The regulations may specify standards of competence to be attained and other conditions to be satisfied, or specify conditions to be satisfied, by a person in order to be a qualified master, officer or seaman of any designation for the purposes of this Act.

(2) Without limiting the generality of sub-section (1), the conditions specified in regulations made for the purposes of that sub-section may include conditions as to age, character, health, nationality, citizenship or residence, and regulations made for the purposes of that sub-section may make provision for and in relation to

(a) the manner in which the attainment of any standard or the satisfaction of any other condition is to be evidenced, and, in particular, the obtaining of certificates and other documents to be held by masters, officers and seamen as evidence that they are qualified masters, officers or seamen of particular designations for the purposes of this Act;

(b) the issue, recall, surrender, replacement, form and recording of such certificates and other documents;

(c) the duration, variation, renewal, suspension and cancellation of such certificates and other documents;

(d) the instruction, training and examination of masters, officers and seamen, including the gaining of sea service and other experience, and the conduct of examinations, the conditions for admission to examinations and the appointment and remuneration of examiners;

(e) the recognition, for the purposes of this Act, in whole or in part and whether conditionally or unconditionally, of certificates and other documents granted or issued to or in respect of masters, officers and seamen under the laws of a State or Territory or of a country other than Australia;

(f) the reconsideration of decisions made under regulations made for the purposes of sub-section (1) or under orders made in pursuance of regulations made by virtue of paragraph (h) of this sub-section;

(g) the exemption of persons, in whole or in part and whether conditionally or unconditionally, from any requirement in relation to which provision is made by the regulations made for the purposes of sub-section (1); and

(h) empowering the Minister to make orders with respect to any matter for or in relation to which provision may be made by the regulations by virtue of this section.

(3) In sub-section (2), decision has the same meaning as in the Administrative Appeals Tribunal Act 1975.

(4) Section 426 applies to orders made in pursuance of regulations made by virtue of paragraph (2)(h) of this section.


Unqualified person going to sea as qualified master, officer or seaman

16. A person shall not

(a) serve on a ship, or enter into an agreement to serve on a ship, as a qualified master, officer or seaman of a particular designation if he is not a qualified master, officer or seaman of that designation;

(b) falsely represent himself to be a qualified master, officer or seaman of any designation; or

(c) take into employment as a qualified master, officer or seaman of a particular designation a person who is not a qualified master, officer or seaman of that designation.

Penalty: $1,000.

Certificates to be produced

17. A person who is serving on a ship, or is entering or has entered into an agreement to serve on a ship, as a qualified master, officer or seaman of any designation shall not, without reasonable excuse, fail to produce on demand his certificates to a proper authority.

Penalty: $500.

Proper authority may refuse to approve engagement of unqualified master, officer or seaman

18. A proper authority at a port may refuse to permit a person to enter into an agreement to serve on a ship as a master, officer or seaman of a particular designation if the proper authority is not satisfied that the person is a qualified master, officer or seaman of that designation.

Application of Division

19. (1) The provisions of this Division apply to

(a) ships registered in Australia;

(b) ships (other than ships registered in Australia) engaged in the coasting trade; and

(c) ships (other than ships registered in Australia or engaged in the coasting trade) licensed under section 288 to engage in the coasting trade and operated by any of the following (whether or not in association with any other person, firm or company, being a person, firm or company of any description), namely

(i) a person who is a resident of, or has his principal place of business in, Australia;

(ii) a firm that has its principal place of business in Australia; and

(iii) a company that is incorporated, or has its principal place of business, in Australia,

and to their owners, masters and crews.

(2) A reference in this Division to a ship shall be read as a reference to a ship to which this Division applies..

(2) If section 5 comes into operation before the commencement of sub-section (1) of this section, sections 17 and 18a of the Principal Act as amended by this Act have effect after the commencement of section 5 and until the commencement of sub-section (1) of this section as if or a citizen of Ireland were inserted after British subject (wherever occurring).

Repeal of Division 6 of Part II

11. (1) Division 6 of Part II of the Principal Act is repealed.

(2) If sub-section 4 (3) comes into operation before the commencement of sub-section (1) of this section, section 39 of the Principal Act as amended by this Act has effect after the commencement of sub-section 4 (3) and until the commencement of sub-section (1) of this section as if the reference in paragraph (c) to a Commonwealth country other than Australia were a reference to a prescribed country.

Heading to Division 7 of Part II

12. The heading to Division 7 of Part II of the Principal Act is omitted and the following heading is substituted:

Division 7Crew Work in Port

Repeal of sections 43 and 44

13. Sections 43 and 44 of the Principal Act are repealed.

14. After section 48 of the Principal Act the following sections are inserted:

Minimum age for employment at sea

48a. (1) Except as provided by the regulations, a person shall not engage another person for service at sea in any capacity unless that other person has attained the age prescribed in respect of that capacity.

(2) A proper authority at a port may refuse to permit a seaman to enter into an agreement to serve on a ship if he is not satisfied that the seaman has attained the age prescribed in respect of the capacity in which he is to be engaged or is otherwise entitled to serve at sea in that capacity.

Proper authority may refuse to permit engagement of seaman if discharge not produced

48b. A proper authority at a port may refuse to permit a seaman to enter into an agreement to serve on a ship if the seaman fails to produce a discharge from his last ship to the proper authority..

Repeal of section 58

15. Section 58 of the Principal Act is repealed.

16. After section 59a of the Principal Act the following section is inserted:

Shipowner not entitled to limit liability in respect of claims by crew, &c.

59b. (1) The owner of a ship is not entitled to limit his liability in respect of a claim that is made by the master or any other member of the crew of the ship, or by a servant of the owner on board the ship or by a servant of the owner whose duties are connected with the ship, where the claim arises from an occurrence of a kind specified in sub-paragraph (1)(a) or (b) of Article 1 of the International Convention relating to the limitation of the liability of owners of sea-going ships referred to in sub-section 330(1).

(2) The reference in sub-section (1) to the master or any other member of the crew of a ship, or a servant of the owner of a ship on board the ship or a servant of the owner of a ship whose duties are connected with the ship, shall be read as including a reference to the heirs, personal representatives and dependants of the master or other member of the crew, or servant of the owner, as the case may be..

Certificate of clearance

17. Section 60a of the Principal Act is amended by adding at the end thereof the following sub-section:

(3) It is a defence to a prosecution for an offence against sub-section (1) if the master of the ship concerned proves that a certificate of clearance could not have been obtained without unreasonable delay to the ship..

Discharges in Australia

18. Section 61 of the Principal Act is amended

(a) by omitting from paragraph (a) , if the ship is not registered in Australia or engaged in the coasting trade,; and

(b) by inserting in paragraph (a) by instrument in writing after Minister.

19. Section 66 of the Principal Act is repealed and the following section is substituted:

Return of seamans certificates

66. On the discharge of a seaman from a ship, the master of the ship shall return to the seaman any of the certificates of the seaman in the possession, custody or control of the master..

Report of seamans character

20. Section 67 of the Principal Act is amended by omitting from sub-section (2) indorse on his discharge and substituting furnish to the seaman.

Allotment of seamans wages

21. Section 70 of the Principal Act is amended by omitting paragraph (a) of sub-section (3) and substituting the following paragraph:

(a) an allotment note in the prescribed form, or in a form approved by the Minister by instrument in writing, is signed by the master and the seaman; and.


22. Section 75 of the Principal Act is repealed and the following section is substituted:

Payment of wages on discharge

75. (1) Where a seaman is discharged at a port in Australia, or at a port outside Australia from a ship registered in Australia, then

(a) subject to section 79, the seaman shall, before or at the time he is given his discharge, be paid the amount of wages due to him up to the time of his discharge, less any deductions specified in the account required to be delivered to him under sub-section 76(1) and any other deductions approved by the proper authority at the port; and

(b) if the seaman requests the master of the ship that he be paid in the presence of the proper authority—the seaman shall be paid in the presence of the proper authority or, if that is not practicable, through the proper authority.

(2) If a seaman is not paid the amount of his wages in accordance with sub-section (1), the master of the ship from which he is discharged, and the owner of the ship, are each guilty of an offence.

(3) It is a defence to a prosecution for an offence against sub-section (2) if the person charged proves that the failure to pay to the seaman the amount of his wages in accordance with sub-section (1) was due to the seamans act or default, to a reasonable dispute as to liability for those wages or to any other cause not attributable to the wrongful act or default of the person charged or of any person acting on his behalf..

Account of wages on discharge

23. Section 76 of the Principal Act is amended

(a) by omitting sub-section (1) and substituting the following sub-section:

(1) The master of a ship (whether British or foreign) who discharges a seaman at a port in Australia, and the master of a ship registered in Australia who discharges a seaman at any port, shall deliver to the seaman, either directly or through a proper authority, at the prescribed time and in the prescribed form or in a form approved by the Minister by instrument in writing, a full and true account of the wages of the seaman and of the deductions made or to be made for any reason from those wages.;

(b) by omitting from sub-section (3) The master and substituting Subject to sub-section (5), the master; and

(c) by adding at the end thereof the following sub-section:

(5) The Minister may, by instrument in writing, direct that, subject to such conditions (if any) as are specified in the direction, sub-section (3) does not apply in relation to the master of a specified ship or the master of a ship included in a specified class of ships..

Settlement of wages

24. Section 80 of the Principal Act is amended

(a) by omitting paragraph (a) and substituting the following paragraph:

(a) Where the settlement of a seamans wages is completed before a proper authority, the master or owner, and the seaman, shall, in the presence of the proper authority, sign, in the prescribed form or in a form approved by the Minister by instrument in writing, a mutual release of all claims in respect of the past engagement, other than any claim by the seaman against the master or owner that, by a note entered upon the release, is excepted from the release.; and

(b) by omitting from paragraph (d) discharge and settlement are and substituting settlement is.

Court may direct forfeiture of wages of deserting seaman

25. Section 105 of the Principal Act is amended

(a) by omitting sub-sections (1) and (2); and

(b) by omitting from sub-section (3) the seaman (first occurring) and substituting a seaman.

Repeal of section 121

26. (1) Section 121 of the Principal Act is repealed.


(2) If sub-section 4(3) comes into operation before the commencement of sub-section (1) of this section, section 121 of the Principal Act as amended by this Act has effect after the commencement of sub-section 4(3) and until the commencement of sub-section (1) of this section as if the reference in paragraph (c) to a Commonwealth country other than Australia were a reference to a prescribed country.

Regulations relating to accommodation

27. Section 136 of the Principal Act is amended

(a) by omitting paragraph (k) of sub-section (1) and substituting the following paragraph:

(k) the modification of a provision of the regulations in its application to a ship, or the exemption of a ship from the application of a provision of the regulations, where the keel of the ship was laid before the date of commencement of the provision or the ship had reached, before that date, a stage of construction specified in the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph.; and

(b) by omitting sub-section (2).

Crew Accommodation Committee

28. Section 138 of the Principal Act is amended

(a) by inserting after sub-section (4c) the following sub-sections:

(4d) The Chairman and other members of the Committee, and the deputies of the Chairman and other members of the Committee, shall be paid such remuneration as is determined by the Remuneration Tribunal.

(4e) The Chairman and other members of the Committee, and the deputies of the Chairman and other members of the Committee, shall be paid such allowances as are prescribed.

(4f) Sub-sections (4d) and (4e) have effect subject to the Remuneration Tribunals Act 1973.;

(b) by adding at the end of paragraph (b) of sub-section (8) and;

(c) by omitting from paragraph (c) of sub-section (8) and (last occurring); and

(d) by omitting paragraph (d) of sub-section (8).

Ships not to go to sea without required accommodation

29. Section 138a of the Principal Act is amended by inserting or by virtue of after under.

Right of Minister to dispose of effects of deceased seaman

30. Section 156 of the Principal Act is amended

(a) by omitting from sub-section (1) Five hundred dollars (wherever occurring) and substituting $2,000;

(b) by omitting from paragraph (c) of sub-section (1) a foreign country between which and the United Kingdom an agreement exists respecting the disposal of the property of deceased seaman of the respective nationalities of that country and the United Kingdom and substituting a country between which and Australia an international agreement exists relating to the disposal of the property of deceased seaman or apprentices who are nationals of that country; and

(c) by adding at the end thereof the following sub-section:

(3) Moneys to which sub-section (1) applies that, in the opinion of the Minister, cannot for the time being be dealt with as that sub-section requires, may be invested by the Minister as prescribed..

Application

31. Section 187 of the Principal Act is amended by adding at the end thereof the following sub-sections:

(2) Section 2 does not have effect in relation to a provision of this Part that gives effect to a provision of Chapter V of the Regulations contained in the Annex to the Safety Convention (other than Regulation 13 or 15 of that Chapter of those Regulations).


(3) Provisions of this Act giving effect to the Safety Convention do not apply in relation to an intra-State vessel to the extent that a law of a State or of the Northern Territory makes provision giving effect to the Safety Convention in relation to that vessel..

Interpretation

32. (1) Section 187a of the Principal Act is amended

(a) by omitting from sub-section (1) the definition of the Load Line Convention and substituting the following definition:

“‘the Load Line Convention means the International Convention on Load Lines, 1966, as corrected by the Procès-Verbal of Rectification dated 30 January 1969 and the Procès-Verbal of Rectification dated 5 May 1969 (a copy of the English text of the articles of which, and of the annexes to which, as so corrected, other than the chart attached to Annex II, is set forth in Schedule 4), as affected by any amendment, other than an amendment not accepted by Australia, made under Article 29 of the Convention;; and

(b) by omitting sub-section (2).

(2) Section 187a of the Principal Act is amended by inserting after the definition of the Load Line Convention in sub-section (1) the following definition:

“‘the Prevention of Collisions Convention means the Convention on the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea, 1972 (a copy of the English text of the articles of which is set forth in Schedule 3), together with the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea, 1972, constituted by the rules and other annexes attached to that Convention, as corrected by the Procès-Verbal of Rectification dated 1 December 1973 (a copy of the English text of which rules and other annexes, as so corrected, is also set forth in Schedule 3), as affected by any amendment, other than an amendment objected to by Australia, made under Article VI of that Convention;.

(3) Section 187a of the Principal Act is amended

(a) by omitting or territory from the definition of country to which the Safety Convention applies in sub-section (1);

(b) by omitting from the definition of Safety Convention ship in sub-section (1) registered in and substituting entitled to fly the flag of;

(c) by omitting from sub-section (1) the definition of the Safety Convention and substituting the following definitions:

“‘the Protocol of 1978 relating to the Safety Convention means the Protocol of 1978 relating to the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974 (a copy of the English text of the articles of which, and of the annex and appendix to which, is set forth in Schedule 2), as affected by any amendment, other than an amendment objected to by Australia, made under Article VIII of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974, as incorporated in that Protocol by Article II of that Protocol;

“‘the Safety Convention means the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974 (a copy of the English text of the articles of which, and of the annex and appendix to which, is set forth in Schedule 1), as affected by any amendment, other than an amendment objected to by Australia, made under Article VIII of that Convention and, after the date on which the Protocol of 1978 relating to the Safety Convention enters into force for Australia, as also affected by that Protocol;;

(d) by omitting sub-section (3) and substituting the following sub-sections:

(2) For the purposes of determining for the purposes of this Part whether a voyage is an international voyage, account shall not be taken of a deviation by a ship from an intended voyage if the deviation is due only to stress of weather or any other circumstance that neither the master nor the owner of the ship could have prevented or forestalled.

(3) For the purposes of determining for the purposes of Division 5 whether a voyage is an international voyage, a territory for which the United Nations are the administering authority, or for the international relations of which Australia or any other country is responsible, shall be deemed to be a separate country.; and


(e) by adding at the end thereof the following sub-section:

(5) For the purposes of this Part, an unregistered ship entitled to fly the flag of a country shall be deemed to be registered in that country..

(4) Section 187a of the Principal Act is amended by inserting before the definition of the Load Line Convention in sub-section (1) the following definition:

“‘the Container Convention means the International Convention for Safe Containers as corrected by the Procès-Verbal of Rectification dated 25 June 1976 (a copy of the English text of the articles of which, and of the annexes to which, as so corrected, is set forth in Schedule 5), as affected by

(a) any amendment of the Convention, other than an amendment not accepted by Australia, made under Article IX of the Convention; and

(b) any amendment of the annexes to the Convention, other than an amendment objected to by Australia, made under Article X of the Convention..

Declaration of countries to which the Safety Convention applies

33. Section 187b of the Principal Act is amended by omitting or territory (wherever occurring).

34. Section 187d of the Principal Act is repealed and the following sections are substituted:

Certificate by Minister as to amendments of the Load Line Convention

187d. The Minister may, by writing under his hand, certify that the amendments, other than amendments not accepted by Australia, by which the Load Line Convention was affected as at such date as is specified in the certificate are set out in, or annexed to, the certificate, and such a certificate is, for all purposes, prima facie evidence of the matters so certified.

Certificate by Minister as to amendments of the Safety Convention, &c.

187e. The Minister may, by writing under his hand, certify that the amendments, other than amendments objected to by Australia, by which the Safety Convention, or the Protocol of 1978 relating to the Safety Convention, was affected as at such date as is specified in the certificate are set out in, or annexed to, the certificate, and such a certificate is, for all purposes, prima facie evidence of the matters so certified..

Exemptions

35. Section 188 of the Principal Act is amended by adding at the end thereof the following sub-sections:

(2) The Minister may, in relation to a Safety Convention ship that is registered in Australia, exercise the right conferred on the Government of the Commonwealth by paragraph (b) of Regulation 4 of Chapter I contained in the Annex to the Safety Convention to exempt the ship from a provision of Chapter II-1, II-2, III or IV of the Regulations contained in that Annex, and a ship so exempted, and the master and owner of the ship, are exempt from compliance with any provision of this Act that gives effect to that provision.

(3) An exemption under sub-section (2) is subject to such safety requirements (if any) as are specified in the exemption.

(4) If a safety requirement that is applicable to a ship by virtue of an exemption under sub-section (3) is contravened or not complied with, the master and the owner of the ship are each guilty of an offence punishable upon conviction by a fine not exceeding $1,000..

Powers of inspection of surveyors

36. Section 190aa of the Principal Act is amended by omitting from sub-section (1) the certificate of competency of the master and substituting the certificates of the master.

Regulations to give effect to the Safety Convention

37. Section 191 of the Principal Act is amended by adding at the end thereof the following sub-sections:

(3) Section 2 does not have effect in relation to a regulation, or an order made in pursuance of the regulations, that gives effect to a provision of Chapter V of the Regulations contained in the Annex to the Convention (other than Regulation 13 or 15 of that Chapter of those Regulations).


(4) Regulations and orders giving effect to the Convention do not apply in relation to an intra-State vessel to the extent that a law of a State or of the Northern Territory makes provision giving effect to the Convention in relation to that vessel..

Regulations giving effect to Conventions-discretion of Governor-General and Minister

38. (1) Section 191a of the Principal Act is amended by omitting from sub-sections (1) and (2) or (second occurring) and substituting , the Prevention of Collisions Convention or the.

(2) Section 191a of the Principal Act is amended by inserting in sub-section (1) the Container Convention, before the Safety Convention.

Duration and extension of certificates

39. Section 195 of the Principal Act is amended by inserting after sub-section (1) the following sub-sections:

(1a) Where a ship in respect of which a certificate of survey, a passenger certificate or a certificate of equipment has been issued is not in an Australian port at the time when the certificate expires or is about to expire, the Minister may, if it appears proper and reasonable for him so to do, extend the certificate for a period not exceeding 5 months from the date of expiration of the certificate, for the purpose of allowing the ship to proceed to a port specified by the Minister to be surveyed.

(1b) An extension of a certificate under sub-section (1a) is of no further effect upon the arrival of the ship at the port so specified..

40. After section 195 of the Principal Act the following section is inserted:

Cancellation of certificates if ship ceases to be registered in Australia

195a. A certificate of survey, a passenger certificate or a certificate of equipment ceases to have effect if the ship in respect of which it was issued ceases to be registered in Australia..

Extension of certificates

41. Section 206p of the Principal Act is amended

(a) by inserting in sub-section (1) , other than a cargo ship safety construction certificate, after a certificate; and

(b) by omitting from sub-section (3) has not been and substituting is not a cargo ship safety construction certificate or a certificate which has been.

42. After section 206p of the Principal Act the following section is inserted:

Cancellation of certificates if ship ceases to be registered in Australia

206pa. A certificate issued under this Division ceases to have effect if the ship in respect of which it was issued ceases to be registered in Australia..

Certificates required for non-Safety Convention ships not registered in Australia

43. Section 206v of the Principal Act is amended by omitting sub-section (2) and substituting the following sub-sections:

(2) The Minister may, by instrument in writing, exempt a ship, or ships included in a class of ships, from the application of sub-section (1).

(3) The Minister shall not exercise his powers under sub-section (2) unless he is satisfied, having regard to any certificate in force in respect of the ship or each ship included in the class of ships, that he can do so without danger to the ship or each ship, as the case may be, or to the passengers and crew.

(4) An exemption under sub-section (2)

(a) is subject to such conditions (if any) as are specified in the exemption; and

(b) may be confined to a particular period or to one or more particular voyages.

(5) If a condition that is applicable to a ship by virtue of an exemption under sub-section (4) is contravened or not complied with, the master and owner of the ship are each guilty of an offence punishable upon conviction by a fine not exceeding $1,000..

Interpretation

44. Section 218 of the Principal Act is amended by omitting sub-section (2).


Ships not to be overloaded

45. Section 227b of the Principal Act is amended

(a) by omitting from sub-section (1) deadweight tonnage (first occurring) and substituting deadweight tonneage;

(b) by omitting from sub-section (1) each inch or part of an inch and substituting each 25 millimetres or part thereof;

(c) by omitting the table at the foot of sub-section (1) and substituting the following table:

 

Amount

 

$

1—Gross registered tonnage (passenger ships)

 

Not exceeding 1,000 tons...................................

500

Exceeding 1,000 tons but not exceeding 5,000 tons..................

1,000

Exceeding 5,000 tons but not exceeding 10,000 tons..................

2,000

Exceeding 10,000 tons but not exceeding 20,000 tons.................

4,000

Exceeding 20,000 tons but not exceeding 40,000 tons.................

6,000

Exceeding 40,000 tons.....................................

8,000

2—Deadweight tonneage (cargo ships)

 

Not exceeding 1,000 tonnes..................................

500

Exceeding 1,000 tonnes but not exceeding 5,000 tonnes...............

1,000

Exceeding 5,000 tonnes but not exceeding 10,000 tonnes..............

2,000

Exceeding 10,000 tonnes but not exceeding 20,000 tonnes..............

4,000

Exceeding 20,000 tonnes but not exceeding 40,000 tonnes..............

6,000

Exceeding 40,000 tonnes....................................

8,000

(d). by omitting from sub-section (2) deadweight tonnage (wherever occurring) and substituting deadweight tonneage; and

(e) by inserting in sub-section (2) or tonnes, as the case requires, after tons (wherever occurring).

Heading to Division 8 of Part IV

46. The heading to Division 8 of Part IV of the Principal Act is omitted and the following heading is substituted:

Division 8—Musters, Drills and Checks and Tests of Machinery and Equipment.

47. After section 235 of the Principal Act the following section is inserted:

Machinery and equipment checks and tests

236. The master of a ship

(a) shall ensure that checks and tests of the machinery and equipment of the ship are conducted as required by the regulations; and

(b) shall, in accordance with the regulations, make, or cause to be made, in the official log-book of the ship entries relating to the conducting of such checks and tests and any failure to conduct such a check or test.

Penalty: $500..

48. After Division 8 of Part IV of the Principal Act the following Division is inserted:

Division 9—Containers

Interpretation

237. In this Division, container has the same meaning as in the Container Convention.


Declaration of countries to which the Container Convention applies

238. (1) The Minister may, by notice published in the Gazette, declare

(a) that a country specified in the notice has ratified, accepted, approved or acceded to the Container Convention or has ratified, accepted, approved or acceded to the Convention subject to reservations specified in the notice, as the case may be, and that the Convention has, or will, come into force or has, or will, come into force subject to those reservations, as the case may be, in respect of that country on a date specified in the notice; or

(b) that a country specified in the notice has denounced the Container Convention and that that denunciation has taken, or will take, effect on a date specified in the notice.

(2) A notice under sub-section (1) is, for all purposes, prima facie evidence of the matters declared.

Certificate by Minister as to amendments of the Container Convention

239. The Minister may, by writing under his hand, certify that the amendments (other than amendments not accepted by Australia) by which the Container Convention was affected, and the amendments (other than amendments objected to by Australia) by which the annexes to that Convention were affected, as at such date as is specified in the certificate are set out in, or annexed to, the certificate, and such a certificate is, for all purposes, prima facie evidence of the matters so certified.

Regulations to give effect to the Container Convention

240. (1) The regulations may make provision for and in relation to giving effect to the Container Convention.

(2) Without limiting the generality of sub-section (1), regulations made for the purposes of that sub-section may empower the Minister to make orders with respect to any matter for or in relation to which provision may be made by the regulations by virtue of this section.

(3) Regulations giving effect to the Container Convention do not apply in relation to a container in a State or in the Northern Territory to the extent that a law of that State or Territory, as the case may be, makes provision giving effect to that Convention in relation to that container.

(4) Section 426 applies to orders made in pursuance of regulations made by virtue of sub-section (1) of this section.

Safety requirements and tests not required or permitted by the Container Convention not to be imposed

241. (1) Nothing in a law of the Commonwealth in force at the commencement of this Division shall, after that commencement, be taken as imposing or authorizing the imposition of structural safety requirements or tests on containers to which the Container Convention applies that are not required or permitted by that Convention to be imposed on such containers.

(2) Structural safety requirements or tests that are not required or permitted by the Container Convention to be imposed on containers to which that Convention applies shall not be imposed by or under a law of a State or Territory on such containers.

(3) Nothing in sub-section (1) or (2) shall be taken to preclude the application in relation to containers to which the Container Convention applies of a law of the Commonwealth or of a State or Territory that prescribes additional structural safety requirements or tests of a kind referred to in paragraph 2 of Article V of that Convention..

Collisions, lights and signals

49. (1) Section 258 of the Principal Act is amended by omitting from sub-section (6) fees and travelling expenses and substituting remuneration and allowances.

(2) Section 258 of the Principal Act is amended

(a) by omitting from sub-section (1) ships and substituting vessels;

(b) by inserting after sub-section (1) the following sub-sections:

(1a) Without limiting the generality of sub-section (1), the regulations may make provision for and in relation to giving effect to the Prevention of Collisions Convention, and section 2 does not have effect in relation to regulations, and orders made in pursuance of the regulations, that give effect to that Convention.


(1b) Regulations and orders giving effect to the Prevention of Collisions Convention do not apply in relation to a vessel that is in the area constituted by

(a) the territorial sea of Australia;

(b) the sea on the landward side of the territorial sea of Australia; and

(c) waters other than waters of the sea,

to the extent that a law of a State or of the Northern Territory makes provision giving effect to that Convention in relation to that vessel while it is in that area.;

(c) by omitting from sub-section (2) sub-section (1) and substituting this section;

(d) by omitting from sub-section (2) $200 and substituting $2,000; and

(e) by omitting from sub-sections (3), (4) and (5) sub-section (1) and substituting this section.

50. After section 258 of the Principal Act the following section is inserted:

Certificate by Minister as to amendments of the Prevention of Collisions Convention

258aa. The Minister may, by writing under his hand, certify that the amendments, other than amendments objected to by Australia, by which the Prevention of Collisions Convention was affected as at such date as is specified in the certificate are set out in, or annexed to, the certificate, and such a certificate is, for all purposes, prima facie evidence of the matters so certified..

Accidents, &c., to be reported

51. (1) Section 268 of the Principal Actis amended

(a) by omitting the limits of Australia or the territorial waters of Australia and substituting Australia; and

(b) by inserting or another port in Australia after that port.

(2) Section 268 of the Principal Act is amended

(a) by omitting paragraph (b) and substituting the following paragraph:

(b) has sustained an accident or has otherwise received damage, or a defect in the ship or its boilers, machinery or equipment has been discovered, and the accident, damage or defect has affected, or is likely to affect

(i) the seaworthiness or safety of the ship;

(ii) the efficient operation or the safety of the boilers, machinery or fixed equipment of the ship; or

(iii) the efficiency or completeness of the life-saving appliances or other safety equipment of the ship;; and

(b) by adding at the end thereof the following sub-section:

(2) In this section

fixed equipment means equipment included in a class of equipment specified in the regulations as fixed equipment for the purposes of this section;

safety equipment means equipment included in a class of equipment specified in the regulations as safety equipment for the purposes of this section..

52. The following Division is added at the end of Part IV of the Principal Act:

Division 14—Reports of Movements of Ships

Interpretation

269b. In this Division, unless the contrary intention appears

Australia includes an external Territory within the prescribed area;


foreign ship means a ship that is registered in a country other than Australia, but does not include a ship that

(a) is engaged in the coasting trade or in trade between Australia and an external Territory or between external Territories; or

(b) is demised under a charterparty to a charterer whose residence or principal place of business is in Australia;

port of call, in relation to a ship, includes its port of destination and, in the case of a ship on a round trip, its port of departure;

prescribed area means the area of sea prescribed under paragraph 269e (a);

prescribed officer means

(a) the person occupying, or performing the duties of, the office prescribed for the purposes of paragraph 269e (b); and

(b) a person holding an appointment under sub-section 269m (1);

sailing plan means a sailing plan furnished under section 269f, and includes that sailing plan as varied at any time by a position report under section 269h;

time of day means a time of day expressed by reference to Greenwich Mean Time.

Objects of Division

269c. The objects of this Division include the making of provision to enable the Government of the Commonwealth to carry out the duty imposed on it as a Contracting Government under the Safety Convention to ensure that any necessary arrangements are made for coast watching and for the rescue of persons in distress at sea around the coast of Australia.

Extension to Territories

269d. This Division extends to an external Territory in the prescribed area.

Prescription

269e. For the purposes of this Division

(a) the regulations may prescribe an area of sea (including the territorial sea) around Australia as the prescribed area; and

(b) the regulations may prescribe an office in the Department that deals with matters arising under this Act as the prescribed office.

Sailing plan

269f. (1) Subject to this section, the master of a ship shall not take the ship to sea from a port in Australia (in this section referred to as the port of departure) unless he has, not earlier than 24 hours before the departure of the ship, furnished, in the prescribed manner, to a prescribed officer a sailing plan specifying the next port of call of the ship and containing such other information as is prescribed of the proposed movement of the ship from the port of departure until

(a) if that port of call is a port in Australia—it arrives at that port of call; or

(b) if that port of call is a port outside Australia—it leaves the prescribed area.

(2) Subject to sub-section (3), where a ship referred to in sub-section (1) is, after leaving the port of departure, to be at sea for a period of not less than 24 hours without calling at a port of call, the sailing plan with respect to the ship shall nominate a time of day for the furnishing by the master of a position report, or position reports, under sub-section 269h (1).

(3) Sub-section (2) does not apply in relation to a foreign ship the next port of call of which is a port outside Australia if the master of the ship, when furnishing the sailing plan, gives a notification, in the prescribed manner, to a prescribed officer that he does not intend to furnish position reports.

(4) In sub-section (3), Australia does not include an external Territory.

(5) A master of a ship who takes the ship to sea from a port in Australia without having furnished a sailing plan in accordance with sub-section (1) may, within 2 hours after so taking the ship to sea, furnish, in the prescribed manner, to a prescribed officer a sailing plan containing the information required by sub-section (1) and, where applicable, sub-section (2) and, if he does so, the taking of the ship to sea shall be deemed not to have been a contravention of sub-section (1).


Cancellation of sailing plan

269g. (1) Where the master of a ship at a port has furnished a sailing plan with respect to the proposed movement of the ship after leaving the port, the master may, at any time before he takes the ship to sea from the port, notify a prescribed officer, in the prescribed manner, of the cancellation of the plan.

(2) Where the master of a ship at a port

(a) takes the ship to sea at a time that is earlier, by more than 2 hours, than the time of departure specified in a sailing plan with respect to the ship; and

(b) does not, before so taking the ship to sea, notify the cancellation of the sailing plan under this section,

the sailing plan shall, for the purposes of this Division, be deemed not to have been furnished.

(3) Where

(a) a ship in respect of which a sailing plan has been furnished has not left the port of departure to which the sailing plan refers at the expiration of 2 hours after the time of departure specified in the sailing plan; and

(b) the master of the ship has not notified the cancellation of the sailing plan under sub-section (1),

the master shall forthwith give such a notification.

(4) Where the master of a ship at a port notifies the cancellation of a sailing plan under this section, the plan shall, for the purposes of this Division, be deemed not to have been furnished.

Position report

269h. (1) The master of a ship in respect of which there is a sailing plan nominating a time of day for the furnishing of position reports under this sub-section shall, on each day while the ship is at sea, furnish a position report with respect to the position, course and speed of the ship at the time of day so nominated.

(2) Where a ship referred to in sub-section (1) is, at any time, in a position that is so distant from the position in which it would be predicted to be from information in the sailing plan that more than 2 hours would be required for the ship to cover the distance from the one position to the other, the master of the ship shall furnish a position report with respect to the position, course and speed of the ship at that time.

(3) A position report under this section shall be furnished

(a) in the prescribed manner;

(b) to a prescribed officer; and

(c) not earlier than 2 hours before, and not later than, the time to which the report relates.

(4) Where a position report under this section is furnished before the time to which it relates, the position, course and speed of the ship stated in the report shall be the predicted position, course and speed at that time.

(5) The regulations may provide that a position report is to include such further information as is prescribed.

(6) This section does not apply in relation to a foreign ship the next port of call of which is a port outside Australia but, if the sailing plan nominates a time of day for the furnishing of position reports, the master of the ship may, if he so wishes, furnish position reports in accordance with this section.

(7) In sub-section (6), Australia does not include an external Territory.

Arrival report and report of leaving prescribed area

269j. (1) Subject to this section, the master of a ship that arrives at a port in Australia shall, within 2 hours after that arrival, furnish, in the prescribed manner, to a prescribed officer a report that the ship has so arrived.

(2) Sub-section (1) does not apply in relation to the arrival of a ship at a port if, not earlier than 2 hours before the estimated time of arrival of the ship at that port, the master of the ship furnished, in the prescribed manner, to a prescribed officer a report that the ship was so to arrive.

(3) Subject to this section, where

(a) the master of a ship has furnished a sailing plan that nominates a time of day for the furnishing of position reports;

(b) the next port of call specified in the sailing plan is a port outside Australia; and

(c) the ship leaves the prescribed area in the course of its voyage to that port,

the master of the ship shall, on or before the next occurrence of the time of day referred to in paragraph (a) after leaving the prescribed area, furnish, in the prescribed manner, to a prescribed officer a report that the ship has left the prescribed area.

(4) Sub-section (3) does not apply in relation to a foreign ship but the master of such a ship may, if he so wishes, furnish a report in accordance with that sub-section.

(5) A report under sub-section (3) shall specify the position, course and speed of the ship at the time of departure from the prescribed area.

(6) The regulations may provide that a report under this section is to include such further information as is prescribed.

Ships entering the prescribed area

269k. (1) Where a ship enters the prescribed area from a port outside Australia, this Division applies in relation to that ship as if the entry into the prescribed area were the departure from a port in Australia.

(2) A sailing plan furnished by virtue of this section shall, in addition to the information required by section 269f, specify the position, course and speed, or the predicted position, course and speed, of the ship at the time of entry into the prescribed area.

(3) Sub-section (1) does not apply in relation to a foreign ship, but the master of a foreign ship that enters the prescribed area from a port outside Australia may, if he so wishes, furnish the sailing plan that he would be required to furnish if the ship were not a foreign ship and, upon his so doing, sub-section (1) shall be taken to have applied, and to apply, in relation to the ship in respect of that entry into the prescribed area.

Exemption

269l. (1) The Minister may, by instrument in writing, exempt a ship, or ships included in a class of ships, from all or any of the provisions of this Division.

(2) An exemption under sub-section (1)

(a) is subject to such conditions (if any) as are specified in the exemption; and

(b) may be confined to a particular period or to one or more particular voyages.

Appointment of agents

269m. (1) The Minister may, by instrument in writing, appoint persons to receive, on behalf of the person occupying, or performing the duties of, the office prescribed for the purposes of paragraph 269e (b), sailing plans, notifications and reports under this Division.

(2) An appointment under sub-section (1) may specify the person to whom the appointment relates by reference to the office or position that the person holds or the functions or duties that the person performs.

Offences

269n. (1) If the master of a ship contravenes or fails to comply with a provision of this Division or a condition that is applicable to the ship by virtue of an exemption under section 269l, the master and the owner of the ship are each guilty of an offence against this section punishable upon conviction by a fine not exceeding $2,000.

(2) It is a defence if a person charged with an offence against this section proves that it was not possible for the master of the ship concerned to comply with, or not to contravene, the provision or condition to which the charge relates..

Regulations as to passenger trade

53. Section 270 of the Principal Act is amended by omitting paragraph (k).


54. After Part V of the Principal Act the following Part is inserted:

PART Va—SPECIAL PURPOSE SHIPS AND SPECIAL PERSONNEL

Interpretation

283. In this Part

special purpose ship means a ship specified in the regulations as a special purpose ship or a ship included in a class of ships specified in the regulations as special purpose ships;

special personnel means persons carried on board a special purpose ship with the knowledge or consent of the owner, agent or master of the ship, other than

(a) the master or any other member of the crew of the ship;

(b) a pilot;

(c) a person temporarily employed on the ship in port; or

(d) any person included in a class of persons prescribed for the purposes of this paragraph.

Power to make regulations

283a. (1) The regulations may make provision for or in relation to special purpose ships or special personnel with respect to any matter with respect to which provision is made by this Act or may be made by regulations made otherwise than by virtue of this section.

(2) The regulations may provide that a specified provision of this Act does not apply, or applies with prescribed modifications, in relation to special purpose ships or special personnel.

Special personnel not passengers

283b. For the purposes of this Act, persons who are special personnel carried on board a special purpose ship shall, except where the contrary intention appears, be deemed not to be passengers on that ship..

Ships in receipt of subsidies

55. Section 287 of the Principal Act is amended by omitting from sub-section (1) any Government other than that of a Commonwealth country and substituting the government of a country other than Australia.

Payment of Australian rates of wages

56. Section 289 of the Principal Act is amended by omitting sub-sections (3) and (4).

Interpretation

57. Section 294 of the Principal Act is amended by inserting before the definition of Wreck the following definition:

Historic wreck means

(a) a historic shipwreck within the meaning of the Historic Shipwrecks Act 1976; or

(b) a historic relic within the meaning of that Act;.

58. After section 295 of the Principal Act the following section is inserted in Division 1 of Part VII:

Certain provisions of Part not applicable to historic wrecks

295a. (1) The provisions of sections 302 to 312 (inclusive), section 314 and Divisions 3 and 4 do not apply in relation to a wreck that is a historic wreck.

(2) Where the provisions referred to in sub-section (1) (in this sub-section referred to as the relevant provisions) cease to apply in relation to a wreck by reason that it becomes a historic wreck, section 8 of the Acts Interpretation Act 1901 has effect, subject to the Historic Shipwrecks Act 1976, in respect of any previous application of the relevant provisions in relation to that wreck as if the relevant provisions had been repealed by another Act with effect from the date on which they so cease to apply, but nothing in this sub-section precludes the relevant provisions from again applying in relation to that wreck if it subsequently ceases to be a historic wreck..


Courts in which disputes to be determined

59. Section 319 of the Principal Act is amended by omitting from sub-section (2) such sum as the Minister directs and substituting such remuneration and allowances as are paid to an assessor engaged in attendance on a Court of Marine Inquiry.

Appointment of valuer

60. Section 321 of the Principal Act is amended by omitting sub-section (3) and substituting the following sub-sections:

(3) A valuer shall be paid such remuneration as is determined by the Remuneration Tribunal.

(4) A valuer shall be paid such allowances as are prescribed.

(5) Sub-sections (3) and (4) have effect subject to the Remuneration Tribunals Act 1973..

Removal of wrecks on or near coast

61. Section 329 of the Principal Act is amended by adding at the end thereof the following sub-section:

(3) The provisions of sub-section (1) have effect in relation to a wreck that is a historic wreck notwithstanding anything contained in the Historic Shipwrecks Act 1976 but, in respect of a wreck that is a historic wreck, the Minister shall not exercise any of the powers referred to in that sub-section unless in his opinion it is necessary to do so for the purpose of

(a) saving human life;

(b) securing the safe navigation of ships; or

(c) dealing with an emergency involving a serious threat to the environment..

Offences

62. Section 329g of the Principal Act is amended by omitting from the definition of the prescribed amount in sub-section (3) tons (wherever occurring) and substituting tonnes.

Prevention &c., of pollution caused by escape of oil

63. Section 329k of the Principal Act is amended

(a) by omitting from sub-section (7) the definition of adjusted net tonnage and substituting the following definition:

“‘adjusted register tonnage, in relation to a ship, means the number of tons that would be the register tonnage of the ship if, in ascertaining that tonnage by reference to the gross tonnage of the ship in accordance with the normal rules for measuring the tonnage of ships, no deduction were made from the gross tonnage of the ship in respect of engine-room space;;

(b) by omitting from sub-section (7) the definition of tonnage factor and substituting the following definition:

“‘tonnage factor, in relation to a ship, means a number equal to the number of tons included in the adjusted register tonnage of the ship or, if the ship cannot be measured in accordance with the normal rules for measuring the tonnage of ships, a number equal to 40% of the number of tonnes of oil of a specific gravity of 0.9 that the ship is capable of carrying in bulk as cargo.; and

(c) by omitting sub-section (8).

Saving of other laws

64. Section 329l of the Principal Act is amended by adding at the end thereof and nothing in the Historic Shipwrecks Act 1976 affects the operation of this Part..

65. (1) Part VIII of the Principal Act is repealed and the following Part is substituted:

PART VIII—LIMITATION AND EXCLUSION OF SHIPOWNERS LIABILITY

Division 1—Limitation of Liability


Interpretation

330. (1) In this Division, unless the contrary intention appears

applied provisions of the Convention means the provisions of the Convention that, by virtue of section 333, have the force of law as part of the law of the Commonwealth;

Convention means the International Convention relating to the limitation of the liability of owners of sea-going ships signed at Brussels on 10 October 1957, a copy of the English text of which is set forth in Schedule 6.

(2) In this Division, except so far as the contrary intention appears, a word or expression used in this Division has the same meaning as in the Convention.

Extension to external Territories

331. This Division extends to the External Territories.

Application

332. (1) Section 2 does not have effect in relation to the provisions of this Division.

(2) Section 3 does not have effect in relation to the provisions of this Division except to the extent that that section refers to vessels belonging to the naval, military or air forces of a country other than Australia.

(3) The provisions of this Division do not apply in relation to an intra-State vessel to the extent that a law of a State or of the Northern Territory makes provision giving effect to the Convention in relation to that vessel.

(4) The provisions of this Division shall be read subject to a law of the Commonwealth, a State or the Northern Territory to the extent that, by giving effect to an international agreement to which Australia is a party, it excludes or limits the right of the owner of a sea-going ship to limit his liability in accordance with the Convention.

(5) A reference in this section to the provisions of this Division shall be read as including a reference to the applied provisions of the Convention and the provisions of any regulations made for the purposes of section 336.

Convention to have force of law

333. The provisions of the Convention, other than sub-paragraph (1) (c) of Article 1 of that Convention, have the force of law as part of the law of the Commonwealth.

Certain ships to be treated as sea-going ships

334. (1) A ship, not being a sea-going ship, that

(a) is engaged in trade or commerce with other countries or among the States or with or among the Territories or, being a ship in the course of construction, is intended for use in trade or commerce with other countries or among the States or with or among the Territories; or

(b) belongs to, or is under the control of, the Commonwealth (including a ship that belongs to an arm of the Defence Force) or a body established for a public purpose by or under an Act or a law of a Territory (other than a prescribed law of the Northern Territory) or (being a ship in the course of construction that does not belong to, or is not under the control of, the Commonwealth or such a body) is being built by, or on behalf of, or to the order of, the Commonwealth or such a body,

shall, for the purposes of this Division and the applied provisions of the Convention, be treated as if it were a sea-going ship.

(2) A reference in sub-section (1) to a ship in the course of construction shall be read as a reference to a ship that has been launched, but not completed and delivered under the building contract.

Application to determine liability

335. (1) Where a claim is, or claims are, made against or apprehended by a person in respect of any liability of that person that he may limit in accordance with the applied provisions of the Convention, the person may apply

(a) in the case of a claim or claims made in proceedings in the Supreme Court of a State or Territory—to that Court; or


(b) in any other case—to the Supreme Court of any State or Territory,

to determine the limit of that liability in accordance with those provisions, and the Court may so determine the limit of that liability and may make such order or orders as it thinks fit with respect to the constitution, administration and distribution, in accordance with those provisions, of a limitation fund for the payment of claims in respect of which the person is so entitled to limit his liability.

(2) The Supreme Court of a State or Territory to which an application has been made under sub-section (1) may, if the Court thinks fit, at any stage in the proceedings, upon application or of its own motion, by order, transfer the proceedings to another Supreme Court.

(3) Where proceedings are transferred from a Court in pursuance of sub-section (2)

(a) all documents filed of record, and moneys lodged, in that Court shall be transmitted by the Registrar or other proper officer of that Court to the Registrar or other proper officer of the Court to which the proceedings are transferred; and

(b) the Court to which the proceedings are transferred shall proceed as if the proceedings had been originally instituted in that Court and as if the same proceedings had been taken in that Court as had been taken in the Court from which the proceedings were transferred.

Regulations, &c.

336. (1) The regulations may prescribe matters that are necessary or convenient to be prescribed for the purposes of carrying out or giving effect to the applied provisions of the Convention and, for or in connection with those purposes, may make provision for and in relation to

(a) the ascertainment of the tonnage of ships, including the estimation of the tonnage of ships in circumstances where it is not possible or reasonably practicable to measure their tonnage;

(b) the conversion of amounts of money expressed in the franc mentioned in Article 3 of the Convention into amounts of money expressed in the currency of Australia; and

(c) such matters as, under the Convention, are to be governed by the national law of a country that is a party to the Convention.

(2) Sub-section (1) shall not be taken as limiting the power of a judge or judges of the Supreme Court of a State or Territory to make rules of court with respect to a matter that is not provided for in regulations made by virtue of sub-section (1).

Evidence of certain matters

337. (1) The Minister may, by notice published in the Gazette, declare

(a) that a country specified in the notice has ratified or acceded to the Convention or has ratified or acceded to the Convention subject to reservations specified in the notice, as the case may be, and that the Convention has, or will, come into force or has, or will, come into force subject to those reservations, as the case may be, in respect of that country on a date specified in the notice;

(b) that a country specified in the notice has, at the time of deposit of its instrument of ratification or accession to the Convention or at any later time, declared that the Convention extends to a territory or territories specified in the notice and that that extension of the Convention has, or will, come into force on a date specified in the notice;

(c) that a country specified in the notice has denounced the Convention and that that denunciation has taken, or will take, effect on a date specified in the notice; or

(d) that a country specified in the notice has declared that the Convention shall cease to extend to a territory or territories specified in the notice and that that denunciation has taken, or will take, effect on a date specified in the notice.

(2) A notice under sub-section (1) is, for all purposes, prima facie evidence of the matters declared.


Division 2—Exclusion of Liability

Shipowner not to be liable in certain cases of loss of or damage to, goods

338. The owner of a ship, other than a foreign ship, shall not be liable to make good to any extent whatever any loss or damage happening without his actual fault or privity where

(a) any goods, merchandise or other things whatsoever taken in or put on board the ship are lost or damaged by reason of fire on board the ship; or

(b) any goods, being gold, silver, diamonds, watches, jewels or precious stones taken in or put on board the ship, the true nature and value of which have not, at the time of shipment, been declared by the owner or shipper thereof to the owner or master of the ship in the bills of lading or otherwise in writing, are lost or damaged by reason of any robbery, embezzlement, making away with or secreting thereof..

(2) If sub-section (1) of this section comes into operation before the commencement of section 80 of this Act, section 336 of the Principal Act as amended by sub-section (1) of this section has effect until the commencement of section 80 of this Act as if sub-section (1) were omitted and the following sub-section were substituted:

(1) The regulations may prescribe matters that are necessary or convenient to be prescribed for carrying out or giving effect to the applied provisions of the Convention and, in particular, without limiting the generality of the foregoing, may make provision for and in relation to

(a) the ascertainment of the tonnage of ships that are not registered or of ships that are registered but are included in a class of ships prescribed for the purposes of this paragraph;

(b) the conversion of amounts of money expressed in the franc mentioned in Article 3 of the Convention into amounts of money expressed in the currency of Australia; and

(c) such matters as, under the Convention, are to be governed by the national law of a country that is a party to the Convention..

(3) If sub-section 4 (3) comes into operation before the commencement of sub-section (1) of this section, section 332 of the Principal Act as amended by this Act has effect after the commencement of sub-section 4 (3) and until the commencement of sub-section (1) of this section as if the reference in sub-section (1) to a Commonwealth country were a reference to a prescribed country.

Repeal of section 355a

66. Section 355a of the Principal Act is repealed.

Appointment of assessors

67. Section 360 of the Principal Act is amended by omitting from sub-section (2) or, where the inquiry involves, or is likely to involve, any question as to the cancellation or suspension of the certificate of an engineer, who are, or have been, chief engineers of British ships.

Repeal of section 361

68. Section 361 of the Principal Act is repealed.

69. Section 362 of the Principal Act is repealed and the following section is substituted:

Remuneration and allowances of assessors

362. (1) An assessor shall be paid such remuneration as is determined by the Remuneration Tribunal.

(2) An assessor shall be paid such allowances as are prescribed.

(3) This section has effect subject to the Remuneration Tribunals Act 1973..

Powers of Court

70. Section 364 of the Principal Act is amended—

(a) by adding at the end of paragraph (f) of sub-section (1) and;

(b) by omitting from paragraph (g) of sub-section (1) and (last occurring); and

(c) by omitting paragraph (h) of sub-section (1).


Witnesses

71. Section 370 of the Principal Act is amended by omitting sub-section (4) and substituting the following sub-section:

(4) A witness to be examined before a Court of Marine Inquiry, or before a person appointed to receive evidence on behalf of a Court of Marine Inquiry, may make an affirmation in lieu of taking an oath, and an affirmation so made is of the same force and effect, and entails the same liabilities, as an oath..

Repeal of sections 372 to 375b

72. (1) Sections 372 to 375b (inclusive) of the Principal Act are repealed.

(2) If sub-section 4(3) comes into operation before the commencement of sub-section (1) of this section, sections 372 and 374 of the Principal Act as amended by this Act have effect after the commencement of sub-section 4(3) and until the commencement of sub-section (1) of this section as if the references in paragraph 372(b), and sub-section 374(2), of that Act as so amended to a Commonwealth country other than Australia were references to a prescribed country.

Repeal of sections 381 and 382

73. (1) Sections 381 and 382 of the Principal Act are repealed.

(2) If sub-section 4 (3) comes into operation before the commencement of sub-section (1) of this section, section 382 of the Principal Act as amended by this Act has effect after the commencement of sub-section 4(3) and until the commencement of sub-section (1) of this section as if the reference to a Commonwealth country were a reference to a prescribed country.

Power to detain foreign ship that has occasioned damage

74. Section 383 of the Principal Act is amended by omitting from paragraph (b) of sub-section (1) in any port of Australia or within three miles of the coast thereof and substituting in Australia.

Offences in connection with certificates

75. Section 389a of the Principal Act is amended by omitting sub-section (6) and substituting the following sub-section:

(6) In this section, certificate means any of the certificates of a master, officer or seaman, and includes a certified copy of such a certificate.

Indictable offences

76. Section 392 of the Principal Act is amended

(a) by omitting from paragraph (b) of sub-section (1) Four hundred dollars and substituting $5,000; and

(b) by omitting sub-section (2).

General penalty

77. Section 393 of the Principal Act is amended by omitting Forty dollars and substituting $200.

78. (1) After section 396 of the Principal Act the following section is inserted:

Offences against certain provisions of Act and regulations

397. (1) Section 19b of the Crimes Act 1914 does not apply to an offence to which this section applies by virtue of sub-section (2) or to an offence against the regulations that is declared by the regulations to be an offence to which this section applies.

(2) This section applies to offences created by, or resulting from the contravention or failure to comply with, the following provisions of this Act:

Sub-sections 14(8) and (11), section 16, items 4, 6, 8 and 9 of the table at the foot of section 100, sub-sections 125(1), 188(4), 190a(1), 191b(1) and (2), 192c(4), 193(1), 202(1), 206h(2), 206s(1) and (2) and 206t(1), (2) and (3), section 206u, sub-sections 206v(1) and (5), 217(1), 221(4) and (8), 227a(1), 227b(1) and 227d(1) and (2), sections 228, 231a and 231b, sub-sections 231c(1) and (2), section 233, sub-section 235(1), section 236, sub-sections 249(1), 253(1) and (2), 253a(2) and 254(1), sections 255, 256 and 268 and sub-section 269a(1)..


(2) Until the commencement of section 8 of this Act, sub-section 397(2) of the Principal Act as amended by sub-section (1) has effect as if

(a) the reference to sub-sections 14(8) and (11) were a reference to sub-sections 14(1) and 43(1); and

(b) the reference to section 16 were omitted.

(3) Until the commencement of sub-section 32(3) of this Act, sub-section 397(2) of the Principal Act as amended by sub-section (1) has effect as if the references to sub-section 188(4), sub-section 206v(5) and section 236 were omitted.

Proof of certificates and other documents

79. Section 401 of the Principal Act is amended

(a) by inserting in sub-section (1) and other documents after certificates;

(b) by inserting in sub-section (2) or other document after certificate; and

(c) by inserting in sub-section (3) or other document after certificate (wherever occurring).

80. After Part X of the Principal Act the following Part is inserted:

PART XaTONNAGE MEASUREMENT OF SHIPS

Interpretation

405b. (1) In this Part, unless the contrary intention appears

Australian tonnage measurement certificate means a certificate issued under sub-paragraph 405f(a)(ii) or paragraph 405f(b);

International Tonnage Certificate (1969) means a certificate in the form of the International Tonnage Certificate (1969) set out in Annex II to the Tonnage Measurement Convention;

international voyage means a voyage

(a) from a port in Australia to a port outside Australia;

(b) to a port in Australia from a port outside Australia;

(c) from a port in a Tonnage Measurement Convention country to a port outside that country; or

(d) to a port in a Tonnage Measurement Convention country from a port outside that country;

ship to which the Tonnage Measurement Convention applies means a ship to which, in accordance with Articles 3 and 4 of the Tonnage Measurement Convention, that Convention applies;

survey authority has the same meaning as in Part IV;

Tonnage Measurement Convention means the International Convention on Tonnage Measurement of Ships, 1969 (a copy of the English text of the articles of which, and of the annexes to which, is set forth in Schedule 8), as affected by any amendment, other than an amendment not accepted by Australia, made under Article 18 of the Convention;

Tonnage Measurement Convention certificate means an International Tonnage Certificate (1969) issued under sub-paragraph 405f(a)(i);

Tonnage Measurement Convention country means a country or territory specified in a notice under section 405c.

(2) For the purpose of determining whether a voyage is an international voyage

(a) account shall not be taken of a deviation by a ship from an intended voyage if the deviation is due only to stress of weather or any other circumstance that neither the master nor the owner of the ship could have prevented or forestalled; and

(b) a territory for which the United Nations are the administering authority, or for the international relations of which Australia or any other country is responsible, shall be deemed to be a separate country.

(3) For the purposes of this Part an unregistered ship flying the flag of a country shall be deemed to be registered in that country.


(4) Where a ship in the course of construction, or the construction of which has been completed, has not been registered and is not flying the flag of a country, but is intended to be registered in a particular country, the ship shall, for the purposes of this Part, be deemed to be registered in that country.

Declaration of countries to which the Tonnage Measurement Convention applies

405c. The Minister may, by notice published in the Gazette, declare that, for the purposes of this Part, a country or territory, other than Australia, specified in the notice is a country or territory to which the Tonnage Measurement Convention applies.

Certificate by Minister as to amendments of Convention

405d. The Minister may, by writing under his hand, certify that the amendments, other than amendments not accepted by Australia, by which the Tonnage Measurement Convention was affected as at such date as is specified in the certificate are set out in, or annexed to, the certificate, and such a certificate is, for all purposes, prima facie evidence of the matters so certified.

Tonnage measurement regulations

405e. (1) The regulations may make provision for and in relation to giving effect to the Tonnage Measurement Convention and may, for any purpose specified in the regulations, otherwise make provision (not inconsistent with the Convention) for or in relation to the ascertainment of the tonnage of ships.

(2) Any regulations that make provision for or in relation to giving effect to the Tonnage Measurement Convention may be expressed to apply to a ship, or a class of ships, that is not engaged on international voyages or to which the Convention otherwise does not apply, and may be expressed so as to apply with or without modifications specified in or to be determined under the regulations.

(3) The Governor-General may, with respect to a provision of the Tonnage Measurement Convention the terms of which are such as to vest in the several governments who are parties to the Convention a discretion as to whether any, and, if any, as to what, action should be taken thereunder, make, by regulation, such provision (if any) as the Governor-General in the exercise of that discretion thinks appropriate.

(4) Without limiting the generality of sub-section (1), regulations made for the purposes of that sub-section may empower the Minister to make orders with respect to any matter for or in relation to which provision may be made by the regulations by virtue of this section.

(5) Section 426 applies to orders made in pursuance of regulations made by virtue of sub-section (4) of this section.

Issue of tonnage measurement certificates

405f. Where the tonnage of a ship is measured under the regulations made for the purposes of section 405e, the Minister, or a survey authority authorized by the Minister, by instrument in writing, to issue certificates under this section, may issue in respect of the ship

(a) if the ship is registered in Australia and is a ship to which the Tonnage Measurement Convention applies or would be such a ship if it were engaged on international voyages

(i) an International Tonnage Certificate (1969); and

(ii) such other tonnage measurement certificates as the regulations provide should be issued in respect of the ship; or

(b) in any other case—such tonnage measurement certificates as the regulations provide should be issued in respect of the ship.

Extension and cancellation of certificates

405g. (1) Provision may be made in the regulations for and in relation to—.

(a) the cancellation, in accordance with paragraph (1) of Article 10 of the Tonnage Measurement Convention, of a Tonnage Measurement Convention certificate; and

(b) the continuance in force, in accordance with paragraph (3) of Article 10 of the Tonnage Measurement Convention, of a Tonnage Measurement Convention certificate.

(2) Subject to the regulations made by virtue of paragraph (1)(b), a Tonnage Measurement Convention certificate ceases to have effect if the ship in respect of which it was issued ceases to be registered in Australia.

(3) The regulations may specify circumstances in which an Australian tonnage measurement certificate ceases to have effect and may make provision for and in relation to the extension or cancellation of an Australian tonnage measurement certificate.

(4) Where a Tonnage Measurement Convention certificate or an Australian tonnage measurement certificate is cancelled

(a) the certificate is of no force or effect after the Minister has given notice in writing of the cancellation to the owner, agent or master of the ship in respect of which the certificate was issued; and

(b) the Minister may require the owner or master of the ship in respect of which the certificate was issued to deliver up the certificate to the Minister or to such other person as the Minister directs, and the ship may be detained until the requirement is complied with.

Tonnage Measurement Convention country may request Minister to issue certificate

405h. (1) Upon receipt of a request by the government of a Tonnage Measurement Convention country for the issue of an International Tonnage Certificate (1969) in respect of a ship that is registered in that country and is a ship to which the Tonnage Measurement Convention applies, the Minister may

(a) cause the tonnage of the ship to be measured under the regulations made for the purposes of section 405e; and

(b) issue, or cause to be issued, an International Tonnage Certificate (1969) in respect of the ship.
 

(2) A certificate issued under this section

(a) shall contain a statement to the effect that it has been issued at the request of the government of the country in which the ship is registered; and

(b) has effect, for the purposes of this Act, as if it had been issued by that government.

Minister may request Tonnage Measurement Convention country to issue certificate

405j. (1) The Minister may request the government of a Tonnage Measurement Convention country to issue, or cause to be issued, in respect of a ship that is registered in Australia and is a ship to which the Tonnage Measurement Convention applies, an International Tonnage Certificate (1969).

(2) A certificate issued in pursuance of such a request and containing a statement that it has been so issued has effect, for the purposes of this Act, as if it had been issued by the Minister under sub-paragraph 405f(a)(i).

Power of inspection of surveyors

405k. (1) A surveyor may at any reasonable time go on board a ship that is at a port in Australia, being a ship that is registered in a Tonnage Measurement Convention country and is a ship to which the Tonnage Measurement Convention applies, and

(a) may require the production of the International Tonnage Certificate (1969) issued in respect of the ship; and

(b) may inspect the ship, or any part of the ship, for the purpose of verifying that the main characteristics of the ship correspond to the data given in the certificate.

(2) A surveyor shall not, in exercising his powers under this section, unnecessarily detain or delay a ship from proceeding on a voyage.

(3) A person shall not obstruct or hinder a surveyor in the exercise of his powers under this section and shall, unless he has reasonable excuse for failing to do so, comply with any requirement made by a surveyor under this section. Penalty: $500.

Appeal from refusal to issue certificate, &c.

405l. (1) Where the issue of a certificate in respect of a ship under this Part is refused, the owner of the ship may appeal to a Court of Marine Inquiry.

(2) Where a certificate is issued under this Part in respect of a ship and the owner of the ship is dissatisfied with the certificate, he may appeal to a Court of Marine Inquiry.

(3) A Court of Marine Inquiry may, on the hearing of an appeal under this section, make such order as it thinks fit.

(4) In this section, this Part includes the regulations made for the purposes of this Part.

Register tonnage of non-Convention ships

405m. (1) The amount of the register tonnage specified in the certificate of registry of a ship registered in a prescribed country, other than a ship to which the Tonnage Measurement Convention applies, shall be the register tonnage of the ship for the purposes of this Act.

(2) The amount of the register tonnage of a ship, other than a ship registered in a prescribed country or a ship to which the Tonnage Measurement Convention applies, shall, for the purposes of this Act, be the register tonnage of the ship as determined in accordance with directions given by the Minister by instrument in writing in relation to the ship or the class of ships in which the ship is included.

Tonnage of non-Convention ships to be measured in certain cases

405n. Where

(a) an unregistered ship, other than a ship to which the Tonnage Measurement Convention applies, enters a port in Australia; or

(b) a dispute arises as to the tonnage of a ship, other than a ship to which the Tonnage Measurement Convention applies,

the tonnage of the ship shall be measured under the regulations made for the purposes of section 405e.

Assignment of other tonnages to non-Convention ships

405p. (1) Where, under the regulations made for the purposes of section 405e, there is assigned to a ship a gross tonnage and a register tonnage, instead of the gross tonnage and register tonnage ascertained in relation to the ship in accordance with the other provisions of those regulations, this Act applies in relation to the ship as if references in this Act to gross tonnage were references to the gross tonnage so assigned and references in this Act to register tonnage were references to the register tonnage so assigned.

(2) Where, under the regulations made for the purposes of section 405e, there is assigned to a ship a gross tonnage and a register tonnage, as alternatives to the gross tonnage and register tonnage ascertained in relation to the ship in accordance with the other provisions of those regulations, the assignment of such a gross tonnage and register tonnage shall be disregarded for the purposes of this Act, without prejudice to its effect for the purposes of any other law.

(3) This section does not apply to a ship to which the Tonnage Measurement Convention applies..

Amendments of Merchant Shipping Act in relation to tonnage

81. (1) Section 407a of the Principal Act is amended

(a) by omitting sub-sections (1) and (2); and

(b) by omitting from sub-section (3) by virtue of sub-section (1) of this section and substituting for the purposes of section 405e.

 

(2) Until the commencement of sub-section (1) of this section, section 407a of the Principal Act has effect as if the following sub-sections were inserted after sub-section (2):

(2a) Where, under the regulations made by virtue of paragraph (2)(f), there is assigned to a ship a gross tonnage and a register tonnage, instead of the gross tonnage and register tonnage ascertained in relation to the ship in accordance with the other provisions of the tonnage regulations, this Act applies in relation to the ship as if references in this Act to gross tonnage were references to the gross tonnage so assigned and references in this Act to register tonnage were references to the register tonnage so assigned.

(2b) Where, under the regulations made by virtue of paragraph (2)(f), there is assigned to a ship a gross tonnage and a register tonnage, as alternatives to the gross tonnage and register tonnage ascertained in relation to the ship in accordance with the other provisions of the tonnage regulations, the assignment of such a gross tonnage and register tonnage shall be disregarded for the purposes of this Act, without prejudice to its effect for the purposes of any other law..

Repeal of section 407b

82. (1) Section 407b of the Principal Act is repealed.


(2) If sub-section 4(3) comes into operation before the commencement of sub-section (1) of this section, section 407b of the Principal Act as amended by this Act has effect after the commencement of sub-section 4(3) and until the commencement of sub-section (1) of this section as if the references in sub-sections (1) and (3) to a Commonwealth country were references to a prescribed country.

Repeal of section 408

83. (1) Section 408 of the Principal Act is repealed.

(2) Until the commencement of sub-section (1) of this section, section 408 of the Principal Act has effect as if the reference in that section to net tonnage were a reference to register tonnage.

(3) If sub-section 4(3) comes into operation before the commencement of sub-section (1) of this section, section 408 of the Principal Act as amended by this Act has effect after the commencement of sub-section 4(3) and until the commencement of sub-section (1) of this section as if the reference in that section to a Commonwealth country were a reference to a prescribed country.

Repeal of section 409

84. Section 409 of the Principal Act is repealed.

Copy of Act to be kept on certain ships

85. Section 410 of the Principal Act is amended by omitting sub-section (2) and substituting the following sub-section:

(2) In sub-section (1), this Act, except to the extent that the regulations provide otherwise, does not include regulations or orders made under this Act or in pursuance of the regulations..

Detention of ships

86. Section 414 of the Principal Act is amended by omitting from sub-section (2) Two hundred dollars and substituting $5,000.

Repeal of section 420

87. (1) Section 420 of the Principal Act is repealed.

(2) If sub-section 4(3) comes into operation before the commencement of sub-section (1) of this section, section 420 of the Principal Act as amended by this Act has effect after the commencement of sub-section 4(3) and until the commencement of sub-section (1) of this section as if the reference in sub-section (6) to a Commonwealth country other than Australia were a reference to a prescribed country.

Power to suspend provisions inconsistent with treaty or other international agreement

88. Section 422 of the Principal Act is amended—

(a) by omitting made between that country and the United Kingdom and substituting or other international agreement to which that country and Australia are parties; and

(b) by inserting or other international agreement after the treaty.

Marine Council and committees of advice

89. (1) Section 424 of the Principal Act is amended—

(a) by inserting after sub-section (8) the following sub-sections:

(8a) The Chairman and other members of the Marine Council, the deputies of the Chairman and other members of the Marine Council, and the members of a committee of advice, shall be paid such remuneration as is determined by the Remuneration Tribunal.

(8b) The Chairman and other members of the Marine Council, the deputies of the Chairman and other members of the Marine Council, and the members of a committee of advice, shall be paid such allowances as are prescribed.

(8c) Sub-sections (8a) and (8b) have effect subject to the Remuneration Tribunals Act 1973.;

(b) by adding at the end of paragraph (c) of sub-section (9) and;

(c) by omitting from paragraph (d) of sub-section (9) and (last occurring); and

(d) by omitting paragraph (e) of sub-section (9).

(2) Section 424 of the Principal Act is amended by omitting from sub-section (6) sub-section 14(2) or 43(2) or.


Regulations

90. Section 425 of the Principal Act is amended

(a) by omitting paragraph (f) and substituting the following paragraphs:

(f) empowering the Minister to make orders for and in relation to

(i) the safe navigation and operation of ships;

(ii) the safety of persons, including pilots, going on or coming from, or on board, ships;

(iii) the protection of the health of persons on board ships;

(iv) the stability of ships;

(v) the construction, hull, equipment and machinery of ships;

(vi) the loading and unloading of ships; and

(vii) the stowing and carriage of cargo in ships;

(fa) empowering the Minister to make orders with respect to any matter for or in relation to which provision may be made by the regulations under section 253a;;

(b) by omitting paragraph (h) and substituting the following paragraphs:

(h) the imposition of penalties not exceeding a fine of $500 or imprisonment for a period of 3 months, or both, for a contravention of, or failure to comply with, a provision of the regulations or a notice, order, direction or instruction given, issued or made under or in force by virtue of the regulations;

(ha) the manner in which notices, orders, directions, instructions or other documents under this Act may be given, served or notified; and; and

(c) by adding at the end thereof the following sub-sections:

(2) The power to make regulations and orders conferred by this Act, and the power to make orders in pursuance of the regulations, shall not be taken, by implication, not to include the power to make provision for or in relation to a matter by reason only of the fact that

(a) provision is made by this Act or the regulations, as the case may be, in relation to that matter or another matter; or

(b) power is expressly conferred by this Act or the regulations, as the case may be, to make provision by regulation or order for or in relation to another matter.

(3) The power to make regulations and orders conferred by this Act, and the power to make orders in pursuance of the regulations, may be exercised

(a) in relation to all cases to which the power extends, or in relation to all those cases subject to specified exceptions, or in relation to any specified cases or classes of case; and

(b) so as to make, as respects the cases in relation to which it is exercised, the same provision for all those cases or a different provision for different cases or classes of case.

(4) The power conferred by this Act to make modifications by regulation includes the power to omit any matter or add any new matter.

(5) Where regulations made by virtue of paragraph (1)(f) or (fa) empower the Minister to make orders with respect to any matter, the orders may, except to the extent that the regulations provide otherwise or the operation of this sub-section is expressly excluded by a provision of this Act, make such provision with respect to that matter as could be made by regulation.

(6) Section 49a of the Acts Interpretation Act 1901 applies in relation to the making of orders under this Act or in pursuance of the regulations in like manner as it applies in relation to the making of regulations.

(7) Where, by virtue of section 49a of the Acts Interpretation Act 1901, the regulations, or orders made under this Act or in pursuance of the regulations, apply, adopt or incorporate all or any of the provisions of the code known as the Uniform Shipping Laws Code adopted for the time being by the conference of Commonwealth and State Ministers known as the Marine and Ports Council of Australia, the regulations may make provision for and in relation to authorizing the Minister to exempt, conditionally or unconditionally, ships or classes of ships from the application of any or all of those provisions.


(8) Section 426 applies to orders made in pursuance of regulations made by virtue of paragraph (1)(f) or (fa) of this section..

91. After section 425 of the Principal Act the following sections are inserted:

Orders may be disallowed, &c.

426. (1) Sections 48, 49 and 50 of the Acts Interpretation Act 1901 apply in relation to orders to which this section applies as if references in those sections to regulations were references to such orders and references in those sections to an Act included a reference to regulations.

(2) An order to which this section applies shall not be deemed to be a statutory rule within the meaning of the Statutory Rules Publication Act 1903, but sub-sections 5(3) to (3c) (inclusive) of that Act apply in relation to such orders in like manner as they apply in relation to statutory rules.

Orders by Minister as to Uniform Shipping Laws Code

427. (1) In this section—

Code means the code known as the Uniform Shipping Laws Code adopted by the Council;

Council means the conference of Commonwealth and State Ministers known as the Marine and Ports Council of Australia.

(2) The Minister may, by order published in the Gazette, declare

(a) that the provisions annexed to the order are provisions, or are the provisions, of the Code as in existence on a specified date; or

(b) that specified provisions of the Code as in existence on a specified date have been varied by the Council on a specified date and that the variations annexed to the order are the variations so made by the Council.

(3) An order under sub-section (2) is, for all purposes, prima facie evidence of the matters declared in the order..

Repeal of Schedules Ia and IIa

92. (1) Schedules Ia and IIa to the Principal Act (as renumbered by virtue of section 100) are repealed.

(2) Section 204 of the Navigation Act 1958 is repealed.

Schedules 1 and 2

93. Schedule 1 to the Principal Act (as renumbered by virtue of section 100) is repealed and the Schedules set out in Schedule 3 to this Act are substituted.

Schedule 3

94. Before Schedule 4 to the Principal Act (as renumbered by virtue of section 100) the Schedule set out in Schedule 1 to this Act is inserted.

Schedule 5

95. After Schedule 4 to the Principal Act (as renumbered by virtue of section 100) the Schedule set out in Schedule 4 to this Act is inserted.

Schedule 6

96. Before Schedule 7 to the Principal Act (as renumbered by virtue of section 100) the Schedule set out in Schedule 2 to this Act is inserted.

Schedule 8

97. After Schedule 7 to the Principal Act (as renumbered by virtue of section 100) the Schedule set out in Schedule 5 to this Act is inserted.

Corrections of Load Line Convention

98. For the purposes of the Procès-Verbal of Rectification dated 5 May 1969, Schedule 4 to the Principal Act (as renumbered by virtue of section 100) is amended as set out in Schedule 6 to this Act.

Amendments in relation to tonnage

99. The Principal Act is amended as set out in Schedule 7.


Formal and other minor amendments

100. The Principal Act is amended as set out in Schedule 8.

Amendments in relation to prescribed country

101. The Principal Act is amended as set out in Schedule 9.

Amendments consequential on increase in general penalty for offences

102. The Principal Act is amended as set out in Schedule 10.

PART III—MISCELLANEOUS

Interpretation

103. In this Part, Merchant Shipping Act means the Imperial Act known as the Merchant Shipping Act, 1894, as amended, or otherwise affected in its operation, by the provisions of any other Imperial Act or of any Act, in so far as that Act as so amended, or otherwise affected in its operation, is part of the law of the Commonwealth.

Limitation of shipowners liability

104. (1) In this section, Convention means the International Convention relating to the limitation of the liability of owners of seagoing ships signed at Brussels on 10 October 1957.

(2) Approval is given to the ratification by Australia of the Convention subject to a reservation, in pursuance of sub-paragraph 2(a) of the Protocol of Signature to the Convention, excluding the application of sub-paragraph (1)(c) of Article 1 of the Convention.

(3) Part VIII of the Merchant Shipping Act is repealed.

(4) The right of a shipowner to limit his liability in respect of a claim arising out of an occurrence that took place before the commencement of this sub-section is not affected by the repeal of Part VIII of the Merchant Shipping Act effected by sub-section (3) of this section and the amendments of the Principal Act made by section 16, sub-section 65(1) and section 96 of this Act.

(5) In sub-section (4), occurrence means an occurrence of a kind specified in sub-paragraph (1)(a) or (b) of Article 1 of the Convention.

Container Convention

105. Approval is given to the ratification by Australia of the International Convention for Safe Containers.

Repeal of certain provisions of Merchant Shipping Act

106. Sections 221 to 224 (inclusive) of the Merchant Shipping Act are repealed.

Saving of regulations

107. Regulations (other than regulations referred to in section 111) made, or purporting to be made, under, by virtue of or for the purposes of a provision of the Principal Act and in force, or purporting to have been in force, immediately before the date of commencement of a provision of this Act that amends, or repeals and re-enacts (with or without modifications), that provision of that Act are, on and after that date, as valid and effectual, mutatis mutandis, as if they had been made under the Principal Act as amended by this Act.

Transitional provision in relation to prescribed countries

108. Until regulations are made, for the purposes of a provision of the Principal Act as amended by this Act in which the expression prescribed country appears, prescribing a country or countries for the purposes of that provision, a reference in that provision, or deemed by this Act to be in that provision, to a prescribed country shall be read as a reference to a country that, immediately before the commencement of sub-section 4(3), is a Commonwealth country for the purposes of that Act as so amended and as including a reference to

(a) a colony, overseas territory or protectorate of such a country; and

(b) a territory for the international relations of which such a country is responsible.


Transitional provisions in relation to complement of ships

109. (1) Notwithstanding the repeal by this Act of sections 14 and 43 of, and Schedules I and II to, the Principal Act as amended by this Act, the provisions of those sections and Schedules, of regulations made for the purposes of those sections, and of orders made under those sections, to the extent that those provisions require a ship, or each ship included in a class of ships, to carry a particular complement of officers (including a master) and a particular complement of seamen, continue in force, mutatis mutandis, after that repeal as if they were the provisions of orders made under sub-section 14(1) of the Principal Act as amended by sub-section 8(1) of this Act, and may be varied or revoked by orders so made.

(2) On and after the repeal by this Act of Division 3 of Part II of the Principal Act as amended by this Act, the provisions continued in force by sub-section (1) have effect as if references in those provisions to duly certificated masters, to duly certificated officers and to other members of the crew (however described) were references to qualified masters, to qualified officers and to qualified seamen, respectively.

Transitional provisions in relation to the Safety Convention

110. (1) Certificates issued under Division 2b of Part IV of the Principal Act and in force immediately before the date of commencement of this section are, on and after that date, as valid and effectual as if they had been issued under the Principal Act as amended by this Act.

(2) If, immediately before the commencement of this section, a country fell within the definition of country to which the Safety Convention applies in sub-section 187a(1) of the Principal Act as amended by this Act and, immediately after the commencement of this section, that country does not fall within that definition, then, until that country falls within that definition, the provisions of the Principal Act as amended by this Act, and the regulations in force under that Act, apply in relation to ships registered in that country as if the amendments of the Principal Act effected by sub-section 32(3) and sections 33, 34, 35, 37, 44 and 93 of this Act had not been made.

(3) The Minister may, by notice published in the Gazette, declare that a country, other than Australia, specified in the notice is a country to which the Safety Convention, within the meaning of the Principal Act as amended by this Act, applies, but is not a country to which the Protocol of 1978 relating to the Safety Convention, within the meaning of that Act as so amended, applies.

(4) The Minister may, by notice published in the Gazette, provide that the Principal Act as amended by this Act, and the regulations and orders in force under that Act as so amended, apply with specified modifications to ships registered in a country specified in a notice under sub-section (3).

Transitional provision in relation to tonnage measurement

111. Regulations made for the purposes of section 407a of the Principal Act as amended by this Act and in force immediately before the date of commencement of this section continue in force on and after that date, subject to any amendment or repeal, as if they had been made for the purposes of section 405e of that Act as so amended.

SCHEDULE 1 Section 94

SCHEDULE TO BE INSERTED IN PRINCIPAL ACT BY THIS ACT

SCHEDULE 3 Sub-section 187a(1)

CONVENTION ON THE INTERNATIONAL REGULATIONS FOR PREVENTING COLLISIONS AT SEA, 1972

ARTICLE I

General Obligations

The Parties to the present Convention undertake to give effect to the Rules and other Annexes constituting the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea, 1972, (hereinafter referred to as the Regulations) attached hereto.


ARTICLE II

Signature, Ratification, Acceptance, Approval and Accession

1. The present Convention shall remain open for signature until 1 June 1973 and shall thereafter remain open for accession.

2. States Members of the United Nations, or of any of the Specialized Agencies, or the International Atomic Energy Agency, or Parties to the Statute of the International Court of Justice may become Parties to this Convention by:

(a) signature without reservation as to ratification, acceptance or approval;

(b) signature subject to ratification, acceptance or approval followed by ratification, acceptance or approval; or

(c) accession.


SCHEDULE 1—continued

SCHEDULE 3—continued

3. Ratification, acceptance, approval or accession shall be effected by the deposit of an instrument to that effect with the Inter-Governmental Maritime Consultative Organization (hereinafter referred to as the Organization ) which shall inform the Governments of States that have signed or acceded to the present Convention of the deposit of each instrument and of the date of its deposit.

ARTICLE III

Territorial Application

1. The United Nations in cases where they are the administering authority for a territory or any Contracting Party responsible for the international relations of a territory may at any time by notification in writing to the Secretary-General of the Organization (hereinafter referred to as the Secretary-General), extend the application of this Convention to such a territory.

2. The present Convention shall, upon the date of receipt of the notification or from such other date as may be specified in the notification, extend to the territory named therein.

3. Any notification made in accordance with paragraph 1 of this Article may be withdrawn in respect of any territory mentioned in that notification and the extension of this Convention to that territory shall cease to apply after one year or such longer period as may be specified at the time of the withdrawal.

4. The Secretary-General shall inform all Contracting Parties of the notification of any extension or withdrawal of any extension communicated under this Article.

ARTICLE IV

Entry into force

1. (a) The present Convention shall enter into force twelve months after the date on which at least 15 States, the aggregate of whose merchant fleets constitutes not less than 65 per cent by number or by tonnage of the world fleet of vessels of 100 gross tons and over have become Parties to it, whichever is achieved first.

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions in sub-paragraph (a) of this paragraph, the present Convention shall not enter into force before 1 January 1976.

2. Entry into force for States which ratify, accept, approve or accede to this Convention in accordance with Article II after the conditions prescribed in sub-paragraph 1(a) have been met and before the Convention enters into force, shall be on the date of entry into force of the Convention.

3. Entry into force for States which ratify, accept, approve or accede after the date on which this Convention enters into force, shall be on the date of deposit of an instrument in accordance with Article II.

4. After the date of entry into force of an amendment to this Convention in accordance with paragraph 4 of Article VI, any ratification, acceptance, approval or accession shall apply to the Convention as amended.

5. On the date of entry into force of this Convention, the Regulations replace and abrogate the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea, 1960.

6. The Secretary-General shall inform the Governments of States that have signed or acceded to this Convention of the date of its entry into force.

ARTICLE V

Revision Conference

1. A Conference for the purpose of revising this Convention or the Regulations or both may be convened by the Organization.

2. The Organization shall convene a Conference of Contracting Parties for the purpose of revising this Convention or the Regulations or both at the request of not less than one-third of the Contracting Parties.


SCHEDULE 1—continued

SCHEDULE 3continued

ARTICLE VI

Amendments to the Regulations

  1. Any amendment to the Regulations proposed by a Contracting Party shall be considered in the Organization at the request of that Party.

 

2. If adopted by a two-thirds majority of those present and voting in the Maritime Safety Committee of the Organization, such amendment shall be communicated to all Contracting Parties and Members of the Organization at least six months prior to its consideration by the Assembly of the Organization. Any Contracting Party which is not a Member of the Organization shall be entitled to participate when the amendment is considered by the Assembly.
 

3. If adopted by a two-thirds majority of those present and voting in the Assembly, the amendment shall be communicated by the Secretary-General to all Contracting Parties for their acceptance.
 

4. Such an amendment shall enter into force on a date to be determined by the Assembly at the time of its adoption unless, by a prior date determined by the Assembly at the same time, more than one-third of the Contracting Parties notify the Organization of their objection to the amendment. Determination by the Assembly of the dates referred to in this paragraph shall be by a two-thirds majority of those present and voting.
 

5. On entry into force any amendment shall, for all Contracting Parties which have not objected to the amendment, replace and supersede any previous provision to which the amendment refers.
 

6. The Secretary-General shall inform all Contracting Parties and Members of the Organization of any request and communication under this Article and the date on which any amendment enters into force.

ARTICLE VII

Denunciation

1. The present Convention may be denounced by a Contracting Party at any time after the expiry of five years from the date on which the Convention entered into force for that Party.
 

2. Denunciation shall be effected by the deposit of an instrument with the Organization. The Secretary-General shall inform all other Contracting Parties of the receipt of the instrument of denunciation and of the date of its deposit.

 

3. A denunciation shall take effect one year, or such longer period as may be specified in the instrument, after its deposit.
 

ARTICLE VIII

Deposit and Registration

1. The present Convention and the Regulations shall be deposited with the Organization, and the Secretary-General shall transmit certified true copies thereof to all Governments of States that have signed this Convention or acceded to it.

 

2. When the present Convention enters into force, the text shall be transmitted by the Secretary-General to the Secretariat of the United Nations for registration and publication in accordance with Article 102 of the Charter of the United Nations.
 

ARTICLE IX

Languages

The present Convention is established, together with the Regulations, in a single copy in the English and French languages, both texts being equally authentic. Official translations in the Russian and Spanish languages shall be prepared and deposited with the signed original.


SCHEDULE 1—continued

SCHEDULE 3—continued

INTERNATIONAL REGULATIONS FOR PREVENTING COLLISIONS AT SEA, 1972

PART A—GENERAL

RULE 1

Application

(a) These Rules shall apply to all vessels upon the high seas and in all waters connected therewith navigable by seagoing vessels.

(b) Nothing in these Rules shall interfere with the operation of special rules made by an appropriate authority for roadsteads, harbours, rivers, lakes or inland waterways connected with the high seas and navigable by seagoing vessels. Such special rules shall conform as closely as possible to these Rules.

(c) Nothing in these Rules shall interfere with the operation of any special rules made by the Government of any State with respect to additional station or signal lights or whistle signals for ships of war and vessels proceeding under convoy, or with respect to additional station or signal lights for fishing vessels engaged in fishing as a fleet. These additional station or signal lights or whistle signals shall, so far as possible, be such that they cannot be mistaken for any light or signal authorized elsewhere under these Rules.

(d) Traffic separation schemes may be adopted by the Organization for the purpose of these Rules.

(e) Whenever the Government concerned shall have determined that a vessel of special construction or purpose cannot comply fully with the provisions of any of these Rules with respect to the number, position, range or arc of visibility of lights or shapes, as well as to the disposition and characteristics of sound-signalling appliances, without interfering with the special function of the vessel, such vessel shall comply with such other provisions in regard to the number, position, range or arc of visibility of lights or shapes, as well as to the disposition and characteristics of sound-signalling appliances, as her Government shall have determined to be the closest possible compliance with these Rules in respect to that vessel.
 

RULE 2

Responsibility

(a) Nothing in these Rules shall exonerate any vessel, or the owner, master or crew thereof, from the consequences of any neglect to comply with these rules or of the neglect of any precaution which may be required by the ordinary practice of seamen, or by the special circumstances of the case.

(b) In construing and complying with these Rules due regard shall be had to all dangers of navigation and collision and to any special circumstances, including the limitations of the vessels involved, which may make a departure from these Rules necessary to avoid immediate danger.

RULE 3

General Definitions

For the purpose of these Rules, except where the context otherwise requires:

(a) The word vessel includes every description of water craft, including non-displacement craft and seaplanes, used or capable of being used as a means of transportation on water.

(b) The term power-driven vessel means any vessel propelled by machinery.

(c) The term sailing vessel means any vessel under sail provided that propelling machinery, if fitted, is not being used.

(d) The term vessel engaged in fishing means any vessel fishing with nets, lines, trawls or other fishing apparatus which restrict manoeuvrability, but does not include a vessel fishing with trolling lines or other fishing apparatus which do not restrict manoeuvrability.


SCHEDULE 1—continued

SCHEDULE 3—continued

(e) The word seaplane includes any aircraft designed to manoeuvre on the water.

(f) The term vessel not under command means a vessel which through some exceptional circumstance is unable to manoeuvre as required by these Rules and is therefore unable to keep out of the way of another vessel.

(g) The term vessel restricted in her ability to manoeuvre means a vessel which from the nature of her work is restricted in her ability to manoeuvre as required by these Rules and is therefore unable to keep out of the way of another vessel.

The following vessels shall be regarded as vessels restricted in their ability to manoeuvre:

(i) a vessel engaged in laying, servicing or picking up a navigation mark, submarine cable or pipeline;

(ii) a vessel engaged in dredging, surveying or underwater operations;

(iii) a vessel engaged in replenishment or transferring persons, provisions or cargo while underway;

(iv) a vessel engaged in the launching or recovery of aircraft;

(v) a vessel engaged in minesweeping operations;

(vi) a vessel engaged in a towing operation such as severely restricts the towing vessel and her tow in their ability to deviate from their course.

(h) The term vessel constrained by her draught means a power-driven vessel which because of her draught in relation to the available depth of water is severely restricted in her ability to deviate from the course she is following.

(i) The word underway means that a vessel is not at anchor, or made fast to the shore, or aground.

(j) The words length and breadth of a vessel mean her length overall and greatest breadth.

(k) Vessels shall be deemed to be in sight of one another only when one can be observed visually from the other.

(l) The term restricted visibility means any condition in which visibility is restricted by fog, mist, falling snow, heavy rainstorms, sandstorms or any other similar causes.

PART B—STEERING AND SAILING RULES

SECTION 1—CONDUCT OF VESSELS IN ANY CONDITION OF VISIBILITY

RULE 4

Application

Rules in this Section apply in any condition of visibility.
 

RULE 5

Look-out

Every vessel shall at all times maintain a proper look-out by sight and hearing as well as by all available means appropriate in the prevailing circumstances and conditions so as to make a full appraisal of the situation and of the risk of collision.
 

RULE 6

Safe speed

Every vessel shall at all times proceed at a safe speed so that she can take proper and effective action to avoid collision and be stopped within a distance appropriate to the prevailing circumstances and conditions.


SCHEDULE 1—continued

SCHEDULE 3—continued

In determining a safe speed the following factors shall be among those taken into account:

(a) By all vessels:

(i) the state of visibility;

(ii) the traffic density including concentrations of fishing vessels or any other vessels;

(iii) the manoeuvrability of the vessel with special reference to stopping distance and turning ability in the prevailing conditions;

(iv) at night the presence of background light such as from shore lights or from back scatter of her own lights;

(v) the state of wind, sea and current, and the proximity of navigational hazards;

(vi) the draught in relation to the available depth of water.

(b) Additionally, by vessels with operational radar:

(i) the characteristics, efficiency and limitations of the radar equipment;

(ii) any constraints imposed by the radar range scale in use;

(iii) the effect on radar detection of the sea state, weather and other sources of interference;

(iv) the possibility that small vessels, ice and other floating objects may not be detected by radar at an adequate range;

(v) the number, location and movement of vessels detected by radar;

(vi) the more exact assessment of the visibility that may be possible when radar is used to determine the range of vessels or other objects in the vicinity.
 

RULE 7

Risk of Collision

(a) Every vessel shall use all available means appropriate to the prevailing circumstances and conditions to determine if risk of collision exists. If there is any doubt such risk shall be deemed to exist.

(b) Proper use shall be made of radar equipment if fitted and operational, including long-range scanning to obtain early warning of risk of collision and radar plotting or equivalent systematic observation of detected objects.

(c) Assumptions shall not be made on the basis of scanty information, especially scanty radar information.

(d) In determining if risk of collision exists the following considerations shall be among those taken into account:

(i) such risk shall be deemed to exist if the compass bearing of an approaching vessel does not appreciably change;

(ii) such risk may sometimes exist even when an appreciable bearing change is evident, particularly when approaching a very large vessel or a tow or when approaching a vessel at close range.

RULE 8

Action to avoid collision

(a) Any action taken to avoid collision shall, if the circumstances of the case admit, be positive, made in ample time and with due regard to the observance of good seamanship.

(b) Any alteration of course and/or speed to avoid collision shall, if the circumstances of the case admit, be large enough to be readily apparent to another vessel observing visually or by radar; a succession of small alterations of course and/or speed should be avoided.

(c) If there is sufficient sea room, alteration of course alone may be the most effective action to avoid a close-quarters situation provided that it is made in good time, is substantial and does not result in another close-quarters situation.


SCHEDULE 1—continued

SCHEDULE 3—continued

(d) Action taken to avoid collision with another vessel shall be such as to result in passing at a safe distance. The effectiveness of the action shall be carefully checked until the other vessel is finally past and clear.

(e) If necessary to avoid collision or allow more time to assess the situation, a vessel shall slacken her speed or take all way off by stopping or reversing her means of propulsion.
 

RULE 9

Narrow channels

(a) A vessel proceeding along the course of a narrow channel or fairway shall keep as near to the outer limit of the channel or fairway which lies on her starboard side as is safe and practicable.

(b) A vessel of less than 20 metres in length or a sailing vessel shall not impede the passage of a vessel which can safely navigate only within a narrow channel or fairway.

(c) A vessel engaged in fishing shall not impede the passage of any other vessel navigating within a narrow channel or fairway.

(d) A vessel shall not cross a narrow channel or fairway if such crossing impedes the passage of a vessel which can safely navigate only within such channel or fairway. The latter vessel may use the sound signal prescribed in Rule 34(d) if in doubt as to the intention of the crossing vessel.

(e) (i) In a narrow channel or fairway when overtaking can take place only if the vessel to be overtaken has to take action to permit safe passing, the vessel intending to overtake shall indicate her intention by sounding the appropriate signal prescribed in Rule 34(c)(i). The vessel to be overtaken shall, if in agreement, sound the appropriate signal prescribed in Rule 34(c)(ii) and take steps to permit safe passing. If in doubt she may sound the signals prescribed in Rule 34(d).

(ii) This Rule does not relieve the overtaking vessel of her obligation under Rule 13.

(f) A vessel nearing a bend or an area of a narrow channel or fairway where other vessels may be obscured by an intervening obstruction shall navigate with particular alertness and caution and shall sound the appropriate signal prescribed in Rule 34 (e).

(g) Any vessel shall, if the circumstances of the case admit, avoid anchoring in a narrow channel.
 

RULE 10

Traffic separation schemes

(a) This Rule applies to traffic separation schemes adopted by the Organization.

(b) A vessel using a traffic separation scheme shall:

(i) proceed in the appropriate traffic lane in the general direction of traffic flow for that lane;

(ii) so far as practicable keep clear of a traffic separation line or separation zone;

(iii) normally join or leave a traffic lane at the termination of the lane, but when joining or leaving from the side shall do so at as small an angle to the general direction of traffic flow as practicable.

(c) A vessel shall so far as practicable avoid crossing traffic lanes, but if obliged to do so shall cross as nearly as practicable at right angles to the general direction of traffic flow.

(d) Inshore traffic zones shall not normally be used by through traffic which can safely use the appropriate traffic lane within the adjacent traffic separation scheme.

(e) A vessel, other than a crossing vessel, shall not normally enter a separation zone or cross a separation line except:

(i) in cases of emergency to avoid immediate danger;

(ii) to engage in fishing within a separation zone.

(f) A vessel navigating in areas near the terminations of traffic separation schemes shall do so with particular caution.


SCHEDULE 1—continued

SCHEDULE 3—continued

(g) A vessel shall so far as practicable avoid anchoring in a traffic separation scheme or in areas near its terminations.

(h) A vessel not using a traffic separation scheme shall avoid it by as wide a margin as is practicable.

(i) A vessel engaged in fishing shall not impede the passage of any vessel following a traffic lane.

(j) A vessel of less than 20 metres in length or a sailing vessel shall not impede the safe passage of a power-driven vessel following a traffic lane.

SECTION II—CONDUCT OF VESSELS IN SIGHT OF ONE ANOTHER
 

RULE 11

Application

Rules in this Section apply to vessels in sight of one another.

 

RULE 12

Sailing vessels

(a) When two sailing vessels are approaching one another, so as to involve risk of collision, one of them shall keep out of the way of the other as follows:

(i) when each has the wind on a different side, the vessel which has the wind on the port side shall keep out of the way of the other;

(ii) when both have the wind on the same side, the vessel which is to windward shall keep out of the way of the vessel which is to leeward;

(iii) if a vessel with the wind on the port side sees a vessel to windward and cannot determine with certainty whether the other vessel has the wind on the port or on the starboard side, she shall keep out of the way of the other.

(b) For the purposes of this Rule the windward side shall be deemed to be the side opposite to that on which the mainsail is carried or, in the case of a square-rigged vessel, the side opposite to that on which the largest fore-and-aft sail is carried.

RULE 13

Overtaking

(a) Notwithstanding anything contained in the Rules of this Section any vessel overtaking any other shall keep out of the way of the vessel being overtaken.

(b) A vessel shall be deemed to be overtaking when coming up with another vessel from a direction more than 22.5 degrees abaft her beam, that is, in such a position with reference to the vessel she is overtaking, that at night she would be able to see only the sternlight of that vessel but neither of her sidelights.

(c) When a vessel is in any doubt as to whether she is overtaking another, she shall assume that this is the case and act accordingly.

(d) Any sub-sequent alteration of the bearing between the two vessels shall not make the overtaking vessel a crossing vessel within the meaning of these Rules or relieve her of the duty of keeping clear of the overtaken vessel until she is finally past and clear.
 

RULE 14

Head-on situation

(a) When two power-driven vessels are meeting on reciprocal or nearly reciprocal courses so as to involve risk of collision each shall alter her course to starboard so that each shall pass on the port side of the other.

(b) Such a situation shall be deemed to exist when a vessel sees the other ahead or nearly ahead and by night she could see the masthead lights of the other in a line or nearly in a line and/or both sidelights and by day she observes the corresponding aspect of the other vessel.


SCHEDULE 1—continued

SCHEDULE 3—continued

(c) When a vessel is in any doubt as to whether such a situation exists she shall assume that it does exist and act accordingly.

RULE 15

Crossing Situation

When two power-driven vessels are crossing so as to involve risk of collision, the vessel which has the other on her own starboard side shall keep out of the way and shall, if the circumstances of the case admit, avoid crossing ahead of the other vessel.
 

RULE 16

Action by give-way vessel

Every vessel which is directed to keep out of the way of another vessel shall, so far as possible, take early and substantial action to keep well clear.

 

RULE 17

Action by stand-on vessel

(a) (i) Where one of two vessels is to keep out of the way the other shall keep her course and speed.

(ii) The latter vessel may however take action to avoid collision by her manoeuvre alone, as soon as it becomes apparent to her that the vessel required to keep out of the way is not taking appropriate action in compliance with these Rules.

(b) When, from any cause, the vessel required to keep her course and speed finds herself so close that collision cannot be avoided by the action of the give-way vessel alone, she shall take such action as will best aid to avoid collision.

(c) A power-driven vessel which takes action in a crossing situation in accordance with sub-paragraph (a) (ii) of this Rule to avoid collision with another power-driven vessel shall, if the circumstances of the case admit, not alter course to port for a vessel on her own port side.

(d) This Rule does not relieve the give-way vessel of her obligation to keep out of the way.

 

RULE 18

Responsibilities between vessels

Except where Rules 9, 10 and 13 otherwise require:

(a) A power-driven vessel underway shall keep out of the way of:

(i) a vessel not under command;

(ii) a vessel restricted in her ability to manoeuvre;

(iii) a vessel engaged in fishing;

(iv) a sailing vessel.

(b) A sailing vessel underway shall keep out of the way of:

(i) a vessel not under command;

(ii) a vessel restricted in her ability to manoeuvre;

(iii) a vessel engaged in fishing.

(c) A vessel engaged in fishing when underway shall, so far as possible, keep out of the way of:

(i) a vessel not under command;

(ii) a vessel restricted in her ability to manoeuvre.


SCHEDULE 1—continued

SCHEDULE 3continued

(d) (i) Any vessel other than a vessel not under command or a vessel restricted in her ability to manoeuvre shall, if the circumstances of the case admit, avoid impeding the safe passage of a vessel constrained by her draught, exhibiting the signals in Rule 28.

(ii) A vessel constrained by her draught shall navigate with particular caution having full regard to her special condition.

(e) A seaplane on the water shall, in general, keep well clear of all vessels and avoid impeding their navigation. In circumstances, however, where risk of collision exists, she shall comply with the Rules of this Part.

SECTION III—CONDUCT OF VESSELS IN RESTRICTED VISIBILITY
 

RULE 19

Conduct of vessels in restricted visibility

(a) This Rule applies to vessels not in sight of one another when navigating in or near an area of restricted visibility.

(b) Every vessel shall proceed at a safe speed adapted to the prevailing circumstances and conditions of restricted visibility. A power-driven vessel shall have her engines ready for immediate manoeuvre.

(c) Every vessel shall have due regard to the prevailing circumstances and conditions of restricted visibility when complying with the Rules of Section I of this Part.

(d) A vessel which detects by radar alone the presence of another vessel shall determine if a close-quarters situation is developing and/or risk of collision exists. If so, she shall take avoiding action in ample time, provided that when such action consists of an alteration of course, so far as possible the following shall be avoided:

(i) an alteration of course to port for a vessel forward of the beam, other than for a vessel being overtaken;

(ii) an alteration of course towards a vessel abeam or abaft the beam.

(e) Except where it has been determined that a risk of collision does not exist, every vessel which hears apparently forward of her beam the fog signal of another vessel, or which cannot avoid a close-quarters situation with another vessel forward of her beam, shall reduce her speed to the minimum at which she can be kept on her course. She shall if necessary take all her way off and in any event navigate with extreme caution until danger of collision is over.

 

PART C—LIGHTS AND SHAPES

 

RULE 20

 

Application

(a) Rules in this Part shall be complied with in all weathers.

(b) The Rules concerning lights shall be complied with from sunset to sunrise, and during such times no other lights shall be exhibited, except such lights as cannot be mistaken for the lights specified in these Rules or do not impair their visibility or distinctive character, or interfere with the keeping of a proper look-out.

(c) The lights prescribed by these Rules shall, if carried, also be exhibited from sunrise to sunset in restricted visibility and may be exhibited in all other circumstances when it is deemed necessary.

(d) The Rules concerning shapes shall be complied with by day.

(e) The lights and shapes specified in these Rules shall comply with the provisions of Annex I to these Regulations.


SCHEDULE 1—continued

SCHEDULE 3—continued

RULE 21

Definitions

(a) Masthead light means a white light placed over the fore and aft centreline of the vessel showing an unbroken light over an arc of the horizon of 225 degrees and so fixed as to show the light from right ahead to 22.5 degrees abaft the beam on either side of the vessel.

(b) Sidelights means a green light on the starboard side and a red light on the port side each showing an unbroken light over an arc of the horizon of 112.5 degrees and so fixed as to show the light from right ahead to 22.5 degrees abaft the beam on its respective side. In a vessel of less than 20 metres in length the sidelights may be combined in one lantern carried on the fore and aft centreline of the vessel.

(c) Sternlight means a white light placed as nearly as practicable at the stern showing an unbroken light over an arc of the horizon of 135 degrees and so fixed as to show the light 67.5 degrees from right aft on each side of the vessel.

(d)Towing light means a yellow light having the same characteristics as the sternlight defined in paragraph (c) of this Rule.

(e)All-round light means a light showing an unbroken light over an arc of the horizon of 360 degrees.

(f)Flashing light means a light flashing at regular intervals at a frequency of 120 flashes or more per minute.

RULE 22

Visibility of Lights

The lights prescribed in these Rules shall have an intensity as specified in Section 8 of Annex I to these Regulations so as to be visible at the following minimum ranges:

(a) In vessels of 50 metres or more in length:

—a masthead light, 6 miles;

—a sidelight, 3 miles;

—a sternlight, 3 miles;

—a towing light, 3 miles;

—a white, red, green or yellow all-round light, 3 miles.

(b) In vessels of 12 metres or more in length but less than 50 metres in length:

—a masthead light, 5 miles; except that where the length of the vessel is less than 20 metres, 3 miles;

—a sidelight, 2 miles;

—a sternlight, 2 miles;

—a towing light, 2 miles;

—a white, red, green or yellow all-round light, 2 miles.

(c) In vessels of less than 12 metres in length:

—a masthead light, 2 miles;

—a sidelight, 1 mile;

—a sternlight, 2 miles;

—a towing light, 2 miles;

—a white, red, green or yellow all-round light, 2 miles.


SCHEDULE 1—continued

SCHEDULE 3—continued

RULE 23

Power-driven vessels underway

(a) A power-driven vessel underway shall exhibit:

(i) a masthead light forward;

(ii) a second masthead light abaft of and higher than the forward one; except that a vessel of less than 50 metres in length shall not be obliged to exhibit such light but may do so;

(iii) sidelights;

(iv) a sternlight.

(b) An air-cushion vessel when operating in the non-displacement mode shall, in addition to the lights prescribed in paragraph (a) of this Rule, exhibit an all-round flashing yellow light.

(c) A power-driven vessel of less than 7 metres in length and whose maximum speed does not exceed 7 knots may, in lieu of the lights prescribed in paragraph (a) of this Rule, exhibit an all-round white light. Such vessel shall, if practicable, also exhibit sidelights.

 

RULE 24

Towing and pushing

(a) A power-driven vessel when towing shall exhibit:

(i) instead of the light prescribed in Rule 23(a)(i), two masthead lights forward in a vertical line. When the length of the tow, measuring from the stern of the towing vessel to the after end of the tow exceeds 200 metres, three such lights in a vertical line;

(ii) sidelights;

(iii) a sternlight;

(iv) a towing light in a vertical line above the sternlight;

(v) when the length of the tow exceeds 200 metres, a diamond shape where it can best be seen.

(b) When a pushing vessel and a vessel being pushed ahead are rigidly connected in a composite unit they shall be regarded as a power-driven vessel and exhibit the lights prescribed in Rule 23.

(c) A power-driven vessel when pushing ahead or towing alongside, except in the case of a composite unit, shall exhibit:

(i) instead of the light prescribed in Rule 23(a)(i), two masthead lights forward in a vertical line;

(ii) sidelights;

(iii) a sternlight.

(d) A power-driven vessel to which paragraphs (a) and (c) of this Rule apply shall also comply with Rule 23(a)(ii).

(e) A vessel or object being towed shall exhibit:

(i) sidelights;

(ii) a sternlight;

(iii) when the length of the tow exceeds 200 metres, a diamond shape where it can best be seen.

(f) Provided that any number of vessels being towed alongside or pushed in a group shall be lighted as one vessel,

(i) a vessel being pushed ahead, not being part of a composite unit, shall exhibit at the forward end, sidelights;

(ii) a vessel being towed alongside shall exhibit a sternlight and at the forward end, sidelights.


SCHEDULE 1—continued

SCHEDULE 3—continued

(g) Where from any sufficient cause it is impracticable for a vessel or object being towed to exhibit the lights prescribed in paragraph (e) of this Rule, all possible measures shall be taken to light the vessel or object towed or at least to indicate the presence of the unlighted vessel or object.
 

RULE 25

Sailing vessels underway and vessels under oars

(a) A sailing vessel underway shall exhibit:

(i) sidelights;

(ii) a sternlight.

(b) In a sailing vessel of less than 12 metres in length the lights prescribed in paragraph (a) of this Rule may be combined in one lantern carried at or near the top of the mast where it can best be seen.

(c) A sailing vessel underway may, in addition to the lights prescribed in paragraph (a) of this Rule, exhibit at or near the top of the mast, where they can best be seen, two all-round lights in a vertical line, the upper being red and the lower green, but these lights shall not be exhibited in conjunction with the combined lantern permitted by paragraph (b) of this Rule.

(d) (i) A sailing vessel of less than 7 metres in length shall, if practicable, exhibit the lights prescribed in paragraph (a) or (b) of this Rule, but if she does not, she shall have ready at hand an electric torch or lighted lantern showing a white light which shall be exhibited in sufficient time to prevent collision.

(ii) A vessel under oars may exhibit the lights prescribed in this Rule for sailing vessels, but if she does not, she shall have ready at hand an electric torch or lighted lantern showing a white light which shall be exhibited in sufficient urne to prevent collision.

(e) A vessel proceeding under sail when also being propelled by machinery shall exhibit forward where it can best be seen a conical shape, apex downwards.

 

RULE 26

Fishing vessels

(a) A vessel engaged in fishing, whether underway or at anchor, shall exhibit only the lights and shapes prescribed in this Rule.

(b) A vessel when engaged in trawling, by which is meant the dragging through the water of a dredge net or other apparatus used as a fishing appliance, shall exhibit:

(i) two all-round lights in a vertical line, the upper being green and the lower white, or a shape consisting of two cones with their apexes together in a vertical line one above the other; a vessel of less than 20 metres in length may instead of this shape exhibit a basket;

(ii) a masthead light abaft of and higher than the all-round green light; a vessel of less than 50 metres in length shall not be obliged to exhibit such a light but may do so;

(iii) when making way through the water, in addition to the lights prescribed in this paragraph, sidelights and a sternlight.

(c) A vessel engaged in fishing, other than trawling, shall exhibit:

(i) two all-round lights in a vertical line, the upper being red and the lower white, or a shape consisting of two cones with apexes together in a vertical line one above the other; a vessel of less than 20 metres in length may instead of this shape exhibit a basket;

(ii) when there is outlying gear extending more than 150 metres horizontally from the vessel, an all-round white light or a cone apex upwards in the direction of the gear;

(iii) when making way through the water, in addition to the lights prescribed in this paragraph, sidelights and a sternlight.


SCHEDULE 1—continued

SCHEDULE 3—continued

(d) A vessel engaged in fishing in close proximity to other vessels engaged in fishing may exhibit the additional signals described in Annex II to these Regulations.

(e) A vessel when not engaged in fishing shall not exhibit the lights or shapes prescribed in this Rule, but only those prescribed for a vessel of her length.

 

RULE 27

Vessels not under command or restricted in their ability to manoeuvre

(a) A vessel not under command shall exhibit:

(i) two all-round red lights in a vertical line where they can best be seen;

(ii) two balls or similar shapes in a vertical line where they can best be seen;

(iii) when making way through the water, in addition to the lights prescribed in this paragraph, sidelights and a sternlight.

(b) A vessel restricted in her ability to manoeuvre, except a vessel engaged in minesweeping operations, shall exhibit:

(i) three all-round lights in a vertical line where they can best be seen. The highest and lowest of these lights shall be red and the middle light shall be white;

(ii) three shapes in a vertical line where they can best be seen. The highest and lowest of these shapes shall be balls and the middle one a diamond;

(iii) when making way through the water, masthead lights, sidelights and a sternlight, in addition to the lights prescribed in sub-paragraph (i);

(iv) when at anchor, in addition to the lights or shapes prescribed in sub-paragraphs (i) and (ii), the light, lights or shape prescribed in Rule 30.

(c) A vessel engaged in a towing operation such as renders her unable to deviate from her course shall, in addition to the lights or shapes prescribed in sub-paragraphs (b)(i) and (ii) of this Rule, exhibit the lights or shape prescribed in Rule 24(a).

(d) A vessel engaged in dredging or underwater operations, when restricted in her ability to manoeuvre, shall exhibit the lights and shapes prescribed in paragraph (b) of this Rule and shall in addition, when an obstruction exists, exhibit:

(i) two all-round red lights or two balls in a vertical line to indicate the side on which the obstruction exists;

(ii) two all-round green lights or two diamonds in a vertical line to indicate the side on which another vessel may pass;

(iii) when making way through the water, in addition to the lights prescribed in this paragraph, masthead lights, sidelights and a sternlight;

(iv) a vessel to which this paragraph applies when at anchor shall exhibit the lights or shapes prescribed in sub-paragraphs (i) and (ii) instead of the lights or shape prescribed in Rule 30.

(e) Whenever the size of a vessel engaged in diving operations makes it impracticable to exhibit the shapes prescribed in paragraph (d) of this Rule, a rigid replica of the International Code flag A not less than 1 metre in height shall be exhibited. Measures shall be taken to ensure all-round visibility.

(f) A vessel engaged in minesweeping operations shall, in addition to the lights prescribed for a power-driven vessel in Rule 23, exhibit three all-round green lights or three balls. One of these lights or shapes shall be exhibited at or near the foremast head and one at each end of the fore yard. These lights or shapes indicate that it is dangerous for another vessel to approach closer than 1,000 metres astern or 500 metres on either side of the minesweeper.

(g) Vessels of less than 7 metres in length shall not be required to exhibit the lights prescribed in this Rule.


SCHEDULE 1—continued

SCHEDULE 3—continued

(h) The signals prescribed in this Rule are not signals of vessels in distress and requiring assistance. Such signals are contained in Annex IV to these Regulations.

 

RULE 28

Vessels constrained by their draught

A vessel constrained by her draught may, in addition to the lights prescribed for power-driven vessels in Rule 23, exhibit where they can best be seen three all-round red lights in a vertical line, or a cylinder.

RULE 29

Pilot vessels

(a) A vessel engaged on pilotage duty shall exhibit:

(i) at or near the masthead, two all-round lights in a vertical line, the upper being white and the lower red;

(ii) when underway, in addition, sidelights and a sternlight;

(iii) when at anchor, in addition to the lights prescribed in sub-paragraph (i), the anchor light, lights or shape.

(b) A pilot vessel when not engaged on pilotage duty shall exhibit the lights or shapes prescribed for a similar vessel of her length.

RULE 30

Anchored vessels and vessels aground

(a) A vessel at anchor shall exhibit where it can best be seen:

(i) in the fore part, an all-round white light or one ball;

(ii) at or near the stern and at a lower level than the light prescribed in sub-paragraph (i), an all-round white light.

(b) A vessel of less than 50 metres in length may exhibit an all-round white light where it can best be seen instead of the lights prescribed in paragraph (a) of this Rule.

(c) A vessel at anchor may, and a vessel of 100 metres and more in length shall, also use the available working or equivalent lights to illuminate her decks.

(d) A vessel aground shall exhibit the lights prescribed in paragraph (a) or (b) of this Rule and in addition, where they can best be seen:

(i) two all-round red lights in a vertical line;

(ii) three balls in a vertical line.

(e) A vessel of less than 7 metres in length, when at anchor or aground, not in or near a narrow channel, fairway or anchorage, or where other vessels normally navigate, shall not be required to exhibit the lights or shapes prescribed in paragraphs (a), (b) or (d) of this Rule.

 

RULE 31

Seaplanes

Where it is impracticable for a seaplane to exhibit lights and shapes of the characteristics or in the positions prescribed in the Rules of this Part she shall exhibit lights and shapes as closely similar in characteristics and position as is possible.

 

PART D—SOUND AND LIGHT SIGNALS

RULE 32

Definitions

(a) The word whistle means any sound signalling appliance capable of producing the prescribed blasts and which complies with the specifications in Annex III to these Regulations.


SCHEDULE 1—continued

SCHEDULE 3—continued

(b) The term short blast means a blast of about one seconds duration.

(c) The term prolonged blast means a blast of from four to six seconds duration.
 

RULE 33

Equipment for sound signals

(a) A vessel of 12 metres or more in length shall be provided with a whistle and a bell and a vessel of 100 metres or more in length shall, in addition, be provided with a gong, the tone and sound of which cannot be confused with that of the bell. The whistle, bell and gong shall comply with the specifications in Annex III to these Regulations. The bell or gong or both may be replaced by other equipment having the same respective sound characteristics, provided that manual sounding of the required signals shall always be possible.

(b) A vessel of less than 12 metres in length shall not be obliged to carry the sound signalling appliances prescribed in paragraph (a) of this Rule but if she does not, she shall be provided with some other means of making an efficient sound signal.

RULE 34

Manoeuvring and warning signals

(a) When vessels are in sight of one another, a power-driven vessel underway, when manoeuvring as authorized or required by these Rules, shall indicate that manoeuvre by the following signals on her whistle:

—one short blast to mean I am altering my course to starboard;

—two short blasts to mean I am altering my course to port;

—three short blasts to mean I am operating astern propulsion.

(b) Any vessel may supplement the whistle signals prescribed in paragraph (a) of this Rule by light signals, repeated as appropriate, whilst the manoeuvre is being carried out:

(i) these light signals shall have the following significance:

—one flash to mean “I am altering my course to starboard;

—two flashes to mean I am altering my course to port;

—three flashes to mean I am operating astern propulsion;

(ii) the duration of each flash shall be about one second, the interval between flashes shall be about one second, and the interval between successive signals shall be not less than ten seconds;

(iii) the light used for this signal shall, if fitted, be an all-round white light, visible at a minimum range of 5 miles, and shall comply with the provisions of Annex I.

(c) When in sight of one another in a narrow channel or fairway:

(i) a vessel intending to overtake another shall in compliance with Rule 9(e)(i) indicate her intention by the following signals on her whistle:

—two prolonged blasts followed by one short blast to mean I intend to overtake you on your starboard side;

—two prolonged blasts followed by two short blasts to mean I intend to overtake you on your port side;

(ii) the vessel about to be overtaken when acting in accordance with Rule 9(e)(i) shall indicate her agreement by the following signal on her whistle:

—one prolonged, one short, one prolonged and one short blast, in that order.

(d) When vessels in sight of one another are approaching each other and from any cause either vessel fails to understand the intentions or actions of the other, or is in doubt whether sufficient action is being taken by the other to avoid collision, the vessel in doubt shall immediately indicate such doubt by giving at least five short and rapid blasts on the whistle. Such signal may be supplemented by a light signal of at least five short and rapid flashes.

(e) A vessel nearing a bend or an area of a channel or fairway where other vessels may be obscured by an intervening obstruction shall sound one prolonged blast. Such signal shall be answered with a prolonged blast by any approaching vessel that may be within hearing around the bend or behind the intervening obstruction.


SCHEDULE 1—continued

SCHEDULE 3—continued

(f) If whistles are fitted on a vessel at a distance apart of more than 100 metres, one whistle only shall be used for giving manoeuvring and warning signals.

 

RULE 35

Sound signals in restricted visibility

In or near an area of restricted visibility, whether by day or night, the signals prescribed in this Rule shall be used as follows:

(a) A power-driven vessel making way through the water shall sound at intervals of not more than 2 minutes one prolonged blast.

(b) A power-driven vessel underway but stopped and making no way through the water shall sound at intervals of not more than 2 minutes two prolonged blasts in succession with an interval of about 2 seconds between them.

(c) A vessel not under command, a vessel restricted in her ability to manoeuvre, a vessel constrained by her draught, a sailing vessel, a vessel engaged in fishing and a vessel engaged in towing or pushing another vessel shall, instead of the signals prescribed in paragraphs (a) or (b) of this Rule, sound at intervals of not more than 2 minutes three blasts in succession, namely one prolonged followed by two short blasts.

(d) A vessel towed or if more than one vessel is towed the last vessel of the tow, if manned, shall at intervals of not more than 2 minutes sound four blasts in succession, namely one prolonged followed by three short blasts. When practicable, this signal shall be made immediately after the signal made by the towing vessel.

(e) When a pushing vessel and a vessel being pushed ahead are rigidly connected in a composite unit they shall be regarded as a power-driven vessel and shall give the signals prescribed in paragraphs (a) or (b) of this Rule.

(f) A vessel at anchor shall at intervals of not more than one minute ring the bell rapidly for about 5 seconds. In a vessel of 100 metres or more in length the bell shall be sounded in the forepart of the vessel and immediately after the ringing of the bell the gong shall be sounded rapidly for about 5 seconds in the after part of the vessel. A vessel at anchor may in addition sound three blasts in succession, namely one short, one prolonged and one short blast, to give warning of her position and of the possibility of collision to an approaching vessel.

(g) A vessel aground shall give the bell signal and if required the gong signal prescribed in paragraph (f) of this Rule and shall, in addition, give three separate and distinct strokes on the bell immediately before and after the rapid ringing of the bell. A vessel aground may in addition sound an appropriate whistle signal.

(h) A vessel of less than 12 metres in length shall not be obliged to give the abovementioned signals but, if she does not, shall make some other efficient sound signal at intervals of not more than 2 minutes.

(i) A pilot vessel when engaged on pilotage duty may in addition to the signals prescribed in paragraphs (a), (b) or (f) of this Rule sound an identity signal consisting of four short blasts.

 

RULE 36

Signals to attract attention

If necessary to attract the attention of another vessel any vessel may make light or sound signals that cannot be mistaken for any signal authorized elsewhere in these Rules, or may direct the beam of her searchlight in the direction of the danger, in such a way as not to embarrass any vessel.

 

RULE 37

Distress signals

When a vessel is in distress and requires assistance she shall use or exhibit the signals prescribed in Annex IV to these Regulations.


SCHEDULE 1—continued

SCHEDULE 3—continued

PART EEXEMPTIONS

RULE 38

Exemptions

Any vessel (or class of vessels) provided that she complies with the requirements of the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea, 1960, the keel of which is laid or which is at a corresponding stage of construction before the entry into force of these Regulations may be exempted from compliance therewith as follows:

(a) The installation of lights with ranges prescribed in Rule 22, until four years after the date of entry into force of these Regulations.

(b) The installation of lights with colour specifications as prescribed in Section 7 of Annex I to these Regulations, until four years after the date of entry into force of these Regulations.

(c) The repositioning of lights as a result of conversion from Imperial to metric units and rounding off measurement figures, permanent exemption.

(d) (i) The repositioning of masthead lights on vessels of less than 150 metres in length, resulting from the prescriptions of Section 3(a) of Annex I, permanent exemption.

(ii) The repositioning of masthead lights on vessels of 150 metres or more in length, resulting from the prescriptions of Section 3(a) of Annex I to these Regulations, until nine years after the date of entry into force of these Regulations.

(e) The repositioning of masthead lights resulting from the prescriptions of Section 2(b) of Annex I, until nine years after the date of entry into force of these Regulations.

(f) The repositioning of sidelights resulting from the prescriptions of Sections 2(g) and 3(b)of Annex I, until nine years after the date of entry into force of these Regulations.

(g) The requirements for sound signal appliances prescribed in Annex III, until nine years after the date of entry into force of these Regulations.
 

ANNEX I

POSITIONING AND TECHNICAL DETAILS OF LIGHTS AND SHAPES

1. Definition

The term height above the hull means height above the uppermost continuous deck.

2. Vertical positioning and spacing of lights

(a) On a power-driven vessel of 20 metres or more in length the masthead lights shall be placed as follows:

(i) the forward masthead light, or if only one masthead light is carried, then that light, at a height above the hull of not less than 6 metres, and, if the breadth of the vessel exceeds 6 metres, then at a height above the hull not less than such breadth, so however that the light need not be placed at a greater height above the hull than 12 metres;

(ii) when two masthead lights are carried the after one shall be at least 4.5 metres vertically higher than the forward one.

(b) The vertical separation of masthead lights of power-driven vessels shall be such that in all normal conditions of trim the after light will be seen over and separate from the forward light at a distance of 1000 metres from the stem when viewed from sea level.

(c) The masthead light of a power-driven vessel of 12 metres but less than 20 metres in length shall be placed at a height above the gunwale of not less than 2.5 metres.

(d) A power-driven vessel of less than 12 metres in length may carry the uppermost light at a height of less than 2.5 metres above the gunwale. When however a masthead light is carried in addition to sidelights and a sternlight, then such masthead light shall be carried at least 1 metre higher than the sidelights.

(e) One of the two or three masthead lights prescribed for a power-driven vessel when engaged in towing or pushing another vessel shall be placed in the same position as the forward masthead light of a power-driven vessel.

(f) In all circumstances the masthead light or lights shall be so placed as to be above and clear of all other lights and obstructions.

(g) The sidelights of a power-driven vessel shall be placed at a height above the hull not greater than three quarters of that of the forward masthead light. They shall not be so low as to be interfered with by deck lights.


SCHEDULE 1—continued

SCHEDULE 3—continued

(h) The sidelights, if in a combined lantern and carried on a power-driven vessel of less than 20 metres in length, shall be placed not less than 1 metre below the masthead light.

(i) When the Rules prescribe two or three lights to be carried in a vertical line, they shall be spaced as follows:

(i) on a vessel of 20 metres in length or more such lights shall be spaced not less than 2 metres apart, and the lowest of these lights shall, except where a towing light is required, not be less than 4 metres above the hull;

(ii) on a vessel of less than 20 metres in length such lights shall be spaced not less than 1 metre apart and the lowest of these lights shall, except where a towing light is required, not be less than 2 metres above the gunwale;

(iii) when three lights are carried they shall be equally spaced.

(j) The lower of the two all-round lights prescribed for a fishing vessel when engaged in fishing shall be at a height above the sidelights not less than twice the distance between the two vertical lights.

(k) The forward anchor light, when two are carried, shall not be less than 4.5 metres above the after one. On a vessel of 50 metres or more in length this forward anchor light shall not be less than 6 metres above the hull.

3. Horizontal positioning and spacing of lights

(a) When two masthead lights are prescribed for a power-driven vessel, the horizontal distance between them shall not be less than one half of the length of the vessel but need not be more than 100 metres. The forward light shall be placed not more than one quarter of the length of the vessel from the stem.

(b) On a vessel of 20 metres or more in length the sidelights shall not be placed in front of the forward masthead lights. They shall be placed at or near the side of the vessel.

4. Details of location of direction-indicating lights for fishing vessels, dredgers and vessels engaged in underwater operations

(a) The light indicating the direction of the outlying gear from a vessel engaged in fishing as prescribed in Rule 26(c)(ii) shall be placed at a horizontal distance of not less than 2 metres and not more than 6 metres away from the two all-round red and white lights. This light shall be placed not higher than the all-round white light prescribed in Rule 26(c)(i) and not lower than the sidelights.

(b) The lights and shapes on a vessel engaged in dredging or underwater operations to indicate the obstructed side and/or the side on which it is safe to pass, as prescribed in Rule 27(d)(i) and (ii), shall be placed at the maximum practical horizontal distance, but in no case less than 2 metres, from the lights or shapes prescribed in Rule 27(b)(i) and (ii). In no case shall the upper of these lights or shapes be at a greater height than the lower of the three lights or shapes prescribed in Rule 27(b)(i) and (ii).

5. Screens for sidelights

The sidelights shall be fitted with inboard screens painted matt black, and meeting the requirements of Section 9 of this Annex. With a combined lantern, using a single vertical filament and a very narrow division between the green and red sections, external screens need not be fitted.

6. Shapes

(a) Shapes shall be black and of the following sizes:

(i) a ball shall have a diameter of not less than 0.6 metre;

(ii) a cone shall have a base diameter of not less than 0.6 metre and a height equal to its diameter;

(iii) a cylinder shall have a diameter of at least 0.6 metre and a height of twice its diameter;

(iv) a diamond shape shall consist of two cones as defined in (ii) above having a common base.

(b) The vertical distance between shapes shall be at least 1.5 metres.


SCHEDULE 1—continued

SCHEDULE 3—continued

(c) In a vessel of less than 20 metres in length shapes of lesser dimensions but commensurate with the size of the vessel may be used and the distance apart may be correspondingly reduced.

7. Colour specification of lights

The chromaticity of all navigation lights shall conform to the following standards, which lie within the boundaries of the area of the diagram specified for each colour by the International Commission on Illumination (CIE).

The boundaries of the area for each colour are given by indicating the corner co-ordinates, which are as follows:

(i) White

x

0.525

0.525

0.452

0.310

0.310

0.443

y

0.382

0.440

0.440

0.348

0.283

0.382

(ii) Green

x

0.028

0.009

0.300

0.203

y

0.385

0.723

0.511

0.356

(iii) Red

x

0.680

0.660

0.735

0.721

y

0.320

0.320

0.265

0.259

(iv) Yellow

x

0.612

0.618

0.575

0.575

y

0.382

0.382

0.425

0.406

8. Intensity of lights

(a) The minimum luminous intensity of lights shall be calculated by using the formula:

I = 3.43 × 106 × T × D2 × KD

where I is luminous intensity in candelas under service conditions,

T is threshold factor 2 × 107 lux,

D is range of visibility (luminous range) of the light in nautical miles,

K is atmospheric transmissivity.

For prescribed lights the value of K shall be 0.8, corresponding to a meteorological visibility of approximately 13 nautical miles.

(b) A selection of figures derived from the formula is given in the following table:

Range of visibility (luminous range) of light in nautical miles

Luminous intensity of light in candelas for K = 0.8

D

I

1

0.9

2

4.3

3

12

4

27

5

52

6

94

NOTE: The maximum luminous intensity of navigation lights should be limited to avoid undue glare.

9. Horizontal Sectors

(a) (i) In the forward direction, sidelights as fitted on the vessel must show the minimum required intensities. The intensities must decrease to reach practical cut-off between 1 degree and 3 degrees outside the prescribed sectors.


SCHEDULE 1—continued

SCHEDULE 3—continued

(ii) For sternlights and masthead lights and at 22.5 degrees abaft the beam for sidelights, the minimum required intensities shall be maintained over the arc of the horizon up to 5 degrees within the limits of the sectors prescribed in Rule 21. From 5 degrees within the prescribed sectors the intensity may decrease by 50 per cent up to the prescribed limits; it shall decrease steadily to reach practical cut-off at not more than 5 degrees outside the prescribed limits.

(b) All-round lights shall be so located as not to be obscured by masts, topmasts or structures within angular sectors of more than 6 degrees, except anchor lights, which need not be placed at an impracticable height above the hull.

10. Vertical Sectors

(a) The vertical sectors of electric lights, with the exception of lights on sailing vessels shall ensure that:

(i) at least the required minimum intensity is maintained at all angles from 5 degrees above to 5 degrees below the horizontal;

(ii) at least 60 per cent of the required minimum intensity is maintained from 7.5 degrees above to 7.5 degrees below the horizontal.

(b) In the case of sailing vessels the vertical sectors of electric lights shall ensure that:

(i) at least the required minimum intensity is maintained at all angles from 5 degrees above to 5 degrees below the horizontal;

(ii) at least 50 per cent of the required minimum intensity is maintained from 25 degrees above to 25 degrees below the horizontal.

(c) In the case of lights other than electric these specifications shall be met as closely as possible.

11. Intensity of non-electric lights

Non-electric lights shall so far as practicable comply with the minimum intensities, as specified in the Table given in Section 8 of this Annex.

12. Manoeuvring light

Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph 2 (f) of this Annex the manoeuvring light described in Rule 34 (b) shall be placed in the same fore and aft vertical plane as the masthead light or lights and, where practicable, at a minimum height of 2 metres vertically above the forward masthead light, provided that it shall be carried not less than 2 metres vertically above or below the after masthead light. On a vessel where only one masthead light is carried the manoeuvring light, if fitted, shall be carried where it can best be seen, not less than 2 metres vertically apart from the masthead light.

13. Approval

The construction of lanterns and shapes and the installation of lanterns on board the vessel shall be to the satisfaction of the appropriate authority of the State where the vessel is registered.

 

ANNEX II

ADDITIONAL SIGNALS FOR FISHING VESSELS FISHING IN CLOSE PROXIMITY

1. General

The lights mentioned herein shall, if exhibited in pursuance of Rule 26(d), be placed where they can best be seen. They shall be at least 0.9 metre apart but at a lower level than lights prescribed in Rule 26(b)(i) and (c)(i). The lights shall be visible all round the horizon at a distance of at least 1 mile but at a lesser distance than the lights prescribed by these Rules for fishing vessels.


SCHEDULE 1—continued

SCHEDULE 3—continued

2. Signals for Trawlers

(a) Vessels when engaged in trawling, whether using demersal or pelagic gear, may exhibit:

(i) when shooting their nets: two white lights in a vertical line;

(ii) when hauling their nets: one white light over one red light in a vertical line;

(iii) when the net has come fast upon an obstruction: two red lights in a vertical line.

(b) Each vessel engaged in pair trawling may exhibit:

(i) by night, a searchlight directed forward and in the direction of the other vessel of the pair;

(ii) when shooting or hauling their nets or when their nets have come fast upon an obstruction, the lights prescribed in 2(a) above.

3. Signals for purse seiners

Vessels engaged in fishing with purse seine gear may exhibit two yellow lights in a vertical line. These lights shall flash alternately every second and with equal light and occultation duration. These lights may be exhibited only when the vessel is hampered by its fishing gear.
 

ANNEX III

TECHNICAL DETAILS OF SOUND SIGNAL APPLIANCES

1. Whistles

(a) Frequencies and range of audibility The fundamental frequency of the signal shall lie within the range 70-700 Hz.

The range of audibility of the signal from a whistle shall be determined by those frequencies, which may include the fundamental and/or one or more higher frequencies, which lie within the range 180-700 Hz (± 1 per cent) and which provide the sound pressure levels specified in paragraph 1 (c) below.

(b) Limits of fundamental frequencies To ensure a wide variety of whistle characteristics, the fundamental frequency of a whistle shall be between the following limits:

(i) 70-200 Hz, for a vessel 200 metres or more in length;

(ii) 130-350 Hz, for a vessel 75 metres but less than 200 metres in length;

(iii) 250-700 Hz, for a vessel less than 75 metres in length.

(c) Sound signal intensity and range of audibility A whistle fitted in a vessel shall provide, in the direction of maximum intensity of the whistle and at a distance of 1 metre from it, a sound pressure level in at least one 1/3rd-octave band within the range of frequencies 180-700 (± 1 per cent) of not less than the appropriate figure given in the table below.

Length of vessel in metres

1/3rd-octave

band level at

1 metre in dB

referred to

2 x 105N/m2

Audibility range in nautical miles

200 or more................................

143

2

75 but less than 200...........................

138

1.5

20 but less than 75............................

130

1

Less than 20................................

120

0.5


SCHEDULE 1—continued

SCHEDULE 3—continued

The range of audibility in the table above is for information and is approximately the range at which a whistle may be heard on its forward axis with 90 per cent probability in conditions of still air on board a vessel having average background noise level at the listening posts (taken to be 68 dB in the octave band centred on 250 Hz and 63 dB in the octave band centred on 500 Hz).

In practice the range at which a whistle may be heard is extremely variable and depends critically on weather conditions; the values given can be regarded as typical but under conditions of strong wind or high ambient noise level at the listening post the range may be much reduced.

(d) Directional properties The sound pressure level of a directional whistle shall be not more than 4 dB below the sound pressure level on the axis at any direction in the horizontal plane within ±45 degrees of the axis. The sound pressure level at any other direction in the horizontal plane shall be not more than 10 dB below the sound pressure level on the axis, so that the range in any direction will be at least half the range on the forward axis. The sound pressure level shall be measured in that 1/3rd-octave band which determines the audibility range.

(e) Positioning of whistles When a directional whistle is to be used as the only whistle on a vessel, it shall be installed with its maximum intensity directed straight ahead.

A whistle shall be placed as high as practicable on a vessel, in order to reduce interception of the emitted sound by obstructions and also to minimize hearing damage risk to personnel. The sound pressure level of the vessels own signal at listening posts shall not exceed 110 dB (A) and so far as practicable should not exceed 100 dB (A).

(f) Fitting of more than one whistle If whistles are fitted at a distance apart of more than 100 metres, it shall be so arranged that they are not sounded simultaneously.

(g) Combined whistle systems If due to the presence of obstructions the sound field of a single whistle or of one of the whistles referred to in paragraph 1 (f) above is likely to have a zone of greatly reduced signal level, it is recommended that a combined whistle system be fitted so as to overcome this reduction. For the purposes of the Rules a combined whistle system is to be regarded as a single whistle. The whistles of a combined system shall be located at a distance apart of not more than 100 metres and arranged to be sounded simultaneously. The frequency of any one whistle shall differ from those of the others by a least 10 Hz.

2. Bell or gong

(a) Intensity of signal A bell or gong, or other device having similar sound characteristics shall produce a sound pressure level of not less than 110 dB at 1 metre.

(b) Construction Bells and gongs shall be made of corrosion-resistant material and designed to give a clear tone. The diameter of the mouth of the bell shall be not less than 300 mm for vessels of more than 20 metres in length, and shall be not less than 200 mm for vessels of 12 to 20 metres in length. Where practicable, a power-driven bell striker is recommended to ensure constant force but manual operation shall be possible. The mass of the striker shall be not less than 3 per cent of the mass of the bell.

3. Approval

The construction of sound signal appliances, their performance and their installation on board the vessel shall be to the satisfaction of the appropriate authority of the State where the vessel is registered.
 

ANNEX IV

DISTRESS SIGNALS

1. The following signals, used or exhibited either together or separately, indicate distress and need of assistance:

(a) a gun or other explosive signal fired at intervals of about a minute;

(b) a continuous sounding with any fog-signalling apparatus;

(c) rockets or shells, throwing red stars fired one at a time at short intervals;


SCHEDULE 1—continued

SCHEDULE 3—continued

(d) a signal made by radiotelegraphy or by any other signalling method consisting of the group...---... (SOS) in the Morse Code;

(e) a signal sent by radiotelephony consisting of the spoken word Mayday;

(f) the International Code Signal of distress indicated by N.C.;

(g) a signal consisting of a square flag having above or below it a ball or anything resembling a ball;

(h) flames on the vessel (as from a burning tar barrel, oil barrel, etc.);

(i) a rocket parachute flare or a hand flare showing a red light;

(j) a smoke signal giving off orange-coloured smoke;

(k) slowly and repeatedly raising and lowering arms outstretched to each side;

(l) the radiotelegraph alarm signal;

(m) the radiotelephone alarm signal;

(n) signals transmitted by emergency position-indicating radio beacons.

2. The use or exhibition of any of the foregoing signals except for the purpose of indicating distress and need of assistance and the use of other signals which may be confused with any of the above signals is prohibited.

3. Attention is drawn to the relevant sections of the International Code of Signals, the Merchant Ship Search and Rescue Manual and the following signals:

(a) a piece of orange-coloured canvas with either a black square and circle or other appropriate symbol (for identification from the air);

(b) a dye marker..

SCHEDULE 2 Section 96

SCHEDULE TO BE INSERTED IN PRINCIPAL ACT BY THIS ACT

SCHEDULE 6 Section 330

INTERNATIONAL CONVENTION

relating to the limitation of the liability

of owners of sea-goings ships.

The High Contracting Parties,

Having recognised the desirability of determining by agreement certain uniform rules relating to the limitation of the liability of owners of sea-going ships;

Have decided to conclude a Convention for this purpose, and thereto have agreed as follows:

ARTICLE 1.

(1) The owner of a sea-going ship may limit his liability in accordance with Article 3 of this Convention in respect of claims arising from any of the following occurrences, unless the occurrence giving rise to the claim resulted from the actual fault or privity of the owner:

(a) loss of life of, or personal injury to, any person being carried in the ship, and loss of, or damage to, any property on board the ship;

(b) loss of life of, or personal injury to, any other person, whether on land or on water, loss of or damage to any other property or infringement of any rights caused by the act, neglect or default of any person on board the ship for whose act, neglect or de-


SCHEDULE 2—continued

SCHEDULE 6—continued

fault the owner is responsible or any person not on board the ship for whose act, neglect or default the owner is responsible: Provided however that in regard to the act, neglect or default of this last class of person, the owner shall only be entitled to limit his liability when the act, neglect or default is one which occurs in the navigation or the management of the ship or in the loading, carriage or discharge of its cargo or in the embarkation, carriage or disembarkation of its passengers;

(c) any obligation or liability imposed by any law relating to the removal of wreck and arising from or in connection with the raising, removal or destruction of any ship which is sunk, stranded or abandoned (including anything which may be on board such ship) and any obligation or liability arising out of damage caused to harbour works, basins and navigable waterways.

(2) In the present Convention the expression personal claims means claims resulting from loss of life and personal injury; the expression property claims means all other claims set out in paragraph (1) of this Article.

(3) An owner shall be entitled to limit his liability in the cases set out in paragraph (1) of this Article even in cases where his liability arises, without proof of negligence on the part of the owner or of persons for whose conduct he is responsible, by reason of his ownership, possession, custody or control of the ship.

(4) Nothing in this Article shall apply :

(a) to claims for salvage or to claims for contribution in general average;

(b) to claims by the Master, by members of the crew, by any servants of the owner on board the ship or by servants of the owner whose duties are connected with the ship, including the claims of their heirs, personal representatives or dependants, if under the law governing the contract of service between the owner and such servants the owner is not entitled to limit his liability in respect of such claims or if he is by such law only permitted to limit his liability to an amount greater than that provided for in Article 3 of this Convention.

(5) If the owner of a ship is entitled to make a claim against a claimant arising out of the same occurrence, their respective claims shall be set off against each other and the provisions of this Convention shall only apply to the balance, if any.

(6) The question upon whom lies the burden of proving whether or not the occurrence giving rise to the claim resulted from the actual fault or privity of the owner shall be determined by the lex fori.

(7) The act of invoking limitation of liability shall not constitute an admission of liability.
 

ARTICLE 2.

(1) The limit of liability prescribed by Article 3 of this Convention shall apply to the aggregate of personal claims and property claims which arise on any distinct occasion without regard to any claims which have arisen or may arise on any other distinct occasion.

(2) When the aggregate of the claims which arise on any distinct occasion exceeds the limits of liability provided for by Article 3 the total sum representing such limits of liability may be constituted as one distinct limitation fund.

(3) The fund thus constituted shall be available only for the payment of claims in respect of which limitation of liability can be invoked.

(4) After the fund has been constituted, no claimant against the fund shall be entitled to exercise any right against any other assets of the shipowner in respect of his claim against the fund, if the limitation fund is actually available for the benefit of the claimant.
 

ARTICLE 3.

(1) The amounts to which the owner of a ship may limit his liability under Article 1 shall be:

(a) where the occurrence has only given rise to property claims an aggregate amount of 1,000 francs for each ton of the ships tonnage;

(b) where the occurrence has only given rise to personal claims an aggregate amount of 3,100 francs for each ton of the ships tonnage;

(c) where the occurrence has given rise both to personal claims and property claims an aggregate amount of 3,100 francs for each ton of the ships tonnage, of which a first


SCHEDULE 2—continued

SCHEDULE 6—continued

portion amounting to 2,100 francs for each ton of the ships tonnage shall be exclusively appropriated to the payment of personal claims and of which a second portion amounting to 1,000 francs for each ton of the ships tonnage shall be appropriated to the payment of property claims: Provided however that in cases where the first portion is insufficient to pay the personal claims in full, the unpaid balance of such claims shall rank rateably with the property claims for payment against the second portion of the fund.

(2) In each portion of the limitation fund the distribution among the claimants shall be made in proportion to the amounts of their established claims.

(3) If before the fund is distributed the owner has paid in whole or in part any of the claims set out in Article 1 paragraph (1), he shall pro tanto be placed in the same position in relation to the fund as the claimant whose claim he has paid, but only to the extent that the claimant whose claim he has paid would have had a right of recovery against him under the national law of the State where the fund has been constituted.

(4) Where the shipowner establishes that he may at a later date be compelled to pay in whole or in part any of the claims set out in Article 1 paragraph (1) the Court or other competent authority of the State where the fund has been constituted may order that a sufficient sum shall be provisionally set aside to enable the shipowner at such later date to enforce his claim against the fund in the manner set out in the preceding paragraph.

(5) For the purpose of ascertaining the limit of an owners liability in accordance with the provisions of this Article the tonnage of a ship of less than 300 tons shall be deemed to be 300 tons.

(6) The franc mentioned in this Article shall be deemed to refer to a unit consisting of sixty five and a half milligrams of gold of millesimal fineness nine hundred. The amounts mentioned in paragraph (1) of this Article shall be converted into the national currency of the State in which limitation is sought on the basis of the value of that currency by reference to the unit defined above at the date on which the shipowner shall have constituted the limitation fund, made the payment or given a guarantee which under the law of that State is equivalent to such payment.

(7) For the purpose of this convention tonnage shall be calculated as follows:

— in the case of steamships or other mechanically propelled ships there shall be taken the net tonnage with the addition of the amount deducted from the gross tonnage on account of engine room space for the purpose of ascertaining the net tonnage;

— in the case of all other ships there shall be taken the net tonnage.

ARTICLE 4.

Without prejudice to the provisions of Article 3, paragraph (2) of this Convention, the rules relating to the constitution and distribution of the limitation fund, if any, and all rules of procedure shall be governed by the national law of the State in which the fund is constituted.

ARTICLE 5.

(1) Whenever a shipowner is entitled to limit his liability under this Convention, and the ship or another ship or other property in the same ownership has been arrested within the jurisdiction of a Contracting State or bail or other security has been given to avoid arrest, the Court or other competent authority of such State may order the release of the ship or other property or of the security given if it is established that the shipowner has already given satisfactory bail or security in a sum equal to the full limit of his liability under this Convention and that the bail or other security so given is actually available for the benefit of the claimant in accordance with his rights.

(2) Where, in circumstances mentioned in paragraph (1) of this Article, bail or other security has already been given:

(a) at the port where the accident giving rise to the claim occurred;

(b) at the first port of call after the accident if the accident did not occur in a port;

(c) at the port of disembarkation or discharge if the claim is a personal claim or relates to damage to cargo;

the Court or other competent authority shall order the release of the ship or the bail or other security given, subject to the conditions set forth in paragraph (1) of this Article.


SCHEDULE 2—continued

SCHEDULE 6—continued

(3) The provisions of paragraphs (1) and (2) of this Article shall apply likewise if the bail or other security already given is in a sum less than the full limit of liability under this Convention: Provided that satisfactory bail or other security is given for the balance.

(4) When the shipowner has given bail or other security in a sum equal to the full limit of his liability under this Convention such bail or other security shall be available for the payment of all claims arising on a distinct occasion and in respect of which the shipowner may limit his liability.

(5) Questions of procedure relating to actions brought under the provisions of this Convention and also the time limit within which such actions shall be brought or prosecuted shall be decided in accordance with the national law of the Contracting State in which the action takes place.

ARTICLE 6.

(1) In this Convention the liability of the shipowner includes the liability of the ship herself.

(2) Subject to paragraph (3) of this Article, the provisions of this Convention shall apply to the charterer, manager and operator of the ship, and to the master, members of the crew and other servants of the owner, charterer, manager or operator acting in the course of their employment, in the same way as they apply to an owner himself: Provided that the total limits of liability of the owner and all such other persons in respect of personal claims and property claims arising on a distinct occasion shall not exceed the amounts determined in accordance with Article 3 of this Convention.

(3) When actions are brought against the master or against members of the crew such persons may limit their liability even if the occurrence which gives rise to the claims resulted from the actual fault or privity of one or more of such persons. If, however, the master or member of the crew is at the same time the owner, co-owner, charterer, manager or operator of the ship the provisions of this paragraph shall only apply where the act, neglect or default in question is an act, neglect or default committed by the person in question in his capacity as master or as member of the crew of the ship.

ARTICLE 7.

This Convention shall apply whenever the owner of a ship, or any other person having by virtue of the provisions of Article 6 hereof the same rights as an owner of a ship, limits or seeks to limit his liability before the Court of a Contracting State or seeks to procure the release of a ship or other property arrested or the bail or other security given within the jurisdiction of any such State.

Nevertheless, each Contracting State shall have the right to exclude, wholly or partially, from the benefits of this Convention any non-Contracting State, or any person who, at the time when he seeks to limit his liability or to secure the release of a ship or other property arrested or the bail or other security in accordance with the provisions of Article 5 hereof, is not ordinarily resident in a Contracting State, or does not have his principal place of business in a Contracting State, or any ship in respect of which limitation of liability or release is sought which does not at the time specified above fly the flag of a Contracting State.

ARTICLE 8.

Each Contracting State reserves the right to decide what other classes of ship shall be treated in the same manner as sea-going ships for the purposes of this Convention.

ARTICLE 9.

This Convention shall be open for signature by the States represented at the tenth session of the Diplomatic Conference on Maritime Law.

ARTICLE 10.

This Convention shall be ratified and the instruments of ratification shall be deposited with the Belgian Government which shall notify through diplomatic channels all signatory and acceding States of their deposit.


SCHEDULE 2—continued

SCHEDULE 6—continued

ARTICLE 11.

(1) This Convention shall come into force six months after the date of deposit of at least ten instruments of ratification, of which at least five shall have been deposited by States that have each a tonnage equal or superior to one million gross tons of tonnage.

(2) For each signatory State which ratifies the Convention after the date of deposit of the instrument of ratification determining the coming into force such as is stipulated in paragraph (1) of this Article, this Convention shall come into force six months after the deposit of their instrument of ratification.

ARTICLE 12.

Any State not represented at the tenth session of the Diplomatic Conference on Maritime Law may accede to this Convention.

The instruments of accession shall be deposited with the Belgian Government which shall inform through diplomatic channels all signatory and acceding States of the deposit of any such instruments.

The Convention shall come into force in respect of the acceding State six months after the date of the deposit of the instrument of accession of that State, but not before the date of entry into force of the Convention as established by Article 11(1).

ARTICLE 13.

Each High Contracting Party shall have the right to denounce this Convention at any time after the coming into force thereof in respect of such High Contracting Party. Nevertheless, this denunciation shall only take effect one year after the date on which notification thereof has been received by the Belgian Government which shall inform through diplomatic channels all signatory and acceding States of such notification.

ARTICLE 14.

(1) Any High Contracting Party may at the time of its ratification of or accession to this Convention or at any time thereafter declare by written notification to the Belgian Government that the Convention shall extend to any of the territories for whose international relations it is responsible. The Convention shall six months after the date of the receipt of such notification by the Belgian Government extend to the territories named therein, but not before the date of the coming into force of this Convention in respect of such High Contracting Party;

(2) Any High Contracting Party which has made a declaration under paragraph (1) of this Article extending the Convention to any territory for whose international relations it is responsible may at any time thereafter declare by notification given to the Belgian Government that the Convention shall cease to extend to such territory. This denunciation shall take effect one year after the date on which notification thereof has been received by the Belgian Government;

(3) The Belgian Government shall inform through diplomatic channels all signatory and acceding States of any notification received by it under this Article.

ARTICLE 15.

Any High Contracting Party may three years after the coming into force of this Convention in respect of such High Contracting Party or at any time thereafter request that a Conference be convened in order to consider amendments to this Convention.

Any High Contracting Party proposing to avail itself of this right shall notify the Belgian Government which shall convene the Conference within six months thereafter.

ARTICLE 16.

In respect of the relations between States which ratify this Convention or accede to it, this Convention shall replace and abrogate the International Convention for the unification of certain rules concerning the limitation of the liability of the owners of sea-going ships, signed at Brussels, on the 25th of August 1924.

In Witness whereof the Plenipotentiaries, duly authorized, have signed this Convention.


SCHEDULE 2—continued

SCHEDULE 6—continued

Done at Brussels, this tenth day of October 1957, in the French and English languages, the two texts being equally authentic, in a single copy, which shall remain deposited in the archives of the Belgian Government, which shall issue certified copies.

(Here follows the signatures of the Plenipotentiaries, of the States on behalf of which the Convention was signed.)

PROTOCOL OF SIGNATURE

(1) Any State, at the time of signing, ratifying or acceding to this Convention may make any of the reservations set forth in paragraph (2). No other reservations to this Convention shall be admissible.

(2) The following are the only reservations admissible:

(a) Reservation of the right to exclude the application of Article 1 paragraph (1) (c).

(b) Reservation of the right to regulate by specific provisions of national law the system of limitation of liability to be applied to ships of less than 300 tons.

(c) Reservation of the right to give effect to this Convention either by giving it the force of law or by including in national legislation, in a form appropriate to that legislation, the provisions of this Convention.

(Here follow the signatures of the Plenipotentiaries of the States on behalf of which the Protocol was signed.).

SCHEDULE 3 Section 93

SCHEDULES TO BE INSERTED IN PRINCIPAL ACT BY THIS ACT

SCHEDULE 1 Sub-section 187a(1)

INTERNATIONAL CONVENTION FOR THE SAFETY OF LIFE AT SEA, 1974

ARTICLE I

General Obligations under the Convention

(a) The Contracting Governments undertake to give effect to the provisions of the present Convention and the Annex thereto, which shall constitute an integral part of the present Convention. Every reference to the present Convention constitutes at the same time a reference to the Annex.

(b) The Contracting Governments undertake to promulgate all laws, decrees, orders and regulations and to take all other steps which may be necessary to give the present Convention full and complete effect, so as to ensure that, from the point of view of safety of life, a ship is fit for the service for which it is intended.

ARTICLE II

Application

The present Convention shall apply to ships entitled to fly the flag of States the Governments of which are Contracting Governments.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

SCHEDULE 1—continued

ARTICLE III

Laws, Regulations

The Contracting Governments undertake to communicate to and deposit with the Secretary-General of the Inter-Governmental Maritime Consultative Organization (hereinafter referred to as the Organization):

(a) a list of non-governmental agencies which are authorized to act in their behalf in the administration of measures for safety of life at sea for circulation to the Contracting Governments for the information of their officers;

(b) the text of laws, decrees, orders and regulations which shall have been promulgated on the various matters within the scope of the present Convention;

(c) a sufficient number of specimens of their Certificates issued under the provisions of the present Convention for circulation to the Contracting Governments for the information of their officers.

ARTICLE IV

Cases of Force Majeure

(a) A ship, which is not subject to the provisions of the present Convention at the time of its departure on any voyage, shall not become subject to the provisions of the present Convention on account of any deviation from its intended voyage due to stress of weather or any other cause of force majeure.

(b) Persons who are on board a ship by reason of force majeure or in consequence of the obligation laid upon the master to carry shipwrecked or other persons shall not be taken into account for the purpose of ascertaining the application to a ship of any provisions of the present Convention.

ARTICLE V

Carriage of Persons in Emergency

(a) For the purpose of evacuating persons in order to avoid a threat to the security of their lives a Contracting Government may permit the carriage of a larger number of persons in its ships than is otherwise permissible under the present Convention.

(b) Such permission shall not deprive other Contracting Governments of any right of control under the present Convention over such ships which come within their ports.

(c) Notice of any such permission, together with a statement of the circumstances, shall be sent to the Secretary-General of the Organization by the Contracting Government granting such permission.

ARTICLE VI

Prior Treaties and Conventions

(a) As between the Contracting Governments, the present Convention replaces and abrogates the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea which was signed in London on 17 June 1960.

(b) All other treaties, conventions and arrangements relating to safety of life at sea, or matters appertaining thereto, at present in force between Governments parties to the present Convention shall continue to have full and complete effect during the terms thereof as regards:

(i) ships to which the present Convention does not apply;

(ii) ships to which the present Convention applies, in respect of matters for which it has not expressly provided.

(c) To the extent, however, that such treaties, conventions or arrangements conflict with the provisions of the present Convention, the provisions of the present Convention shall prevail.

(d) All matters which are not expressly provided for in the present Convention remain subject to the legislation of the Contracting Governments.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

SCHEDULE 1—continued

ARTICLE VII

Special Rules drawn up by Agreement

When in accordance with the present Convention special rules are drawn up by agreement between all or some of the Contracting Governments, such rules shall be communicated to the Secretary-General of the Organization for circulation to all Contracting Governments.

ARTICLE VIII

Amendments

(a) The present Convention may be amended by either of the procedures specified in the following paragraphs.

(b) Amendments after consideration within the Organization:

(i) Any amendment proposed by a Contracting Government shall be submitted to the Secretary-General of the Organization, who shall then circulate it to all Members of the Organization and all Contracting Governments at least six months prior to its consideration.

(ii) Any amendment proposed and circulated as above shall be referred to the Maritime Safety Committee of the Organization for consideration.

(iii) Contracting Governments of States, whether or not Members of the Organization, shall be entitled to participate in the proceedings of the Maritime Safety Committee for the consideration and adoption of amendments.

(iv) Amendments shall be adopted by a two-thirds majority of the Contracting Governments present and voting in the Maritime Safety Committee expanded as provided for in sub-paragraph (iii) of this paragraph (hereinafter referred to as the expanded Maritime Safety Committee) on condition that at least one-third of the Contracting Governments shall be present at the time of voting.

(v) Amendments adopted in accordance with sub-paragraph (iv) of this paragraph shall be communicated by the Secretary-General of the Organization to all Contracting Governments for acceptance.

(vi) (1) An amendment to an Article of the Convention or to Chapter I of the Annex shall be deemed to have been accepted on the date on which it is accepted by two-thirds of the Contracting Governments.

(2) An amendment to the Annex other than Chapter I shall be deemed to have been accepted:

(aa) at the end of two years from the date on which it is communicated to Contracting Governments for acceptance; or

(bb) at the end of a different period, which shall not be less than one year, if so determined at the time of its adoption by a two-thirds majority of the Contracting Governments present and voting in the expanded Maritime Safety Committee.

However, if within the specified period either more than one-third of Contracting Governments, or Contracting Governments the combined merchant fleets of which constitute not less than fifty per cent of the gross tonnage of the worlds merchant fleet, notify the Secretary-General of the Organization that they object to the amendment, it shall be deemed not to have been accepted.

(vii) (1) An amendment to an Article of the Convention or to Chapter I of the Annex shall enter into force with respect to those Contracting Governments which have accepted it, six months after the date on which it is deemed to have been accepted, and with respect to each Contracting Government which accepts it after that date, six months after the date of that Contracting Governments acceptance.

(2) An amendment to the Annex other than Chapter I shall enter into force with respect to all Contracting Governments, except those which have objected to the amendment under sub-paragraph (vi) (2) of this paragraph and which have not withdrawn such objections, six months after the date on which it is deemed to have been accepted. However, before the date set for entry into force, any


SCHEDULE 3—continued

SCHEDULE 1—continued

Contracting Government may give notice to the Secretary-General of the Organization that it exempts itself from giving effect to that amendment for a period not longer than one year from the date of its entry into force, or for such longer period as may be determined by a two-thirds majority of the Contracting Governments present and voting in the expanded Maritime Safety Committee at the time of the adoption of the amendment.

(c) Amendment by a Conference:

(i) Upon the request of a Contracting Government concurred in by at least one-third of the Contracting Governments, the Organization shall convene a Conference of Contracting Governments to consider amendments to the present Convention.

(ii) Every amendment adopted by such a Conference by a two-thirds majority of the Contracting Governments present and voting shall be communicated by the Secretary-General of the Organization to all Contracting Governments for acceptance.

(iii) Unless the Conference decides otherwise, the amendment shall be deemed to have been accepted and shall enter into force in accordance with the procedures specified in sub-paragraphs (b) (vi) and (b) (vii) respectively of this Article, provided that references in these paragraphs to the expanded Maritime Safety Committee shall be taken to mean references to the Conference.

(d) (i) A contracting Government which has accepted an amendment to the Annex which has entered into force shall not be obliged to extend the benefit of the present Convention in respect of the certificates issued to a ship entitled to fly the flag of a State the Government of which, pursuant to the provisions of sub-paragraph (b) (vi) (2) of this Article, has objected to the amendment and has not withdrawn such an objection, but only to the extent that such certificates relate to matters covered by the amendment in question.

(ii) A Contracting Government which has accepted an amendment to the Annex which has entered into force shall extend the benefit of the present Convention in respect of the certificates issued to a ship entitled to fly the flag of a State the Government of which, pursuant to the provisions of sub-paragraph (b) (vii) (2) of this Article, has notified the Secretary-General of the Organization that it exempts itself from giving effect to the amendment.

(e) Unless expressly provided otherwise, any amendment to the present Convention made under this Article, which relates to the structure of a ship, shall apply only to ships the keels of which are laid or which are at a similar stage of construction, on or after the date on which the amendment enters into force.

(f) Any declaration of acceptance of, or objection to, an amendment or any notice given under sub-paragraph (b) (vii) (2) of this Article shall be submitted in writing to the Secretary-General of the Organization, who shall inform all Contracting Governments of any such submission and the date of its receipt.

(g) The Secretary-General of the Organization shall inform all Contracting Governments of any amendments which enter into force under this Article, together with the date on which each such amendment enters into force.

ARTICLE IX

Signature, Ratification, Acceptance, Approval and Accession

(a) The present Convention shall remain open for signature at the Headquarters of the Organization from 1 November 1974 until 1 July 1975 and shall thereafter remain open for accession. States may become parties to the present Convention by:

(i) signature without reservation as to ratification, acceptance or approval; or

(ii) signature subject to ratification, acceptance or approval, followed by ratification, acceptance or approval; or

(iii) accession.

(b) Ratification, acceptance, approval or accession shall be effected by the deposit of an instrument to that effect with the Secretary-General of the Organization.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

SCHEDULE 1—continued

(c) The Secretary-General of the Organization shall inform the Governments of all States which have signed the present Convention or acceded to it of any signature or of the deposit of any instrument of ratification, acceptance, approval or accession and the date of its deposits.

ARTICLE X

Entry into Force

(a) The present Convention shall enter into force twelve months after the date on which not less than twenty-five States, the combined merchant fleets of which constitute not less than fifty per cent of the gross tonnage of the worlds merchant shipping, have become parties to it in accordance with Article IX.

(b) Any instrument of ratification, acceptance, approval or accession deposited after the date on which the present Convention enters into force shall take effect three months after the date of deposit.

(c) After the date on which an amendment to the present Convention is deemed to have been accepted under Article VIII, any instrument of ratification, acceptance, approval or accession deposited shall apply to the Convention as amended.

ARTICLE XI

Denunciation

(a) The present Convention may be denounced by any Contracting Government at any time after the expiry of five years from the date on which the Convention enters into force for that Government.

(b) Denunciation shall be effected by the deposit of an instrument of denunciation with the Secretary-General of the Organization who shall notify all the other Contracting Governments of any instrument of denunciation received and of the date of its receipt as well as the date on which such denunciation takes effect.

(c) A denunciation shall take effect one year, or such longer period as may be specified in the instrument of denunciation, after its receipt by the Secretary-General of the Organization.

ARTICLE XII

Deposit and Registration

(a) The present Convention shall be deposited with the Secretary-General of the Organization who shall transmit certified true copies thereof to the Governments of all States which have signed the present Convention or acceded to it.

(b) As soon as the present Convention enters into force, the text shall be transmitted by the Secretary-General of the Organization to the Secretary-General of the United Nations for registration and publication, in accordance with Article 102 of the Charter of the United Nations.

ARTICLE XIII

Languages

The present Convention is established in a single copy in the Chinese, English, French, Russian and Spanish languages, each text being equally authentic. Official translations in the Arabic, German and Italian languages shall be prepared and deposited with the signed original.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

SCHEDULE 1—continued

ANNEX

CHAPTER I

GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART A—APPLICATION, DEFINITIONS, ETC.

Regulation 1

Application

(a) Unless expressly provided otherwise, the present Regulations apply only to ships engaged on international voyages.

(b) The classes of ships to which each Chapter applies are more precisely defined, and the extent of the application is shown, in each Chapter.

Regulation 2

Definitions

For the purpose of the present Regulations, unless expressly provided otherwise:

(a)Regulations means the Regulations contained in the Annex to the present Convention.

(b)Administration means the Government of the State whose flag the ship is entitled to fly.

(c)Approved means approved by the Administration.

(d)International voyage means a voyage from a country to which the present Convention applies to a port outside such country, or conversely.

(e) A passenger is every person other than:

(i) the master and the members of the crew or other persons employed or engaged in any capacity on board a ship on the business of that ship; and

(ii) a child under one year of age.

(f) A passenger ship is a ship which carries more than twelve passengers.

(g) A cargo ship is any ship which is not a passenger ship.

(h) A tanker is a cargo ship constructed or adapted for the carriage in bulk of liquid cargoes of an inflammable* nature.

(i) A fishing vessel is a vessel used for catching fish, whales, seals, walrus or other living resources of the sea.

(j) A nuclear ship is a ship provided with a nuclear power plant.

(k)New ship means a ship the keel of which is laid or which is at a similar stage of construction on or after the date of coming into force of the present Convention.

(l)Existing ship means a ship which is not a new ship.

(m) A mile is 1,852 metres or 6,080 feet.

Regulation 3

Exceptions

(a) The present Regulations, unless expressly provided otherwise, do not apply to:

(i) Ships of war and troopships.

(ii) Cargo ships of less than 500 tons gross tonnage.

(iii) Ships not propelled by mechanical means.

(iv) Wooden ships of primitive build.

(v) Pleasure yachts not engaged in trade.

(vi) Fishing vessels.

* Inflammable has the same meaning as flammable.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

SCHEDULE 1—continued

(b) Except as expressly provided in Chapter V, nothing herein shall apply to ships solely navigating the Great Lakes of North America and the River St. Lawrence as far east as a straight line drawn from Cap des Rosiers to West Point, Anticosti Island and, on the north side of Anticosti Island, the 63rd Meridian.

Regulation 4

Exemptions

(a) A ship which is not normally engaged on international voyages but which, in exceptional circumstances, is required to undertake a single international voyage may be exempted by the Administration from any of the requirements of the present Regulations provided that it complies with safety requirements which are adequate in the opinion of the Administration for the voyage which is to be undertaken by the ship.

(b) The Administration may exempt any ship which embodies features of a novel kind from any of the provisions of Chapters II-1, II-2, III and IV of these Regulations the application of which might seriously impede research into the development of such features and their incorporation in ships engaged on international voyages. Any such ship shall, however, comply with safety requirements which, in the opinion of that Administration, are adequate for the service for which it is intended and are such as to ensure the overall safety of the ship and which are acceptable to the Governments of the States to be visited by the ship. The Administration which allows any such exemption shall communicate to the Organization particulars of same and the reasons therefor which the Organization shall circulate to the Contracting Governments for their information.

Regulation 5

Equivalents

(a) Where the present Regulations require that a particular fitting, material, appliance or apparatus, or type thereof, shall be fitted or carried in a ship, or that any particular provision shall be made, the Administration may allow any other fitting, material, appliance or apparatus, or type thereof, to be fitted or carried, or any other provision to be made in that ship, if it is satisfied by trial thereof or otherwise that such fitting, material, appliance or apparatus, or type thereof, or provision, is at least as effective as that required by the present Regulations.

(b) Any Administration which so allows, in substitution, a fitting, material, appliance or apparatus, or type thereof, or provision, shall communicate to the Organization particulars thereof together with a report on any trials made and the Organization shall circulate such particulars to other Contracting Governments for the information of their officers.

PART B—SURVEYS AND CERTIFICATES

Regulation 6

Inspection and Survey

The inspection and survey of ships, so far as regards the enforcement of the provisions of the present Regulations and the granting of exemptions therefrom, shall be carried out by officers of the country in which the ship is registered, provided that the Government of each country may entrust the inspection and survey either to surveyors nominated for the purpose or to organizations recognized by it. In every case the Government concerned fully guarantees the completeness and efficiency of the inspection and survey.

Regulation 7

Surveys of Passenger Ships

(a) A passenger ship shall be subjected to the surveys specified below:

(i) A survey before the ship is put in service.

(ii) A periodical survey once every twelve months.

(iii) Additional surveys, as occasion arises.

SCHEDULE 3—continued

SCHEDULE 1—continued

(b) The surveys referred to above shall be carried out as follows:

(i) The survey before the ship is put in service shall include a complete inspection of its structure, machinery and equipment, including the outside of the ships bottom and the inside and outside of the boilers. This survey shall be such as to ensure that the arrangements, material, and scantlings of the structure, boilers and other pressure vessels and their appurtenances, main and auxiliary machinery, electrical installation, radio installation, radiotelegraph installations in motor lifeboats, portable radio apparatus for survival craft, life-saving appliances, fire protection, fire detecting and extinguishing appliances, radar, echo-sounding device, gyro-compass, pilot ladders, mechanical pilot hoists and other equipment, fully comply with the requirements of the present Convention, and of the laws, decrees, orders and regulations promulgated as a result thereof by the Administration for ships of the service for which it is intended. The survey shall also be such as to ensure that the workmanship of all parts of the ship and its equipment is in all respects satisfactory, and that the ship is provided with the lights, shapes, means of making sound signals and distress signals as required by the provisions of the present Convention and the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea in force.

(ii) The periodical survey shall include an inspection of the structure, boilers and other pressure vessels, machinery and equipment, including the outside of the ships bottom. The survey shall be such as to ensure that the ship, as regards the structure, boilers and other pressure vessels and their appurtenances, main and auxiliary machinery, electrical installation, radio installation, radiotelegraph installations in motor lifeboats, portable radio apparatus for survival craft, life-saving appliances, fire protection, fire detecting and extinguishing appliances, radar, echo-sounding device, gyro-compass, pilot ladders, mechanical pilot hoists and other equipment, is in satisfactory condition and fit for the service for which it is intended, and that it complies with the requirements of the present Convention, and of the laws, decrees, orders and regulations promulgated as a result thereof by the Administration. The lights, shapes and means of making sound signals and the distress signals carried by the ship shall also be subject to the above-mentioned survey for the purpose of ensuring that they comply with the requirements of the present Convention and of the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea in force.

(iii) A survey either general or partial, according to the circumstances, shall be made every time an accident occurs or a defect is discovered which affects the safety of the ship or the efficiency or completeness of its life-saving appliances or other equipment, or whenever any important repairs or renewals are made. The survey shall be such as to ensure that the necessary repairs or renewals have been effectively made, that the material and workmanship of such repairs are in all respects satisfactory, and that the ship complies in all respects with the provisions of the present Convention and of the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea in force, and of the laws, decrees, orders and regulations promulgated as a result thereof by the Administration.

(c) (i) The laws, decrees, orders and regulations referred to in paragraph (b) of this Regulation shall be in all respects such as to ensure that, from the point of view of safety of life, the ship is fit for the service for which it is intended.

(ii) They shall among other things prescribe the requirements to be observed as to the initial and sub-sequent hydraulic or other acceptable alternative tests to which the main and auxiliary boilers, connexions, steam pipes, high pressure receivers, and fuel tanks for internal combustion engines are to be submitted including the test procedures to be followed and the intervals between two consecutive tests.

 

Regulation 8

Surveys of Life-Saving Appliances and other Equipment of Cargo Ships

The life-saving appliances, except a radiotelegraph installation in a motor lifeboat or a portable radio apparatus for survival craft, the echo-sounding device, the gyro-compass, and the fire-extinguishing appliances of cargo ships to which Chapters II-1, II-2, III and V apply shall be subject to initial and sub-sequent surveys as provided for passenger ships in Regulation 7 of this Chapter with the substitution of 24 months for 12 months in sub-paragraph (a) (ii) of that Regulation. The fire control plans in new ships and the pilot ladders, mechanical pilot hoists, lights, shapes and means of making sound signals carried by new and existing

SCHEDULE 3—continued

SCHEDULE 1—continued

ships shall be included in the surveys for the purpose of ensuring that they comply fully with the requirements of the present Convention and, where applicable, the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea in force.

Regulation 9

Surveys of Radio and Radar Installations of Cargo Ships

The radio and radar installations of cargo ships to which Chapters IV and V apply and any radiotelegraph installation in a motor lifeboat or portable radio apparatus for survival craft which is carried in compliance with the requirements of Chapter III shall be subject to initial and sub-sequent surveys as provided for passenger ships in Regulation 7 of this Chapter.

Regulation 10

Surveys of Hull, Machinery and Equipment of Cargo Ships

The hull, machinery and equipment (other than items in respect of which Cargo Ship Safety Equipment Certificates, Cargo Ship Safety Radiotelegraphy Certificates or Cargo Ship Safety Radiotelephony Certificates are issued) of a cargo ship shall be surveyed on completion and thereafter in such manner and at such intervals as the Administration may consider necessary in order to ensure that their condition is in all respects satisfactory. The survey shall be such as to ensure that the arrangements, material, and scantlings of the structure, boilers and other pressure vessels and their appurtenances, main and auxiliary machinery, electrical installations and other equipment are in all respects satisfactory for the service for which the ship is intended.

Regulation 11

Maintenance of Conditions after Survey

After any survey of the ship under Regulations 7, 8, 9 or 10 of this Chapter has been completed, no change shall be made in the structural arrangements, machinery, equipment, etc. covered by the survey, without the sanction of the Administration.

Regulation 12

Issue of Certificates

(a) (i) A certificate called a Passenger Ship Safety Certificate shall be issued after inspection and survey to a passenger ship which complies with the requirements of Chapters II-1, II-2, III and IV and any other relevant requirements of the present Regulations.

(ii) A certificate called a Cargo Ship Safety Construction Certificate shall be issued after survey to a cargo ship which satisfies the requirements for cargo ships on survey set out in Regulation 10 of this Chapter and complies with the applicable requirements of Chapters II-1 and II-2 other than those relating to fire-extinguishing appliances and fire control plans.

(iii) A certificate called a Cargo Ship Safety Equipment Certificate shall be issued after inspection to a cargo ship which complies with the relevant requirements of Chapters II-1, II-2 and III and any other relevant requirements of the present Regulations.

(iv) A certificate called a Cargo Ship Safety Radiotelegraphy Certificate shall be issued after inspection to a cargo ship, fitted with a radiotelegraph installation, which complies with the requirements of Chapter IV and any other relevant requirements of the present Regulations.

(v) A certificate called a Cargo Ship Safety Radiotelephony Certificate shall be issued after inspection to a cargo ship, fitted with a radiotelephone installation, which complies with the requirements of Chapter IV and any other relevant requirements of the present Regulations.

(vi) When an exemption is granted to a ship under and in accordance with the provisions of the present Regulations, a certificate called an Exemption Certificate shall be issued in addition to the certificates prescribed in this paragraph.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

SCHEDULE 1—continued

(vii) Passenger Ship Safety Certificates, Cargo Ship Safety Construction Certificates, Cargo Ship Safety Equipment Certificates, Cargo Ship Safety Radiotelegraphy Certificates, Cargo Ship Safety Radiotelephony Certificates and Exemption Certificates shall be issued either by the Administration or by any person or organization duly authorized by it. In every case, that Administration assumes full responsibility for the Certificate.

(b) Notwithstanding any other provision of the present Convention any certificate issued under, and in accordance with, the provisions of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1960, which is current when the present Convention comes into force in respect of the Administration by which the certificate is issued, shall remain valid until it expires under the terms of Regulation 14 of Chapter I of that Convention.

(c) A Contracting Government shall not issue certificates under, and in accordance with, the provisions of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1960, 1948 or 1929, after the date on which acceptance of the present Convention by the Government takes effect.

Regulation 13

Issue of Certificate by another Government

A Contracting Government may, at the request of the Administration, cause a ship to be surveyed and, if satisfied that the requirements of the present Regulations are complied with, shall issue certificates to the ship in accordance with the present Regulations. Any certificate so issued must contain a statement to the effect that it has been issued at the request of the Government of the country in which the ship is or will be registered, and it shall have the same force and receive the same recognition as a certificate issued under Regulation 12 of this Chapter.

Regulation 14

Duration of Certificates

(a) Certificates other than Cargo Ship Safety Construction Certificates, Cargo Ship Safety Equipment Certificates and Exemption Certificates shall be issued for a period of not more than 12 months. Cargo Ship Safety Equipment Certificates shall be issued for a period of not more than 24 months. Exemption Certificates shall not be valid for longer than the period of the certificates to which they refer.

(b) If a survey takes place within two months before the end of the period for which a Cargo Ship Safety Radiotelegraphy Certificate or a Cargo Ship Safety Radiotelephony Certificate issued in respect of cargo ships of 300 tons gross tonnage and upwards, but less than 500 tons gross tonnage, was originally issued, that certificate may be withdrawn, and a new certificate may be issued which shall expire 12 months after the end of the said period.

(c) If a ship at the time when its certificate expires is not in a port of the country in which it is registered, the certificate may be extended by the Administration, but such extension shall be granted only for the purpose of allowing the ship to complete its voyage to the country in which it is registered or is to be surveyed, and then only in cases where it appears proper and reasonable so to do.

(d) No certificate shall be thus extended for a longer period than five months, and a ship to which such extension is granted shall not, on its arrival in the country in which it is registered or the port in which it is to be surveyed, be entitled by virtue of such extension to leave that port or country without having obtained a new certificate.

(e) A certificate which has not been extended under the foregoing provisions of this Regulation may be extended by the Administration for a period of grace of up to one month from the date of expiry stated on it.

Regulation 15

Form of Certificates

(a) All certificates shall be drawn up in the official language or languages of the country by which they are issued.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

SCHEDULE 1—continued

(b) The form of the certificates shall be that of the models given in the Appendix to the present Regulations. The arrangement of the printed part of the model certificates shall be exactly reproduced in the certificates issued, or in certified copies thereof, and the particulars inserted in the certificates issued, or in certified copies thereof, shall be in Roman characters and Arabic figures.

Regulation 16

Posting up of Certificates

All certificates or certified copies thereof issued under the present Regulations shall be posted up in a prominent and accessible place in the ship.

Regulation 17

Acceptance of Certificates

Certificates issued under the authority of a Contracting Government shall be accepted by the other Contracting Governments for all purposes covered by the present Convention. They shall be regarded by the other Contracting Governments as having the same force as certificates issued by them.

Regulation 18

Qualification of Certificates

(a) If in the course of a particular voyage a ship has on board a number of persons less than the total number stated in the Passenger Ship Safety Certificate and is in consequence, in accordance with the provisions of the present Regulations, free to carry a smaller number of lifeboats and other life-saving appliances than that stated in the Certificate, an annex may be issued by the Government, person or organization referred to in Regulation 12 or 13 of this Chapter.

(b) This annex shall state that in the circumstances there is no infringement of the provisions of the present Regulations. It shall be annexed to the Certificate and shall be substituted for it in so far as the life-saving appliances are concerned. It shall be valid only for the particular voyage for which it is issued.

Regulation 19

Control

Every ship holding a certificate issued under Regulation 12 or Regulation 13 of this Chapter is subject in the ports of the other Contracting Governments to control by officers duly authorized by such Governments in so far as this control is directed towards verifying that there is on board a valid certificate. Such certificate shall be accepted unless there are clear grounds for believing that the condition of the ship or of its equipment does not correspond substantially with the particulars of that certificate. In that case, the officer carrying out the control shall take such steps as will ensure that the ship shall not sail until it can proceed to sea without danger to the passengers or the crew. In the event of this control giving rise to intervention of any kind, the officer carrying out the control shall inform the Consul of the country in which the ship is registered in writing forthwith of all the circumstances in which intervention was deemed to be necessary, and the facts shall be reported to the Organization.

Regulation 20

Privileges

The privileges of the present Convention may not be claimed in favour of any ship unless it holds appropriate valid certificates.

PART C—CASUALTIES

Regulation 21

Casualties

(a) Each Administration undertakes to conduct an investigation of any casualty occurring to any of its ships subject to the provisions of the present Convention when it judges that


SCHEDULE 3—continued

SCHEDULE 1—continued

such an investigation may assist in determining what changes in the present Regulations might be desirable.

(b) Each Contracting Government undertakes to supply the Organization with pertinent information concerning the findings of such investigations. No reports or recommendations of the Organization based upon such information shall disclose the identity or nationality of the ships concerned or in any manner fix or imply responsibility upon any ship or person.

CHAPTER II-l

CONSTRUCTION—SUBDIVISION AND STABILITY, MACHINERY AND ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

PART A—GENERAL

Regulation 1

Application

(a) (i) Unless expressly provided otherwise, this Chapter applies to new ships.

(ii) Existing passenger ships and cargo ships shall comply with the following:

(1) for ships the keels of which were laid or which were at a similar stage of construction on or after the date of coming into force of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1960, the Administration shall ensure that the requirements which were applied under Chapter II of that Convention to new ships as defined in that Chapter are complied with;

(2) for ships the keels of which were laid or which were at a similar stage of construction on or after the date of coming into force of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1948, but before the date of coming into force of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1960, the Administration shall ensure that the requirements which were applied under Chapter II of the 1948 Convention to new ships as defined in that Chapter are complied with;

(3) for ships the keels of which were laid or which were at a similar stage of construction before the date of coming into force of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1948, the Administration shall ensure that the requirements which were applied under Chapter II of that Convention to existing ships as defined in that Chapter are complied with;

(4) as regards the requirements of Chapter II-1 of the present Convention which are not contained in Chapter II of the 1960 and 1948 Conventions, the Administration shall decide which of these requirements shall be applied to existing ships as defined in the present Convention.

(iii) A ship which undergoes repairs, alterations, modifications and outfitting related thereto shall continue to comply with at least the requirements previously applicable to the ship. An existing ship in such a case shall not, as a rule, comply to a lesser extent with the requirements for a new ship than it did before. Repairs, alterations and modifications of a major character and outfitting related thereto should meet the requirements for a new ship in so far as the Administration deems reasonable and practicable.

(b) For the purpose of this Chapter:

(i) A new passenger ship is a passenger ship the keel of which is laid or which is at a similar stage of construction on or after the date of coming into force of the present Convention, or a cargo ship which is converted to a passenger ship on or after that date, all other passenger ships being described as existing passenger ships.

(ii) A new cargo ship is a cargo ship the keel of which is laid or which is at a similar stage of construction after the date of coming into force of the present Convention.

(c) The Administration may, if it considers that the sheltered nature and conditions of the voyage are such as to render the application of any specific requirements of this Chapter unreasonable or unnecessary, exempt from those requirements individual ships or classes


SCHEDULE 3—continued

SCHEDULE 1—continued

of ships belonging to its country which, in the course of their voyage, do not proceed more than 20 miles from the nearest land.

(d) In the case of a passenger ship which is permitted under paragraph (c) of Regulation 27 of Chapter III to carry a number of persons on board in excess of the lifeboat capacity provided, it shall comply with the special standards of subdivision set out in paragraph (e) of Regulation 5 of this Chapter, and the associated special provisions regarding permeability in paragraph (d) of Regulation 4 of this Chapter, unless the Administration is satisfied that, having regard to the nature and conditions of the voyage, compliance with the other provisions of the Regulations of this Chapter and Chapter II-2 of the present Convention is sufficient.

(e) In the case of passenger ships which are employed in special trades for the carriage of large numbers of special trade passengers, such as the pilgrim trade, the Administration, if satisfied that it is impracticable to enforce compliance with the requirements of this Chapter, may exempt such ships, when they belong to its country, from those requirements, provided that they comply fully with the provisions of:

(i) the Rules annexed to the Special Trade Passenger Ships Agreement, 1971, and

(ii) the Rules annexed to the Protocol on Space Requirements for Special Trade Passenger Ships, 1973, when it enters into force.

Regulation 2

Definitions

For the purpose of this Chapter, unless expressly provided otherwise:

(a) (i) A subdivision load line is a water-line used in determining the subdivision of the ship.

(ii) The deepest subdivision load line is the water-line which corresponds to the greatest draught permitted by the subdivision requirements which are applicable.

(b) The length of the ship is the length measured between perpendiculars taken at the extremities of the deepest subdivision load line.

(c) The breadth of the ship is the extreme width from outside of frame to outside of frame at or below the deepest subdivision load line.

(d) The draught is the vertical distance from the moulded base line amidships to the subdivision load line in question.

(e) The bulkhead deck is the uppermost deck up to which the transverse watertight bulkheads are carried.

(f) The margin line is a line drawn at least 76 millimetres (3 inches) below the upper surface of the bulkhead deck at side.

(g) The permeability of a space is the percentage of that space which can be occupied by water.

The volume of a space which extends above the margin line shall be measured only to the height of that line.

(h) The machinery space is to be taken as extending from the moulded base line to the margin line and between the extreme main transverse watertight bulkheads bounding the spaces containing the main and auxiliary propelling machinery, boilers serving the needs of propulsion, and all permanent coal bunkers.

In the case of unusual arrangements, the Administration may define the limits of the machinery spaces.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

SCHEDULE 1—continued

(i) Passenger spaces are those which are provided for the accommodation and use of passengers, excluding baggage, store, provision and mail rooms.

For the purposes of Regulations 4 and 5 of this Chapter, spaces provided below the margin line for the accommodation and use of the crew shall be regarded as passenger spaces.

(j) In all cases volumes and areas shall be calculated to moulded lines.

PART B—SUBDIVISION AND STABILITY*

(Part B applies to passenger ships only, except that Regulation 19 also applies to cargo ships.)

Regulation 3

Floodable Length

(a) The floodable length at any point of the length of a ship shall be determined by a method of calculation which takes into consideration the form, draught and other characteristics of the ship in question.

(b) In a ship with a continuous bulkhead deck, the floodable length at a given point is the maximum portion of the length of the ship, having its centre at the point in question, which can be flooded under the definite assumptions set forth in Regulation 4 of this Chapter without the ship being submerged beyond the margin line.

(c) (i) In the case of a ship not having a continuous bulkhead deck, the floodable length at any point may be determined to an assumed continuous margin line which at no point is less than 76 millimetres (3 inches) below the top of the deck (at side) to which the bulkheads concerned and the shell are carried watertight.

(ii) Where a portion of an assumed margin line is appreciably below the deck to which bulkheads are carried, the Administration may permit a limited relaxation in the watertightness of those portions of the bulkheads which are above the margin line and immediately under the higher deck.

Regulation 4

Permeability

(a) The definite assumptions referred to in Regulation 3 of this Chapter relate to the permeabilities of the spaces below the margin line.

In determining the floodable length, a uniform average permeability shall be used throughout the whole length of each of the following portions of the ship below the margin line:

(i) the machinery space as defined in Regulation 2 of this Chapter;

(ii) the portion forward of the machinery space; and

(iii) the portion abaft the machinery space.

(b) (i) The uniform average permeability throughout the machinery space shall be determined from the formula

* Instead of the requirements in this Part, the Regulations on Subdivision and Stability of Passenger Ships as an Equivalent to Part B of Chapter II of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1960, adopted by the Organization by Resolution A.265 (VIII), may be used, if applied, in their entirety.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

SCHEDULE 1—continued

where:

a = volume of the passenger spaces, as defined in Regulation 2 of this Chapter, which are situated below the margin line within the limits of the machinery space;

c = volume of between deck spaces below the margin line within the limits of the machinery space which are appropriated to cargo, coal or stores;

v = whole volume of the machinery space below the margin line.

(ii) Where it is shown to the satisfaction of the Administration that the average permeability as determined by detailed calculation is less than that given by the formula, the detailed calculated value may be used. For the purpose of such calculation, the permeabilities of passenger spaces, as defined in Regulation 2 of this Chapter, shall be taken as 95, that of all cargo, coal and store spaces as 60, and that of double bottom, oil fuel and other tanks at such values as may be approved in each case.

(c) Except as provided in paragraph (d) of this Regulation, the uniform average permeability throughout the portion of the ship before (or abaft) the machinery space shall be determined from the formula

63 + 35

a

v

where:

a = volume of the passenger spaces, as defined in Regulation 2 of this Chapter, which are situated below the margin line, before (or abaft) the machinery space, and

v = whole volume of the portion of the ship below the margin line before (or abaft) the machinery space.

(d) In the case of a ship which is permitted under paragraph (c) of Regulation 27 of Chapter III to carry a number of persons on board in excess of the lifeboat capacity provided, and is required under paragraph (d) of Regulation 1 of this Chapter to comply with special provisions, the uniform average permeability throughout the portion of the ship before (or abaft) the machinery space shall be determined from the formula

9535

b

v

where:

b = the volume of the spaces below the margin line and above the tops of floors, inner bottom, or peak tanks, as the case may be, which are appropriated to and used as cargo spaces, coal or oil fuel bunkers, store-rooms, baggage and mail rooms, chain lockers and fresh water tanks, before (or abaft) the machinery space; and

v = whole volume of the portion of the ship below the margin line before (or abaft) the machinery space.

In the case of ships engaged on services where the cargo holds are not generally occupied by any substantial quantities of cargo, no part of the cargo spaces is to be included in calculating b.

(e) In the case of unusual arrangements the Administration may allow, or require, a detailed calculation of average permeability for the portions before or abaft the machinery space. For the purpose of such calculation, the permeability of passenger spaces as defined in Regulation 2 of this Chapter shall be taken as 95, that of spaces containing machinery as 85, that of all cargo, coal and store spaces as 60 and that of double bottom, oil fuel and other tanks at such value as may be approved in each case.

(f) Where a between deck compartment between two watertight transverse bulkheads contains any passenger or crew space, the whole of that compartment, less any space completely enclosed within permanent steel bulkheads and appropriated to other purposes, shall be regarded as passenger space. Where, however, the passenger or crew space in question is completely enclosed within permanent steel bulkheads, only the space so enclosed need be considered as passenger space.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

SCHEDULE 1—continued

Regulation 5

Permissible Length of Compartments

(a) Ships shall be as efficiently subdivided as is possible having regard to the nature of the service for which they are intended. The degree of subdivision shall vary with the length of the ship and with the service, in such manner that the highest degree of subdivision corresponds with the ships of greatest length, primarily engaged in the carriage of passengers.

(b) Factor of Subdivision. The maximum permissible length of a compartment having its centre at any point in the ships length is obtained from the floodable length by multiplying the latter by an appropriate factor called the factor of subdivision.

The factor of subdivision shall depend on the length of the ship, and for a given length shall vary according to the nature of the service for which the ship is intended. It shall decrease in a regular and continuous manner:

(i) as the length of the ship increases, and

(ii) from a factor A, applicable to ships primarily engaged in the carriage of cargo, to a factor B, applicable to ships primarily engaged in the carriage of passengers.

The variations of the factors A and B shall be expressed by the following formulae (I) and (II) where L is the length of the ship as defined in Regulation 2 of this Chapter:

L in metres

A =

58.2

+ .18 (L= 131 and upwards)......................

(I)

L 60

L in feet

A =

190

+ .18 (L = 430 and upwards)

L 198

L in metres

B

30.3

+ .18 (L = 79 and upwards)......................

(II)

L 42

L in feet

B

100

+ .18 (L = 260 and upwards)

L 138

(c) Criterion of Service. For a ship of given length the appropriate factor of subdivision shall be determined by the Criterion of Service Numeral (hereinafter called the Criterion Numeral) as given by the following formulae (III) and (IV) where:

Cs = the Criterion Numeral;

L = Length of the ship, as defined in Regulation 2 of this Chapter;

M = the volume of the machinery space, as defined in Regulation 2 of this Chapter; with the addition thereto of the volume of any permanent oil fuel bunkers which may be situated above the inner bottom and before or abaft the machinery space;

P = the whole volume of the passenger spaces below the margin line, as defined in Regulation 2 of this Chapter;

V = the whole volume of the ship below the margin line;

P1 = KN where:

N = number of passengers for which the ship is to be certified, and K has the following values:

 

Value of K

Length in metres and volumes in cubic metres

.056L

Length in feet and volumes in cubic feet

.6L


SCHEDULE 3—continued

SCHEDULE 1—continued

Where the value of KN is greater than the sum of P and the whole volume of the actual passenger spaces above the margin line, the figure to be taken as P, is that sum or two-thirds KN, whichever is the greater.

When P1 is greater than P

Cs

= 72

M + 2P1

..................................(III)

V + P1 P

and in other cases

Cs

= 72

M + 2P

..................................(IV)

V

For ships not having a continuous bulkhead deck the volumes are to be taken up to the actual margin lines used in determining the floodable lengths.

(d) Rules for Subdivision of Ships other than those covered by paragraph (e) of this Regulation

(i) The subdivision abaft the forepeak of ships 131 metres (430 feet) in length and upwards having a criterion numeral of 23 or less shall be governed by the factor A given by formula (I); of those having a criterion numeral of 123 or more by the factor B given by formula (II); and of those having a criterion numeral between 23 and 123 by the factor F obtained by linear interpolation between the factors A and B, usine the formula:

F = A

(A B) (Cs 23)

..................................(V)

100

Nevertheless, where the criterion numeral is equal to 45 or more and simultaneously the computed factor of subdivision as given by formula (V) is .65 or less, but more than .50, the subdivision abaft the forepeak shall be governed by the factor .50.

Where the factor F is less than .40 and it is shown to the satisfaction of the Administration to be impracticable to comply with the factor F in a machinery compartment of the ship, the subdivision of such compartment may be governed by an increased factor, which, however, shall not exceed .40.

(ii) The subdivision abaft the forepeak of ships less than 131 metres (430 feet) but not less than 79 metres (260 feet) in length having a criterion numeral equal to S, where

S =

3,574 25L

(L in metres) =

9,382 20L

(L in feet)

13

34

shall be governed by the factor unity; of those having a criterion numeral of 123 or more by the factor B given by the formula (II); of those having a criterion numeral between S and 123 by the factor F obtained by linear interpolation between unity and the factor B using the formula:

F =

1 (1 B) (Cs S)

...................................(VI)

123 S

(iii) The subdivision abaft the forepeak of ships less than 131 metres (430 feet) but not less than 79 metres (260 feet) in length and having a criterion numeral less than S, and of all ships less than 79 metres (260 feet) in length shall be governed by the factor unity, unless, in either case, it is shown to the satisfaction of the Administration to be impracticable to comply with this factor in any part of the ship, in which case the Administration may allow such relaxation as may appear to be justified, having regard to all the circumstances.

(iv) The provisions of sub-paragraph (iii) of this paragraph shall apply also to ships of whatever length, which are to be certified to carry a number of passengers exceeding 12 but not exceeding

L2

(in metres) =

L2

(in feet), or 50, whichever is the less.

650

7,000


SCHEDULE 3—continued

SCHEDULE 1—continued

(e) Special Standards of Subdivision for Ships which are permitted under paragraph (c) of Regulation 27 of Chapter III to carry a number of persons on board in excess of the lifeboat capacity provided and are required under paragraph (d) of Regulation 1 of this Chapter to comply with special provisions

(i) (1) In the case of ships primarily engaged in the carriage of passengers, the subdivision abaft the forepeak shall be governed by a factor of .50 or by the factor determined according to paragraphs (c) and (d) of this Regulation, if less than .50.

(2) In the case of such ships less than 91.5 metres (300 feet) in length, if the Administration is satisfied that compliance with such factor would be impracticable in a compartment, it may allow the length of that compartment to be governed by a higher factor provided the factor used is the lowest that is practicable and reasonable in the circumstances.

(ii) Where, in the case of any ship whether less than 91.5 metres (300 feet) or not, the necessity of carrying appreciable quantities of cargo makes it impracticable to require the subdivision abaft the forepeak to be governed by a factor not exceeding .50, the standard of subdivision to be applied shall be determined in accordance with the following sub-paragraphs (1) to (5), subject to the condition that where the Administration is satisfied that insistence on strict compliance in any respect would be unreasonable, it may allow such alternative arrangement of the watertight bulkheads as appears to be justified on merits and will not diminish the general effectiveness of the subdivision.

(1) The provisions of paragraph (c) of this Regulation relating to the criterion numeral shall apply with the exception that in calculating the value of P1 for berthed passengers K is to have the value defined in paragraph (c) of this Regulation, or 3.55 cubic metres (125 cubic feet), whichever is the greater, and for unberthed passengers K is to have the value 3.55 cubic metres (125 cubic feet).

(2) The factor B in paragraph (b) of this Regulation shall be replaced by the factor BB determined by the following formula:

L in metres

BB =

17.6

+ .20 (L = 55 and upwards)

L 33

L in feet

BB =

57.6

+ .20 (L = 180 and upwards)

L 108

(3) The subdivision abaft the forepeak of ships 131 metres (430 feet) in length and upwards having a criterion numeral of 23 or less shall be governed by the factor A given by formula (I) in paragraph (b) of this Regulation; of those having a criterion numeral of 123 of more by the factor BB given by the formula in sub-paragraph (ii) (2) of this paragraph; and of those having a criterion numeral between 23 and 123 by the factor F obtained by linear interpolation between the factors A and BB, using the formula:

F = A

(A BB)(Cs 23)

100

except that if the factor F so obtained is less than .50 the factor to be used shall be either .50 or the factor calculated according to the provisions of sub-paragraph (d) (i) of this Regulation, whichever is the smaller.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

SCHEDULE 1—continued

(4) The subdivision abaft the forepeak of ships less than 131 metres (430 feet) but not less than 55 metres (180 feet) in length having a criterion numeral equal to S1 where

S1=

3,712 25L

(L in metres)

19

 

S1 =

1,950 4L

(L in feet)

10

shall be governed by the factor unity; of those having a criterion numeral of 123 or more by the factor BB given by the formula in sub-paragraph (ii) (2) of this paragraph; of those having a criterion numeral between S1 and 123 by the factor F obtained by linear interpolation between unity and the factor BB using the formula:

F = 1

(1 BB)(Cs S1)

123 S1

except that in either of the two latter cases if the factor so obtained is less than .50 the subdivision may be governed by a factor not exceeding .50.

(5) The subdivision abaft the forepeak of ships less than 131 metres (430 feet) but not less than 55 metres (180 feet) in length and having a criterion numeral less than S1 and of all ships less than 55 metres (180 feet) in length shall be governed by the factor unity, unless it is shown to the satisfaction of the Administration to be impracticable to comply with this factor in particular compartments, in which event the Administration may allow such relaxations in respect of those compartments as appear to be justified, having regard to all the circumstances, provided that the aftermost compartment and as many as possible of the forward compartments (between the forepeak and the after end of the machinery space) shall be kept within the floodable length.

Regulation 6

Special Rules concerning Subdivision

(a) Where in a portion or portions of a ship the watertight bulkheads are carried to a higher deck than in the remainder of the ship and it is desired to take advantage of this higher extension of the bulkheads in calculating the floodable length, separate margin lines may be used for each such portion of the ship provided that:

(i) the sides of the ship are extended throughout the ships length to the deck corresponding to the upper margin line and all openings in the shell plating below this deck throughout the length of the ship are treated as being below a margin line, for the purposes of Regulation 14 of this Chapter; and

(ii) the two compartments adjacent to the step in the bulkhead deck are each within the permissible length corresponding to their respective margin lines, and, in addition, their combined length does not exceed twice the permissible length based on the lower margin line.

(b) (i) A compartment may exceed the permissible length determined by the rules of Regulation 5 of this Chapter provided the combined length of each pair of adjacent compartments to which the compartment in question is common does not exceed either the floodable length or twice the permissible length, whichever is the less.

(ii) If one of the two adjacent compartments is situated inside the machinery space, and the second is situated outside the machinery space, and the average permeability of the portion of the ship in which the second is situated differs from that of the machinery space, the combined length of the two compartments shall be adjusted to the mean average permeability of the two portions of the ship in which the compartments are situated.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

SCHEDULE 1—continued

(iii) Where the two adjacent compartments have different factors of subdivision, the combined length of the two compartments shall be determined proportionately.

(c) In ships 100 metres (330 feet) in length and upwards, one of the main transverse bulkheads abaft the forepeak shall be fitted at a distance from forward perpendicular which is not greater than the permissible length.

(d) A main transverse bulkhead may be recessed provided that all parts of the recess lie inboard of vertical surfaces on both sides of the ship, situated at a distance from the shell plating equal to one-fifth the breadth of the ship, as defined in Regulation 2 of this Chapter, and measured at right angles to the centre line at the level of the deepest subdivision load line.

Any part of a recess which lies outside these limits shall be dealt with as a step in accordance with paragraph (e) of this Regulation.

(e) A main transverse bulkhead may be stepped provided that it meets one of the following conditions:

(i) the combined length of the two compartments, separated by the bulkhead in question, does not exceed either 90 per cent of the floodable length or twice the permissible length, except that in ships having a factor of subdivision greater than .9, the combined length of the two compartments in question shall not exceed the permissible length;

(ii) additional subdivision is provided in way of the step to maintain the same measure of safety as that secured by a plane bulkhead;

(iii) the compartment over which the step extends does not exceed the permissible length corresponding to a margin line taken 76 millimetres (3 inches) below the step.

(f) Where a main transverse bulkhead is recessed or stepped, an equivalent plane bulkhead shall be used in determining the subdivision.

(g) If the distance between two adjacent main transverse bulkheads, or their equivalent plane bulkheads, or the distance between the transverse planes passing through the nearest stepped portions of the bulkheads, is less than 3.05 metres (10 feet) plus 3 per cent of the length of the ship, or 10.67 metres (35 feet) whichever is the less, only one of these bulkheads shall be regarded as forming part of the subdivision of the ship in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 5 of this Chapter.

(h) Where a main transverse watertight compartment contains local subdivision and it can be shown to the satisfaction of the Administration that, after any assumed side damage extending over a length of 3.05 metres (10 feet) plus 3 per cent of the length of the ship, or 10.67 metres (35 feet) whichever is the less, the whole volume of the main compartment will not be flooded, a proportionate allowance may be made in the permissible length otherwise required for such compartment. In such a case the volume of the effective buoyancy assumed on the undamaged side shall not be greater than that assumed on the damaged side.

(i) Where the required factor of subdivision is .50 or less, the combined length of any two adjacent compartments shall not exceed the floodable length.

Regulation 7

Stability of Ships in Damaged Condition

(a) Sufficient intact stability shall be provided in all service conditions so as to enable the ship to withstand the final stage of flooding of any one main compartment which is required to be within the floodable length.

Where two adjacent main compartments are separated by a bulkhead which is stepped under the conditions of sub-paragraph (e) (i) of Regulation 6 of this Chapter the intact stability shall be adequate to withstand the flooding of those two adjacent main compartments.

Where the required factor of subdivision is .50 or less but more than .33 intact stability shall be adequate to withstand the flooding of any two adjacent main compartments.

Where the required factor of subdivision is .33 or less the intact stability shall be adequate to withstand the flooding of any three adjacent main compartments.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(b) (i) The requirements of paragraph (a) of this Regulation shall be determined by calculations which are in accordance with paragraphs (c), (d) and (f) of this Regulation and which take into consideration the proportions and design characteristics of the ship and the arrangement and configuration of the damaged compartments. In making these calculations the ship is to be assumed in the worst anticipated service condition as regards stability.

(ii) Where it is proposed to fit decks, inner skins or longitudinal bulkheads of sufficient tightness to seriously restrict the flow of water, the Administration shall be satisfied that proper consideration is given to such restrictions in the calculations.

(iii) In cases where the Administration considers the range of stability in the damaged condition to be doubtful, it may require investigation thereof.

(c) For the purpose of making damage stability calculations the volume and surface permeabilities shall be in general as follows:

Spaces

Permeability

Appropriated to Cargo, Coal or Stores

60

Occupied by Accommodation

95

Occupied by Machinery

85

Intended for Liquids

0 or 95*

Higher surface permeabilities are to be assumed in respect of spaces which, in the vicinity of the damage waterplane, contain no substantial quantity of accommodation or machinery and spaces which are not generally occupied by any substantial quantity of cargo or stores.

(d) Assumed extent of damage shall be as follows:

(i) longitudinal extent: 3.05 metres (10 feet) plus 3 per cent of the length of the ship, or 10.67 metres (35 feet) whichever is the less. Where the required factor of subdivision is .33 or less the assumed longitudinal extent of damage shall be increased as necessary so as to include any two consecutive main transverse watertight bulkheads;

(ii) transverse extent (measured inboard from the ship’s side, at right angles to the centre line at the level of the deepest subdivision load line): a distance of one-fifth of the breadth of the ship, as defined in Regulation 2 of this Chapter; and

(iii) vertical extent: from the base line upwards without limit.

(iv) If any damage of lesser extent than that indicated in sub-paragraphs (i), (ii) and (iii) of this paragraph would result in a more severe condition regarding heel or loss of metacentric height, such damage shall be assumed in the calculations.

(e) Unsymmetrical flooding is to be kept to a minimum consistent with efficient arrangements. Where it is necessary to correct large angles of heel, the means adopted shall, where practicable, be self-acting, but in any case where controls to cross-flooding fittings are provided they shall be operable from above the bulkhead deck. These fittings together with their controls as well as the maximum heel before equalization shall be acceptable to the Administration. Where cross-flooding fittings are required the time for equalization shall not exceed 15 minutes. Suitable information concerning the use of cross-flooding fittings shall be supplied to the master of the ship.

* Whichever results in the more severe requirements.

Reference is made to the Recommendation on a Standard Method for Establishing Compliance with the Requirements for Cross-Flooding Arrangements in Passenger Ships, adopted by the Organization by Resolution A.266(VIII).


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(f) The final conditions of the ship after damage and, in the case of unsymmetrical flooding, after equalization measures have been taken shall be as follows:

(i) in the case of symmetrical flooding there shall be a positive residual metacentric height of at least 50 millimetres (2 inches) as calculated by the constant displacement method;

(ii) in the case of unsymmetrical flooding the total heel shall not exceed seven degrees, except that, in special cases, the Administration may allow additional heel due to the unsymmetrical moment, but in no case shall the final heel exceed fifteen degrees;

(iii) in no case shall the margin line be submerged in the final stage of flooding. If it is considered that the margin line may become submerged during an intermediate stage of flooding, the Administration may require such investigations and arrangements as it considers necessary for the safety of the ship.

(g) The master of the ship shall be supplied with the data necessary to maintain sufficient intact stability under service conditions to enable the ship to withstand the critical damage. In the case of ships requiring cross-flooding the master of the ship shall be informed of the conditions of stability on which the calculations of heel are based and be warned that excessive heeling might result should the ship sustain damage when in a less favourable condition.

(h) (i) No relaxation from the requirements for damage stability may be considered by the Administration unless it is shown that the intact metacentric height in any service condition necessary to meet these requirements is excessive for the service intended.

(ii) Relaxations from the requirements for damage stability shall be permitted only in exceptional cases and subject to the condition that the Administration is to be satisfied that the proportions, arrangements and other characteristics of the ship are the most favourable to stability after damage which can practically and reasonably be adopted in the particular circumstances.

Regulation 8

Ballasting

When ballasting with water is necessary, the water ballast should not in general be carried in tanks intended for oil fuel. In ships in which it is not practicable to avoid putting water in oil fuel tanks, oily-water separator equipment to the satisfaction of the Administration shall be fitted, or other alternative means acceptable to the Administration shall be provided for disposing of the oily-water ballast.

Regulation 9

Peak and Machinery Space Bulkheads, Shaft Tunnels, etc.

(a) (i) A ship shall have a forepeak or collision bulkhead, which shall be watertight up to the bulkhead deck. This bulkhead shall be fitted not less than 5 per cent of the length of the ship, and not more than 3.05 metres (10 feet) plus 5 per cent of the length of the ship from the forward perpendicular.

(ii) If the ship has a long forward superstructure, the forepeak bulkhead shall be extended weathertight to the deck next above the bulkhead deck. The extension need not be fitted directly over the bulkhead below, provided it is at least 5 per cent of the length of the ship from the forward perpendicular, and the part of the bulkhead deck which forms the step is made effectively weathertight.

(b) An afterpeak bulkhead, and bulkheads dividing the machinery space, as defined in Regulation 2 of this Chapter, from the cargo and passenger spaces forward and aft, shall also be fitted and made watertight up to the bulkhead deck. The afterpeak bulkhead may, however, be stepped below the bulkhead deck, provided the degree of safety of the ship as regards subdivision is not thereby diminished.

(c) In all cases stern tubes shall be enclosed in watertight spaces of moderate volume. The stern gland shall be situated in a watertight shaft tunnel or other watertight space separate from the stern tube compartment and of such volume that, if flooded by leakage through the stern gland, the margin line will not be submerged.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

Regulation 10

Double Bottoms

(a) A double bottom shall be fitted extending from the forepeak bulkhead to the afterpeak bulkhead as far as this is practicable and compatible with the design and proper working of the ship.

(i) In ships 50 metres (165 feet) and under 61 metres (200 feet) in length a double bottom shall be fitted at least from the machinery space to the forepeak bulkhead, or as near thereto as practicable.

(ii) In ships 61 metres (200 feet) and under 76 metres (249 feet) in length a double bottom shall be fitted at least outside the machinery space, and shall extend to the fore and after peak bulkheads, or as near thereto as practicable.

(iii) In ships 76 metres (249 feet) in length and upwards, a double bottom shall be fitted amidships, and shall extend to the fore and after peak bulkheads, or as near thereto as practicable.

(b) Where a double bottom is required to be fitted its depth shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration and the inner bottom shall be continued out to the ship’s sides in such a manner as to protect the bottom to the turn of the bilge. Such protection will be deemed satisfactory if the line of intersection of the outer edge of the margin plate with the bilge plating is not lower at any part than a horizontal plane passing through the point of intersection with the frame line amidships of a transverse diagonal line inclined at 25 degrees to the base line and cutting it at a point one-half the ship’s moulded breadth from the middle line.

(c) Small wells constructed in the double bottom in connexion with drainage arrangements of holds, etc., shall not extend downwards more than necessary. The depth of the well shall in no case be more than the depth less 457 millimetres (18 inches) of the double bottom at the centreline, nor shall the well extend below the horizontal plane referred to in paragraph (b) of this Regulation. A well extending to the outer bottom is, however, permitted at the after end of the shaft tunnel of screw-ships. Other wells (e.g., for lubricating oil under main engines) may be permitted by the Administration if satisfied that the arrangements give protection equivalent to that afforded by a double bottom complying with this Regulation.

(d) A double bottom need not be fitted in way of watertight compartments of moderate size used exclusively for the carriage of liquids, provided the safety of the ship, in the event of bottom or side damage, is not, in the opinion of the Administration, thereby impaired.

(e) In the case of ships to which the provisions of paragraph (d) of Regulation 1 of this Chapter apply and which are engaged on regular service within the limits of a short international voyage as defined in Regulation 2 of Chapter III, the Administration may permit a double bottom to be dispensed with in any part of the ship which is subdivided by a factor not exceeding .50, if satisfied that the fitting of a double bottom in that part would not be compatible with the design and proper working of the ship.

Regulation 11

Assigning, Marking and Recording of Subdivision Load Lines

(a) In order that the required degree of subdivision shall be maintained, a load line corresponding to the approved subdivision draught shall be assigned and marked on the ship’s sides. A ship having spaces which are specially adapted for the accommodation of passengers and the carriage of cargo alternatively may, if the owners desire, have one or more additional load lines assigned and marked to correspond with the subdivision draughts which the Administration may approve for the alternative service conditions.

(b) The subdivision load lines assigned and marked shall be recorded in the Passenger Ship Safety Certificate, and shall be distinguished by the notation C.1 for the principal passenger condition, and C.2, C.3, etc., for the alternative conditions.

(c) The freeboard corresponding to each of these load lines shall be measured at the same position and from the same deck line as the freeboards determined in accordance with the International Convention respecting Load Lines in force.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(d) The freeboard corresponding to each approved subdivision load line and the conditions of service for which it is approved, shall be clearly indicated on the Passenger Ship Safety Certificate.

(e) In no case shall any subdivision load line mark be placed above the deepest load line in salt water as determined by the strength of the ship and/or the International Convention respecting Load Lines in force.

(f) Whatever may be the position of the subdivision load line marks, a ship shall in no case be loaded so as to submerge the load line mark appropriate to the season and locality as determined in accordance with the International Convention respecting Load Lines in force.

(g) A ship shall in no case be so loaded that when she is in salt water the subdivision load line mark appropriate to the particular voyage and condition of service is submerged.

Regulation 12

Construction and Initial Testing of Watertight Bulkheads, etc.

(a) Each watertight subdivision bulkhead, whether transverse or longitudinal, shall be constructed in such a manner that it shall be capable of supporting, with a proper margin of resistance, the pressure due to the maximum head of water which it might have to sustain in the event of damage to the ship but at least the pressure due to a head of water up to the margin line. The construction of these bulkheads shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(b) (i) Steps and recesses in bulkheads shall be watertight and as strong as the bulkhead at the place where each occurs.

(ii) Where frames or beams pass through a watertight deck or bulkhead, such deck or bulkhead shall be made structurally watertight without the use of wood or cement.

(c) Testing main compartments by filling them with water is not compulsory. When testing by filling with water is not carried out, a hose test is compulsory; this test shall be carried out in the most advanced stage of the fitting out of the ship. In any case, a thorough inspection of the watertight bulkheads shall be carried out.

(d) The forepeak, double bottoms (including duct keels) and inner skins shall be tested with water to a head corresponding to the requirements of paragraph (a) of this Regulation.

(e) Tanks which are intended to hold liquids, and which form part of the subdivision of the ship, shall be tested for tightness with water to a head up to the deepest subdivision load line or to a head corresponding to two-thirds of the depth from the top of keel to the margin line in way of the tanks, whichever is the greater; provided that in no case shall the test head be less than 0.92 metres (3 feet) above the top of the tank.

(f) The tests referred to in paragraphs (d) and (e) of this Regulation are for the purpose of ensuring that the subdivision structural arrangements are watertight and are not to be regarded as a test of the fitness of any compartment for the storage of oil fuel or for other special purposes for which a test of a superior character may be required depending on the height to which the liquid has access in the tank or its connexions.

Regulation 13

Openings in Watertight Bulkheads

(a) The number of openings in watertight bulkheads shall be reduced to the minimum compatible with the design and proper working of the ship; satisfactory means shall be provided for closing these openings.

(b) (i) Where pipes, scuppers, electric cables, etc. are carried through watertight subdivision bulkheads, arrangements shall be made to ensure the integrity of the watertightness of the bulkheads.

(ii) Valves and cocks not forming part of a piping system shall not be permitted in watertight subdivision bulkheads.

(iii) Lead or other heat sensitive materials shall not be used in systems which penetrate watertight subdivision bulkheads, where deterioration of such systems in the event of fire would impair the watertight integrity of the bulkheads.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(c) (i) No doors, manholes, or access openings are permitted:

(1) in the collision bulkhead below the margin line;

(2) in watertight tranverse bulkheads dividing a cargo space from an adjoining cargo space or from a permanent or reserve bunker, except as provided in paragraph (1) of this Regulation.

(ii) Except as provided in sub-paragraph (iii) of this paragraph, the collision bulkhead may be pierced below the margin line by not more than one pipe for dealing with fluid in the forepeak tank, provided that the pipe is fitted with a screwdown valve capable of being operated from above the bulkhead deck, the valve chest being secured inside the forepeak to the collision bulkhead.

(iii) If the forepeak is divided to hold two different kinds of liquids the Administration may allow the collision bulkhead to be pierced below the margin line by two pipes, each of which is fitted as required by sub-paragraph (ii) of this paragraph, provided the Administration is satisfied that there is no practical alternative to the fitting of such a second pipe and that, having regard to the additional subdivision provided in the forepeak, the safety of the ship is maintained.

(d) (i) Watertight doors fitted in bulkheads between permanent and reserve bunkers shall be always accessible, except as provided in sub-paragraph (ii) of paragraph (k) of this Regulation for between deck bunker doors.

(ii) Satisfactory arrangements shall be made by means of screens or otherwise to prevent the coal from interfering with the closing of watertight bunker doors.

(e) Within spaces containing the main and auxiliary propelling machinery including boilers serving the needs of propulsion and all permanent bunkers, not more than one door apart from the doors to bunkers and shaft tunnels may be fitted in each main transverse bulkhead. Where two or more shafts are fitted the tunnels shall be connected by an intercommunicating passage. There shall be only one door between the machinery space and the tunnel spaces where two shafts are fitted and only two doors where there are more than two shafts. All these doors shall be of the sliding type and shall be located so as to have their sills as high as practicable. The hand gear for operating these doors from above the bulkhead deck shall be situated outside the spaces containing the machinery if this is consistent with a satisfactory arrangement of the necessary gearing.

(f) (i) Watertight doors shall be sliding doors or hinged doors or doors of an equivalent type. Plate doors secured only by bolts and doors required to be closed by dropping or by the action of a dropping weight are not permitted.

(ii) Sliding doors may be either:

hand-operated only, or

power-operated as well as hand-operated.

(iii) Authorized watertight doors may therefore be divided into three Classes:

Class 1—hinged doors;

Class 2—hand-operated sliding doors;

Class 3—sliding doors which are power-operated as well as hand-operated.

(iv) The means of operation of any watertight door whether power-operated or not shall be capable of closing the door with the ship listed to 15 degrees either way.

(v) In all classes of watertight doors indicators shall be fitted which show, at all operating stations from which the doors are not visible, whether the doors are open or closed. If any of the watertight doors, of whatever Class, is not fitted so as to enable it to be closed from a central control station, it shall be provided with a mechanical, electrical, telephonic, or any other suitable direct means of communication, enabling the officer of the watch promptly to contact the person who is responsible for closing the door in question, under previous orders.

(g) Hinged doors (Class 1) shall be fitted with quick action closing devices, such as catches, workable from each side of the bulkhead.

(h) Hand-operated sliding doors (Class 2) may have a horizontal or vertical motion. It shall be possible to operate the mechanism at the door itself from either side, and in addition, from an accessible position above the bulkhead deck, with an all round crank motion, or


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

some other movement providing the same guarantee of safety and of an approved type. Departures from the requirement of operation on both sides may be allowed, if this requirement is impossible owing to the layout of the spaces. When operating a hand gear the time necessary for the complete closure of the door with the vessel upright, shall not exceed 90 seconds.

(i) (i) Power-operated sliding doors (Class 3) may have a vertical or horizontal motion. If a door is required to be power-operated from a central control, the gearing shall be so arranged that the door can be operated by power also at the door itself from both sides. The arrangement shall be such that the door will close automatically if opened by local control after being closed from the central control, and also such that any door can be kept closed by local systems which will prevent the door from being opened from the upper control. Local control handles in connexion with the power gear shall be provided each side of the bulkhead and shall be so arranged as to enable persons passing through the doorway to hold both handles in the open position without being able to set the closing mechanism in operation accidentally. Power-operated sliding doors shall be provided with hand gear workable at the door itself on either side and from an accessible position above the bulkhead deck, with an all round crank motion or some other movement providing the same guarantee of safety and of an approved type. Provision shall be made to give warnings by sound signal that the door has begun to close and will continue to move until it is completely closed. The door shall take a sufficient time to close to ensure safety.

(ii) There shall be at least two independent power sources capable of opening and closing all the doors under control, each of them capable of operating all the doors simultaneously. The two power sources shall be controlled from the central station on the bridge provided with all the necessary indicators for checking that each of the two power sources is capable of giving the required service satisfactorily.

(iii) In the case of hydraulic operation, each power source shall consist of a pump capable of closing all doors in not more than 60 seconds. In addition, there shall be for the whole installation hydraulic accumulators of sufficient capacity to operate all the doors at least three times, i.e., closed-open-closed. The fluid used shall be one which does not freeze at any of the temperatures liable to be encountered by the ship during its service.

(j) (i) Hinged watertight doors (Class 1) in passenger, crew and working spaces are only permitted above a deck the underside of which, at its lowest point at side, is at least 2.13 metres (7 feet) above the deepest subdivision load line.

(ii) Watertight doors, the sills of which are above the deepest load line and below the line specified in the preceding sub-paragraph shall be sliding doors and may be hand-operated (Class 2), except in vessels engaged on short international voyages and required to have a factor of subdivision of .50 or less in which all such doors shall be power-operated. When trunkways in connexion with refrigerated cargo and ventilation or forced draught ducts are carried through more than one main watertight subdivision bulkhead, the doors at such openings shall be operated by power.

(k) (i) Watertight doors which may sometimes be opened at sea, and the sills of which are below the deepest subdivision load line shall be sliding doors. The following rules shall apply:

(1) when the number of such doors (excluding doors at entrances to shaft tunnels) exceeds five, all of these doors and those at the entrance to shaft tunnels or ventilation or forced draught ducts, shall be powered-operated (Class 3) and shall be capable of being simultaneously closed from a central station situated on the bridge;


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(2) when the number of such doors (excluding doors at entrances to shaft tunnels) is greater than one, but does not exceed five,

(a) where the ship has no passenger spaces below the bulkhead deck, all the above-mentioned doors may be hand-operated (Class 2);

(b) where the ship has passenger spaces below the bulkhead deck all the above-mentioned doors shall be power-operated (Class 3) and shall be capable of being simultaneously closed from a central station situated on the bridge;

(3) in any ship where there are only two such watertight doors and they are into or within the space containing machinery, the Administration may allow these two doors to be hand-operated only (Class 2).

(ii) If sliding watertight doors which have sometimes to be open at sea for the purpose of trimming coal are fitted between bunkers in the between decks below the bulkhead deck, these doors shall be operated by power. The opening and closing of these doors shall be recorded in such log book as may be prescribed by the Administration.

(l) (i) If the Administration is satisfied that such doors are essential, watertight doors of satisfactory construction may be fitted in watertight bulkheads dividing cargo between deck spaces. Such doors may be hinged, rolling or sliding doors but shall not be remotely controlled. They shall be fitted at the highest level and as far from the shell plating as practicable, but in no case shall the outboard vertical edges be situated at a distance from the shell plating which is less than one-fifth of the breadth of the ship, as defined in Regulation 2 of this Chapter, such distance being measured at right angles to the centre line of the ship at the level of the deepest subdivision load line.

(ii) Such doors shall be closed before the voyage commences and shall be kept closed during navigation; and the time of opening such doors in port and of closing them before the ship leaves port shall be entered in the log book. Should any of the doors be accessible during the voyage, they shall be fitted with a device which prevents unauthorized opening. When it is proposed to fit such doors, the number and arrangements shall receive the special consideration of the Administration.

(m) Portable plates on bulkheads shall not be permitted except in machinery spaces. Such plates shall always be in place before the ship leaves port, and shall not be removed during navigation except in case of urgent necessity. The necessary precautions shall be taken in replacing them to ensure that the joints shall be watertight.

(n) All watertight doors shall be kept closed during navigation except when necessarily opened for the working of the ship, and shall always be ready to be immediately closed.

(o) (i) Where trunkways or tunnels for access from crew accommodation to the stokehold, for piping, or for any other purpose are carried through main transverse watertight bulkheads, they shall be watertight and in accordance with the requirements of Regulation 16 of this Chapter. The access to at least one end of each such tunnel or trunkway, if used as a passage at sea, shall be through a trunk extending watertight to a height sufficient to permit access above the margin line. The access to the other end of the trunkway or tunnel may be through a watertight door of the type required by its location in the ship. Such trunkways or tunnels shall not extend through the first subdivision bulkhead abaft the collision bulkhead.

(ii) Where it is proposed to fit tunnels or trunkways for forced draught, piercing main transverse watertight bulkheads, these shall receive the special consideration of the Administration.

Regulation 14

Openings in the Shell Plating below the Margin Line

(a) The number of openings in the shell plating shall be reduced to the minimum compatible with the design and proper working of the ship.

(b) The arrangement and efficiency of the means for closing any opening in the shell plating shall be consistent with its intended purpose and the position in which it is fitted and generally to the satisfaction of the Administration.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(c) (i) If in a between decks, the sills of any sidescuttles are below a line drawn parallel to the bulkhead deck at side and having its lowest point 2½ per cent of the breadth of the ship above the deepest subdivision load line, all sidescuttles in that between deck shall be of the non-opening type.

(ii) All sidescuttles the sills of which are below the margin line, other than those required to be of a non-opening type by sub-paragraph (i) of this paragraph, shall be of such construction as will effectively prevent any person opening them without the consent of the master of the ship.

(iii) (1) Where in a between decks, the sills of any of the sidescuttles referred to in sub-paragraph (ii) of this paragraph are below a line drawn parallel to the bulkhead deck at side and having its lowest point 1.37 metres (4½ feet) plus 2½ per cent of the breadth of the ship above the water when the ship departs from any port, all the sidescuttles in that between decks shall be closed watertight and locked before the ship leaves port, and they shall not be opened before the ship arrives at the next port. In the application of this sub-paragraph the appropriate allowance for fresh water may be made when applicable.

(2) The time of opening such sidescuttles in port and of closing and locking them before the ship leaves port shall be entered in such log book as may be prescribed by the Administration.

(3) For any ship that has one or more sidescuttles so placed that the requirements of clause (1) of this sub-paragraph would apply when she was floating at her deepest subdivision load line, the Administration may indicate the limiting mean draught at which these sidescuttles will have their sills above the line drawn parallel to the bulkhead deck at side, and having its lowest point 1.37 metres (4½ feet) plus 2½ per cent of the breadth of the ship above the water-line corresponding to the limiting mean draught, and at which it will therefore be permissible to depart from port without previously closing and locking them and to open them at sea on the responsibility of the master during the voyage to the next port. In tropical zones as defined in the International Convention respecting Load Lines in force, this limiting draught may be increased by 0.305 metres (1 foot).
 

(d) Efficient hinged inside deadlights arranged so that they can be easily and effectively closed and secured watertight shall be fitted to all sidescuttles except that abaft one-eighth of the ship’s length from the forward perpendicular and above a line drawn parallel to the bulkhead deck at side and having its lowest point at a height of 3.66 metres (12 feet) plus 2½ per cent of the breadth of the ship above the deepest subdivision load line, the deadlights may be portable in passenger accommodation other than that for steerage passengers, unless the deadlights are required by the International Convention respecting Load Lines in force to be permanently attached in their proper positions. Such portable deadlights shall be stowed adjacent to the sidescuttles they serve.

(e) Sidescuttles and their deadlights, which will not be accessible during navigation, shall be closed and secured before the ship leaves port.

(f) (i) No sidescuttles shall be fitted in any spaces which are appropriated exclusively to the carriage of cargo or coal.

(ii) Sidescuttles may, however, be fitted in spaces appropriated alternatively to the carriage of cargo or passengers, but they shall be of such construction as will effectively prevent any person opening them or their deadlights without the consent of the master of the ship.

(iii) If cargo is carried in such spaces, the sidescuttles and their deadlights shall be closed watertight and locked before the cargo is shipped and such closing and locking shall be recorded in such log book as may be prescribed by the Administration.

 

(g) Automatic ventilating sidescuttles shall not be fitted in the shell plating below the margin line without the special sanction of the Administration.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(h) The number of scuppers, sanitary discharges and other similar openings in the shell plating shall be reduced to the minimum either by making each discharge serve for as many as possible of the sanitary and other pipes, or in any other satisfactory manner.

(i) (i) All inlets and discharges in the shell plating shall be fitted with efficient and accessible arrangements for preventing the accidental admission of water into the ship. Lead or other heat sensitive materials shall not be used for pipes fitted outboard of shell valves in inlets or discharges, or any other application where the deterioration of such pipes in the event of fire would give rise to danger of flooding.

(ii) (1) Except as provided in sub-paragraph (iii) of this paragraph, each separate discharge led through the shell plating from spaces below the margin line shall be provided either with one automatic non-return valve fitted with a positive means of closing it from above the bulkhead deck, or, alternatively, with two automatic non-return valves without such means, the upper of which is so situated above the deepest subdivision load line as to be always accessible for examination under service conditions, and is of a type which is normally closed.

(2) Where a valve with positive means of closing is fitted, the operating position above the bulkhead deck shall always be readily accessible, and means shall be provided for indicating whether the valve is open or closed.

(iii) Main and auxiliary sea inlets and discharges in connexion with machinery shall be fitted with readily accessible cocks or valves between the pipes and shell plating or between the pipes and fabricated boxes attached to the shell plating.

(j) (i) Gangway, cargo and coaling ports fitted below the margin line shall be of sufficient strength. They shall be effectively closed and secured watertight before the ship leaves port, and shall be kept closed during navigation.

(ii) Such ports shall be in no case fitted so as to have their lowest point below the deepest subdivision load line.

(k) (i) The inboard opening of each ash-shoot, rubbish-shoot, etc., shall be fitted with an efficient cover.

(ii) If the inboard opening is situated below the margin line, the cover shall be watertight, and in addition an automatic non-return valve shall be fitted in the shoot in an easily accessible position above the deepest subdivision load line. When the shoot is not in use both the cover and the valve shall be kept closed and secured.

Regulation 15

Construction and Initial Tests of Watertight Doors, Sidescuttles, etc.

(a) (i) The design, materials and construction of all watertight doors, sidescuttles, gangway, cargo and coaling ports, valves, pipes, ash-shoots and rubbish-shoots referred to in these Regulations shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(ii) The frames of vertical watertight doors shall have no groove at the bottom in which dirt might lodge and prevent the door closing properly.

(iii) All cocks and valves for sea inlets and discharges below the bulkhead deck and all fittings outboard of such cocks and valves shall be made of steel, bronze or other approved ductile material. Ordinary cast iron or similar materials shall not be used.

(b) Each watertight door shall be tested by water pressure to a head up to the bulkhead deck. The test shall be made before the ship is put in service, either before or after the door is fitted.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued
 

Regulation 16

Construction and Initial Tests of Watertight Decks, Trunks, etc.

(a) Watertight decks, trunks, tunnels, duct keels and ventilators shall be of the same strength as watertight bulkheads at corresponding levels. The means used for making them watertight, and the arrangements adopted for closing openings in them, shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration. Watertight ventilators and trunks shall be carried at least up to the bulkhead deck.

(b) After completion, a hose or flooding test shall be applied to watertight decks and a hose test to watertight trunks, tunnels and ventilators.
 

Regulation 17

Watertight Integrity above the Margin Line

(a) The Administration may require that all reasonable and practicable measures shall be taken to limit the entry and spread of water above the bulkhead deck. Such measures may include partial bulkheads or webs. When partial watertight bulkheads and webs are fitted on the bulkhead deck, above or in the immediate vicinity of main subdivision bulkheads, they shall have watertight shell and bulkhead deck connexions so as to restrict the flow of water along the deck when the ship is in a heeled damaged condition. Where the partial watertight bulkhead does not line up with the bulkhead below, the bulkhead deck between shall be made effectively watertight.

(b) The bulkhead deck or a deck above it shall be weathertight in the sense that in ordinary sea conditions water will not penetrate in a downward direction. All openings in the exposed weather deck shall have coamings of ample height and strength and shall be provided with efficient means for expeditiously closing them weathertight. Freeing ports, open rails and/or scuppers shall be fitted as necessary for rapidly clearing the weather deck of water under all weather conditions.

(c) Sidescuttles, gangway, cargo and coaling ports and other means for closing openings in the shell plating above the margin line shall be of efficient design and construction and of sufficient strength having regard to the spaces in which they are fitted and their positions relative to the deepest subdivision load line.

(d) Efficient inside deadlights, arranged so that they can be easily and effectively closed and secured watertight, shall be provided for all sidescuttles to spaces below the first deck above the bulkhead deck.
 

Regulation 18

Bilge Pumping Arrangements in Passenger Ships

(a) Ships shall be provided with an efficient bilge pumping plant capable of pumping from and draining any watertight compartment which is neither a permanent oil compartment nor a permanent water compartment under all practicable conditions after a casualty whether the ship is upright or listed. For this purpose wing suctions will generally be necessary except in narrow compartments at the ends of the ship, where one suction may be sufficient. In compartments of unusual form, additional suctions may be required. Arrangements shall be made whereby water in the compartment may find its way to the suction pipes. Where in relation to particular compartments the Administration is satisfied that the provision of drainage may be undesirable, it may allow such provision to be dispensed with if calculations made in accordance with the conditions laid down in paragraph (b) of Regulation 7 of this Chapter show that the safety of the ship will not be impaired. Efficient means shall be provided for draining water from insulated holds.
 

(b) (i) Ships shall have at least three power pumps connected to the bilge main, one of which may be attached to the propelling unit. Where the criterion numeral is 30 or more, one additional independent power pump shall be provided.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(ii) The requirements are summarized in the following table:

Criterion numeral

Less than 30

30 and over

Main engine pump (may be replaced by one independent pump)

1

1

Independent pumps.............................

2

3

(iii) Sanitary, ballast and general service pumps may be accepted as independent power bilge pumps if fitted with the necessary connexions to the bilge pumping system.

(c) Where practicable, the power bilge pumps shall be placed in separate watertight compartments so arranged or situated that these compartments will not readily be flooded by the same damage. If the engines and boilers are in two or more watertight compartments, the pumps available for bilge service shall be distributed throughout these compartments as far as is possible.

(d) On ships 91.5 metres (300 feet) or more in length or having a criterion numeral of 30 or more, the arrangements shall be such that at least one power pump shall be available for use in all ordinary circumstances in which a ship may be flooded at sea. This requirement will be satisfied if:

(i) one of the required pumps is an emergency pump of a reliable submersible type having a source of power situated above the bulkhead deck; or

(ii) the pumps and their sources of power are so disposed throughout the length of the ship that under any condition of flooding which the ship is required to withstand, at least one pump in an undamaged compartment will be available.

(e) With the exception of additional pumps which may be provided for peak compartments only, each required bilge pump shall be arranged to draw water from any space required to be drained by paragraph (a) of this Regulation.

(f) (i) Each power bilge pump shall be capable of giving a speed of water through the required main bilge pipe of not less than 122 metres (400 feet) per minute. Independent power bilge pumps situated in machinery spaces shall have direct suctions from these spaces, except that not more than two such suctions shall be required in any one space. Where two or more such suctions are provided there shall be at least one on the port side and one on the starboard side. The Administration may require independent power bilge pumps situated in other spaces to have separate direct suctions. Direct suctions shall be suitably arranged and those in a machinery space shall be of a diameter not less than that required for the bilge main.

(ii) In coal-burning ships there shall be provided in the stokehold, in addition to the other suctions required by this Regulation, a flexible suction hose of suitable diameter and sufficient length, capable of being connected to the suction side of an independent power pump.

(g) (i) In addition to the direct bilge suction or suctions required by paragraph (f) of this Regulation there shall be in the machinery space a direct suction from the main circulating pump leading to the drainage level of the machinery space and fitted with a non-return valve. The diameter of this direct suction pipe shall be at least two-thirds of the diameter of the pump inlet in the case of steamships, and of the same diameter as the pump inlet in the case of motorships.

(ii) Where in the opinion of the Administration the main circulating pump is not suitable for this purpose, a direct emergency bilge suction shall be led from the largest available independent power driven pump to the drainage level of the machinery space; the suction shall be of the same diameter as the main inlet of the pump used. The capacity of the pump so connected shall exceed that of a required bilge pump by an amount satisfactory to the Administration.

(iii) The spindles of the sea inlet and direct suction valves shall extend well above the engine room platform.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(iv) Where the fuel is, or may be, coal and there is no watertight bulkhead between the engines and the boilers, a direct discharge overboard or alternatively a by-pass to the circulating pump discharge, shall be fitted from any circulating pump used in compliance with sub-paragraph (i) of this paragraph.

(h) (i) All pipes from the pumps which are required for draining cargo or machinery spaces shall be entirely distinct from pipes which may be used for filling or emptying spaces where water or oil is carried.

(ii) All bilge pipes used in or under coal bunkers or fuel storage tanks or in boiler or machinery spaces, including spaces in which oil-settling tanks or oil fuel pumping units are situated, shall be of steel or other approved material.

(i) The diameter of the bilge main shall be calculated according to the following formulae provided that the actual internal diameter of the bilge main may be of the nearest standard size acceptable to the Administration:

i

where: d = internal diameter of the bilge main in millimetres,

L and B are the length and the breadth of the ship in metres, as defined in Regulation 2 of this Chapter, and

D = moulded depth of the ship to bulkhead deck in metres;

or

where: d = internal diameter of the bilge main in inches,

L and B are the length and the breadth of the ship in feet, as defined in Regulation 2 of this Chapter, and

D = moulded depth of the ship to bulkhead deck in feet.

The diameter of the bilge branch pipes shall be determined by rules to be made by the Administration.

(j) The arrangement of the bilge and ballast pumping system shall be such as to prevent the possibility of water passing from the sea and from water ballast spaces into the cargo and machinery spaces, or from one compartment to another. Special provision shall be made to prevent any deep tank having bilge and ballast connexions being inadvertently run up from the sea when containing cargo, or pumped out through a bilge pipe when containing water ballast.

(k) Provision shall be made to prevent the compartment served by any bilge suction pipe being flooded in the event of the pipe being severed, or otherwise damaged by collision or grounding in any other compartment. For this purpose, where the pipe is at any part situated nearer the side of the ship than one-fifth the breadth of the ship (measured at right angles to the centre line at the level of the deepest subdivision load line), or in a duct keel, a non-return valve shall be fitted to the pipe in the compartment containing the open end.

(l) All the distribution boxes, cocks and valves in connexion with the bilge pumping arrangements shall be in positions which are accessible at all times under ordinary circumstances. They shall be so arranged that, in the event of flooding, one of the bilge pumps may be operative on any compartment; in addition, damage to a pump or its pipe connecting to the bilge main outboard of a line drawn at one-fifth of the breadth of the ship shall not put the bilge system out of action. If there is only one system of pipes common to all the pumps, the necessary cocks or valves for controlling the bilge suctions must be capable of being operated from above the bulkhead deck. Where in addition to the main bilge pumping system an emergency bilge pumping system is provided, it shall be independent of the main system and so arranged that a pump is capable of operating on any compartment under flooding conditions; in that case only the cocks and valves necessary for the operation of the emergency system need be capable of being operated from above the bulkhead deck.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(m) All cocks and valves mentioned in paragraph (1) of this Regulation which can be operated from above the bulkhead deck shall have their controls at their place of operation clearly marked and provided with means to indicate whether they are open or closed.
 

Regulation 19

Stability Information for Passenger Ships and Cargo Ships*

(a) Every passenger ship and cargo ship shall be inclined upon its completion and the elements of its stability determined. The master shall be supplied with such reliable information as is necessary to enable him by rapid and simple processes to obtain accurate guidance as to the stability of the ship under varying conditions of service, and a copy shall be furnished to the Administration.

(b) Where any alterations are made to a ship so as to materially affect the stability information supplied to the master, amended stability information shall be provided. If necessary the ship shall be re-inclined.

(c) The Administration may allow the inclining test of an individual ship to be dispensed with provided basic stability data are available from the inclining test of a sister ship and it is shown to the satisfaction of the Administration that reliable stability information for the exempted ship can be obtained from such basic data.

(d) The Administration may also allow the inclining test of an individual ship or class of ships, especially designed for the carriage of liquids or ore in bulk, to be dispensed with when reference to existing data for similar ships clearly indicates that due to the ship’s proportions and arrangements more than sufficient metacentric height will be available in all probable loading conditions.

Regulation 20

Damage Control Plans

There shall be permanently exhibited, for the guidance of the officer in charge of the ship, plans showing clearly for each deck and hold the boundaries of the watertight compartments, the openings therein with the means of closure and position of any controls thereof, and the arrangements for the correction of any list due to flooding. In addition, booklets containing the aforementioned information shall be made available to the officers of the ship.

Regulation 21

Marking, Periodical Operation and Inspection of Watertight Doors, etc.

(a) This Regulation applies to new and existing ships.

(b) Drills for the operating of watertight doors, sidescuttles, valves and closing mechanisms of scuppers, ash-shoots and rubbish-shoots shall take place weekly. In ships in which the voyage exceeds one week in duration a complete drill shall be held before leaving port, and others thereafter at least once a week during the voyage. In all ships all watertight power doors and hinged doors, in main transverse bulkheads, in use at sea, shall be operated daily.

(c) (i) The watertight doors and all mechanisms and indicators connected therewith, all valves the closing of which is necessary to make a compartment watertight, and all valves the operation of which is necessary for damage control cross connexions shall be periodically inspected at sea at least once a week.

(ii) Such valves, doors and mechanisms shall be suitably marked to ensure that they may be properly used to provide maximum safety.

* Reference is made to the Recommendation on Intact Stability for Passenger and Cargo Ships under 100 metres in length, adopted by the Organization by Resolution A.167 (ES.IV) and Amendments to this Recommendation, adopted by the Organization by Resolution A.206 (VII).


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

Regulation 22

Entries in Log

(a) This Regulation applies to new and existing ships.

(b) Hinged doors, portable plates, sidescuttles, gangway, cargo and coaling ports and other openings, which are required by these Regulations to be kept closed during navigation, shall be closed before the ship leaves port. The time of closing and the time of opening (if permissible under these Regulations) shall be recorded in such log book as may be prescribed by the Administration.

(c) A record of all drills and inspections required by Regulation 21 of this Chapter shall be entered in the log book with an explicit record of any defects which may be disclosed.

PART C—MACHINERY AND ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS*

(Part C applies to passenger ships and cargo ships)
 

Regulation 23

General

(a) Electrical installations in passenger ships shall be such that:

(i) services essential for safety will be maintained under various emergency conditions; and

(ii) the safety of passengers, crew and ship from electrical hazards will be assured.

(b) Cargo ships shall comply with Regulations 26, 27, 28, 29, 30 and 32 of this Chapter.
 

Regulation 24

Main Source of Electrical Power in Passenger Ships

(a) Every passenger ship, the electrical power of which constitutes the only means of maintaining the auxiliary services indispensable for the propulsion and the safety of the ship, shall be provided with at least two main generating sets. The power of these sets shall be such that it shall still be possible to ensure the functioning of the services referred to in sub-paragraph (a) (i) of Regulation 23 of this Chapter in the event of any one of these generating sets being stopped.

(b) In a passenger ship where there is only one main generating station, the main switchboard shall be located in the same main fire zone. Where there is more than one main generating station, it is permissible to have only one main switchboard.
 

Regulation 25

Emergency Source of Electrical Power in Passenger Ships

(a) There shall be above the bulkhead deck and outside the machinery casings a self-contained emergency source of electrical power. Its location in relation to the main source or sources of electrical power shall be such as to ensure to the satisfaction of the Administration that a fire or other casualty to the machinery space as defined in paragraph (h) of Regulation 2 of this Chapter will not interfere with the supply or distribution of emergency power. It shall not be forward of the collision bulkhead.

(b) The power available shall be sufficient to supply all those services that are, in the opinion of the Administration, necessary for the safety of the passengers and the crew in an emergency, due regard being paid to such services as may have to be operated simultaneously. Special consideration shall be given to emergency lighting at every boat station on deck and oversides, in all alleyways, stairways and exits, in the machinery spaces and in the control stations as defined in paragraph (r) of Regulation 3 of Chapter II—2, to the sprinkler pump, to navigation lights, and to the daylight signalling lamp if

* Reference is made to the Recommendation on Safety Measures for Periodically Unattended Machinery Spaces of Cargo Ships additional to those normally considered necessary for an Attended Machinery Space, adopted by the Organization by Resolution A.211 (VII).


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

operated from the main source of power. The power shall be adequate for a period of 36 hours, except that, in the case of ships engaged regularly on voyages of short duration, the Administration may accept a lesser supply if satisfied that the same standard of safety would be attained.

(c) The emergency source of power may be either:

(i) a generator driven by a suitable prime-mover with an independent fuel supply and with approved starting arrangements; the fuel used shall have a flashpoint of not less than 43°C (110°F); or

(ii) an accumulator (storage) battery capable of carrying the emergency load without recharging or excessive voltage drop.

(d) (i) Where the emergency source of power is a generator there shall be provided a temporary source of emergency power consisting of an accumulator battery of sufficient capacity:

(1) to supply emergency lighting continuously for half an hour;

(2) to close the watertight doors (if electrically operated) but not necessarily to close them all simultaneously;

(3) to operate the indicators (if electrically operated) which show whether power-operated watertight doors are open or closed; and

(4) to operate the sound signals (if electrically operated) which give warning that power-operated watertight doors are about to close.

The arrangements shall be such that the temporary source of emergency power will come into operation automatically in the event of failure of the main electrical supply.

(ii) Where the emergency source of power is an accumulator battery, arrangements shall be made to ensure that emergency lighting will automatically come into operation in the event of failure of the main lighting supply.

(e) An indicator shall be mounted in the machinery space, preferably on the main switchboard, to indicate when any accumulator battery fitted in accordance with this Regulation is being discharged.

(f) (i) The emergency switchboard shall be installed as near as is practicable to the emergency source of power.

(ii) Where the emergency source of power is a generator, the emergency switchboard shall be located in the same space as the emergency source of power, unless the operation of the emergency switchboard would thereby be impaired.

(iii) No accumulator battery fitted in accordance with this Regulation shall be installed in the same space as the emergency switchboard.

(iv) The Administration may permit the emergency switchboard to be supplied from the main switchboard in normal operation.

(g) Arrangements shall be such that the complete emergency installation will function when the ship is inclined 22½ degrees and/or when the trim of the ship is 10 degrees.

(h) Provision shall be made for the periodic testing of the emergency source of power and the temporary source of power, if provided, which shall include the testing of automatic arrangements.

Regulation 26

Emergency Source of Electrical Power in Cargo Ships

(a) Cargo ships of 5,000 Tons Gross Tonnage and upwards

(i) In cargo ships of 5,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards there shall be a self-contained emergency source of power, located to the satisfaction of the Administration above the uppermost continuous deck and outside the machinery casings, to ensure its functioning in the event of fire or other casualty causing failure to the main electrical installation.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(ii) The power available shall be sufficient to supply all those services which are, in the opinion of the Administration, necessary for the safety of all on board in an emergency, due regard being paid to such services as may have to be operated simultaneously. Special consideration shall be given to:

(1) emergency lighting at every boat station on deck and oversides, in all alleyways, stairways and exits, in the main machinery space and main generating set space, on the navigating bridge and in the chartroom;

(2) the general alarm; and

(3) navigation lights if solely electric, and the daylight signalling lamp if operated by the main source of electrical power.

The power shall be adequate for a period of 6 hours.

(iii) The emergency source of power may be either:

(1) an accumulator (storage) battery capable of carrying the emergency load without recharging or excessive voltage drop; or

(2) a generator driven by a suitable prime-mover with an independent fuel supply and with starting arrangements to the satisfaction of the Administration. The fuel used shall have a flashpoint of not less than 43°C (110°F).

(iv) Arrangements shall be such that the complete emergency installation will function when the ship is inclined 22½ degrees and/or when the trim of the ship is 10 degrees.

(v) Provision shall be made for the periodic testing of the complete emergency installation.

(b) Cargo ships of less than 5,000 Tons Gross Tonnage

(i) In cargo ships of less than 5,000 tons gross tonnage there shall be a self-contained emergency source of power located to the satisfaction of the Administration, and capable of supplying the illumination at launching stations and stowage positions of survival craft prescribed in sub-paragraphs (a) (ii), (b) (ii) and (b) (iii) of Regulation 19 of Chapter III, and in addition such other services as the Administration may require, due regard being paid to Regulation 38 of Chapter III.

(ii) The power available shall be adequate for a period of at least 3 hours.

(iii) These ships shall also be subject to sub-paragraphs (iii), (iv), and (v) of paragraph (a) of this Regulation.

Regulation 27

Precautions against Shock, Fire and other Hazards of Electrical Origin

(a) Passenger Ships and Cargo Ships

(i) (1) All exposed metal parts of electrical machines or equipment which are not intended to be “live” but are liable to become “live” under fault conditions, shall be earthed (grounded); and all electrical apparatus shall be so constructed and so installed that danger of injury in ordinary handling shall not exist.

(2) Metal frames of all portable electric lamps, tools and similar apparatus, supplied as ship’s equipment and rated in excess of a safety voltage to be prescribed by the Administration shall be earthed (grounded) through a suitable conductor, unless equivalent provisions are made such as by double insulation or by an isolating transformer. The Administration may require additional special precautions for electric lamps, tools or similar apparatus for use in damp spaces.

(ii) Main and emergency switchboards shall be so arranged as to give easy access back and front, without danger to attendants. The sides and backs and, where necessary, the fronts of switchboards shall be suitably guarded. There shall be non-conducting mats or gratings front and rear where necessary. Exposed current-carrying parts at voltages to earth (ground) exceeding a voltage to be specified by


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

the Administration shall not be installed on the face of any switchboard or control panel.

(iii) (1) Where the hull return system of distribution is used, special precautions shall be taken to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(2) Hull return shall not be used in tankers.

(iv) (1) All metal sheaths and armour of cables shall be electrically continuous and shall be earthed (grounded).

(2) Where the cables are neither sheathed nor armoured and there might be a risk of fire in the event of an electrical fault, precautions shall be required by the Administration.

(v) Lighting fittings shall be arranged to prevent temperature rises that would be injurious to the wiring, and to prevent surrounding material from becoming excessively hot.

(vi) Wiring shall be supported in such a manner as to avoid chafing or other injury.

(vii) Each separate circuit shall be protected against short circuit. Each separate circuit shall also be protected against overload, except in accordance with Regulation 30 of this Chapter or where the Administration grants an exemption. The current-carrying capacity of each circuit shall be permanently indicated, together with the rating or setting of the appropriate overload protective device.

(viii) Accumulator batteries shall be suitably housed, and compartments used primarily for their accommodation shall be properly constructed and efficiently ventilated.
 

(b) Passenger Ships only

(i) Distribution systems shall be so arranged that fire in any main fire zone will not interfere with essential services in any other main fire zone. This requirement will be met if main and emergency feeders passing through any zone are separated both vertically and horizontally as widely as is practicable.

(ii) Electric cables shall be of a flame retarding type to the satisfaction of the Administration. The Administration may require additional safeguards for electric cables in particular spaces of the ship with a view to the prevention of fire or explosion.

(iii) In spaces where inflammable mixtures are liable to collect, no electrical equipment shall be installed unless it is of a type which will not ignite the mixture concerned, such as flameproof (explosion proof) equipment.

(iv) A lighting circuit in a bunker or hold shall be provided with an isolating switch outside the space.

(v) Joints in all conductors except for low voltage communication circuits shall be made only in junction or outlet boxes. All such boxes or wiring devices shall be so constructed as to prevent the spread of fire from the box or device. Where splicing is employed it shall only be by an approved method such that it retains the original mechanical and electrical properties of the cable.

(vi) Wiring systems for interior communications essential for safety and for emergency alarm systems shall be arranged to avoid galleys, machinery spaces and other enclosed spaces having a high risk of fire except in so far as it is necessary to provide communication or to give alarm within those spaces. In the case of ships the construction and small size of which do not permit of compliance with these requirements, measures satisfactory to the Administration shall be taken to ensure efficient protection for these wiring systems where they pass through galleys, machinery spaces and other enclosed spaces having a high risk of fire.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(c) Cargo Ships only

Devices liable to arc shall not be installed in any compartment assigned principally to accumulator batteries unless the devices are flameproof (explosion proof).
 

Regulation 28

Means of Going Astern

(a) Passenger Ships and Cargo Ships

Ships shall have sufficient power for going astern to secure proper control of the ship in all normal circumstances.

(b) Passenger Ships only

The ability of the machinery to reverse the direction of thrust of the propeller in sufficient time, under normal manoeuvring conditions, and so to bring the ship to rest from maximum ahead service speed shall be demonstrated at the initial survey.
 

Regulation 29

Steering Gear*

(a) Passenger Ships and Cargo Ships

(i) Ships shall be provided with a main steering gear and an auxiliary steering gear to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(ii) The main steering gear shall be of adequate strength and sufficient to steer the ship at maximum service speed. The main steering gear and rudder stock shall be so designed that they are not damaged at maximum astern speed.

(iii) The auxiliary steering gear shall be of adequate strength and sufficient to steer the ship at navigable speed and capable of being brought speedily into action in an emergency.

(iv) The exact position of the rudder, if power operated, shall be indicated at the principal steering station.

(b) Passenger Ships only

(i) The main steering gear shall be capable of putting the rudder over from 35 degrees on one side to 35 degrees on the other side with the ship running ahead at maximum service speed. The rudder shall be capable of being put over from 35 degrees on either side to 30 degrees on the other side in 28 seconds at maximum service speed.

(ii) The auxiliary steering gear shall be operated by power in any case in which the Administration would require a rudder stock of over 228.6 millimetres (9 inches) diameter in way of the tiller.

(iii) Where main steering gear power units and their connexions are fitted in duplicate to the satisfaction of the Administration, and each power unit enables the steering gear to meet the requirements of sub-paragraph (i) of this paragraph, no auxiliary steering gear need be required.

(iv) Where the Administration would require a rudder stock with a diameter in way of the tiller exceeding 228.6 millimetres (9 inches) there shall be provided an alternative steering station located to the satisfaction of the Administration. The remote steering control systems from the principal and alternative steering stations shall be so arranged to the satisfaction of the Administration that failure of either system would not result in inability to steer the ship by means of the other system.

(v) Means satisfactory to the Administration shall be provided to enable orders to be transmitted from the bridge to the alternative steering station.

* Reference is made to the Recommendation on Steering Gear for Large Ships, adopted by the Organization by Resolution A.210 (VII).


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(c) Cargo Ships only

(i) The auxiliary steering gear shall be operated by power in any case in which the Administration would require a rudder stock of over 355.6 millimetres (14 inches) diameter in way of the tiller.

(ii) Where power-operated steering gear units and connexions are fitted in duplicate to the satisfaction of the Administration, and each unit complies with sub-paragraph (iii) of paragraph (a) of this Regulation, no auxiliary steering gear need be required, provided that the duplicate units and connexions operating together comply with sub-paragraph (ii) of paragraph (a) of this Regulation.
 

Regulation 30

Electric and Electrohydraulic Steering Gear*

(a) Passenger Ships and Cargo Ships

Indicators for running indication of the motors of electric and electrohydraulic steering gear shall be installed in a suitable location to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(b) All Passenger Ships (irrespective of tonnage) and Cargo Ships of 5,000 Tons Gross Tonnage and upwards

(i) Electric and electrohydraulic steering gear shall be served by two circuits fed from the main switchboard. One of the circuits may pass through the emergency switchboard, if provided. Each circuit shall have adequate capacity for supplying all the motors which are normally connected to it and which operate simultaneously. If transfer arrangements are provided in the steering gear room to permit either circuit to supply any motor or combination of motors, the capacity of each circuit shall be adequate for the most severe load condition. The circuits shall be separated throughout their length as widely as is practicable.

(ii) Short circuit protection only shall be provided for these circuits and motors.

(c) Cargo Ships of less than 5,000 Tons Gross Tonnage

(i) Cargo ships in which electrical power is the sole source of power for both main and auxiliary steering gear shall comply with sub-paragraphs (i) and (ii) of paragraph (b) of this Regulation, except that if the auxiliary steering gear is powered by a motor primarily intended for other services, paragraph (b) (ii) may be waived, provided that the Administration is satisfied with the protection arrangements.

(ii) Short circuit protection only shall be provided for motors and power circuits of electrically or electrohydraulically operated main steering gear.
 

Regulation 31

Location of Emergency Installations in Passenger Ships

The emergency source of electrical power, emergency fire pumps, emergency bilge pumps, batteries of carbon dioxide bottles for fire extinguishing purposes and other emergency installations which are essential for the safety of the ship shall not be installed in a passenger ship forward of the collision bulkhead.
 

Regulation 32

Communication between Bridge and Engine Room

Ships shall be fitted with two means of communicating orders from the bridge to the engine room. One means shall be an engine room telegraph.

* Reference is made to the Recommendation on Steering Gear for Large Ships, adopted by the Organization by Resolution A.210 (VII).


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

CHAPTER II-2

CONSTRUCTION—FIRE PROTECTION, FIRE DETECTION AND FIRE EXTINCTION

PART A—GENERAL*

Regulation 1

Application

(a) For the purpose of this Chapter:

(i) A new passenger ship is a passenger ship the keel of which is laid or which is at a similar stage of construction on or after the date of coming into force of the present Convention, or a cargo ship which is converted to a passenger ship on or after that date, all other passenger ships being considered as existing ships.

(ii) A new cargo ship is a cargo ship the keel of which is laid or which is at a similar stage of construction on or after the date of coming into force of the present Convention.

(iii) A ship which undergoes repairs, alterations, modifications and outfitting related thereto shall continue to comply with at least the requirements previously applicable to the ship. An existing ship in such a case shall not as a rule comply to a lesser extent with the requirements for a new ship than it did before. Repairs, alterations and modifications of a major character and outfitting related thereto should meet the requirements for a new ship in so far as the Administration deems reasonable and practicable.

(b) Unless expressly provided otherwise:

(i) Regulations 4 to 16 of Part A of this Chapter apply to new ships.

(ii) Part B of this Chapter applies to new passenger ships carrying more than 36 passengers.

(iii) Part C of this Chapter applies to new passenger ships carrying not more than 36 passengers.

(iv) Part D of this Chapter applies to new cargo ships.

(v) Part E of this Chapter applies to new tankers.

(c) (i) Part F of this Chapter applies to existing passenger ships carrying more than 36 passengers.

(ii) Existing passenger ships carrying not more than 36 passengers and existing cargo ships shall comply with the following:

(1) for ships the keels of which were laid or which were at a similar stage of construction on or after the date of coming into force of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1960, the Administration shall ensure that the requirements which were applied under Chapter II of that Convention to new ships as defined in that Chapter are complied with;

(2) for ships the keels of which were laid or which were at a similar stage of construction on or after the date of coming into force of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1948, but before the date of coming into force of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1960, the Administration shall ensure that the requirements which were applied under Chapter II of the 1948 Convention to new ships as defined in that Chapter are complied with;

* Reference is made to Recommendation on Safety Measures for Periodically Unattended Machinery Spaces of Cargo Ships additional to those normally considered necessary for an Attended Machinery Space, adopted by the Organization by Resolution A.211 (VII).


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(3) for ships the keels of which were laid or which were at a similar stage of construction before the date of coming into force of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1948, the Administration shall ensure that the requirements which were applied under Chapter II of that Convention to existing ships as defined in that Chapter are complied with.

(d) For any existing ship as defined in the present Convention the Administration, in addition to applying the requirements of sub-paragraph (c) (i) of this Regulation, shall decide which of the requirements of this Chapter not contained in Chapter II of the 1948 and 1960 Conventions shall be applied.

(e) The Administration may, if it considers that the sheltered nature and conditions of the voyage are such as to render the application of any specific requirements of this Chapter unreasonable or unnecessary, exempt from those requirements individual ships or classes of ships belonging to its country which, in the course of their voyage, do not proceed more than 20 miles from the nearest land.

(f) In the case of passenger ships which are employed in special trades for the carriage of large numbers of special trade passengers, such as the pilgrim trade, the Administration, if satisfied that it is impracticable to enforce compliance with the requirements of this Chapter, may exempt such ships, when they belong to its country, from those requirements, provided that they comply fully with the provisions of:

(i) the Rules annexed to the Special Trade Passenger Ships Agreement, 1971, and

(ii) the Rules annexed to the Protocol on Space Requirements for Special Trade Passenger Ships, 1973, when it comes into force.

Regulation 2

Basic Principles

The purpose of this Chapter is to require the fullest practicable degree of fire protection, fire detection and fire extinction in ships. The following basic principles underlie the Regulations in this Chapter and are embodied in the Regulations as appropriate, having regard to the type of ships and the potential fire hazard involved:

(a) division of ship into main vertical zones by thermal and structural boundaries;

(b) separation of accommodation spaces from the remainder of the ship by thermal and structural boundaries;

(c) restricted use of combustible materials;

(d) detection of any fire in the zone of origin;

(e) containment and extinction of any fire in the space of origin;

(f) protection of means of escape or access for fire fighting;

(g) ready availability of fire-extinguishing appliances;

(h) minimization of possibility of ignition of inflammable* cargo vapour.

Regulation 3

Definitions

For the purpose of this Chapter, unless expressly provided otherwise:

(a) “Non-combustible material” means a material which neither burns nor gives off inflammable vapours in sufficient quantity for self-ignition when heated to approximately 750°C (1,382°F) this being determined to the satisfaction of the Administration by an established test procedure. Any other material is a combustible material.

* “Inflammable” has the same meaning as “flammable”.

Reference is made to Recommendation on Test Method for Qualifying Marine Construction Materials as Non-Combustible, adopted by the Organization by Resolution A.270 (VIII).


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(b) “A Standard Fire Test” is one in which specimens of the relevant bulkheads or decks are exposed in a test furnace to temperatures corresponding approximately to the standard time-temperature curve. The specimen shall have an exposed surface of not less than 4.65 square metres (50 square feet) and height (or length of deck) of 2.44 metres (8 feet) resembling as closely as possible the intended construction and including where appropriate at least one joint. The standard time-temperature curve is defined by a smooth curve drawn through the following points:

at the end of the first

5 minutes

538°C (1,000°F)

,,  ,,   ,,  ,,  ,,   ,,

10   

704°C (1,300°F)

,,  ,,   ,,  ,,  ,,   ,,

30   

843°C (1,550°F)

,,  ,,   ,,  ,,  ,,   ,,

60   

927°C (1,700°F)

(c) “ “A” Class Divisions” are those divisions formed by bulkheads and decks which comply with the following:

(i) they shall be constructed of steel or other equivalent material;

(ii) they shall be suitably stiffened;

(iii) they shall be so constructed as to be capable of preventing the passage of smoke and flame to the end of the one-hour standard fire test;

(iv) they shall be insulated with approved non-combustible materials such that the average temperature of the unexposed side will not rise more than 139°C (250°F) above the original temperature, nor will the temperature, at any one point, including any joint, rise more than 180°C (325°F) above the original temperature, within the time listed below:

Class “A-60”

60 minutes

Class “A-30”

30 minutes

ClassA-15”

15 minutes

Class “A-0”

0 minutes

(v) the Administration may require a test of a prototype bulkhead or deck to ensure that it meets the above requirements for integrity and temperature rise.*

(d) “ “B” Class Divisions” are those divisions formed by bulkheads, decks, ceilings or linings which comply with the following:

(i) they shall be so constructed as to be capable of preventing the passage of flame to the end of the first one-half hour of the standard fire test;

(ii) they shall have an insulation value such that the average temperature of the unexposed side will not rise more than 139°C (250°F) above the original temperature, nor will the temperature at any one point, including any joint, rise more than 225°C (405°F) above the original temperature, within the time listed below:

ClassB-15”

15 minutes

Class “B-0”

0 minutes

(iii) they shall be constructed of approved non-combustible materials and all materials entering into the construction and erection of “B” Class Divisions shall be non-combustible, except where in accordance with Parts C and D of this Chapter the use of combustible material is not precluded, in which case it shall comply with the temperature rise limitation specified in sub-paragraph (ii) of this paragraph up to the end of the first one-half hour of the standard fire test;

(iv) the Administration may require a test of a prototype division to ensure that it meets the above requirements for integrity and temperature rise.

* Reference is made to Recommendation for Fire Test Procedures for “A” and “B” Class Divisions, adopted by the Organization by Resolutions A. 163 (ES.IV) and A.215 (VII).

Reference is made to Recommendation for Fire Test Procedures for “A” and “B” Class Divisions, adopted by the Organization by Resolutions A.163 (ES.IV) and A.215 (VII).


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(e) “C” Class Divisions” shall be constructed of approved non-combustible materials. They need meet no requirements relative to the passage of smoke and flame nor the limiting of temperature rise.

(f) “Continuous “B” Class Ceilings or Linings” are those “B” Class ceilings or linings which terminate only at an “A” or “B” Class division.

(g) “Steel or Other Equivalent Material”. Where the words “steel or other equivalent material” occur, “equivalent material” means any material which, by itself or due to insulation provided, has structural and integrity properties equivalent to steel at the end of the applicable fire exposure to the standard fire test (e.g. aluminium alloy with appropriate insulation).

(h) “Low Flame Spread” means that the surface thus described will adequately restrict the spread of flame, this being determined to the satisfaction of the Administration by an established test procedure.

(i) “Main Vertical Zones” are those sections into which the hull, superstructure, and deckhouses are divided by “A” Class divisions, the mean length of which on any one deck does not in general exceed 40 metres (131 feet).

(j) “Accommodation Spaces” are those used for public spaces, corridors, lavatories, cabins, offices, crew quarters, barber shops, isolated pantries and lockers and similar spaces.

(k) “Public Spaces” are those portions of the accommodation which are used for halls, dining rooms, lounges and similar permanently enclosed spaces.

(l) “Service Spaces” are those used for galleys, main pantries, stores (except isolated pantries and lockers), mail and specie rooms, workshops other than those forming part of machinery spaces, and similar spaces and trunks to such spaces.

(m) “Cargo Spaces” are all spaces used for cargo (including cargo oil tanks) and trunks to such spaces.

(n) “Special Category Spaces” are those enclosed spaces above or below the bulkhead deck intended for the carriage of motor vehicles with fuel in their tanks for their own propulsion, into and from which such vehicles can be driven and to which passengers have access.

(o) “Machinery Spaces of Category A” are all spaces which contain:

(i) internal combustion type machinery used either for main propulsion purposes, or for other purposes where such machinery has in the aggregate a total power output of not less than 373 kW, or

(ii) any oil-fired boiler or oil fuel unit; and trunks to such spaces.

(p) “Machinery Spaces” are all machinery spaces of Category A and all other spaces containing propelling machinery, boilers, oil fuel units, steam and internal combustion engines, generators and major electrical machinery, oil filling stations, refrigerating, stabilizing, ventilation and air conditioning machinery, and similar spaces; and trunks to such spaces.

(q) “Oil Fuel Unit” means the equipment used for the preparation of oil fuel for delivery to an oil-fired boiler, or equipment used for the preparation for delivery of heated oil to an internal combustion engine, and includes any oil pressure pumps, filters and heaters dealing with oil at a pressure more than 1.8 kilogrammes per square centimetre (25 pounds per square inch) gauge.

(r) “Control Stations” are those spaces in which the ship’s radio or main navigating equipment or the emergency source of power is located or where the fire recording or fire control equipment is centralized.

(s) “Rooms containing Furniture and Furnishings of Restricted Fire Risk” are, for the purpose of Regulation 20 of this Chapter, those rooms containing furniture and furnishings of restricted fire risk (whether cabins, public spaces, offices or other types of accommodation) in which:


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(i) all case furniture such as desks, wardrobes, dressing tables, bureaux, dressers, is constructed entirely of approved non-combustible materials, except that a combustible veneer not exceeding 2 millimetres (½ inch) may be used on the working surface of such articles;

(ii) all free-standing furniture such as chairs, sofas, tables, is constructed with frames of non-combustible materials;

(iii) all draperies, curtains and other suspended textile materials have, to the satisfaction of the Administration, qualities of resistance to the propagation of flame not inferior to those of wool weighing 0.8 kilogrammes per square metre (24 ounces per square yard);

(iv) all floor coverings have, to the satisfaction of the Administration, qualities of resistance to the propagation of flame not inferior to those of an equivalent woollen material used for the same purpose; and

(v) all exposed surfaces of bulkheads, linings and ceilings have low flame-spread characteristics.

(t) “Bulkhead deck” is the uppermost deck up to which the transverse watertight bulkheads are carried.

(u) “Deadweight” is the difference in metric tons between the displacement of a ship in water of a specific gravity of 1.025 at the load water line corresponding to the assigned summer freeboard and the lightweight of the ship.

(v) “Lightweight” is the displacement of a ship in metric tons without cargo, fuel, lubricating oil, ballast water, fresh water and feedwater in tanks, consumable stores, together with passengers, and crew and their effects.

(w) “Combination carrier” is a tanker designed to carry oil or alternatively solid cargoes in bulk.

Regulation 4

Fire Control Plans

There shall be permanently exhibited in all new and existing ships for the guidance of the ship’s officers general arrangement plans showing clearly for each deck the control stations, the various fire sections enclosed by “A” Class divisions, the sections enclosed by “B” Class divisions (if any), together with particulars of the fire alarms, detecting systems, the sprinkler installation (if any), the fire-extinguishing appliances, means of access to different compartments, decks, etc. and the ventilating system including particulars of the fan control positions, the position of dampers and identification numbers of the ventilating fans serving each section. Alternatively, at the discretion of the Administration, the aforementioned details may be set out in a booklet, a copy of which shall be supplied to each officer, and one copy at all times shall be available on board in an accessible position. Plans and booklets shall be kept up to date, any alterations being recorded thereon as soon as practicable. Description in such plans and booklets shall be in the national language. If the language is neither English nor French, a translation into one of those languages shall be included. In addition, instructions concerning the maintenance and operation of all the equipment and installations on board for the fighting and containment of fire shall be kept under one cover, readily available in an accessible position.
 

Regulation 5

Fire Pumps, Fire Mains, Hydrants and Hoses

(a) Total Capacity of Fire Pumps

(i) In a passenger ship, the required fire pumps shall be capable of delivering for fire-fighting purposes a quantity of water, at the appropriate pressure prescribed below, not less than two-thirds of the quantity required to be dealt with by the bilge pumps when employed for bilge pumping.

(ii) In a cargo ship, the required fire pumps, other than the emergency pump (if any), shall be capable of delivering for fire-fighting purposes a quantity of water, at the appropriate pressure prescribed, not less than four-thirds of the quantity required under Regulation 18 of Chapter II-1 to be dealt with by each of the independent bilge pumps in a passenger ship of the same dimensions when employed on bilge


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

pumping, provided that in no cargo ship need the total required capacity of the fire pumps exceed 180 cubic metres per hour.

(b) Fire Pumps

(i) The fire pumps shall be independently driven. Sanitary, ballast, bilge or general service pumps may be accepted as fire pumps, provided that they are not normally used for pumping oil and that if they are subject to occasional duty for the transfer or pumping of fuel oil, suitable change-over arrangements are fitted.

(ii) (1) In passenger ships carrying more than 36 passengers, each of the required fire pumps shall have a capacity not less than 80 per cent of the total required capacity divided by the minimum number of required fire pumps and each such pump shall in any event be capable of delivering at least the two required jets of water. These fire pumps shall be capable of supplying the fire main system under the required conditions.

Where more pumps than the minimum of required pumps are installed the capacity of such additional pumps shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(2) In all other types of ships, each of the required fire pumps (other than any emergency pump required by Regulation 52 of this Chapter) shall have a capacity not less than 80 per cent of the total required capacity divided by the number of required fire pumps, and shall in any event be capable of supplying the fire main system under the required conditions.

Where more pumps than required are installed their capacity shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(iii) Relief valves shall be provided in conjunction with all fire pumps if the pumps are capable of developing a pressure exceeding the design pressure of the water service pipes, hydrants and hoses. These valves shall be so placed and adjusted as to prevent excessive pressure in any part of the fire main system.
 

(c) Pressure in the Fire Main

(i) The diameter of the fire main and water service pipes shall be sufficient for the effective distribution of the maximum required discharge from two fire pumps operating simultaneously, except that in the case of cargo ships the diameter need only be sufficient for the discharge of 140 cubic metres per hour.

(ii) With the two pumps simultaneously delivering through nozzles specified in paragraph (g) of this Regulation the quantity of water specified in sub-paragraph (i) of this paragraph, through any adjacent hydrants, the following minimum pressures shall be maintained at all hydrants:

Passenger ships:

 

4,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards

3.2 kilogrammes per square centimetre (45 pounds per square inch)

1,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards but under 4,000 tons gross tonnage

2.8 kilogrammes per square centimetre (40 pounds per square inch)

Under 1,000 tons gross tonnage

To the satisfaction of the Administration

Cargo ships:

 

6,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards

2.8 kilogrammes per square centimetre (40 pounds per square inch)

1,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards but under 6,000 tons gross tonnage

2.6 kilogrammes per square centimetre (37 pounds per square inch)

Under 1,000 tons gross tonnage

To the satisfaction of the Administration


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(d) Number and Position of Hydrants

The number and position of the hydrants shall be such that at least two jets of water not emanating from the same hydrant, one of which shall be from a single length of hose, may reach any part of the ship normally accessible to the passengers or crew while the ship is being navigated.

(e) Pipes and Hydrants

(i) Materials readily rendered ineffective by heat shall not be used for fire mains and hydrants unless adequately protected. The pipes and hydrants shall be so placed that the fire hoses may be easily coupled to them. In ships where deck cargo may be carried, the positions of the hydrants shall be such that they are always readily accessible and the pipes shall be arranged as far as practicable to avoid risk of damage by such cargo. Unless there is provided one hose and nozzle for each hydrant in the ship, there shall be complete interchangeability of hose couplings and nozzles.

(ii) A cock or valve shall be fitted to serve each fire hose so that any fire hose may be removed while the fire pumps are at work.

(f) Fire Hoses

Fire hoses shall be of material approved by the Administration and sufficient in length to project a jet of water to any of the spaces in which they may be required to be used. Their maximum length shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration. Each hose shall be provided with a nozzle and the necessary couplings. Hoses specified in this Chapter as “fire hoses” shall together with any necessary fittings and tools be kept ready for use in conspicuous positions near the water service hydrants or connexions. Additionally in interior locations in passenger ships carrying more than 36 passengers, fire hoses shall be connected to the hydrants at all times.

(g) Nozzles

(i) For the purposes of this Chapter, standard nozzle sizes shall be 12 millimetres (½ inch), 16 millimetres ( inch) and 19 millimetres (¾ inch) or as near thereto as possible. Larger diameter nozzles may be permitted at the discretion of the Administration.

(ii) For accommodation and service spaces, a nozzle size greater than 12 millimetres (½ inch) need not be used.

(iii) For machinery spaces and exterior locations, the nozzle size shall be such as to obtain the maximum discharge possible from two jets at the pressure mentioned in paragraph (c) of this Regulation from the smallest pump, provided that a nozzle size greater than 19 millimetres (¾ inch) need not be used.

(iv) For machinery spaces or in similar spaces where the risk of spillage of oil exists, the nozzles shall be suitable for spraying water on oil or alternatively shall be of a dual purpose type.

(h) International Shore Connexion

Standard dimensions of flanges for the international shore connexion required in this Chapter to be installed in the ship shall be in accordance with the following table:

Description

Dimension

 

Outside diameter.......

 

 

178 millimetres (7 inches)

 


Inner diameter........
 


64 millimetres (2½ inches)
 


Bolt circle diameter.....
 

 

132 millimetres (5¼ inches)
 


Slots in flange.........


4 holes 19 millimetres (¾ inch) in diameter equidistantly placed on a bolt circle of the above diameter, slotted to the flange periphery
 


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

Description

Dimension

Flange thickness.......

14.5 millimetres (9/16 inch) minimum

Bolts and nuts.........

4, each of 16 millimetres ( inch) diameter, 50 millimetres (2 inches) in length

The connexion shall be constructed of material suitable for 10.5 kilogrammes per square centimetre (150 pounds per square inch) service. The flange shall have a flat face on one side and the other shall have permanently attached thereto a coupling that will fit the ship’s hydrant and hose. The connexion shall be kept aboard the ship together with a gasket of any material suitable for 10.5 kilogrammes per square centimetre (150 pounds per square inch) service, together with four 16 millimetre ( inch) bolts, 50 millimetres (2 inches) in length and eight washers.

Regulation 6

Miscellaneous Items

(a) Electric radiators, if used, shall be fixed in position and so constructed as to reduce fire risks to a minimum. No such radiators shall be fitted with an element so exposed that clothing, curtains, or other similar materials can be scorched or set on fire by heat from the element.

(b) Cellulose-nitrate based films shall not be used for cinematograph installations.

Regulation 7

Fire Extinguishers

(a) All fire extinguishers shall be of approved types and designs.

(i) The capacity of required portable fluid extinguishers shall be not more than 13.5 litres (3 gallons) and not less than 9 litres (2 gallons). Other extinguishers shall not be in excess of the equivalent portability of the 13.5 litre (3 gallons) fluid extinguisher and shall not be less than the fire-extinguishing equivalent of a 9 litre (2 gallons) fluid extinguisher.

(ii) The Administration shall determine the equivalents of fire extinguishers.

(b) Spare charges shall be provided in accordance with requirements to be specified by the Administration.

(c) Fire extinguishers containing an extinguishing medium which, in the opinion of the Administration, either by itself or under expected conditions of use gives off toxic gases in such quantities as to endanger persons shall not be permitted.

(d) A portable froth applicator unit shall consist of an inductor type of airfroth nozzle capable of being connected to the fire main by a fire hose, together with a portable tank containing at least 20 litres (4½ gallons) of froth-making liquid and one spare tank. The nozzle shall be capable of producing effective froth suitable for extinguishing an oil fire, at the rate of at least 1.5 cubic metres (53 cubic feet) per minute.

(e) Fire extinguishers shall be periodically examined and subjected to such tests as the Administration may require.

(f) One of the portable fire extinguishers intended for use in any space shall be stowed near the entrance to that space.

Regulation 8

Fixed Gas Fire-Extinguishing Systems

(a) The use of a fire-extinguishing medium which, in the opinion of the Administration, either by itself or under expected conditions of use gives off toxic gases in such quantities as to endanger persons shall not be permitted.

(b) Where provision is made for the injection of gas for fire-extinguishing purposes, the necessary pipes for conveying the gas shall be provided with control valves or cocks so marked as to indicate clearly the compartments to which the pipes are led. Suitable provision shall be made to prevent inadvertent admission of the gas to any compartment. Where cargo spaces fitted with such a system for fire protection are used as passenger spaces the gas connexion shall be blanked during such use.

(c) The piping shall be arranged so as to provide effective distribution of fire-extinguishing gas.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(d) (i) When carbon dioxide is used as the extinguishing medium in cargo spaces, the quantity of gas available shall be sufficient to give a minimum volume of free gas equal to 30 per cent of the gross volume of the largest cargo compartment in the ship which is capable of being sealed.

(ii) When carbon dioxide is used as an extinguishing medium for machinery spaces of Category A the quantity of gas carried shall be sufficient to give a minimum quantity of free gas equal to the larger of the following quantities, either:

(1) 40 per cent of the gross volume of the largest space, the volume to include the casing up to the level at which the horizontal area of the casing is 40 per cent or less of the horizontal area of the space concerned taken midway between the tank top and the lowest part of the casing; or

(2) 35 per cent of the entire volume of the largest space including the casing;

provided that the above-mentioned percentages may be reduced to 35 per cent and 30 per cent respectively for cargo ships of less than 2,000 tons gross tonnage; provided also that if two or more machinery spaces of Category A are not entirely separate they shall be considered as forming one compartment.

(iii) Where the volume of free air contained in air receivers in any machinery space of Category A is such that, if released in such space in the event of fire, such release of air within that space would seriously affect the efficiency of the fixed fire-extinguishing installation, the Administration shall require the provision of an additional quantity of carbon dioxide.

(iv) When carbon dioxide is used as an extinguishing medium both for cargo spaces and for machinery spaces of Category A the quantity of gas need not be more than the maximum required either for the largest cargo compartment or machinery space.

(v) For the purpose of this paragraph the volume of carbon dioxide shall be calculated at 0.56 cubic metres to the kilogramme (9 cubic feet to the pound).

(vi) When carbon dioxide is used as the extinguishing medium for machinery spaces of Category A the fixed piping system shall be such that 85 per cent of the gas can be discharged into the space within 2 minutes.

(vii) Carbon dioxide bottle storage rooms shall be situated at a safe and readily accessible position and shall be effectively ventilated to the satisfaction of the Administration. Any entrance to such storage rooms shall preferably be from the open deck, and in any case shall be independent of the protected space. Access doors shall be gastight and bulkheads and decks which form the boundaries of such rooms shall be gastight and adequately insulated.

(e) (i) Where gas other than carbon dioxide or steam as permitted by paragraph (f) of this Regulation is produced on the ship and is used as an extinguishing medium, it shall be a gaseous product of fuel combustion in which the oxygen content, the carbon monoxide content, the corrosive elements and any solid combustible elements have been reduced to a permissible minimum.

(ii) Where such gas is used as the extinguishing medium in a fixed fire-extinguishing system for the protection of machinery spaces of Category A it shall afford protection equivalent to that provided by a fixed carbon dioxide system.

(iii) Where such gas is used as the extinguishing medium in a fixed fire-extinguishing system for the protection of cargo spaces a sufficient quantity of such gas shall be available to supply hourly a volume of free gas at least equal to 25 per cent of the gross volume of the largest compartment protected in this way for a period of 72 hours.

(f) In general, the Administration shall not permit the use of steam as a fire-extinguishing medium in fixed fire-extinguishing systems of new ships. Where the use of steam is permitted by the Administration it shall be used only in restricted areas as an addition to the required fire-extinguishing medium and with the proviso that the boiler or boilers available for supplying steam shall have an evaporation of at least 1 kilogramme of steam per hour for each 0.75 cubic metres (1 pound of steam per hour per 12 cubic feet) of the gross


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

volume of the largest space so protected. In addition to complying with the foregoing requirements the systems in all respects shall be as determined by, and to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(g) Means shall be provided for automatically giving audible warning of the release of fire-extinguishing gas into any space to which personnel normally have access. The alarm shall operate for a suitable period before the gas is released.

(h) The means of control of any such fixed gas fire-extinguishing system shall be readily accessible and simple to operate and shall be grouped together in as few locations as possible at positions not likely to be cut off by a fire in the protected space.

Regulation 9

Fixed Froth Fire-Extinguishing Systems in Machinery Spaces

(a) Any required fixed froth fire-extinguishing system in machinery spaces shall be capable of discharging through fixed discharge outlets in not more than five minutes, a quantity of froth sufficient to cover to a depth of 150 millimetres (6 inches) the largest single area over which oil fuel is liable to spread. The system shall be capable of generating froth suitable for extinguishing oil fires. Means shall be provided for effective distribution of the froth through a permanent system of piping and control valves or cocks to suitable discharge outlets, and for the froth to be effectively directed by fixed sprayers on other main fire hazards in the protected space. The expansion ratio of the froth shall not exceed 12 to 1.

(b) The means of control of any such systems shall be readily accessible and simple to operate and shall be grouped together in as few locations as possible at positions not likely to be cut off by a fire in the protected space.

Regulation 10

Fixed High Expansion Froth Fire-Extinguishing Systems in Machinery Spaces

(a) (i) Any required fixed high expansion froth system in machinery spaces shall be capable of rapidly discharging through fixed discharge outlets a quantity of froth sufficient to fill the greatest space to be protected at a rate of at least 1 metre (3.3 feet) in depth per minute. The quantity of froth-forming liquid available shall be sufficient to produce a volume of froth equal to five times the volume of the largest space to be protected. The expansion ratio of the froth shall not exceed 1,000 to 1.

(ii) The Administration may permit alternative arrangements and discharge rates provided that it is satisfied that equivalent protection is achieved.

(b) Supply ducts for delivering froth, air intakes to the froth generator and the number of froth-producing units shall in the opinion of the Administration be such as will provide effective froth production and distribution.

(c) The arrangement of the froth generator delivery ducting shall be such that a fire in the protected space will not affect the froth-generating equipment.

(d) The froth generator, its sources of power supply, froth-forming liquid and means of controlling the system shall be readily accessible and simple to operate and shall be grouped in as few locations as possible at positions not likely to be cut off by fire in the protected space.

Regulation 11

Fixed Pressure Water-Spraying Fire-Extinguishing Systems in Machinery Spaces

(a) Any required fixed pressure water-spraying fire-extinguishing system in machinery spaces shall be provided with spraying nozzles of an approved type.

(b) The number and arrangement of the nozzles shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration and be such as to ensure an effective average distribution of water of at least 5 litres per square metre (0.1 gallon per square foot) per minute in the spaces to be protected. Where increased application rates are considered necessary, these shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration. Nozzles shall be fitted above bilges, tank tops and other areas over which oil fuel is liable to spread and also above other specific fire hazards in the machinery spaces.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(c) The system may be divided into sections, the distribution valves of which shall be operated from easily accessible positions outside the spaces to be protected and which will not be readily cut off by an outbreak of fire.

(d) The system shall be kept charged at the necessary pressure and the pump supplying the water for the system shall be put automatically into action by a pressure drop in the system.

(e) The pump shall be capable of simultaneously supplying at the necessary pressure all sections of the system in any one compartment to be protected. The pump and its controls shall be installed outside the space or spaces to be protected. It shall not be possible for a fire in the space or spaces protected by the water-spraying system to put the system out of action.

(f) The pump may be driven by independent internal combustion type machinery but if it is dependent upon power being supplied from the emergency generator fitted in compliance with the provisions of Regulation 25 or Regulation 26 as appropriate of Chapter II-1 of the present Convention that generator shall be arranged to start automatically in case of main power failure so that power for the pump required by paragraph (e) of this Regulation is immediately available. When the pump is driven by independent internal combustion type machinery it shall be so situated that a fire in the protected space will not affect the air supply to the machinery.

(g) Precautions shall be taken to prevent the nozzles from becoming clogged by impurities in the water or corrosion of piping, nozzles, valves and pump.

Regulation 12

Automatic Sprinkler and Fire Alarm and Fire Detection Systems

(a) (i) Any required automatic sprinkler and fire alarm and fire detection system shall be capable of immediate operation at all times and no action by the crew shall be necessary to set it in operation. It shall be of the wet pipe type but small exposed sections may be of the dry pipe type where in the opinion of the Administration this is a necessary precaution. Any parts of the system which may be subjected to freezing temperatures in service shall be suitably protected against freezing. It shall be kept charged at the necessary pressure and shall have provision for a continuous supply of water as required in this Regulation.

(ii) Each section of sprinklers shall include means for giving a visual and audible alarm signal automatically at one or more indicating units whenever any sprinkler comes into operation. Such units shall give an indication of any fire and its location in any space served by the system and shall be centralized on the navigating bridge or in the main fire control station, which shall be so manned or equipped as to ensure that any alarm from the system is immediately received by a responsible member of the crew. Such alarm systems shall be constructed so as to indicate if any fault occurs in the system.

(b) (i) Sprinklers shall be grouped into separate sections, each of which shall contain not more than 200 sprinklers. Any section of sprinklers shall not serve more than two decks and shall not be situated in more than one main vertical zone, except that an Administration, if it is satisfied that the protection of the ship against fire will not thereby be reduced, may permit such a section of sprinklers to serve more than two decks or to be situated in more than one main vertical zone.

(ii) Each section of sprinklers shall be capable of being isolated by one stop valve only. The stop valve in each section shall be readily accessible and its location shall be clearly and permanently indicated. Means shall be provided to prevent the operation of the stop valves by any unauthorized person.

(iii) A gauge indicating the pressure in the system shall be provided at each section stop valve and at a central station.

(iv) The sprinklers shall be resistant to corrosion by marine atmospheres. In accommodation and service spaces the sprinklers shall come into operation within the temperature range of 68°C (155°F) and 79°C (175°F), except that in locations such as drying rooms, where high ambient temperatures might be expected, the operating temperature may be increased by not more than 30°C (54°F) above the maximum deck head temperature.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(v) A list or plan shall be displayed at each indicating unit showing the spaces covered and the location of the zone in respect of each section. Suitable instructions for testing and maintenance shall be available.

(c) Sprinklers shall be placed in an overhead position and spaced in a suitable pattern to maintain an average application rate of not less than 5 litres per square metre (0.1 gallon per square foot) per minute over the nominal area covered by the sprinklers. Alternatively, the Administration may permit the use of sprinklers providing such other amount of water suitably distributed as has been shown to the satisfaction of the Administration to be not less effective.

(d) (i) A pressure tank having a volume equal to at least twice that of the charge of water specified in this sub-paragraph shall be provided. The tank shall contain a standing charge of fresh water, equivalent to the amount of water which would be discharged in one minute by the pump referred to in sub-paragraph (e) (ii) of this Regulation, and the arrangements shall provide for maintaining such air pressure in the tank to ensure that where the standing charge of fresh water in the tank has been used the pressure will be not less than the working pressure of the sprinkler, plus the pressure due to a head of water measured from the bottom of the tank to the highest sprinkler in the system. Suitable means of replenishing the air under pressure and of replenishing the fresh water charge in the tank shall be provided. A glass gauge shall be provided to indicate the correct level of the water in the tank.

(ii) Means shall be provided to prevent the passage of sea water into the tank.

(e) (i) An independent power pump shall be provided solely for the purpose of continuing automatically the discharge of water from the sprinklers. The pump shall be brought into action automatically by the pressure drop in the system before the standing fresh water charge in the pressure tank is completely exhausted.

(ii) The pump and the piping system shall be capable of maintaining the necessary pressure at the level of the highest sprinkler to ensure a continuous output of water sufficient for the simultaneous coverage of a minimum area of 280 square metres (3,000 square feet) at the application rate specified in paragraph (c) of this Regulation.

(iii) The pump shall have fitted on the delivery side a test valve with a short open-ended discharge pipe. The effective area through the valve and pipe shall be adequate to permit the release of the required pump output while maintaining the pressure in the system specified in sub-paragraph (d) (i) of this Regulation.

(iv) The sea inlet to the pump shall wherever possible be in the space containing the pump and shall be so arranged that when the ship is afloat it will not be necessary to shut off the supply of sea water to the pump for any purpose other than the inspection or repair of the pump.

(f) The sprinkler pump and tank shall be situated in a position reasonably remote from any machinery space of Category A and shall not be situated in any space required to be protected by the sprinkler system.

(g) There shall be not less than two sources of power supply for the sea water pump and automatic alarm and detection system. Where the sources of power for the pump are electrical, these shall be a main generator and an emergency source of power. One supply for the pump shall be taken from the main switchboard, and one from the emergency switchboard by separate feeders reserved solely for that purpose.

The feeders shall be arranged so as to avoid galleys, machinery spaces and other enclosed spaces of high fire risk except in so far as it is necessary to reach the appropriate switchboards, and shall be run to an automatic change-over switch situated near the sprinkler pump. This switch shall permit the supply of power from the main switchboard so long as a supply is available therefrom, and be so designed that upon failure of that supply it will automatically change over to the supply from the emergency switchboard. The switches on the main switchboard and the emergency switchboard shall be clearly labelled and normally kept closed. No other switch shall be permitted in the feeders concerned. One of the sources of power supply for the alarm and detection system shall be an


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

emergency source. Where one of the sources of power for the pump is an internal combustion-type engine it shall, in addition to complying with the provisions of paragraph (f) of this Regulation, be so situated that a fire in any protected space will not affect the air supply to the machinery.

(h) The sprinkler system shall have a connexion from the ship’s fire main by way of a lockable screw-down non-return valve at the connexion which will prevent a backflow from the sprinkler system to the fire main.

(i) (i) A test valve shall be provided for testing the automatic alarm for each section of sprinklers by a discharge of water equivalent to the operation of one sprinkler. The test valve for each section shall be situated near the stop valve for that section.

(ii) Means shall be provided for testing the automatic operation of the pump, on reduction of pressure in the system.

(iii) Switches shall be provided at one of the indicating positions referred to in sub-paragraph (a) (ii) of this Regulation which will enable the alarm and the indicators for each section of sprinklers to be tested.

(j) Spare sprinkler heads shall be provided for each section of sprinklers to the satisfaction of the Administration.

Regulation 13

Automatic Fire Alarm and Fire Detection Systems

Requirements for passenger ships carrying more than 36 passengers

(a) (i) Any required automatic fire alarm and fire detection system shall be capable of immediate operation at all times and no action of the crew shall be necessary to set it in operation.

(ii) Each section of detectors shall include means for giving a visual and audible alarm signal automatically at one or more indicating units whenever any detector comes into operation. Such units shall give an indication of any fire and its location in any space served by the system and shall be centralized on the navigating bridge or in the main fire control station which shall be so manned or equipped as to ensure that any alarm from the system is immediately received by a responsible member of the crew. Such alarm system shall be constructed so as to indicate if any fault occurs in the system.

(b) Detectors shall be grouped into separate sections each covering not more than 50 rooms served by such a system and containing not more than 100 detectors. A section of detectors shall not serve spaces on both the port and starboard sides of the ship nor on more than one deck and neither shall it be situated in more than one main vertical zone except that the Administration, if it is satisfied that the protection of the ship against fire will not thereby be reduced, may permit such a section of detectors to serve both the port and starboard sides of the ship and more than one deck.

(c) The system shall be operated by an abnormal air temperature, by an abnormal concentration of smoke or by other factors indicative of incipient fire in any one of the spaces to be protected. Systems which are sensitive to air temperature shall not operate at less than 57°C (135°F) and shall operate at a temperature not greater than 74°C (165°F) when the temperature increase to those levels is not more than 1°C (1.8°F) per minute. At the discretion of the Administration the permissible temperature of operation may be increased to 30°C (54°F) above the maximum deckhead temperature in drying rooms and similar places of a normally high ambient temperature. Systems which are sensitive to smoke concentration shall operate on the reduction of the intensity of a transmitted light beam by an amount to be determined by the Administration. Other equally effective methods of operation may be accepted at the discretion of the Administration. The detection system shall not be used for any purpose other than fire detection.

(d) The detectors may be arranged to operate the alarm by the opening or closing of contacts or by other appropriate methods. They shall be fitted in an overhead position and shall be suitably protected against impact and physical damage. They shall be suitable for use in a marine atmosphere. They shall be placed in an open position clear of beams and other objects likely to obstruct the flow of hot gases or smoke to the sensitive element. Detectors operated by the closing of contacts shall be of the sealed contact type and the circuit shall be continuously monitored to indicate fault conditions.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(e) At least one detector shall be installed in each space where detection facilities are required and there shall be not less than one detector for each 37 square metres (400 square feet) of deck area. In large spaces the detectors shall be arranged in a regular pattern so that no detector is more than 9 metres (30 feet) from another detector or more than 4.5 metres (15 feet) from a bulkhead.

(f) There shall be not less than two sources of power supply for the electrical equipment used in the operation of the fire alarm and fire detection system, one of which shall be an emergency source. The supply shall be provided by separate feeders reserved solely for that purpose. Such feeders shall run to a change-over switch situated in the control station for the fire detection system. The wiring system shall be so arranged to avoid galleys, machinery spaces and other enclosed spaces having a high fire risk except in so far as it is necessary to provide for fire detection in such spaces or to reach the appropriate switchboard.

(g) (i) A list or plan shall be displayed adjacent to each indicating unit showing the spaces covered and the location of the zone in respect of each section. Suitable instructions for testing and maintenance shall be available.

(ii) Provision shall be made for testing the correct operation of the detectors and the indicating units by supplying means for applying hot air or smoke at detector positions.

(h) Spare detector heads shall be provided for each section of detectors to the satisfaction of the Administration.

Requirements for all other types of ships

(i) All required fire detection systems shall be capable of automatically indicating the presence or indication of fire and also its location. Indicators shall be centralized either on the navigating bridge or in other control stations which are provided with a direct communication with the bridge. The Administration may permit the indicators to be distributed among several stations.

(j) In passenger ships electrical equipment used in the operation of required fire detection systems shall have two separate sources of power, one of which shall be an emergency source.

(k) The alarm system shall operate both audible and visible signals at the main stations referred to in paragraph (i) of this Regulation. Detection systems for cargo spaces need not have audible alarms.

Regulation 14

Fireman’s Outfit

A fireman’s outfit shall consist of:

(a) Personal equipment comprising:

(i) Protective clothing of material to protect the skin from the heat radiating from the fire and from burns and scalding by steam. The outer surface shall be water-resistant.

(ii) Boots and gloves of rubber or other electrically non-conducting material.

(iii) A rigid helmet providing effective protection against impact.

(iv) An electric safety lamp (hand lantern) of an approved type with a minimum burning period of three hours.

(v) An axe to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(b) A breathing apparatus of an approved type which may be either:

(i) A smoke helmet or smoke mask which shall be provided with a suitable air pump and a length of air hose sufficient to reach from the open deck, well clear of hatch or doorway, to any part of the holds or machinery spaces. If, in order to comply with this sub-paragraph, an air hose exceeding 36 metres (120 feet) in length would be necessary, a self-contained breathing apparatus shall be substituted or provided in addition as determined by the Administration, or

(ii) a self-contained breathing apparatus which shall be capable of functioning for a period of time to be determined by the Administration.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

For each breathing apparatus a fireproof lifeline of sufficient length and strength shall be provided capable of being attached by means of a snaphook to the harness of the apparatus or to a separate belt in order to prevent the breathing apparatus becoming detached when the lifeline is operated.

Regulation 15

Ready Availability of Fire-Extinguishing Appliances

In all new and existing ships, fire-extinguishing appliances shall be kept in good order and available for immediate use at all times during the voyage.

Regulation 16

Acceptance of Substitutes

Where in this Chapter any special type of appliance, apparatus, extinguishing medium or arrangement is specified in any new and existing ships, any other type of appliance etc., may be allowed, provided the Administration is satisfied that it is not less effective.

PART B—FIRE SAFETY MEASURES FOR PASSENGER SHIPS CARRYING MORE THAN 36 PASSENGERS

Regulation 17

Structure

The hull, superstructure, structural bulkheads, decks and deckhouses shall be constructed of steel or other equivalent material. For the purpose of applying the definition of steel or other equivalent material as given in Regulation 3 (g) of this Chapter the “applicable fire exposure” shall be according to the integrity and insulation standards given in the tables of Regulation 20 of this Chapter. An example where divisions such as decks or sides and ends of deckhouses are permitted to have “B—O” fire integrity, the “applicable fire exposure” shall be one half-hour.

Provided that in cases where any part of the structure is of aluminium alloy, the following requirements shall apply:

(a) The insulation of aluminium alloy components of “A” or “B” Class divisions, except structure which in the opinion of the Administration is non-load-bearing, shall be such that the temperature of the structural core does not rise more than 200°C (360°F) above the ambient temperature at any time during the applicable fire exposure to the standard fire test.

(b) Special attention shall be given to the insulation of aluminium alloy components of columns, stanchions and other structural members required to support lifeboat and liferaft stowage, launching and embarkation areas, and “A” and “B” Class divisions to ensure:

(i) that for such members supporting lifeboat and liferaft areas and “A” Class divisions the temperature rise limitation specified in paragraph (a) of this Regulation shall apply at the end of one hour; and

(ii) that for such members required to support “B” Class divisions, the temperature rise limitation specified in paragraph (a) of this Regulation shall apply at the end of one half-hour.

(c) Crowns and casings of machinery spaces of Category A shall be of steel construction adequately insulated and openings therein, if any, shall be suitably arranged and protected to prevent the spread of fire.

Regulation 18

Main Vertical Zones and Horizontal Zones

(a) The hull, superstructure and deckhouses shall be subdivided into main vertical zones by “A” Class divisions. Steps and recesses shall be kept to a minimum, but where they are necessary, they shall also be “A” Class divisions. These divisions shall have insulation values in accordance with the applicable tables in Regulation 20 of this Chapter.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(b) As far as practicable, the bulkheads forming the boundaries of the main vertical zones above the bulkhead deck shall be in line with watertight subdivision bulkheads situated immediately below the bulkhead deck.

(c) Such bulkheads shall extend from deck to deck and to the shell or other boundaries.

(d) Where a main vertical zone is subdivided by horizontal “A” Class divisions into horizontal zones for the purpose of providing an appropriate barrier between sprinklered and non-sprinklered zones of the ship the divisions shall extend between adjacent main vertical zone bulkheads and to the shell or exterior boundaries of the ship and shall be insulated in accordance with the fire insulation and integrity values given in Table 3 of Regulation 20 of this Chapter.

(e) On ships designed for special purposes, such as automobile or railroad car ferries, where the provision of main vertical zone bulkheads would defeat the purpose for which the ship is intended, equivalent means for controlling and limiting a fire shall be substituted and specifically approved by the Administration.

Provided that in a ship with special category spaces, any such space shall comply with the applicable provisions of Regulation 30 of this Chapter, and in so far as such compliance would be inconsistent with compliance with other requirements of this Part of this Chapter, the requirements of Regulation 30 shall prevail.

Regulation 19

Bulkheads within a Main Vertical Zone

(a) All bulkheads which are not required to be “A” Class divisions shall be at least “B” Class or “C” Class divisions as prescribed in the tables in Regulation 20 of this Chapter. All such divisions may be faced with combustible materials in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 27 of this Chapter.

(b) All corridor bulkheads where not required to be “A” Class shall be “B” Class divisions which shall extend from deck to deck except:

(i) when continuous “B” Class ceilings and/or linings are fitted on both sides of the bulkhead, the portion of the bulkhead behind the continuous ceiling or lining shall be of material which in thickness and composition is acceptable in the construction of “B” Class divisions but which shall be required to meet “B” Class integrity standards only in so far as is reasonable and practicable in the opinion of the Administration;

(ii) in the case of a ship protected by an automatic sprinkler system complying with the provisions of Regulation 12 of this Chapter, the corridor bulkheads of “B” Class materials may terminate at a ceiling in the corridor provided such a ceiling is of material which in thickness and composition is acceptable in the construction of “B” Class divisions. Notwithstanding the requirements of Regulation 20 of this Chapter, such bulkheads and ceilings shall be required to meet “B” Class integrity standards only in so far as is reasonable and practicable in the opinion of the Administration. All doors and frames in such bulkheads shall be of incombustible materials and shall be constructed and erected so as to provide substantial fire resistance to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(c) All bulkheads required to be “B Class divisions, except corridor bulkheads, shall extend from deck to deck and to the shell or other boundaries unless continuous “B” Class ceilings and/or linings are fitted on both sides of the bulkhead in which case the bulkhead may terminate at the continuous ceiling or lining.

Regulation 20

Fire Integrity of Bulkheads and Decks

(a) In addition to complying with the specific provisions for fire integrity of bulkheads and decks mentioned elsewhere in the Regulations of this Part, the minimum fire integrity of all bulkheads and decks shall be as prescribed in Tables 1 to 4 in this Regulation. Where, due to any particular structural arrangements in the ship, difficulty is experienced in determining from the tables the minimum fire integrity value of any divisions, such values shall be determined to the satisfaction of the Administration.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(b) The following requirements shall govern application of the tables:

(i) Table 1 shall apply to bulkheads bounding main vertical zones or horizontal zones.

Table 2 shall apply to bulkheads not bounding either main vertical zones or horizontal zones.

Table 3 shall apply to decks forming steps in main vertical zones or bounding horizontal zones.

Table 4 shall apply to decks not forming steps in main vertical zones nor bounding horizontal zones.

(ii) For the purpose of determining the appropriate fire integrity standards to be applied to boundaries between adjacent spaces, such spaces are classified according to their fire risk as shown in Categories (1) to (14) below. Where the contents and use of a space are such that there is a doubt as to its classification for the purpose of this Regulation, it shall be treated as a space within the relevant category having the most stringent boundary requirements. The title of each category is intended to be typical rather than restrictive. The number in parentheses preceding each category refers to the applicable column or row number in the tables.

(1) Control Stations

Spaces containing emergency sources of power and lighting.

Wheelhouse and chartroom.

Spaces containing the ships’s radio equipment.

Fire control and recording stations.

Control room for propelling machinery when located outside the propelling machinery space.

Spaces containing centralized fire alarm equipment.

Spaces containing centralized emergency public address system stations and equipment.

(2) Stairways

Interior stairways, lifts and escalators (other than those wholly contained within the machinery spaces) for passengers and crew and enclosures thereto.

In this connexion, a stairway which is enclosed at only one level shall be regarded as part of the space from which it is not separated by a fire door.

(3) Corridors

Passenger and crew corridors.

(4) Lifeboat and Liferaft Handling and Embarkation Stations

Open deck spaces and enclosed promenades forming lifeboat and liferaft embarkation and lowering stations.

(5) Open Deck Spaces

Open deck spaces and enclosed promenades clear of lifeboat and liferaft embarkation and lowering stations.

Air space (the space outside superstructures and deckhouses).

(6) Accommodation Spaces of Minor Fire Risk

Cabins containing furniture and furnishings of restricted fire risk.

Public spaces containing furniture and furnishings of restricted fire risk.

Public spaces containing furniture and furnishings of restricted fire risk and having a deck area of less than 50 square metres (540 square feet).

Offices and dispensaries containing furniture and furnishings of restricted fire risk.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(7) Accommodation Spaces of Moderate Fire Risk

Same as (6) above but containing furniture and furnishings of other than restricted fire risk.

Public spaces containing furniture and furnishings of restricted fire risk and having a deck area of 50 square metres (540 square feet) and greater.

Isolated lockers and small store-rooms in accommodation spaces.

Sale shops.

Motion picture projection and film stowage rooms.

Diet kitchens (containing no open flame).

Cleaning gear lockers (in which inflammable liquids are not stowed).

Laboratories (in which inflammable liquids are not stowed).

Pharmacies.

Small drying rooms (having a deck area of 4 square metres (43 square feet) or less).

Specie rooms.

(8) Accommodation Spaces of Greater Fire Risk

Public spaces containing furniture and furnishings of other than restricted fire risk and having a deck area of 50 square metres (540 square feet) and greater.

Barber shops and beauty parlours.

(9) Sanitary and Similar Spaces

Communal sanitary facilities, showers, baths, water closets, etc.

Small laundry rooms.

Indoor swimming pool area.

Operating rooms.

Isolated serving pantries in accommodation spaces.

Private sanitary facilities shall be considered a portion of the space in which they are located.

(10) Tanks, Voids and Auxiliary Machinery Spaces having little or no Fire Risk

Water tanks forming part of the ship’s structure.

Voids and cofferdams.

Auxiliary machinery spaces which do not contain machinery having a pressure lubrication system and where storage of combustibles is prohibited, such as:

ventilation and air-conditioning rooms; windlass room; steering gear room; stabilizer equipment room; electrical propulsion motor room; rooms containing section switchboards and purely electrical equipment other than oil-filled electrical transformers (above 10 kVA); shaft alleys and pipe tunnels; spaces for pumps and refrigeration machinery (not handling or using inflammable liquids).

Closed trunks serving the spaces listed above.

Other closed trunks such as pipe and cable trunks.

(11) Auxiliary Machinery Spaces, Cargo Spaces, Special Category Spaces, Cargo and other Oil Tanks and other Similar Spaces of Moderate Fire Risk

Cargo oil tanks.

Cargo holds, trunkways and hatchways.

Refrigerated chambers.

Oil fuel tanks (where installed in a separate space with no machinery).

Shaft alleys and pipe tunnels allowing storage of combustibles.

Auxiliary machinery spaces as in Category (10) which contain machinery having a pressure lubrication system or where storage of combustibles is permitted.

Oil fuel filling stations.

Spaces containing oil-filled electrical transformers (above 10 kVA).

Spaces containing turbine and reciprocating steam engine driven auxiliary generators and small internal combustion engines of power output up to 112 kW driving emergency generators, sprinkler, drencher or fire pumps, bilge pumps, etc.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

Special category spaces (Tables 1 and 3 only apply).

Closed trunks serving the spaces listed above.

(12) Machinery Spaces and Main Galleys

Main propelling machinery rooms (other than electric propulsion motor rooms) and boiler rooms.

Auxiliary and machinery spaces other than those in Categories (10) and (11) which contain internal combustion machinery or other oil-burning, heating or pumping units.

Main galleys and annexes.

Trunks and casings to the spaces listed above.

(13) Store-rooms, Workshops, Pantries, etc.

Main pantries not annexed to galleys.

Main laundry.

Large drying rooms (having a deck area of more than 4 square metres (43 square feet)).

Miscellaneous stores.

Mail and baggage rooms.

Garbage rooms.

Workshops (not part of machinery spaces, galleys, etc.).

(14) Other Spaces in which Inflammable Liquids are stowed

Lamp rooms.

Paint rooms.

Store-rooms containing inflammable liquids (including dyes, medicines, etc.).

Laboratories (in which inflammable liquids are stowed).

(iii) Where a single value is shown for the fire integrity of a boundary between two spaces, that value shall apply in all cases.

(iv) In determining the applicable fire integrity standard of a boundary between two spaces within a main vertical zone or horizontal zone which is not protected by an automatic sprinkler system complying with the provisions of Regulation 12 of this Chapter or between such zones neither of which is so protected, the higher of the two values given in the tables shall apply.

(v) In determining the applicable fire integrity standard of a boundary between two spaces within a main vertical zone or horizontal zone which is protected by an automatic sprinkler system complying with the provisions of Regulation 12 of this Chapter or between such zones both of which are so protected, the lesser of the two values given in the tables shall apply. In instances where a sprinklered zone and a non-sprinklered zone meet within accommodation and service spaces, the higher of the two values given in the tables shall apply to the division between the zones.

(vi) Where adjacent spaces are in the same numerical category and the superscript “1” appears in the tables, a bulkhead or deck between such spaces need not be fitted if deemed unnecessary by the Administration. For example, in Category (12) a bulkhead need not be required between a galley and its annexed pantries provided the pantry bulkheads and decks maintain the integrity of the galley boundaries. A bulkhead is, however, required between a galley and a machinery space even though both spaces are in Category (12).

(vii) Where the superscript “2 “ appears in the tables, the lesser insulation value may be permitted only if at least one of the adjoining spaces is protected by an automatic sprinkler system complying with the provisions of Regulation 12 of this Chapter.

(viii) Notwithstanding the provisions of Regulation 19 of this Chapter, there are no special requirements for material or integrity of boundaries where only a dash appears in the tables.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(ix) The Administration shall determine in respect of Category (5) spaces whether the insulation values in Table 1 or 2 shall apply to ends of deckhouses and superstructures, and whether the insulation values in Table 3 or 4 shall apply to weather decks. In no case shall the requirements of Category (5) of Tables 1 to 4 necessitate enclosure of spaces which in the opinion of the Administration need not be enclosed.

(c) Continuous “B” Class ceilings or linings, in association with the relevant decks or bulkheads, may be accepted as contributing wholly or in part, to the required insulation and integrity of a division.

(d) In approving structural fire protection details, the Administration shall have regard to the risk of heat transmission at intersections and terminal points of required thermal barriers.

TABLE 1.—BULKHEADS BOUNDING MAIN VERTICAL ZONES OR HORIZONTAL ZONES

Spaces

 

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

Control stations...............

(1)

A-60

A-30

A-30

A-0

A-0

A-60

A-60

A-60

A-0

A-0

A-60

A-60

A-60

A-60

Stairways...................

(2)

 

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-15

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-60

A-15

A-0

A-0

A-30

A-60

A-15

A-0

A-60

Corridors...................

(3)

 

 

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-30

A-60

A-15

A-0

A-60

Lifeboat and liferaft handling and embarkation stations

(4)

 

 

 

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-60

A-0

A-60

Open deck spaces.............

(5)

 

 

 

 

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

Accommodation spaces of minor fire risk

(6)

 

 

 

 

 

A-15

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-15

A-0

A-30

A-15

A-0

A-30

Accommodation spaces of moderate fire risk

(7)

 

 

 

 

 

 

A-30

A-0

A-60

A-15

A-0

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-60

A-30

A-0

A-60

Accommodation spaces of greater fire risk

(8)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A-60

A-15

A-0

A-0

A-60

A-15

A-60

A-30

A-0

A-60

Sanitary and similar spaces.......

(9)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

Tanks, voids and auxiliary machinery spaces having little or no fire risk

(10)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

Auxiliary machinery spaces, cargo spaces, special category spaces, cargo and other oil tanks and other similar spaces of moderate fire risk

(11)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A-0

A-60

A-0

A-60

Machinery spaces and main galleys

(12)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A-60

A-302

A-15

A-60

Store-rooms, workshops, pantries, etc.

(13)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A-0

A-30

Other spaces in which inflammable liquids are stowed

(14)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A-60


TABLE 2.—BULKHEADS NOT BOUNDING EITHER MAIN VERTICAL ZONES OR HORIZONTAL ZONES

Spaces

 

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

Control stations..............

(1)

B-01

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

B-0

A-60

A-60

A-60

A-0

A-0

A-60

A-60

A-60

A-60

Stairways..................

(2)

 

A-01

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-15

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-15

A-30

A-15

A-0

A-30

Corridors...................

(3)

 

 

C

A-0

A-0

B-0

B-0

B-15

B-0

B-15

B-0

B-0

A-0

A-15

A-30

A-0

A-30

A-0

Lifeboat and liferaft handling and embarkation stations

(4)

 

 

 

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-15

A-0

A-15

A-0

Open deck space..............

(5)

 

 

 

 

A-0

B-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

B-0

Accommodation spaces of minor fire risk

(6)

 

 

 

 

 

B-0

C

B-15

C

B-15

C

B-0

C

A-0

A-0

A-15

A-30

A-0

A-30

A-0

Accommodation spaces of moderate fire risk

(7)

 

 

 

 

 

 

B-15

C

B-15

C

B-0

C

A-0

A-15

A-0

A-60

A-15

A-0

A-60

A-15

Accommodation spaces of greater fire risk

(8)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

B-15

C

B-0

C

A-0

A-30

A-0

A60

A-15

A-0

A-60

A-15

Sanitary and similar spaces.......

(9)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

C

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

Tanks, voids and auxiliary machinery spaces having little or no fire risk

(10)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A-01

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

Auxiliary machinery spaces, cargo spaces, cargo and other oil tanks and other similar spaces of moderate fire risk

(11)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A-01

A-0

A-0

A-302

A-15

Machinery spaces and main galleys

(12)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

.

A-0

A-0

A-60

Store-rooms, workshops, pantries, etc.

(13)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A-01

A-0

Other spaces in which inflammable liquids are stowed

(14)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A-302

A-15


TABLE 3.—DECKS FORMING STEPS IN MAIN VERTICAL ZONES OR BOUNDING HORIZONTAL ZONES

Space below Space above

 

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

Control stations..............

(1)

A-60

A-60

A-30

A-0

A-0

A-15

A-30

A-60

A-0

A-0

A-30

A-60

A-15

A-60

Stairways..................

(2)

A-15

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-15

A-0

A-15

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-60

A-0

A-60

 

(3)

A-30

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-15

A-0

A-15

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-60

A-0

A-60

Lifeboat and liferaft handling and embarkation stations

(4)

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

Open deck spaces.............

(5)

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

Accommodation spaces of minor fire risk

(6)

A-60

A-30

A-0

A-15

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-15

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-15

A-0

A-15

A-0

A-15

Accommodation spaces of moderate fire risk

(7)

A-60

A-60

A-15

A-30

A-0

A-15

A-0

A-0

A-15

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-60

A-15

A-0

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-30

Accommodation spaces of greater fire risk

(8)

A-60

A-60

A-15

A-60

A-15

A-60

A-15

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-60

A-15

A-60

A-15

A-0

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-60

A-15

A-0

A-60

Sanitary and similar spaces.......

(9)

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

Tanks, voids and auxiliary machinery spaces having little or no fire risk

(10)

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

Auxiliary machinery spaces, cargo spaces, special category spaces, cargo and other oil tanks and other similar spaces of moderate fire risk

(11)

A-60

A-60

A-60

A-60

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-60

A-15

A-60

A-15

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-30

A-302

A-0

A-30

Machinery spaces and main galleys

(12)

A-60

A-60

A-60

A-60

A-0

A-60

A-60

A-60

A-0

A-0

A-60

A-60

A-60

A-60

Store-rooms, workshops, pantries, etc.

(13)

A-60

A-60

A-15

A-30

A-0

A-15

A-0

A-15

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-60

A-15

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-30

Other spaces in which inflammable liquids are stowed.

(14)

A-60

A-60

A-60

A-60

A-0

A-60

A-60

A-60

A-0

A-0

A-60

A-60

A-60

A-60


TABLE 4.—DECKS NOT FORMING STEPS IN MAIN VERTICAL ZONES NOR BOUNDING HORIZONTAL ZONES

Space below Space above–

 

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

Control stations...............

(1)

A-30

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-15

A-0

A-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

A-15

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-60

A-0

A-60

A-15

Stairways...................

(2)

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-30

A-0

Corridors....................

(3)

A-15

A-0

A-0

A-01

B-01

A-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

B-0

A-15

B-0

A-15

B-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-30

A-0

Lifeboat and liferaft handling and embarkation stations

(4)

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

Open deck spaces..............

(5)

A-0

A-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

Accommodation spaces of minor fire risk

(6)

A-60

A-15

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

A-0

A-15

A-0

A-0

A-15

A-0

Accommodation spaces of moderate fire risk

(7)

A-60

A-30

A-0

A-15

A-0

A-15

A-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

B-0

A-15

B-0

A-30

B-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

A-15

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-0

A-30

A-0

Accommodation spaces of greater fire risk

(8)

A-60

A-60

A-15

A-60

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-0

B-0

A-15

B-0

A-30

B-0

A-60

B-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-0

A-30

A-0

Sanitary spaces and similar spaces...

(9)

A-0

A-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

Tanks, voids and auxiliary machinery spaces having little or no fire risk

(10)

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-01

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

Auxiliary machinery spaces, cargo spaces, cargo and other oil tanks and other similar spaces of moderate fire risk

(11)

A-60

A-60

A-15

A-60

A-15

A-30

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-15

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-01

A-0

A-0

A-302

A-15

Machinery spaces and main galleys

(12)

A-60

A-60

A-60

A-60

A-0

A-60

A-60

A-60

A-0

A-0

A-30

A-301

A-0

A-60

Store-rooms, workshops, pantries, etc.

(13)

A-60

A-30

A-0

A-15

A-0

A-15

A-0

A-0

B-0

A-15

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-0

B-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-152

A-0

Other spaces in which inflammable liquids are stowed

(14)

A-60

A-60

A-30

A-60

A-30

A-60

A-0

A-30

A-0

A-60

A-15

A-60

A-15

A-0

A-0

A-302

A-0

A-302

A-0

A-0

A-302

A-0

SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

Regulation 21

Means of Escape

(a) In and from all passenger and crew spaces and in spaces in which the crew is normally employed, other than machinery spaces, stairways and ladders shall be arranged to provide ready means of escape to the lifeboat and liferaft embarkation deck. In particular, the following provisions shall be complied with:

(i) Below the bulkhead deck, two means of escape, at least one of which shall be independent of watertight doors, shall be provided from each watertight compartment or similarly restricted space or group of spaces. Exceptionally, the Administration may dispense with one of the means of escape, due regard being paid to the nature and location of spaces and to the number of persons who normally might be quartered or employed there.

(ii) Above the bulkhead deck, there shall be at least two means of escape from each main vertical zone or similarly restricted space or group of spaces at least one of which shall give access to a stairway forming a vertical escape.

(iii) At least one of the means of escape required by sub-paragraphs (a) (i) and (ii) of this Regulation shall be by means of a readily accessible enclosed stairway, which shall provide continuous fire shelter from the level of its origin to the appropriate lifeboat and liferaft embarkation decks or the highest level served by the stairway, whichever level is the highest. However, where an Administration has granted dispensation under the provisions of sub-paragraph (a) (i) of this Regulation the sole means of escape shall provide safe escape to the satisfaction of the Administration. The width, number and continuity of the stairways shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(iv) Protection of access from the stairway enclosures to the lifeboat and liferaft embarkation areas shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(v) Lifts shall not be considered as forming one of the required means of escape.

(vi) Stairways serving only a space and a balcony in that space shall not be considered as forming one of the required means of escape.

(vii) If a radiotelegraph station has no direct access to the weather deck, two means of escape shall be provided from such station.

(viii) Dead-end corridors exceeding 13 metres (43 feet) shall not be permitted.

(b) (i) In special category spaces the number and disposition of the means of escape both below and above the bulkhead deck shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration, and in general the safety of access to the embarkation deck shall be at least equivalent to that provided for under sub-paragraphs (a) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv) and (v) of this Regulation.

(ii) One of the escape routes from the machinery spaces where the crew is normally employed shall avoid direct access to any special category space.

(c) Two means of escape shall be provided from each machinery space. In particular, the following provisions shall be complied with:

(i) Where the space is below the bulkhead deck the two means of escape shall consist of either

(1) two sets of steel ladders as widely separated as possible, leading to doors in the upper part of the space similarly separated and from which access is provided to the appropriate lifeboat and liferaft embarkation decks. One of these ladders shall provide continuous fire shelter from the lower part of the space to a safe position outside the space; or

(2) one steel ladder leading to a door in the upper part of the space from which access is provided to the embarkation deck and a steel door capable of being operated from each side and which provides a safe escape route to the embarkation deck.

(ii) Where the space is above the bulkhead deck, two means of escape shall be as widely separated as possible and the doors leading from such means of escape shall be in a position from which access is provided to the appropriate lifeboat and liferaft embarkation decks. Where such escapes require the use of ladders these shall be of steel.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

Provided that in a ship of less than 1,000 tons gross tonnage, the Administration may dispense with one of the means of escape due regard being paid to the width and disposition of the upper part of the space; and in a ship of 1,000 tons gross tonnage and above, the Administration may dispense with one means of escape from any such space so long as either a door or a steel ladder provides a safe escape route to the embarkation deck due regard being paid to the nature and location of the space and whether persons are normally employed in that space.

Regulation 22

Protection of Stairways and Lifts in Accommodation and Service Spaces

(a) All stairways shall be of steel frame construction except where the Administration sanctions the use of other equivalent material, and shall be within enclosures formed of “A” Class divisions, with positive means of closure at all openings, except that:

(i) a stairway connecting only two decks need not be enclosed, provided the integrity of the deck is maintained by proper bulkheads or doors at one between deck space. When a stairway is closed at one between deck space, the stairway enclosure shall be protected in accordance with the tables for decks in Regulation 20 of this Chapter;

(ii) stairways may be fitted in the open in a public space, provided they lie wholly within such public space.

(b) Stairway enclosures shall have direct communication with the corridors and be of sufficient area to prevent congestion, having in view the number of persons likely to use them in an emergency. In so far as practicable, stairway enclosures shall not give direct access to cabins, service lockers, or other enclosed spaces containing combustibles in which a fire is likely to originate.

(c) Lift trunks shall be so fitted as to prevent the passage of smoke and flame from one between deck to another and shall be provided with means of closing so as to permit the control of draught and smoke.

Regulation 23

Openings in “A” Class Divisions

(a) Where “A” Class divisions are pierced for the passage of electric cables, pipes, trunks, ducts, etc., for girders, beams or other structures, arrangements shall be made to ensure that the fire resistance is not impaired, subject to the provisions of paragraph (g) of this Regulation.

(b) Where of necessity, a ventilation duct passes through a main vertical zone bulkhead, a fail-safe automatic closing fire damper shall be fitted adjacent to the bulkhead. The damper shall also be capable of being manually closed from each side of the bulkhead. The operating position shall be readily accessible and be marked in red light-reflecting colour. The duct between the bulkhead and the damper shall be of steel or other equivalent material and, if necessary, to an insulating standard such as to comply with paragraph (a) of this Regulation. The damper shall be fitted on at least one side of the bulkhead with a visible indicator showing if the damper is in the open position.

(c) Except for hatches between cargo, special category, store, and baggage spaces, and between such spaces and the weather decks, all openings shall be provided with permanently attached means of closing which shall be at least as effective for resisting fires as the divisions in which they are fitted.

(d) The construction of all doors and door frames in “A” Class divisions, with the means of securing them when closed, shall provide resistance to fire as well as to the passage of smoke and flame, as far as practicable, equivalent to that of the bulkheads in which the doors are situated. Such doors and door frames shall be constructed of steel or other equivalent material. Watertight doors need not be insulated.

(e) It shall be possible for each door to be opened and closed from each side of the bulkhead by one person only.

(f) Fire doors in main vertical zone bulkheads and stairway enclosures, other than power-operated watertight doors and those which are normally locked, shall be of the self-closing type capable of closing against an inclination of 3½ degrees opposing closure. The


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

speed of door closure shall, if necessary, be controlled so as to prevent undue danger to personnel. All such doors, except those that are normally closed, shall be capable of release from a control station, either simultaneously or in groups, and also individually from a position at the door. The release mechanism shall be so designed that the door will automatically close in the event of disruption of the control system; however, approved power-operated watertight doors will be considered acceptable for this purpose. Holdback hooks, not subject to control station release, will not be permitted. When double swing doors are permitted, they shall have a latch arrangement which is automatically engaged by the operation of the door release system.

(g) Where a space is protected by an automatic sprinkler system complying with the provisions of Regulation 12 of this Chapter or fitted with a continuous “B” Class ceiling, openings in decks not forming steps in main vertical zones nor bounding horizontal zones shall be closed reasonably tight and such decks shall meet the “A” Class integrity requirements in so far as is reasonable and practicable in the opinion of the Administration.

(h) The requirements for “A” Class integrity of the outer boundaries of a ship shall not apply to glass partitions, windows and sidescuttles. Similarly, the requirements for “A” Class integrity shall not apply to exterior doors in superstructures and deckhouses.

Regulation 24

Openings in BClass Divisions

(a) Where “B” Class divisions are penetrated for the passage of electrical cables, pipes, trunks, ducts, etc., or for the fitting of ventilation terminals, lighting fixtures and similar devices, arrangements shall be made to ensure that the fire resistance is not impaired.

(b) Doors and door frames in “B” Class divisions and means of securing them shall provide a method of closure which shall have resistance to fire as far as practicable equivalent to the divisions except that ventilation openings may be permitted in the lower portion of such doors. Where such opening is in or under a door the total net area of any such opening or openings shall not exceed 0.05 square metres (78 square inches). When such opening is cut in a door it shall be fitted with a grill made of non-combustible material. Doors shall be non-combustible.

(c) The requirements for “B” Class integrity of the outer boundaries of a ship shall not apply to glass partitions, windows and sidescuttles. Similarly, the requirements for “B” Class integrity shall not apply to exterior doors in superstructures and deckhouses.

(d) Where an automatic sprinkler system complying with the provisions of Regulation 12 of this Chapter is fitted:

(i) openings in decks not forming steps in main vertical zones nor bounding horizontal zones shall be closed reasonably tight and such decks shall meet the “B” Class integrity requirements in so far as is reasonable and practicable in the opinion of the Administration; and

(ii) openings in corridor bulkheads of “B” Class materials shall be protected in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 19 of this Chapter.

Regulation 25

Ventilation Systems

(a) In general, the ventilation fans shall be so disposed that the ducts reaching the various spaces remain within the main vertical zone.

(b) Where ventilation systems penetrate decks, precautions shall be taken, in addition to those relating to the fire integrity of the deck required by Regulation 23 of this Chapter, to reduce the likelihood of smoke and hot gases passing from one between deck space to another through the system. In addition to insulation requirements contained in this Regulation, vertical ducts shall, if necessary, be insulated as required by the appropriate tables in Regulation 20 of this Chapter.

(c) The main inlets and outlets of all ventilation systems shall be capable of being closed from outside the space being ventilated.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(d) Except in cargo spaces, ventilation ducts shall be constructed of the following materials:

(i) Ducts not less than 0.075 square metres (116 square inches) in sectional area and all vertical ducts serving more than a single between deck space shall be constructed of steel or other equivalent material.

(ii) Ducts less than 0.075 square metres (116 square inches) in sectional area shall be constructed of non-combustible materials. Where such ducts penetrate “A” or “B” Class divisions due regard shall be given to ensuring the fire integrity of the division.

(iii) Short lengths of duct, not in general exceeding 0.02 square metres (31 square inches) in sectional area nor 2 metres (79 inches) in length, need not be incombustible provided that all of the following conditions are met:

(1) the duct is constructed of a material of restricted fire risk to the satisfaction of the Administration;

(2) the duct is used only at the terminal end of the ventilation system; and

(3) the duct is not located closer than 0.6 metres (24 inches) measured along its length to a penetration of an “A” or “B” Class division, including continuous “B” Class ceilings.

(e) Where a stairway enclosure is ventilated, the duct or ducts (if any) shall be taken from the fan room independently of other ducts in the ventilation system and shall not serve any other space.

(f) All power ventilation, except machinery and cargo spaces ventilation and any alternative system which may be required under paragraph (h) of this Regulation, shall be fitted with controls so grouped that all fans may be stopped from either of two separate positions which shall be situated as far apart as practicable. Controls provided for the power ventilation serving machinery spaces shall also be grouped so as to be operable from two positions, one of which shall be outside such spaces. Fans serving power ventilation systems to cargo spaces shall be capable of being stopped from a safe position outside such spaces.

(g) Where they pass through accommodation spaces or spaces containing combustible materials the exhaust ducts from galley ranges shall be constructed of “A” Class divisions. Each exhaust duct shall be fitted with:

(i) a grease trap readily removable for cleaning;

(ii) a fire damper located in the lower end of the duct;

(iii) arrangements, operable from within the galley, for shutting off the exhaust fan; and

(iv) fixed means for extinguishing a fire within the duct.

(h) Such measures as are practicable shall be taken in respect of control stations outside machinery spaces in order to ensure that ventilation, visibility and freedom from smoke are maintained, so that in the event of fire the machinery and equipment contained therein may be supervised and continue to function effectively. Alternative and separate means of air supply shall be provided; air inlets of the two sources of supply shall be so disposed that the risk of both inlets drawing in smoke simultaneously is minimized. At the discretion of the Administration, such requirements need not apply to control stations situated on, and opening on to, an open deck, or where local closing arrangements would be equally effective.

(i) Ducts provided for ventilation of machinery spaces of Category A shall not in general pass through accommodation, service spaces or control stations, except that the Administration may permit relaxation from this requirement, provided that:

(i) the ducts are constructed of steel, and are insulated to “A-60” standard; or

(ii) the ducts are constructed of steel and are fitted with an automatic fire damper close to the boundary penetrated and are insulated to “A-60” standard from the machinery space to a point at least 5 metres (16 feet) beyond the fire damper.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(j) Ducts provided for ventilation of accommodation, service spaces, or control stations shall not in general pass through machinery spaces of Category A, except that the Administration may permit relaxation from this requirement provided that the ducts are constructed of steel and automatic fire dampers are fitted close to the boundaries penetrated.

Regulation 26

Windows and Sidescuttles

(a) All windows and sidescuttles in bulkheads within accommodation and service spaces and control stations other than those to which the provisions of paragraph (h) of Regulation 23 and paragraph (c) of Regulation 24 of this Chapter apply, shall be constructed so as to preserve the integrity requirements of the type of bulkheads in which they are fitted.

(b) Notwithstanding the requirements of the tables in Regulation 20 of this Chapter:

(i) All windows and sidescuttles in bulkheads separating accommodation and service spaces and control stations from weather shall be constructed with frames of steel or other suitable material. The glass shall be retained by a metal glazing bead or angle.

(ii) Special attention shall be given to the fire integrity of windows facing open or enclosed lifeboat and liferaft embarkation areas and to windows situated below such areas in such a position that their failure during a fire would impede the launching of, or embarkation into, lifeboats or liferafts.

Regulation 27

Restriction of Combustible Materials

(a) Except in cargo spaces, mail rooms, baggage rooms, or refrigerated compartments of service spaces, all linings, grounds, ceilings and insulations shall be of non-combustible materials. Partial bulkheads or decks used to subdivide a space for utility or artistic treatment shall also be of non-combustible material.

(b) Vapour barriers and adhesives used in conjunction with insulation, as well as insulation of pipe fittings, for cold service systems need not be non-combustible, but they shall be kept to the minimum quantity practicable and their exposed surfaces shall have qualities of resistance to the propagation of flame to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(c) Bulkheads, linings and ceilings in all accommodation and service spaces may have combustible veneer, provided that such veneer shall not exceed 2 millimetres (1/12 inch) within any such spaces except corridors, stairway enclosures and control stations where it shall not exceed 1.5 millimetres (1/17 inch).

(d) The total volume of combustible facings, mouldings, decorations and veneers in any accommodation and service space shall not exceed a volume equivalent to 2.5 millimetres (1/10 inch) veneer on the combined area of the walls and ceilings. In the case of ships fitted with an automatic sprinkler system complying with the provisions of Regulation 12 of this Chapter, the above volume may include some combustible material used for erection of “C” Class divisions.

(e) All exposed surfaces in corridors or stairway enclosures and surfaces in concealed or inaccessible spaces in accommodation and service spaces and control stations shall have low flame-spread characteristics.*

(f) Furniture in the passages and stairway enclosures shall be kept to a minimum.

(g) Paints, varnishes and other finishes used on exposed interior surfaces shall not be of a nature to offer an undue fire hazard in the judgment of the Administration and shall not be capable of producing excessive quantities of smoke or other toxic properties.

* Reference is made to Guidelines on the Evaluation of Fire Hazard Properties of Materials, adopted by the Organization by Resolution A.166 (ES.IV).


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(h) Primary deck coverings, if applied, within accommodation and service spaces and control stations, shall be of approved material which will not readily ignite, or give rise to toxic or explosive hazards at elevated temperatures.*

(i) Waste-paper receptacles shall be constructed of non-combustible materials and with solid sides and bottoms.

Regulation 28

Miscellaneous Items

Requirements Applicable to all Portions of the Ship

(a) Pipes penetrating “A” or “B” Class divisions shall be of a material approved by the Administration having regard to the temperature such divisions are required to withstand. Pipes conveying oil or combustible liquids shall be of a material approved by the Administration having regard to the fire risk. Materials readily rendered ineffective by heat shall not be used for overboard scuppers, sanitary discharges, and other outlets which are close to the water-line and where the failure of the material in the event of fire would give rise to danger of flooding.

Requirements Applicable to Accommodation and Service Spaces, Control Stations, Corridors and Stairways

(b) (i) Air spaces enclosed behind ceilings, panelling or linings shall be suitably divided by close-fitting draught stops not more than 14 metres (46 feet) apart.

(ii) In the vertical direction, such spaces, including those behind linings of stairways, trunks, etc., shall be closed at each deck.

(c) The construction of ceiling and bulkheading shall be such that it will be possible, without impairing the efficiency of the fire protection, for the fire patrols to detect any smoke originating in concealed and inaccessible places, except where in the opinion of the Administration there is no risk of fire originating in such places.

Regulation 29

Automatic Sprinkler and Fire Alarm and Fire Detection Systems or Automatic Fire Alarm and Fire Detection Systems

In any ship to which this Part applies there shall be installed throughout each separate zone, whether vertical or horizontal, in all accommodation and service spaces and, where it is considered necessary by the Administration, in control stations, except spaces which afford no substantial fire risk (such as void spaces, sanitary spaces, etc.) either:

(i) an automatic sprinkler and fire alarm and fire detection system of an approved type, complying with the provisions of Regulation 12 of this Chapter and installed and so arranged as to protect such spaces; or

(ii) an automatic fire alarm and fire detection system of an approved type, complying with the provisions of Regulation 13 of this Chapter, and installed and so arranged as to detect the presence of fire in such spaces.

Regulation 30

Protection of Special Category Spaces

Provisions Applicable to Special Category Spaces whether above or below the Bulkhead Deck

(a) General

(i) The basic principle underlying the provisions in this Regulation is that as normal main vertical zoning may not be practicable in special category spaces, equivalent protection must be obtained in such spaces on the basis of a horizontal zone concept and the provision of an efficient fixed fire-extinguishing system. Under this concept a horizontal zone for the purpose of this Regulation may include special category spaces on more than one deck provided that the overall height of the zone does not exceed 10 metres (33 feet).

* Reference is made to Improved Provisional Guidelines on Test Procedures for Primary Deck Coverings, adopted by the Organization by Resolution A.214 (VII).


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(ii) All requirements laid down in Regulations 23 and 25 of this Chapter for maintaining the integrity of vertical zones shall be applied equally to decks and bulkheads forming the boundaries separating horizontal zones from each other and from the remainder of the ship.

(b) Structural Protection

(i) Boundary bulkheads of special category spaces shall be insulated as required for Category (11) spaces in Table 1 of Regulation 20 of this Chapter and the horizontal boundaries as required for Category (11) spaces in Table 3 of that Regulation.

(ii) Indicators shall be provided on the navigating bridge which shall indicate when any fire door leading to or from the special category spaces is closed.

(c) Fixed Fire-Extinguishing System*

Each special category space shall be fitted with an approved fixed pressure waterspraying system for manual operation which shall protect all parts of any deck and vehicle platform, if any, in such space, provided that the Administration may permit the use of any other fixed fire-extinguishing system that has been shown by full-scale test in conditions simulating a flowing petrol fire in a special category space to be not less effective in controlling fires likely to occur in such a space.

(d) Patrols and Detection

(i) An efficient patrol system shall be maintained in special category spaces. In any such space in which the patrol is not maintained by a continuous fire watch at all times during the voyage there shall be provided in that space an automatic fire detection system of an approved type.

(ii) Manual fire alarms shall be provided as necessary throughout the special category spaces and one shall be placed close to each exit from such spaces.

(e) Fire-Extinguishing Equipment

There shall be provided in each special category space:

(i) a number of hydrants with hoses and dual-purpose nozzles of an approved type so arranged that at least two jets of water each from a single length of hose not emanating from the same hydrant may reach any part of such space;

(ii) at least three water fog applicators;

(iii) one portable applicator unit complying with the provisions of Regulation 7 (d) of this Chapter, provided that at least two such units are available in the ship for use in such spaces; and

(iv) such number of portable fire extinguishers of an approved type as the Administration may deem sufficient.

(f) Ventilation System

(i) There shall be provided an effective power ventilation system for the special category spaces sufficient to give at least 10 air changes per hour. The system for such spaces shall be entirely separated from other ventilation systems and shall be operating at all times when vehicles are in such spaces. The Administration may require an increased number of air changes when vehicles are being loaded and unloaded.

(ii) The ventilation shall be such as to prevent air stratification and the formation of air pockets.

(iii) Means shall be provided to indicate on the navigating bridge any loss or reduction of the required ventilating capacity.

* Reference is made to Recommendation on Fixed Fire Extinguishing Systems for Special Category Spaces adopted by the Organisation by Resolution A. 123(V).


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

Additional Provisions Applicable only to Special Category Spaces above the Bulkhead Deck

(g) Scuppers

In view of the serious loss of stability which could arise due to large quantities of water accumulating on the deck or decks consequent on the operation of the fixed pressure water-spraying system, scuppers shall be fitted so as to ensure that such water is rapidly discharged directly overboard.

(h) Precautions against Ignition of Inflammable Vapours

(i) Equipment which may constitute a source of ignition of inflammable vapours and in particular electrical equipment and wiring, shall be installed at least 450 millimetres (18 inches) above the deck, provided that if the Administration is satisfied that the installation of such electrical equipment and wiring below this level is necessary for the safe operation of the ship, such electrical equipment and wiring shall be of a type approved for use in an explosive petrol and air mixture. Electrical equipment installed at more than 450 millimetres (18 inches) above the deck shall be of a type so enclosed and protected as to prevent the escape of sparks. The reference to a level of 450 millimetres (18 inches) above the deck shall be construed to mean each deck on which vehicles are carried and on which explosive vapours might be expected to accumulate.

(ii) Electrical equipment and wiring, if installed in an exhaust ventilation duct, shall be of a type approved for use in explosive petrol and air mixtures and the outlet from any exhaust duct shall be sited in a safe position, having regard to other possible sources of ignition.

 

Additional Provisions applicable only to Special Category Spaces below the Bulkhead Deck

(i) Bilge Pumping and Drainage

In view of the serious loss of stability which could arise due to large quantities of water accumulating on the deck or tank top consequent on the operation of the fixed pressure water-spraying system, the Administration may require pumping and drainage facilities to be provided additional to the requirements of Regulation 18 of Chapter II-1 of the present Convention.

(j) Precautions against Ignition of Inflammable Vapours

(i) Electrical equipment and wiring, if fitted, shall be of a type suitable for use in explosive petrol and air mixtures. Other equipment which may constitute a source of ignition of inflammable vapours shall not be permitted.

(ii) Electrical equipment and wiring, if installed in an exhaust ventilation duct, shall be of a type approved for use in explosive petrol and air mixtures and the outlet from any exhaust duct shall be sited in a safe position, having regard to other possible sources of ignition.

 

Regulation 31

Protection of Cargo Spaces other than Special Category Spaces intended for the Carriage of Motor Vehicles with Fuel in their Tanks for their own Propulsion

In any cargo space (other than special category spaces) containing motor vehicles with fuel in their tanks for their own propulsion, the following provisions shall be complied with:

(a) Fire Detection

There shall be provided an approved fire detection and fire alarm system.

(b) Fire-Extinguishing Arrangements

(i) There shall be fitted a fixed gas fire-extinguishing system which shall comply with the provisions of Regulation 8 of this Chapter, except that if a carbon dioxide system is fitted, the quantity of gas available shall be at least sufficient to give a minimum volume of free gas equal to 45 per cent of the gross volume of the largest of such cargo spaces which is capable of being sealed, and the arrangements shall be such as to ensure that the gas is introduced rapidly and effectively into the space. Any other fixed gas fire-extinguishing system or fixed high expansion froth fire-extinguishing system may be fitted provided it gives equivalent protection.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(ii) There shall be provided for use in any such space such number of portable fire extinguishers of an approved type as the Administration may deem sufficient.

(c) Ventilation System

(i) In any such cargo space there shall be provided an effective power ventilation system sufficient to give at least 10 air changes per hour. The system for such cargo spaces shall be entirely separated from other ventilation systems and shall be operating at all times when vehicles are in such spaces.

(ii) The ventilation shall be such as to prevent air stratification and the formation of air pockets.

(iii) Means shall be provided to indicate on the navigating bridge any loss or reduction of the required ventilating capacity.

(d) Precautions against Ignition of Inflammable Vapours

(i) Electrical equipment and wiring, if fitted, shall be of a type suitable for use in explosive petrol and air mixtures. Other equipment which may constitute a source of ignition of inflammable vapours shall not be permitted.

(ii) Electrical equipment and wiring, if installed in an exhaust ventilation duct, shall be of a type approved for use in explosive petrol and air mixtures and the outlet from any exhaust duct shall be sited in a safe position, having regard to other possible sources of ignition.

 

Regulation 32

Maintenance of Fire Patrols, etc., and Provision for Fire-Extinguishing Equipment (a) Fire Patrols and Detection, Alarms and Public Address Systems

(i) An efficient patrol system shall be maintained so that an outbreak of fire may be promptly detected. Each member of the fire patrol shall be trained to be familiar with the arrangements of the ship as well as the location and operation of any equipment he may be called upon to use.

(ii) Manual alarms shall be fitted throughout the accommodation and service spaces to enable the fire patrol to give an alarm immediately to the navigating bridge or main fire control station.

(iii) An approved fire alarm or fire detecting system shall be provided which will automatically indicate at one or more suitable points or stations the presence or indication of fire and its location in any cargo space which, in the opinion of the Administration, is not accessible to the patrol system, except where it is shown to the satisfaction of the Administration that the ship is engaged on voyages of such short duration that it would be unreasonable to apply this requirement.

(iv) The ship shall at all times when at sea, or in port (except when out of service), be so manned or equipped as to ensure that any initial fire alarm is immediately received by a responsible member of the crew.

(v) A special alarm, operated from the navigating bridge or fire control station, shall be fitted to summon the crew. This alarm may be part of the ship’s general alarm system but it shall be capable of being sounded independently of the alarm to the passenger spaces.

(vi) A public address system or other effective means of communication shall be available throughout the accommodation and service spaces and control stations.

(b) Fire Pumps and Fire Main System

The ship shall be provided with fire pumps, fire main system, hydrants and hoses complying with the provisions of Regulation 5 of this Chapter and shall comply with the following requirements.

(i) In a ship of 4,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards, there shall be provided at least three independently-driven fire pumps and, in a ship of less than 4,000 tons gross tonnage, at least two such fire pumps.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(ii) In a ship of 1,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards, the arrangement of sea connexions, fire pumps and sources of power for operating them shall be such as to ensure that a fire in any one compartment will not put all the fire pumps out of action.

(iii) In a ship of 1,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards, the arrangement of fire pumps, fire mains and hydrants shall be such that at least one effective jet of water as stipulated in paragraph (c) of Regulation 5 of this Chapter is immediately available from any one hydrant in an interior location. Arrangements shall also be made to ensure the continuation of the output of water by the automatic starting of a required fire pump.

(iv) In a ship of less than 1,000 tons gross tonnage the arrangements shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(c) Fire Hydrants, Hoses and Nozzles

(i) The ship shall be provided with fire hoses the number and diameter of which shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration. There shall be at least one fire hose for each of the hydrants required by paragraph (d) of Regulation 5 of this Chapter and these hoses shall be used only for the purposes of extinguishing fires or testing the fire-extinguishing apparatus at fire drills and surveys.

(ii) In accommodation and service spaces and in machinery spaces, the number and position of hydrants shall be such that the requirements of paragraph (d) of Regulation 5 of this Chapter may be complied with when all watertight doors and all doors in main vertical zone bulkheads are closed.

(iii) The arrangements shall be such that at least two jets of water can reach any part of any cargo space when empty.

(iv) All required hydrants in machinery spaces shall be fitted with hoses having in addition to the nozzles required in paragraph (g) of Regulation 5 of this Chapter nozzles suitable for spraying water on oil, or alternatively dual-purpose nozzles. Additionally, each machinery space of Category A shall be provided with at least two suitable water fog applicators.*

(v) Water spray nozzles or dual-purpose nozzles shall be provided for at least one quarter of the number of hoses required in parts of the ship other than machinery spaces.

(vi) For each pair of breathing apparatus there shall be provided one water fog applicator which shall be stored adjacent to such apparatus.

(vii) Where, in any machinery space of Category A, access is provided at a low level from an adjacent shaft tunnel, two hydrants fitted with hoses with dual-purpose nozzles shall be provided external to, but near the entrance to that machinery space. Where such access is not provided from a tunnel but is provided from other space or spaces there shall be provided in one of those spaces two hydrants fitted with hoses with dual-purpose nozzles near the entrance to the machinery space of Category A. Such provision need not be made when the tunnel or adjacent spaces are not part of an escape route.

(d) International Shore Connexion

(i) A ship of 1,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards shall be provided with at least one international shore connexion, complying with the provisions of paragraph (h) of Regulation 5 of this Chapter.

(ii) Facilities shall be available enabling such a connexion to be used on either side of the ship.

* A water fog applicator might consist of a metal “L”-shaped pipe, the long limb being about 2 metres (6 feet) in length capable of being fitted to a firehose and the short limb being about 250 millimetres (10 inches) in length fitted with a fixed water fog nozzle or capable of being fitted with a water spray nozzle.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(e) Portable Fire Extinguishers in Accommodation and Service Spaces and Control Stations

The ship shall be provided in accommodation and service spaces and control stations with such approved portable fire extinguishers as the Administration may deem to be appropriate and sufficient.

(f) Fixed Fire-Extinguishing Arrangements in Cargo Spaces

(i) The cargo spaces of ships of 1,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards shall be protected by a fixed gas fire-extinguishing system complying with the provisions of Regulation 8 of this Chapter, or by a fixed high expansion froth fire-extinguishing system which gives equivalent protection.

(ii) Where it is shown to the satisfaction of the Administration that a ship is engaged on voyages of such short duration that it would be unreasonable to apply the requirements of sub-paragraph (i) of this paragraph and also in ships of less than 1,000 tons gross tonnage, the arrangements in cargo spaces shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(g) Fire-Extinguishing Appliances in Boiler Rooms, etc.

Spaces containing oil-fired boilers or oil fuel units shall be provided with the following arrangements:

(i) There shall be any one of the following fixed fire-extinguishing systems:

(1) A pressure water-spraying system complying with the provisions of Regulation 11 of this Chapter.

(2) A gas system complying with the provisions of Regulation 8 of this Chapter.

(3) A froth system complying with the provisions of Regulation 9 of this Chapter.

(4) A high expansion froth system complying with the provisions of Regulation 10 of this Chapter.

In each case if the engine and boiler rooms are not entirely separate, or if fuel oil can drain from the boiler room into the engine room, the combined engine and boiler rooms shall be considered as one compartment.

(ii) There shall be in each boiler room at least one set of portable air-froth equipment complying with the provisions of paragraph (d) of Regulation 7 of this Chapter.

(iii) There shall be at least two approved portable extinguishers discharging froth or equivalent in each firing space in each boiler room and each space in which a part of the oil fuel installation is situated. There shall be not less than one approved froth-type extinguisher of at least 136 litres (30 gallons) capacity or equivalent in each boiler room. These extinguishers shall be provided with hoses on reels suitable for reaching any part of the boiler room.

(iv) In each firing space there shall be a receptacle containing sand, sawdust impregnated with soda or other approved dry material, in such quantity as may be required by the Administration. Alternatively an approved portable extinguisher may be substituted therefor.

(h) Fire-Extinguishing Appliances in Spaces containing Internal Combustion Type Machinery

Spaces containing internal combustion machinery used either for main propulsion, or for other purposes when such machinery has in the aggregate a total power output of not less than 373 kW, shall be provided with the following arrangements:

(i) There shall be one of the fire-extinguishing systems required by sub-paragraph (g) (i) of this Regulation.

(ii) There shall be at least one set of portable air-froth equipment complying with the provisions of paragraph (d) of Regulation 7 of this Chapter.

(iii) There shall be in each such space approved froth-type fire extinguishers each of at least 45 litres (10 gallons) capacity or equivalent sufficient in number to enable froth or its equivalent to be directed on to any part of the fuel and lubricating oil


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

pressure systems, gearing and other fire hazards. In addition, there shall be provided a sufficient number of portable froth extinguishers or equivalent which shall be so located that an extinguisher is not more than 10 metres (33 feet) walking distance from any point in the space; provided that there shall be at least two such extinguishers in each such space.

(i) Fire-Extinguishing Arrangements in Spaces containing Steam Turbines or enclosed Steam Engines

In spaces containing steam turbines or enclosed steam engines used either for main propulsion or for other purposes when such machinery has in the aggregate a total power output of not less than 373 kW:

(i) There shall be provided froth fire extinguishers each of at least 45 litres (10 gallons) capacity or equivalent sufficient in number to enable froth or its equivalent to be directed on to any part of the pressure lubrication system, on to any part of the casings enclosing pressure lubricated parts of the turbines, engines or associated gearing, and any other fire hazards. Provided that such extinguishers shall not be required if protection at least equivalent to this sub-paragraph is provided in such spaces by a fixed fire-extinguishing system fitted in compliance with sub-paragraph (g) (i) of this Regulation.

(ii) There shall be provided a sufficient number of portable froth extinguishers or equivalent which shall be so located that an extinguisher is not more than 10 metres (33 feet) walking distance from any point in the space; provided that there shall be at least two such extinguishers in each such space, and such extinguishers shall not be required in addition to any provided in compliance with sub-paragraph (h) (iii) of this Regulation.

(j) Fire-Extinguishing Appliances in other Machinery Spaces

Where, in the opinion of the Administration, a fire hazard exists in any machinery space for which no specific provisions for fire-extinguishing appliances are prescribed in paragraphs (g), (h) and (i) of this Regulation there shall be provided in, or adjacent to, that space such number of approved portable fire extinguishers or other means of fire extinction as the Administration may deem sufficient.

(k) Fixed Fire-Extinguishing Appliances not required by this Part

Where a fixed fire-extinguishing system not required by this Part of this Chapter is installed, such a system shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(l) Special Requirements for Machinery Spaces

(i) For any machinery space of Category A to which access is provided at a low level from an adjacent shaft tunnel there shall be provided in addition to any watertight door and on the side remote from that machinery space a light steel fire-screen door which shall be operable from each side.

(ii) An automatic fire detection and alarm system shall be fitted when the Administration considers such special precautions warranted in any machinery space in which the installation of automatic and remote control systems and equipment have been approved in lieu of continuous manning of the space.

(m) Fireman’s Outfits and Personal Equipment

(i) The minimum number of fireman’s outfits complying with the requirements of Regulation 14 of this Chapter, and of additional sets of personal equipment, each such set comprising the items stipulated in sub-paragraphs (a) (i), (ii) and (iii) of that Regulation, to be carried shall be as follows:

(1) two fireman’s outfits; and in addition

(2) for every 80 metres (262 feet) or part thereof, of the aggregate of the lengths of all passenger spaces and service spaces on the deck which carries such spaces or, if there is more than one such deck, on the deck which has the largest aggregate of such lengths, two fireman’s outfits and two sets of personal equipment, each such set comprising the items stipulated in Regulation 14 (a) (i), (ii) and (iii) of this Chapter.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(ii) For each fireman’s outfit which includes a self-contained breathing apparatus as provided in paragraph (b) of Regulation 14 of this Chapter, spare charges shall be carried on a scale approved by the Administration.

(iii) Fireman’s outfits and sets of personal equipment shall be stored in widely separated positions ready for use. At least two fireman’s outfits and one set of personal equipment shall be available at any one position.

Regulation 33

Arrangements for Oil Fuel, Lubricating Oil and other Inflammable Oils

(a) Oil Fuel Arrangements

In a ship in which oil fuel is used, the arrangements for the storage, distribution and utilization of the oil fuel shall be such as to ensure the safety of the ship and persons on board and shall at least comply with the following provisions:

(i) No oil fuel which has a flashpoint of less than 60°C (140°F) (closed cup test) as determined by an approved flashpoint apparatus shall be used as fuel, except in emergency generators, in which case the flashpoint shall be not less than 43°C (110°F).

Provided that the Administration may permit the general use of fuel oil having a flashpoint of not less than 43°C (110°F) subject to such additional precautions as it may consider necessary and on condition that the temperature of the space in which such fuel is stored or used shall not be allowed to rise within 10°C (18°F) below the flashpoint of the fuel.

(ii) As far as practicable, no part of the oil fuel system containing heated oil under pressure exceeding 1.8 kilogrammes per square centimetre (25 pounds per square inch) gauge shall be so concealed that defects and leakage cannot readily be observed. In way of such parts of the oil fuel system the machinery space shall be adequately illuminated.

(iii) The ventilation of machinery spaces shall be sufficient under all normal conditions to prevent accumulation of oil vapour.

(iv) (1) As far as practicable, oil fuel tanks shall be part of the ship’s structure and shall be located outside machinery spaces of Category A. When oil fuel tanks, except double bottom tanks, are necessarily located adjacent to machinery spaces of Category A, they shall preferably have a common boundary with the double bottom tanks, and the area of the tank boundary common with the machinery space shall be kept to a minimum. In general, the use of free-standing oil fuel tanks shall be avoided but when such tanks are employed they shall not be situated in machinery spaces of Category A.

(2) No oil tank shall be situated where spillage or leakage therefrom can constitute a hazard by falling on heated surfaces. Precautions shall be taken to prevent any oil that may escape under pressure from any pump, filter or heater from coming into contact with heated surfaces.

(v) Every oil fuel pipe which if damaged would allow oil to escape from a storage, settling or daily service tank situated above the double bottom shall be fitted with a cock or valve on the tank capable of being closed from a safe position outside the space concerned in the event of a fire arising in the space in which such tanks are situated. In the special case of deep tanks situated in any shaft or pipe tunnel or similar space, valves on the tanks shall be fitted but control in event of fire may be effected by means of an additional valve on the pipe or pipes outside the tunnel or similar space.

(vi) Safe and efficient means of ascertaining the amount of oil fuel contained in any oil tank shall be provided. Sounding pipes with suitable means of closure may be permitted if their upper ends terminate in safe positions. Other means of ascertaining the amount of oil fuel contained in any oil fuel tank may be permitted if they do not require penetration below the top of the tank, and providing their failure or overfilling of the tanks will not permit release of fuel thereby.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(vii) Provision shall be made to prevent over-pressure in any oil tank or in any part of the oil fuel system, including the filling pipes. Any relief valves and air or overflow pipes shall discharge to a position which, in the opinion of the Administration, is safe.

(viii) Oil fuel pipes shall be of steel or other approved material, provided that restricted use of flexible pipes shall be permissible in positions where the Administration is satisfied that they are necessary. Such flexible pipes and end attachments shall be of approved fire-resisting materials of adequate strength and shall be constructed to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(b) Lubricating Oil Arrangements

The arrangements for the storage, distribution and utilization of oil used in pressure lubrication systems shall be such as to ensure the safety of the ships and persons on board, and such arrangements in machinery spaces of Category A and, whenever practicable, in other machinery spaces shall at least comply with the provisions of sub-paragraphs (ii), (iv) (2), (v), (vi) and (vii) of paragraph (a) of this Regulation.

(c) Arrangements for other Inflammable Oils

The arrangements for the storage, distribution and utilization of other inflammable oils employed under pressure in power transmission systems, control and activating systems and heating systems shall be such as to ensure the safety of the ship and persons on board. In locations where means of ignition are present such arrangements shall at least comply with the provisions of sub-paragraphs (a) (iv) (2) and (a) (vi), and with the provisions of sub-paragraph (a) (viii) in respect of strength and construction, of this Regulation.

Regulation 34

Special Arrangements in Machinery Spaces

(a) The provisions of this Regulation shall apply to machinery spaces of Category A and, where the Administration considers it desirable, to other machinery spaces.

(b) (i) The number of skylights, doors, ventilators, openings in funnels to permit exhaust ventilation and other openings to machinery spaces shall be reduced to a minimum consistent with the needs of ventilation and the proper and safe working of the ship.

(ii) The flaps of such skylights where fitted shall be of steel. Suitable arrangements shall be made to permit the release of smoke in the event of fire, from the space to be protected.

(iii) Such doors other than power-operated watertight doors shall be arranged so that positive closure is assured in case of fire in the space, by power-operated closing arrangements or by the provision of self-closing doors capable of closing against an inclination of 3½ degrees opposing closure and having a fail-safe hook-back facility, provided with a remotely operated release device.

(c) Windows shall not be fitted in machinery space casings.

(d) Means of control shall be provided for:

(i) opening and closure of skylights, closure of openings in funnels which normally allow exhaust ventilation, and closure of ventilator dampers;

(ii) permitting the release of smoke;

(iii) closure of power-operated doors or release mechanism on doors other than power-operated watertight doors;

(iv) stopping ventilating fans; and

(v) stopping forced and induced draught fans, oil fuel transfer pumps, oil fuel unit pumps and other similar fuel pumps.

(e) The controls required for ventilating fans shall comply with the provisions of paragraph (f) of Regulation 25 of this Chapter. The controls for any required fixed fire-extinguishing system and those required by sub-paragraphs (d) (i), (ii), (iii) and (v) of this Regulation and of sub-paragraph (a) (v) of Regulation 33 of this Chapter shall be situated at one control position, or grouped in as few positions as possible to the satisfaction of the Administration. Such position


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

or positions shall be located where they will not be cut off in the event of fire in the space they serve, and shall have a safe access from the open deck.

PART C—FIRE SAFETY MEASURES FOR PASSENGER SHIPS CARRYING NOT MORE THAN 36 PASSENGERS

Regulation 35

Structure

(a) The hull, superstructure, structural bulkheads, decks and deckhouses shall be constructed of steel or other equivalent material.

(b) Where fire protection in accordance with paragraph (b) of Regulation 40 of this Chapter is employed, the superstructure may be constructed of, for example, aluminium alloy, provided that:

(i) for the temperature rise of the metallic cores of “A” Class divisions when exposed to the standard fire test, due regard is given to the mechanical properties of the material;

(ii) the Administration is satisfied that the amount of combustible materials used in the relevant part of the ship is suitably reduced; the ceilings (i.e. linings of deck heads) are non-combustible;

(iii) adequate provision is made to ensure that in the event of fire, arrangements for stowage, launching and embarkation into survival craft remain as effective as if the superstructure were constructed of steel;

(iv) crowns and casings of boiler and machinery spaces are of steel construction adequately insulated, and the openings therein, if any, are suitably arranged and protected to prevent spread of fire.

Regulation 36

Main Vertical Zones

(a) The hull, superstructure and deckhouses shall be subdivided into main vertical zones. Steps and recesses shall be kept to a minimum, but where they are necessary, they shall be of “A” Class divisions.

(b) As far as practicable, the bulkheads forming the boundaries of the main vertical zones above the bulkhead deck shall be in line with watertight subdivision bulkheads situated immediately below the bulkhead deck.

(c) Such bulkheads shall extend from deck to deck and to the shell or other boundaries.

(d) On ships designed for special purposes, such as automobile or railroad car ferries, where installation of such bulkheads would defeat the purpose for which the ship is intended, equivalent means for controlling and limiting a fire shall be substituted and specifically approved by the Administration.

Regulation 37

Openings in A Class Divisions

(a) Where “A” Class divisions are pierced for the passage of electric cables, pipes, trunks, ducts, etc., for girders, beams or other structures, arrangements shall be made to ensure that the fire resistance is not impaired.

(b) Where of necessity, a duct passes through a main vertical zone bulkhead, a fail-safe automatic closing fire damper shall be fitted adjacent to the bulkhead. The damper shall also be capable of being manually closed from both sides of the bulkhead. The operating position shall be readily accessible and be marked in red light-reflecting colour. The duct between the bulkhead and the damper shall be of steel or other equivalent material and, if necessary, to an insulating standard such as to comply with paragraph (a) of this Regulation. The damper shall be fitted on at least one side of the bulkhead with a visible indicator showing if the damper is in the open position.

(c) Except for hatches between cargo, store, and baggage spaces, and between such spaces and the weather decks, all openings shall be provided with permanently attached means of closing which shall be at least as effective for resisting fires as the divisions in which they are fitted.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(d) The construction of all doors and door frames in “A” Class divisions, with the means of securing them when closed, shall provide resistance to fire as well as to the passage of smoke and flame as far as practicable equivalent to that of the bulkheads in which the doors are situated. Watertight doors need not be insulated.

(e) It shall be possible for each door to be opened from either side of the bulkhead by one person only.

(f) Fire doors in main vertical zone bulkheads and stairway enclosures, other than power operated watertight doors and those which are normally locked, shall be of the self-closing type capable of closing against an inclination of 3½ degrees opposing closure. All such doors, except those that are normally closed, shall be capable of release from a control station, either simultaneously or in groups, and also individually from a position at the door. The release mechanism shall be so designed that the door will automatically close in the event of disruption of the control system; however, approved power-operated watertight doors will be considered acceptable for this purpose. Hold-back hooks, not subject to control station release, will not be permitted. When double swing doors are permitted, they shall have a latch arrangement which is automatically engaged by the operation of the door release system.

Regulation 38

Fire Integrity of “A” Class Divisions

Where “A” Class divisions are required under this Part, the Administration, in deciding the amount of insulation to be provided, shall be guided by the provisions of Part E of this Chapter, but may accept a reduction of the amount of insulation below that stipulated by that Part.

Regulation 39

Separation of Accommodation Spaces from Machinery, Cargo and Service Spaces

The boundary bulkheads and decks separating accommodation spaces from machinery, cargo and service spaces shall be constructed of “A” Class divisions, and these bulkheads and decks shall have an insulation value to the satisfaction of the Administration having regard to the nature of the adjacent spaces.

Regulation 40

Protection of Accommodation and Service Spaces

The accommodation and service spaces shall be protected in accordance with the provisions of either paragraph (a) or (b) of this Regulation.

(a) (i) Within the accommodation spaces, all enclosure bulkheads other than those required to be of “A” Class divisions, shall be constructed of “B” Class divisions of non-combustible materials, which may, however, be faced with combustible materials in accordance with sub-paragraph (iii) of this paragraph.

(ii) All corridor bulkheads shall extend from deck to deck. Ventilation openings may be permitted in the doors in “B” Class bulkheads, preferably in the lower portion. All other enclosure bulkheads shall extend from deck to deck vertically, and to the shell or other boundaries transversely, unless non-combustible ceilings or linings such as will ensure fire integrity are fitted, in which case the bulkheads may terminate at the ceilings or linings.

(iii) Except in cargo spaces, mail rooms, baggage rooms, or refrigerated compartments of service spaces, all linings, grounds, ceilings and insulations shall be of non-combustible materials. The total volume of combustible facings, mouldings, decorations and veneers in any accommodation or public space shall not exceed a volume equivalent to 2.54 millimetres (1/10 inch) veneer on the combined area of the walls and ceilings. All exposed surfaces in corridors or stairway enclosures and in concealed or inaccessible spaces shall have low flame-spread characteristics.*

* Reference is made to Guidelines on the Evaluation of Fire Hazard Properties of Materials, adopted by the Organization by Resolution A.166(ES.IV).


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(b) (i) All corridor bulkheads in accommodation spaces shall be of steel or be constructed of “B” Class panels.

(ii) A fire detecting system of an approved type shall be installed and so arranged as to detect the presence of fire in all enclosed spaces appropriated to the use or service of passengers or crew (except spaces which afford no substantial fire hazard) and automatically to indicate at one or more points or stations where it can be most quickly observed by officers and crew, the presence or indication of fire and also its location.

Regulation 41

Deck Coverings*

Primary deck coverings within accommodation spaces, control stations, stairways and corridors shall be of approved material which will not readily ignite.

Regulation 42

Protection of Stairways and Lifts in Accommodation and Service Spaces

(a) All stairways and means of escape in accommodation and service spaces shall be of steel or other suitable materials.

(b) Passenger and service lift trunks, vertical trunks for light and air to passenger spaces, etc., shall be of “A” Class divisions. Doors shall be of steel or other equivalent material and when closed shall provide fire resistance at least as effective as the trunks in which they are fitted.

Regulation 43

Protection of Control Stations and Store-rooms

(a) Control stations shall be separated from the remainder of the ship by “A” Class bulkheads and decks.

(b) The boundary bulkheads of baggage rooms, mail rooms, store-rooms, paint and lamp lockers, galleys and similar spaces shall be of “A” Class divisions. Spaces containing highly inflammable stores shall be so situated as to minimize the danger to passengers or crew in the event of fire.

Regulation 44

Windows and Sidescuttles

(a) All windows and sidescuttles in bulkheads separating accommodation spaces from weather shall be constructed with frames of steel or other suitable material. The glass shall be retained by a metal glazing bead.

(b) All windows and sidescuttles in bulkheads within accommodation spaces shall be constructed so as to preserve the integrity requirements of the type of bulkhead in which they are fitted.

Regulation 45

Ventilation Systems

Power ventilation of machinery spaces shall be capable of being stopped from an easily accessible position outside the machinery spaces.

Regulation 46

Details of Construction

(a) Paints, varnishes and similar preparations having a nitro-cellulose or other highly inflammable base shall not be used in any part of the ship.

(b) Pipes penetrating “A” or “B” Class divisions shall be of a material approved by the Administration having regard to the temperature such divisions are required to withstand. Pipes conveying oil or combustible liquids shall be of a material approved by the Administration having regard to the fire risk. Materials readily rendered ineffective by heat shall not be used for overboard scuppers, sanitary discharges, and other outlets

* Reference is made to Improved Provisional Guidelines on Test Procedures for Primary Deck Coverings, adopted by the Organization by Resolution A.214(VII).


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

which are close to the water-line and where the failure of the material in the event of fire would give rise to danger of flooding.

(c) In spaces containing main propulsion machinery, or oil-fired boilers, or auxiliary internal combustion type machinery of total power output of 746 kW or over, the following measures shall be taken:

(i) skylights shall be capable of being closed from outside the space;

(ii) skylights containing glass panels shall be fitted with external shutters of steel or other equivalent material permanently attached;

(iii) any window permitted by the Administration in casings of such spaces shall be of the non-opening type, and shall be fitted with an external shutter of steel or other equivalent material permanently attached; and

(iv) in the windows and skylights referred to in sub-paragraphs (i), (ii) and (iii) of this paragraph, wire reinforced glass shall be used.

Regulation 47

Fire Detection Systems and Fire-Extinguishing Equipment

(a) Patrols and Detection

(i) An efficient patrol system shall be maintained in all ships so that any outbreak of fire may be promptly detected. Manual fire alarms shall be fitted throughout the passenger and crew accommodation to enable the fire patrol to give an alarm immediately to the navigating bridge or fire control station.

(ii) An approved fire alarm or fire detecting system shall be provided which will automatically indicate at one or more suitable points or stations the presence or indication of fire and its location in any part of the ship which, in the opinion of the Administration, is not accessible to the patrol system, except where it is shown to the satisfaction of the Administration that the ship is engaged on voyages of such short duration that it would be unreasonable to apply this requirement.

(iii) The ship, whether new or existing, shall at all times when at sea, or in port (except when out of service), be so manned or equipped as to ensure that any initial fire alarm is immediately received by a responsible member of the crew.

(b) Fire Pumps and Fire Main System

The ship shall be provided with fire pumps, fire main system, hydrants and hoses complying with Regulation 5 of this Chapter and with the following requirements:

(i) A ship of 4,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards shall be provided with at least three independently driven fire pumps and every ship of less than 4,000 tons gross tonnage with at least two such fire pumps.

(ii) In a ship of 1,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards, the arrangement of sea connexions, pumps and sources of power for operating them shall be such as to ensure that a fire in any one compartment will not put all the fire pumps out of action.

(iii) In a ship of less than 1,000 tons gross tonnage the arrangements shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(c) Fire Hydrants, Hoses and Nozzles

(i) The ship shall be provided with such number of fire hoses as the Administration may deem sufficient. There shall be at least one fire hose for each of the hydrants required by paragraph (d) of Regulation 5 of this Chapter and these hoses shall be used only for the purposes of extinguishing fires or testing the fire-extinguishing apparatus at fire drills and surveys.

(ii) In accommodation, service and machinery spaces, the number and position of hydrants shall be such that the requirements of paragraph (d) of Regulation 5 of this Chapter may be complied with when all watertight doors and all doors in main vertical zone bulkheads are closed.

(iii) The arrangements shall be such that at least two jets of water can reach any part of any cargo space when empty.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(iv) All required hydrants in the machinery spaces of ships with oil-fired boilers or internal combustion type propelling machinery shall be fitted with hoses having nozzles as required in paragraph (g) of Regulation 5 of this Chapter.

(d) International Shore Connexion

(i) A ship of 1,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards shall be provided with at least one international shore connexion, complying with paragraph (h) of Regulation 5 of this Chapter.

(ii) Facilities shall be available enabling such a connexion to be used on either side of the ship.

(e) Portable Fire Extinguishers in Accommodation and Service Spaces

The ship shall be provided in accommodation and service spaces with such approved portable fire extinguishers as the Administration may deem to be appropriate and sufficient.

(f) Fixed Fire-Extinguishing Arrangements in Cargo Spaces

(i) The cargo spaces of ships of 1,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards shall be protected by a fixed gas fire-extinguishing system complying with Regulation 8 of this Chapter.

(ii) Where it is shown to the satisfaction of the Administration that a ship is engaged on voyages of such short duration that it would be unreasonable to apply the requirements of sub-paragraph (i) of this paragraph and also in ships of less than 1,000 tons gross tonnage, the arrangements in cargo spaces shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(g) Fire-Extinguishing Appliances in Boiler Rooms, etc.

Where main or auxiliary oil-fired boilers are situated, or in spaces containing oil fuel units or settling tanks, a ship shall be provided with the following arrangements:

(i) There shall be any one of the following fixed fire-extinguishing installations:

(1) a pressure water-spraying system complying with Regulation 11 of this Chapter;

(2) a gas fire-extinguishing installation complying with Regulation 8 of this Chapter;

(3) a fixed froth installation complying with Regulation 9 of this Chapter. (The Administration may require fixed or mobile arrangements by pressure water or froth spraying to fight fire above the floor plates.)

In each case if the engine and boiler rooms are not entirely separate, or if fuel oil can drain from the boiler room into the engine room bilges, the combined engine and boiler rooms shall be considered as one compartment.

(ii) There shall be at least two approved portable extinguishers discharging froth or other approved medium suitable for extinguishing oil fires, in each firing space in each boiler room and each space in which a part of the oil fuel installation is situated. There shall be not less than one approved froth type extinguisher of at least 136 litres (30 gallons) capacity or equivalent in each boiler room. These extinguishers shall be provided with hoses on reels suitable for reaching any part of the boiler room and spaces containing any part of the oil fuel installations.

(iii) In each firing space there shall be a receptacle containing sand, sawdust impregnated with soda or other approved dry material, in such quantity as may be required by the Administration. Alternatively an approved portable extinguisher may be substituted therefor.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(h) Fire-Fighting Appliances in Spaces containing Internal Combustion Type Machinery

Where internal combustion type engines are used, either for main propulsion or for auxiliary purposes associated with a total power output of not less than 746 kW, a ship shall be provided with the following arrangements:

(i) there shall be one of the fixed arrangements required by sub-paragraph (g) (i) of this Regulation;

(ii) there shall be in each engine space one approved froth-type extinguisher of not less than 45 litres (10 gallons) capacity or equivalent and also one approved portable froth-type extinguisher for each 746 kW of engine power output or part thereof; but the total number of portable extinguishers so supplied shall be not less than two and need not exceed six.

(i) Fire-Fighting Arrangements in Spaces containing Steam Turbines and not requiring any Fixed Installation

The Administration shall give special consideration to the fire-extinguishing arrangements to be provided in spaces containing steam turbines which are separated from boiler rooms by watertight bulkheads.

(j) Fireman’s Outfits and Personal Equipment

(i) The minimum number of fireman’s outfits complying with the requirements of Regulation 14 of this Chapter, and of additional sets of personal equipment, each such set comprising the items stipulated in sub-paragraphs (a) (i), (ii) and (iii) of that Regulation, to be carried, shall be as follows:

(1) two fireman’s outfits; and in addition

(2) for every 80 metres (262 feet) or part thereof, of the aggregate of the lengths of all passenger spaces and service spaces on the deck which carries such spaces or, if there is more than one such deck, on the deck which has the largest aggregate of such lengths, two fireman’s outfits and two sets of personal equipment, each such set comprising the items stipulated in Regulation 14 (a) (i), (ii) and (iii) of this Chapter.

(ii) For each fireman’s outfit which includes a self-contained breathing apparatus as provided in paragraph (b) of Regulation 14 of this Chapter, spare charges shall be carried on a scale approved by the Administration.

(iii) Fireman’s outfits and sets of personal equipment shall be stored in widely separated positions ready for use. At least two fireman’s outfits and one set of personal equipment shall be available at any one position.

Regulation 48

Means of Escape

(a) In and from all passenger and crew spaces and spaces in which crew are normally employed, other than machinery spaces, stairways and ladderways shall be arranged so as to provide ready means of escape to the lifeboat embarkation deck. In particular the following precautions shall be complied with:

(i) below the bulkhead deck, two means of escape, at least one of which shall be independent of watertight doors, shall be provided for each watertight compartment or similarly restricted space or group of spaces. One of these means of escape may be dispensed with by the Administration, due regard being paid to the nature and the location of spaces concerned, and to the number of persons who normally might be quartered or employed there;

(ii) above the bulkhead deck, there shall be at least two practical means of escape from each main vertical zone or similarly restricted space or group of spaces at least one of which shall give access to a stairway forming a vertical escape; and

(iii) at least one of the means of escape shall be by means of a readily accessible enclosed stairway, which shall provide as far as practicable continuous fire shelter from the level of its origin to the lifeboat embarkation deck. The width, number and continuity of the stairways shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(b) In machinery spaces, two means of escape, one of which may be a watertight door, shall be provided from each engine room, shaft tunnel and boiler room. In machinery spaces,


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

where no watertight door is available, the two means of escape shall be formed by two sets of steel ladders as widely separated as possible leading to doors in the casing similarly separated and from which access is provided to the embarkation deck. In the case of ships of less than 2,000 tons gross tonnage, the Administration may dispense with this requirement, due regard being paid to the width and the disposition of the casing.

Regulation 49

Oil Fuel used for Internal Combustion Engines

No internal combustion engine shall be used for any fixed installation in a ship if its fuel has a flashpoint of 43°C (110°F) or less (closed cup test) as determined by an approved flashpoint apparatus.

Regulation 50

Special Arrangements in Machinery Spaces

(a) Means shall be provided for stopping ventilating fans serving machinery and cargo spaces and for closing all doorways, ventilators, annular spaces around funnels and other openings to such spaces. These means shall be capable of being operated from outside such spaces in case of fire.

(b) Machinery driving forced and induced draught fans, oil fuel transfer pumps, oil fuel unit pumps and other similar fuel pumps shall be fitted with remote controls situated outside the space concerned so that they may be stopped in the event of a fire arising in the space in which they are located.

(c) Every oil fuel suction pipe from a storage, settling or daily service tank situated above the double bottom shall be fitted with a cock or valve capable of being closed from outside the space concerned in the event of a fire arising in the space in which such tanks are situated. In the special case of deep tanks situated in any shaft or pipe tunnel, valves on the tanks shall be fitted but control in event of fire may be effected by means of an additional valve on the pipeline or lines outside the tunnel or tunnels.

PART D—FIRE SAFETY MEASURES FOR CARGO SHIPS*

Regulation 51

General Requirements for Cargo Ships of 4,000 tons Gross Tonnage and Upwards other than Tankers Covered by Part E of this Chapter

(a) The hull, superstructure, structural bulkheads, decks and deckhouses shall be constructed of steel, except where the Administration may sanction the use of other suitable material in special cases, having in mind the risk of fire.

(b) In accommodation spaces, the corridor bulkheads shall be of steel or be constructed of “B” Class panels.

(c) Deck coverings within accommodation spaces on the decks forming the crown of machinery and cargo spaces shall be of a type which will not readily ignite.

(d) Interior stairways below the weather deck shall be of steel or other suitable material. Crew lift trunks within accommodation shall be of steel or equivalent material.

(e) Bulkheads of galleys, paint stores, lamp rooms, boatswain’s stores when adjacent to accommodation spaces and emergency generator rooms if any, shall be of steel or equivalent material.

(f) In accommodation and machinery spaces, paints, varnishes and similar preparations having a nitro-cellulose or other highly inflammable base shall not be used.

(g) Pipes conveying oil or combustible liquids shall be of a material approved by the Administration having regard to the fire risk. Materials readily rendered ineffective by heat shall not be used for overboard scuppers, sanitary discharges, and other outlets

* Reference is made to Recommendation on Safety Measures for Periodically Unattended Machinery Spaces of Cargo Ships additional to those normally considered necessary for an Attended Machinery Space, adopted by the Organization by Resolution A.211(VII).

Reference is made to Improved Provisional Guidelines on Test Procedures for Primary Deck Coverings, adopted by the Organization by Resolution A.214(VII).


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

which are close to the water-line and where the failure of the material in the event of fire would give rise to danger of flooding.

(h) Power ventilation of machinery spaces shall be capable of being stopped from an easily accessible position outside the machinery spaces.

Regulation 52

Fire-Extinguishing Systems and Equipment

(a) Application

Where ships have a lower gross tonnage than those quoted in this Regulation, the arrangements for the items covered in this Regulation shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(b) Fire Pumps and Fire Main System

The ship shall be provided with fire pumps, fire main system, hydrants and hoses complying with Regulation 5 of this Chapter and with the following requirements:

(i) A ship of 1,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards shall be provided with two independently driven power pumps.

(ii) In a ship of 1,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards if a fire in any one compartment could put all the pumps out of action, there must be an alternative means of providing water for fire fighting. In a ship of 2,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards this alternative means shall be a fixed emergency pump independently driven. This emergency pump shall be capable of supplying two jets of water to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(c) Fire Hydrants, Hoses and Nozzles

(i) In a ship of 1,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards the number of fire hoses to be provided, each complete with couplings and nozzles, shall be one for each 30 metres (100 feet) length of the ship and one spare but in no case less than five in all. This number does not include any hoses required in any engine or boiler room. The Administration may increase the number of the hoses required so as to ensure that hoses in sufficient number are available and accessible at all times, having regard to the type of the ship and the nature of the trade on which the ship is employed.

(ii) In accommodation, service and machinery spaces, the number and position of hydrants shall be such as to comply with the requirements of paragraph (d) of Regulation 5 of this Chapter.

(iii) In a ship the arrangements shall be such that at least two jets of water can reach any part of any cargo space when empty.

(iv) All required hydrants in the machinery spaces of ships with oil-fired boilers or internal combustion type propelling machinery shall be fitted with hoses having nozzles as required in paragraph (g) of Regulation 5 of this Chapter.

(d) International Shore Connexion

(i) A ship of 1,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards shall be provided with at least one international shore connexion, complying with paragraph (h) of Regulation 5 of this Chapter.

(ii) Facilities shall be available enabling such a connexion to be used on either side of the ship.

(e) Portable Fire Extinguishers in Accommodation and Service Spaces

The ship shall be provided in accommodation and service spaces with such approved portable fire extinguishers as the Administration may deem to be appropriate and sufficient; in any case, their number shall not be less than five for ships of 1,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(f) Fixed Fire-Extinguishing Arrangements in Cargo Spaces

(i) Cargo spaces of ships of 2,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards shall be protected by a fixed fire-extinguishing system complying with Regulation 8 of this Chapter.

(ii) The Administration may exempt from the requirements of sub-paragraph (i) of this paragraph the cargo holds of any ship (other than the tanks of a tanker):

(1) if they are provided with steel hatch covers and effective means of closing all ventilators and other openings leading to the holds;

(2) if the ship is constructed and intended solely for carrying such cargoes as ore, coal or grain; or

(3) where it is shown to the satisfaction of the Administration that the ship is engaged on voyages of such short duration that it would be unreasonable to apply the requirement.

(iii) Every ship in addition to complying with the requirements of this Regulation shall, while carrying explosives of such nature or in such quantity as are not permitted to be carried in passenger ships under Regulation 7 of Chapter VII of this Convention comply with the following requirements:

(1) Steam shall not be used in any compartment containing explosives. For the purpose of this sub-paragraph, “compartment” means all spaces contained between two adjacent permanent bulkheads and includes the lower hold and all cargo spaces above it.

(2) In addition, in each compartment containing explosives and in adjacent cargo compartments, there shall be provided a smoke- or fire-detection system in each cargo space.

(g) Fire-Extinguishing Appliances in Boiler Rooms, etc.

Where main or auxiliary oil-fired boilers are situated, or in spaces containing oil fuel units or settling tanks, a ship of 1,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards shall be provided with the following arrangements:

(i) There shall be any one of the following fixed fire-extinguishing installations:

(1) A pressure water-spraying system complying with Regulation 11 of this Chapter.

(2) A fire-extinguishing installation complying with Regulation 8 of this Chapter.

(3) A fixed froth installation complying with Regulation 9 of this Chapter. (The Administration may require fixed or mobile arrangements by pressure water or froth spraying to fight fire above the floor plates.)

In each case if the engine and boiler rooms are not entirely separate, or if fuel oil can drain from the boiler room into the engine room bilges, the combined engine and boiler rooms shall be considered as one compartment.

(ii) There shall be at least two approved portable extinguishers discharging froth or other approved medium suitable for extinguishing oil fires in each firing space in each boiler room and each space in which a part of the oil fuel installation is situated. In addition, there shall be at least one extinguisher of the same description with a capacity of 9 litres (2 gallons) for each burner, provided that the total capacity of the additional extinguisher or extinguishers need not exceed 45 litres (10 gallons) for any one boiler room.

(iii) In each firing space there shall be a receptacle containing sand, sawdust impregnated with soda, or other approved dry material in such quantity as may be required by the Administration. Alternatively an approved portable extinguisher may be substituted therefor.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(h) Fire-Fighting Appliances in Spaces containing Internal Combustion Type Machinery

Where internal combustion type engines are used, either for main propulsion machinery, or for auxiliary purposes associated with a total power output of not less than 746 kW, a ship of 1,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards shall be provided with the following arrangements:

(i) There shall be one of the fixed arrangements required by sub-paragraph (g) (i) of this Regulation.

(ii) There shall be in each engine space one approved froth-type extinguisher of not less than 45 litres (10 gallons) capacity or equivalent and also one approved portable froth extinguisher for each 746 kW of engine power output or part thereof; but the total number of portable extinguishers so supplied shall be not less than two and need not exceed six.

(i) Fire-Fighting Arrangements in Spaces containing Steam Turbines and not requiring any Fixed Installation

The Administration shall give special consideration to the fire-extinguishing arrangements to be provided in spaces containing steam turbines which are separated from boiler rooms by watertight bulkheads.

(j) Fireman’s Outfits and Personal Equipment

(i) The ship, whether new or existing, shall carry at least two fireman’s outfits complying with the requirements of Regulation 14 of this Chapter. Furthermore, Administrations may require in large ships additional sets of personal equipment and in tankers and special ships such as factory ships additional fireman’s outfits.

(ii) For each fireman’s outfit which includes a self-contained breathing apparatus as provided in paragraph (b) of Regulation 14 of this Chapter, spare charges shall be carried on a scale approved by the Administration.

(iii) The fireman’s outfits and personal equipment shall be stored so as to be easily accessible and ready for use and, where more than one fireman’s outfit and set of personal equipment are carried, they shall be stored in widely separated positions.

Regulation 53

Means of Escape

(a) In and from all crew and passenger spaces and spaces in which crew are normally employed, other than machinery spaces, stairways and ladders shall be arranged so as to provide ready means of escape to the lifeboat embarkation deck.

(b) In machinery spaces, two means of escape, one of which may be a watertight door, shall be provided from each engine room, shaft tunnel and boiler room. In machinery spaces, where no watertight door is available, the two means of escape shall be formed by two sets of steel ladders as widely separated as possible leading to doors in the casing similarly separated and from which access is provided to the embarkation deck. In the case of ships of less than 2,000 tons gross tonnage, the Administration may dispense with this requirement, due regard being paid to the width and the disposition of the casing.

Regulation 54

Special Arrangements in Machinery Spaces

(a) Means shall be provided for stopping ventilating fans serving machinery and cargo spaces and for closing all doorways, ventilators, annular spaces around funnels and other openings to such spaces. These means shall be capable of being operated from outside such spaces in case of fire.

(b) Machinery driving forced and induced draught fans, oil fuel transfer pumps, oil fuel unit pumps and other similar fuel pumps shall be fitted with remote controls situated outside the space concerned so that they may be stopped in the event of a fire arising in the space in which they are located.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(c) Every oil fuel suction pipe from a storage, settling or daily service tank situated above the double bottom shall be fitted with a cock or valve capable of being closed from outside the space concerned in the event of a fire arising in the space in which such tanks are situated. In the special case of deep tanks situated in any shaft or pipe tunnel, valves on the tanks shall be fitted but control in event of fire may be effected by means of an additional valve on the pipeline or lines outside the tunnel or tunnels.

PART E—FIRE SAFETY MEASURES FOR TANKERS

Regulation 55

Application

(a) This Part shall apply to all new tankers carrying crude oil and petroleum products having a flashpoint not exceeding 60° C (140° F) (closed cup test) as determined by an approved flashpoint apparatus and whose Reid vapour pressure is below that of atmospheric pressure, and other liquid products having a similar fire hazard.

(b) In addition, all ships covered by this Part shall comply with the requirements of Regulations 52, 53 and 54 of this Chapter, except that paragraph (f) of Regulation 52 need not apply to tankers complying with Regulation 60 of this Chapter.

(c) Where cargoes other than those referred to in paragraph (a) of this Regulation which introduce additional fire hazards are intended to be carried, additional safety measures shall be required to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(d) Combination carriers shall not carry solid cargoes unless all cargo tanks are empty of oil and gas freed or unless, in each case, the Administration is satisfied with the arrangements provided.

Regulation 56

Location and Separation of Spaces

(a) Machinery spaces of Category A shall be positioned aft of cargo tanks and slop tanks and shall be isolated from them by a cofferdam, cargo pump room or oil fuel bunker tank; they shall also be situated aft of such cargo pump rooms and cofferdams, but not necessarily aft of the oil fuel bunker tanks. However, the lower portion of the pump room may be recessed into such spaces to accommodate pumps provided the deck head of the recess is in general not more than one-third of the moulded depth above the keel except that in the case of ships of not more than 25,000 metric tons deadweight, where it can be demonstrated that for reasons of access and satisfactory piping arrangements this is impracticable, the Administration may permit a recess in excess of such height, but not exceeding one half of the moulded depth above the keel.

(b) Accommodation spaces, main cargo control stations, control stations and service spaces shall be positioned aft of all cargo tanks, slop tanks, cargo pump rooms and cofferdams which isolate cargo or slop tanks from machinery spaces of Category A. Any common bulkhead separating a cargo pump room, including the pump room entrance, from accommodation and service spaces and control stations shall be constructed to “A-60” Class. Where deemed necessary, accommodation spaces, control stations, machinery spaces other than those of Category A and service spaces may be permitted forward of all cargo tanks, slop tanks, cargo pump rooms and cofferdams subject to an equivalent standard of safety and appropriate availability of fire-extinguishing arrangements being provided to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(c) Where the fitting of a navigation position above the cargo tank area is shown to be necessary it shall be for navigation purposes only and it shall be separated from the cargo tank deck by means of an open space with a height of at least 2 metres. The fire protection of such navigation position shall in addition be as required for control spaces as set forth in paragraphs (a) and (b) of Regulation 57 and other provisions as applicable of this Part.

(d) Means shall be provided to keep deck spills away from the accommodation and service areas. This may be accomplished by provision of a permanent continuous coaming of a suitable height extending from side to side. Special consideration shall be given to the arrangements associated with stern loading.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(e) Exterior boundaries of superstructures and deckhouses enclosing accommodation and service spaces and including any overhanging decks which support such accommodation, shall be insulated to “A-60” Class for the whole of the portions which face cargo oil tanks and for 3 metres aft of the front boundary. In the case of the sides of these superstructures and deckhouses, such insulation shall be carried as high as is deemed necessary by the Administration.

(f) In boundaries, facing cargo tanks, of superstructures and deckhouses containing accommodation and service spaces the following provisions shall apply:

(i) No doors shall be permitted in such boundaries, except that doors to those spaces not having access to accommodation and service spaces, such as cargo control stations, provision rooms, and storerooms may be permitted by the Administration. Where such doors are fitted, the boundaries of the space shall be insulated to “A-60” Class. Bolted plates for removal of machinery may be fitted in such boundaries.

(ii) Portlights in such boundaries shall be of a fixed (non-opening) type. Pilot house windows may be non-fixed (opening).

(iii) Portlights in the first tier on the main deck shall be fitted with inside covers of steel or equivalent material.

The requirements of this paragraph, where applicable, except in the case of access to the navigating bridge spaces, shall also be applied to the boundaries of the superstructures and deckhouses for a distance of 5 metres measured longitudinally from the forward end of such structures.

Regulation 57

Construction

(a) (i) The hull, superstructure, structural bulkheads, decks and deckhouses shall be constructed of steel or other equivalent material.

(ii) Bulkheads between cargo pump rooms, including their trunks and machinery spaces of Category A shall be “A” Class and shall have no penetrations which are less than “A-0” Class or equivalent in all respects, other than the cargo pump shaft glands and similar glanded penetrations.

(iii) Bulkheads and decks forming divisions separating machinery spaces of Category A and cargo pump rooms, including their trunks, respectively, from the accommodation and service spaces shall be of “A-60” Class. Such bulkheads and decks and any boundaries of machinery spaces of Category A and cargo pump rooms shall not be pierced for windows or portlights.

(iv) The requirements of sub-paragraphs (ii) and (iii) of this paragraph, however, do not preclude the installation of permanent approved gas-tight lighting enclosures for illuminating the pump rooms provided that they are of adequate strength and maintain the integrity and gas-tightness of the bulkhead as “A” Class. Further, it does not preclude the use of windows in a control room located entirely within a machinery space.

(v) Control stations shall be separated from adjacent enclosed spaces by means of “A” Class bulkheads and decks. The insulation of these control station boundaries shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration having in mind the risk of fire in adjacent spaces.

(vi) Casing doors in machinery spaces of Category A shall be self-closing and comply with the related provisions of sub-paragraph (b) (vii) of this Regulation.

(vii) The surface of the insulation on interior boundaries of machinery spaces of Category A shall be impervious to oil and oil vapours.

(viii) Primary deck coverings, if applied, shall be of approved materials which will not readily ignite.*

(ix) Interior stairways shall be of steel or other suitable material.

* Reference is made to Improved Provisional Guidelines on Test Procedures for Primary Deck Coverings, adopted by the Organization by Resolution A.214 (VII).


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(x) When adjacent to accommodation spaces, bulkheads of galleys, paint stores, lamp rooms and boatswain’s stores shall be of steel or equivalent material.

(xi) Paints, varnishes and other finishes used on exposed interior surfaces shall not be of a nature to offer an undue fire hazard in the judgment of the Administration and shall not be capable of producing excessive quantities of smoke or other toxic properties.

(xii) Pipes conveying oil or combustible liquids shall be of a material approved by the Administration having regard to the fire risk. Materials readily rendered ineffective by heat shall not be used for overboard scuppers, sanitary discharges, and other outlets which are close to the water-line and where the failure of the material in the event of fire would give rise to danger of flooding.

(xiii) Power ventilation of machinery spaces shall be capable of being stopped from an easily accessible position outside the machinery spaces.

(xiv) Skylights to machinery spaces of Category A and cargo pump rooms shall comply with the provisions of sub-paragraph (a) (iii) of this Regulation in respect of windows and portlights and in addition shall be so arranged as to be capable of being readily closed from outside the spaces which they serve.

(b) Within the accommodation and service spaces and control stations the following conditions shall apply:

(i) Corridor bulkheads including doors shall be of “A” or “B” Class divisions extending from deck to deck. Where continuous “B” Class ceilings and/or linings are fitted on both sides of the bulkhead, the bulkhead may terminate at the continuous ceiling or lining. Doors of cabins and public spaces in such bulkheads may have a louvre in the lower half.

(ii) Air spaces enclosed behind ceilings, panellings, or linings shall be divided by close fitting draught stops spaced not more than 14 metres apart.

(iii) Ceilings, linings, bulkheads and insulation except for insulation in refrigerated compartments shall be of non-combustible material. Vapour barriers and adhesives used in conjunction with insulation, as well as insulation of pipe fittings for cold service systems need not be non-combustible, but they shall be kept to the minimum quantity practicable and their exposed surfaces shall have resistance to propagation of flame to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(iv) The framing, including grounds and the joint pieces of bulkheads, linings, ceilings and draught stops, if fitted, shall be of non-combustible material.

(v) All exposed surfaces in corridors and stairway enclosures and surfaces in concealed or inaccessible spaces shall have low flame-spread characteristics.*

(vi) Bulkheads, linings and ceilings may have combustible veneer, provided that such veneer shall not exceed 2 millimetres within any such space except corridors, stairway enclosures and control stations where it shall not exceed 1.5 millimetres.

(vii) Stairways which penetrate only a single deck shall be protected at least at one level by “A” or “B” Class divisions and self-closing doors so as to limit the rapid spread of fire from one deck to another. Crew lift trunks shall be of “A” Class divisions. Stairways and lift trunks which penetrate more than a single deck shall be surrounded by “A” Class divisions and protected by self-closing steel doors at all levels. Self-closing doors shall not be fitted with hold-back hooks. However, holdback arrangements fitted with remote release fittings of the failsafe type may be utilized.

* Reference is made to Guidelines on the Evaluation of Fire Hazard Properties of Materials, adopted by the Organization by Resolution A.166 (ES. IV).


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(c) Ducts provided for ventilation of machinery spaces of Category “A” shall not in general pass through accommodation and service spaces or control stations, except that the Administration may permit relaxation from this requirement provided that:

(i) the ducts are constructed of steel and each is insulated to “A-60” Class; or

(ii) the ducts are constructed of steel and are fitted with an automatic fire damper close to the boundary penetrated and are insulated to “A-60” Class from the machinery space of Category A to a point at least 5 metres beyond the fire damper.

(d) Ducts provided for ventilation of accommodation and service spaces or control stations shall not in general pass through machinery spaces of Category A except that the Administration may permit relaxation from this requirement provided that ducts are constructed of steel and an automatic fire damper is fitted close to the boundaries penetrated.

Regulation 58

Ventilation

(a) The arrangement and positioning of openings in the cargo tank deck from which gas emission can occur shall be such as to minimize the possibility of gas being admitted to enclosed spaces containing a source of ignition, or collecting in the vicinity of deck machinery and equipment which may constitute an ignition hazard. In every case the height of the outlet above the deck and the discharge velocity of the gas shall be considered in conjunction with the distance of any outlet from any deckhouse opening or source of ignition.

(b) The arrangement of ventilation inlets and outlets and other deckhouse and superstructure boundary space openings shall be such as to complement the provisions of paragraph (a) of this Regulation. Such vents especially for machinery spaces shall be situated as far aft as practicable. Due consideration in this regard should be given when the ship is equipped to load or discharge at the stern. Sources of ignition such as electrical equipment shall be so arranged as to avoid an explosion hazard.

(c) Cargo pump rooms shall be mechanically ventilated and discharges from the exhaust fans shall be led to a safe place on the open deck. The ventilation of these rooms shall have sufficient capacity to minimize the possibility of accumulation of inflammable vapours. The number of changes of air shall be at least 20 times per hour, based upon the gross volume of the space. The air ducts shall be arranged so that all of the space is effectively ventilated. The ventilation shall be of the suction type.

Regulation 59

Means of Escape

In addition to the requirements of paragraph (a) of Regulation 53 of this Chapter, consideration shall be given by the Administration to the availability of emergency means of escape for personnel from each cabin.

Regulation 60

Cargo Tank Protection

(a) For tankers of 100,000 metric tons deadweight and upwards and combination carriers of 50,000 metric tons deadweight and upwards, the protection of the cargo tanks deck area and cargo tanks shall be achieved by a fixed deck froth system and a fixed inert gas system in accordance with the requirements of Regulations 61 and 62 of this Part except that in lieu of the above installations the Administration, after having given consideration to the ship arrangement and equipment, may accept other combinations of fixed installations if they afford protection equivalent to the above, in accordance with Regulation 5 of Chapter I of this Convention.

(b) To be considered equivalent, the system proposed in lieu of the deck froth system shall:

(i) be capable of extinguishing spill fires and also preclude ignition of spilled oil not yet ignited; and

(ii) be capable of combating fires in ruptured tanks.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(c) To be considered equivalent, the system proposed in lieu of the fixed inert gas system shall:

(i) be capable of preventing dangerous accumulations of explosive mixtures in intact cargo tanks during normal service throughout the ballast voyage and necessary in-tank operations; and

(ii) be so designed as to minimize the risk of ignition from the generation of static electricity by the system itself.

(d) In tankers of less than 100,000 metric tons deadweight and combination carriers of less than 50,000 metric tons deadweight the Administration, in applying the requirements of paragraph (f) of Regulation 52 of this Chapter, may accept a froth system, capable of discharging froth internally or externally, to the tanks. The details of such installation shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration.

Regulation 61

Fixed Deck Froth System

The fixed deck froth system referred to in paragraph (a) of Regulation 60 of this Chapter shall be designed as follows:

(a) The arrangements for providing froth shall be capable of delivering froth to the entire cargo tank area as well as into any cargo tank, the deck of which has been ruptured.

(b) The system shall be capable of simple and rapid operation. The main control station for the system shall be suitably located outside of the cargo tank area, adjacent to the accommodation spaces and readily accessible and operable in the event of fire in the areas protected.

(c) The rate of supply of froth solution shall be not less than the greater of the following:

(i) 0.6 litres per minute per square metre of the cargo deck area, where cargo deck area means the maximum breadth of the ship times the total longitudinal extent of the cargo tank spaces, or

(ii) 6 litres per minute per square metre of the horizontal sectional area of the single tank having the largest such area.

Sufficient froth concentrate shall be supplied to ensure at least 20 minutes of froth generation when using solution rates stipulated in sub-paragraph (i) or (ii) of this paragraph, whichever is the greater. The froth expansion ratio (i.e. the ratio of the volume of froth produced to the volume of the mixture of water and froth-making concentrate supplied) shall not generally exceed 12 to 1. Where systems essentially produce low expansion froth but at an expansion ratio slightly in excess of 12 to 1, the quantity of froth solution available shall be calculated as for 12 to 1 expansion ratio systems. When medium expansion ratio froth (between 50 to 1 and 150 to 1 expansion ratio) is employed the application rate of the froth and the capacity of a monitor installation shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(d) Froth from the fixed froth system shall be supplied by means of monitors and froth applicators. At least 50 per cent of the required froth rate shall be delivered from each monitor.

(e) (i) The number and position of monitors shall be such as to comply with paragraph (a) of this Regulation. The capacity of any monitor in litres per minute of froth solution shall be at least three times the deck area in square metres protected by that monitor, such area being entirely forward of the monitor.

(ii) The distance from the monitor to the farthest extremity of the protected area forward of that monitor shall not be more than 75 per cent of the monitor throw in still air conditions.

(f) A monitor and hose connexion for a froth applicator shall be situated both port and starboard at the poop front or accommodation spaces facing the cargo deck. Applicators shall be provided for flexibility of action during fire-fighting operations and to cover areas screened from the monitors.

(g) Valves shall be provided in both the froth main and the fire main immediately forward of every monitor position to isolate damaged sections of these mains.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(h) Operation of a deck froth system at its required output shall permit the simultaneous use of the minimum required number of jets of water at the required pressure from the fire main.

Regulation 62

Inert Gas System

The inert gas system referred to in paragraph (a) of Regulation 60 of this Chapter shall be capable of providing on demand a gas or mixture of gases to the cargo tank so deficient in oxygen that the atmosphere within a tank may be rendered inert, i.e. incapable of propagating flame. Such a system shall satisfy the following conditions:

(a) The need for fresh air to enter a tank during normal operations shall be eliminated, except when preparing a tank for entry by personnel.

(b) Empty tanks shall be capable of being purged with inert gas to reduce the hydrocarbon content of a tank after discharge of cargo.

(c) The washing of tanks shall be capable of being carried out in an inert atmosphere.

(d) During cargo discharge, the system shall be such as to ensure that the volume of gas referred to in paragraph (f) of this Regulation is available. At other times sufficient gas to ensure compliance with paragraph (g) of this Regulation shall be continuously available.

(e) Suitable means for purging the tanks with fresh air as well as with inert gas shall be provided.

(f) The system shall be capable of supplying inert gas at a rate of at least 125 per cent of the maximum rated capacity of the cargo pumps.

(g) Under normal running conditions, when tanks are being filled or have been filled with inert gas, a positive pressure shall be capable of being maintained at the tank.

(h) Exhaust gas outlets for purging shall be suitably located in the open air and shall be to the same general requirements as prescribed for ventilating outlets of tanks, referred to in paragraph (a) of Regulation 58 of this Chapter.

(i) A scrubber shall be provided which will effectively cool the gas and remove solids and sulphur combustion products.

(j) At least two fans (blowers) shall be provided which together shall be capable of delivering at least the amount of gas stipulated in paragraph (f) of this Regulation.

(k) The oxygen content in the inert gas supply shall not normally exceed 5 per cent by volume.

(l) Means shall be provided to prevent the return of hydrocarbon gases or vapours from the tanks to the machinery spaces and uptakes and prevent the development of excessive pressure or vacuum. In addition, an effective water lock shall be installed at the scrubber or on deck. Branch piping for inert gas shall be fitted with stop valves or equivalent means of control at every tank. The system shall be so designed as to minimize the risk of ignition from the generation of static electricity.

(m) Instrumentation shall be fitted for continuously indicating and permanently recording at all times when inert gas is being supplied the pressure and oxygen content of the gas in the inert gas supply main on the discharge side of the fan. Such instrumentation should preferably be placed in the cargo control room if fitted but in any case shall be easily accessible to the officer in charge of cargo operations. Portable instruments suitable for measuring oxygen and hydrocarbon gases or vapour and the necessary tank fittings shall be provided for monitoring the tank contents.

(n) Means for indicating the temperature and pressure of the inert gas main shall be provided.

(o) Alarms shall be provided to indicate:

(i) high oxygen content of gas in the inert gas main;

(ii) low gas pressure in the inert gas main;

(iii) low pressure in the supply to the deck water seal, if such equipment is installed;


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(iv) high temperature of gas in the inert gas main; and

(v) low water pressure to the scrubber

and automatic shut-downs of the system shall be arranged on predetermined limits being reached in respect of sub-paragraphs (iii), (iv) and (v) of this paragraph.

(p) The master of any ship equipped with an inert gas system shall be provided with an instruction manual covering operational, safety and occupational health requirements relevant to the system.

Regulation 63

Cargo Pump Room

Each cargo pump room shall be provided with a fixed fire-fighting system operated from a readily accessible position outside the pump room. The system shall use water-spray or another suitable medium satisfactory to the Administration.

Regulation 64

Hose Nozzles

All hose water nozzles provided shall be of an approved dual purpose type (i.e. spray/jet type) incorporating a shut-off.

PART F—SPECIAL FIRE SAFETY MEASURES FOR EXISTING PASSENGER SHIPS

(For the purposes of this Part of this Chapter, all references to Regulation . . . (1948) mean references to Regulations of Chapter II of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1948, and all references to Regulation . . . (1960) mean, unless otherwise stated, references to regulations of Chapter II of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1960)

 

Regulation 65

Application

Any passenger ship carrying more than 36 passengers shall at least comply as follows:

(a) A ship, the keel of which was laid before 19 November 1952, shall comply with the provisions of Regulations 66 to 85 inclusive of this Part.

(b) A ship, the keel of which was laid on or after 19 November 1952 but before 26 May 1965, shall comply with the provisions of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1948, relating to the fire safety measures applicable in that Convention to new ships and shall also comply with the provisions of Regulations 68 (b) and (c), 75, 77 (b), 78, 80 (b), 81 (b) to (g), 84 and 85 of this Part.

(c) A ship, the keel of which was laid on or after 26 May 1965, but before the present Convention comes into force, shall, unless it complies with Parts A and B of this Chapter, comply with the provisions of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1960 relating to the fire safety measures applicable in that Convention to new ships and shall also comply with Regulations 68 (b) and (c), 80 (b), 81 (b), (c) and (d) and 85 of this Part.

 

Regulation 66

Structure

The structural components shall be of steel or other suitable material in compliance with Regulation 27 (1948), except that isolated deckhouses containing no accommodation and decks exposed to the weather may be of wood if structural fire protection measures are taken to the satisfaction of the Administration.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

Regulation 67

Main Vertical Zones

The ship shall be subdivided by “A” Class divisions into main vertical zones in compliance with Regulation 28 (1948). Such divisions shall have as far as practicable adequate insulating value, taking into account the nature of the adjacent spaces as provided for in Regulation 26 (c) (iv) (1948).

Regulation 68

Openings in Main Vertical Zone Bulkheads

(a) The ship shall comply substantially with Regulation 29 (1948).

(b) Fire doors shall be of steel or equivalent material with or without non-combustible insulation.

(c) In the case of ventilation trunks and ducts having a cross-sectional area of 0.02 square metres (31 square inches) or more which pass through main zone divisions, the following additional provisions shall apply:

(i) for trunks and ducts having cross-sectional areas between 0.02 square metres (31 square inches) and 0.075 square metres (116 square inches) inclusive, fire dampers shall be of a fail-safe automatic closing type, or such trunks and ducts shall be insulated for at least 457 millimetres (18 inches) on each side of the division to meet the applicable bulkhead requirements;

(ii) for trunks and ducts having a cross-sectional area exceeding 0.075 square metres (116 square inches), fire dampers shall be of a fail-safe automatic closing type.

Regulation 69

Separation of Accommodation Spaces from Machinery, Cargo and Service Spaces

The ship shall comply with Regulation 31 (1948).

Regulation 70

Application relative to Methods I, II and III

Each accommodation space and service space in a ship shall comply with all the provisions stipulated in one of the paragraphs (a), (b), (c) or (d) of this Regulation:

(a) When a ship is being considered for acceptance in the context of Method I, a network of non-combustible “B” Class bulkheads shall be provided in substantial compliance with Regulation 30 (a) (1948) together with maximum use of non-combustible materials in compliance with Regulation 39 (a) (1948).

(b) When a ship is being considered for acceptance in the context of Method II:

(i) an automatic sprinkler and fire alarm system shall be provided which shall be in substantial compliance with Regulations 42 and 48 (1948), and

(ii) the use of combustible materials of all kinds shall be reduced as far as is reasonable and practicable.

(c) When a ship is being considered for acceptance in the context of Method III, a network of fire-retarding bulkheads shall be fitted from deck to deck in substantial compliance with Regulation 30 (b) (1948), together with an automatic fire detection system in substantial compliance with Regulation 43 (1948). The use of combustible and highly inflammable materials shall be restricted as prescribed in Regulations 39 (b) and 40 (g) (1948). Departure from the requirements of Regulations 39 (b) and 40 (g) (1948) may be permitted if a fire patrol is provided at intervals not exceeding 20 minutes.

(d) When a ship is being considered for acceptance in the context of Method III:

(i) additional “A” Class divisions shall be provided within the accommodation spaces in order to reduce in these spaces the mean length of the main vertical zones to about 20 metres (65.5 feet); and

(ii) an automatic fire detection system shall be provided in substantial compliance with Regulation 43 (1948); and


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(iii) all exposed surfaces, and their coatings, of corridor and cabin bulkheads in accommodation spaces shall be of limited flame-spreading power; and

(iv) the use of combustible materials shall be restricted as prescribed in Regulation 39 (b) (1948). Departure from the requirements of Regulation 39 (b) (1948) may be permitted if a fire patrol is provided at intervals not exceeding 20 minutes; and

(v) additional non-combustible “B” Class divisions shall be fitted from deck to deck forming a network of fire-retarding bulkheads within which the area of any compartment, except public spaces, will in general not exceed 300 square metres (3,200 square feet).

 

Regulation 71

Protection of Vertical Stairways

The stairways shall comply with Regulation 33 (1948) except that, in cases of exceptional difficulty, the Administration may permit the use of non-combustible “B” Class divisions and doors instead of “A” Class divisions and doors for stairway enclosures. Moreover, the Administration may permit exceptionally the retention of a wooden stairway subject to its being sprinkler-protected and satisfactorily enclosed.

 

Regulation 72

Protection of Lifts (Passenger and Service), Vertical Trunks for Light and Air, etc.

The ship shall comply with Regulation 34 (1948).

 

Regulation 73

Protection of Control Stations

The ship shall comply with Regulation 35 (1948), except however that in cases where the disposition or construction of control stations is such as to preclude full compliance, e.g. timber construction of wheelhouse, the Administration may permit the use of free-standing non-combustible “B” Class divisions to protect the boundaries of such control stations. In such cases, where spaces immediately below such control stations constitute a significant fire hazard, the deck between shall be fully insulated as an “A” Class division.

 

Regulation 74

Protection of Store-rooms, etc.

The ship shall comply with Regulation 36 (1948).

 

Regulation 75

Windows and Sidescuttles

Skylights of engine and boiler spaces shall be capable of being closed from outside such spaces.

 

Regulation 76

Ventilation Systems

(a) All power ventilation, except cargo and machinery space ventilation, shall be fitted with master controls so located outside the machinery space and in readily accessible positions, that it shall not be necessary to go to more than three stations in order to stop all the ventilation fans to spaces other than machinery and cargo spaces. Machinery space ventilation shall be provided with a master control operable from a position outside the machinery space.

(b) Efficient insulation shall be provided for exhaust ducts from galley ranges where the ducts pass through accommodation spaces.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

Regulation 77

Miscellaneous Items

(a) The ship shall comply with Regulation 40 (a), (b) and (f) (1948), except that in Regulation 40 (a) (i) (1948), 20 metres (65.5 feet) may be substituted for 13.73 metres (45 feet).

(b) Fuel pumps shall be fitted with remote controls situated outside the space concerned so that they may be stopped in the event of a fire arising in the space in which they are located.

Regulation 78

Cinematograph Film

Cellulose-nitrate-based film shall not be used in cinematograph installations on board ship.

Regulation 79

Plans

Plans shall be provided in compliance with Regulation 44 (1948).

Regulation 80

Pumps, Fire Main Systems, Hydrants and Hoses

(a) The provisions of Regulation 45 (1948) shall be complied with.

(b) Water from the fire main shall, as far as practicable, be immediately available, such as by maintenance of pressure or by remote control of fire pumps, which control shall be easily operable and readily accessible.

Regulation 81

Fire Detection and Extinction Requirements

General

(a) The requirements of Regulation 50 (a) to (o) (1948) inclusive shall be complied with, subject to further provisions of this Regulation.

Patrols, Detection and Communication System

(b) Each member of any fire patrol required by this Part shall be trained to be familiar with the arrangements of the ship as well as the location and operation of any equipment he may be called upon to use.

(c) A special alarm to summon the crew shall be fitted which may be part of the ship’s general alarm system.

(d) A public address system or other effective means of communication shall also be available throughout the accommodation, public and service spaces.

Machinery and Boiler Spaces

(e) The number, type and distribution of fire extinguishers shall comply with paragraphs (g) (ii (g) (iii) and (h) (ii) of Regulation 64 (1960).

International Shore Connexion

(f) The provisions of Regulation 64 (d) (1960) shall be complied with.

Firemen’s Outfits

(g) The provisions of Regulation 64 (j) (1960) shall be complied with.

Regulation 82

Ready Availability of Fire-Fighting Appliances

The provisions of Regulation 66 (1960) shall be complied with.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

Regulation 83

Means of Escape

The provisions of Regulation 54 (1948) shall be complied with.

Regulation 84

Emergency Source of Electrical Power

The provisions of Regulation 22 (a), (b) and (c) (1948) shall be complied with except that the location of the emergency source of electrical power shall be in accordance with the requirements of Regulation 25 (a) (1960).

Regulation 85

Practice Musters and Drills

At the fire drills mentioned in Regulation 26 of Chapter III of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1960 each member of the crew shall be required to demonstrate his familiarity with the arrangements and facilities of the ship, his duties, and any equipment he may be called upon to use. Masters shall be required to familiarize and instruct the crews in this regard.

CHAPTER III

LIFE-SAVING APPLIANCES, ETC.

Regulation 1

Application

(a) This Chapter, except where it is otherwise expressly provided, applies as follows to new ships engaged on international voyages:

Part A—Passenger ships and cargo ships.

Part B—Passenger ships.

Part C—Cargo ships.

(b) In the case of existing ships engaged on international voyages, the keels of which were laid or which were at a similar stage of construction on or after the date of coming into force of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1960, the requirements of Chapter III of that Convention applicable to new ships as defined in that Convention shall apply.

(c) In the case of existing ships engaged on international voyages, the keels of which were laid or which were at a similar stage of construction before the date of coming into force of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1960, and which do not already comply with the provisions of Chapter III of that Convention relating to new ships, the arrangements in each ship shall be considered by the Administration with a view to securing, so far as this is practicable and reasonable, and as early as possible, substantial compliance with the requirements of Chapter III of that Convention. The proviso to sub-paragraph (b) (i) of Regulation 27 of this Chapter may, however, be applied to existing ships referred to in this paragraph only if:

(i) the provisions of Regulations 4, 8, 14, 18 and 19 and paragraphs (a) and (b) of Regulation 27 of this Chapter are complied with;

(ii) the liferafts carried in accordance with the provisions of paragraph (b) of Regulation 27 comply with the requirements of either Regulation 15 or Regulation 16, and of Regulation 17 of this Chapter; and

(iii) the total number of persons on board shall not be increased as the result of the provision of liferafts unless the ship fully complies with the provisions of:

(1) Part B of Chapter II-1

(2) sub-paragraphs (a) (iii) and (iv) of Regulation 21 or sub-paragraph (a) (iii) of Regulation 48 of Chapter II-2, as applicable; and

(3) paragraphs (a), (b), (e) and (f) of Regulation 29 of this Chapter.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

PART A-GENERAL

(Part A applies to both passenger ships and cargo ships)

Regulation 2

Definitions

For the purpose of this Chapter:

(a) “Short international voyage” means an international voyage in the course of which a ship is not more than 200 miles from a port or place in which the passengers and crew could be placed in safety, and which does not exceed 600 miles in length between the last port of call in the country in which the voyage begins and the final port of destination.

(b) “Liferaft” means a liferaft complying with either Regulation 15 or Regulation 16 of this Chapter.

(c) “Approved launching device” means a device approved by the Administration, capable of launching from the embarkation position a liferaft fully loaded with the number of persons it is permitted to carry and with its equipment.

(d) “Certificated lifeboatman” means any member of the crew who holds a certificate of efficiency issued under the provisions of Regulation 32 of this Chapter.

(e) “Buoyant apparatus” means flotation equipment (other than lifeboats, liferafts, lifebuoys and life-jackets) designed to support a specified number of persons who are in the water and of such construction that it retains its shape and properties.

Regulation 3

Exemptions

(a) The Administration, if it considers that the sheltered nature and conditions of the voyage are such as to render the application of the full requirements of this Chapter unreasonable or unnecessary, may to that extent exempt from the requirements of this Chapter individual ships or classes of ships which, in the course of their voyage, do not go more than 20 miles from the nearest land.

(b) In the case of passenger ships which are employed in special trades for the carriage of large numbers of special trade passengers, such as the pilgrim trade, the Administration, if satisfied that it is impracticable to enforce compliance with the requirements of this Chapter, may exempt such ships, when they belong to its country, from those requirements, provided that they comply fully with the provisions of:

(i) the Rules annexed to the Special Trade Passenger Ships Agreement, 1971; and

(ii) the Rules annexed to the Protocol on Space Requirements for Special Trade Passenger Ships, 1973, when it enters into force.

Regulation 4

Ready Availability of Lifeboats, Liferafts and Buoyant Apparatus

(a) The general principle governing the provision of lifeboats, liferafts and buoyant apparatus in a ship to which this Chapter applies is that they shall be readily available in case of emergency.

(b) To be readily available, the lifeboats, liferafts and buoyant apparatus shall comply with the following conditions:

(i) they shall be capable of being put into the water safely and rapidly even under unfavourable conditions of trim and of 15 degree of list;

(ii) it shall be possible to effect embarkation into the lifeboats and liferafts rapidly and in good order;

(iii) the arrangement of each lifeboat, liferaft and article of buoyant apparatus shall be such that it will not interfere with the operation of other boats, liferafts and buoyant apparatus.

(c) All the life-saving appliances shall be kept in working order and available for immediate use before the ship leaves port and at all times during the voyage.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

Regulation 5

Construction of Lifeboats

(a) All lifeboats shall be properly constructed and shall be of such form and proportions that they shall have ample stability in a seaway, and sufficient freeboard when loaded with their full complement of persons and equipment. All lifeboats shall be capable of maintaining positive stability when open to the sea and loaded with their full complement of persons and equipment.

(b) (i) All lifeboats shall have rigid sides and internal buoyancy only. The Administration may approve lifeboats with a rigid shelter, provided that it may be readily opened from both inside and outside, and does not impede rapid embarkation and disembarkation or the launching and handling of the lifeboat.

(ii) Motor lifeboats may be fitted to the satisfaction of the Administration with a means for preventing the entry of water at the fore end.

(iii) All lifeboats shall be not less than 7.3 metres (24 feet) in length except where owing to the size of the ship, or for other reasons, the Administration considers the carriage of such lifeboats unreasonable or impracticable. In no ship shall the lifeboats be less than 4.9 metres (16 feet) in length.

(c) No lifeboat may be approved the weight of which when fully laden with persons and equipment exceeds 20,300 kilogrammes (20 tons) or which has a carrying capacity calculated in accordance with Regulation 7 of this Chapter of more than 150 persons.

(d) All lifeboats permitted to carry more than 60 persons but not more than 100 persons shall be either motor lifeboats complying with the requirements of Regulation 9 of this Chapter or be lifeboats fitted with an approved means of mechanical propulsion complying with Regulation 10 of this Chapter. All lifeboats permitted to carry more than 100 persons shall be motor lifeboats complying with the requirements of Regulation 9 of this Chapter.

(e) All lifeboats shall be of sufficient strength to enable them to be safely lowered into the water when loaded with their full complement of persons and equipment. All lifeboats shall be of such strength that they will not suffer residual deflection if subjected to an overload of 25 per cent.

(f) All lifeboats shall have a mean sheer at least equal to 4 per cent of their length. The sheer shall be approximately parabolic in form.

(g) In lifeboats permitted to carry 100 or more persons the volume of the buoyancy shall be increased to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(h) All lifeboats shall have inherent buoyancy, or shall be fitted with watertight air cases or other equivalent non-corrodible buoyant material which shall not be adversely affected by oil or oil products, sufficient to float the boat and its equipment when the boat is flooded and open to the sea. An additional volume of watertight air cases or other equivalent non-corrodible buoyant material, which shall not be adversely affected by oil or oil products, equal to at least one-tenth of the cubic capacity of the boat shall also be provided. The Administration may permit the watertight air cases to be filled with a non-corrodible buoyant material which shall not be adversely affected by oil or oil products.

(i) All thwarts and side-seats shall be fitted as low in the lifeboat as practicable.

(j) The block coefficient of the cubic capacity as determined in accordance with Regulation 6 of this Chapter of all lifeboats, except wooden lifeboats made of planks, shall be not less than 0.64 provided that any such lifeboat may have a block coefficient of less than 0.64 if the Administration is satisfied with the sufficiency of the metacentric height and freeboard when the lifeboat is loaded with its full complement of persons and equipment.

Regulation 6

Cubic Capacity of Lifeboats

(a) The cubic capacity of a lifeboat shall be determined by Simpson’s (Stirling’s) Rule or by any other method giving the same degree of accuracy. The capacity of a square-sterned lifeboat shall be calculated as if the lifeboat had a pointed stern.

(b) For example, the capacity in cubic metres (or cubic feet) of a lifeboat, calculated by the aid of Simpson’s Rule, may be considered as given by the following formula:


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

Capacity =

L

(4A + 2B + 4C)

12

L being the length of the lifeboat in metres (or feet) from the inside of the planking or plating at the stem to the corresponding point at the stern post: in the case of a lifeboat with a square stern, the length is measured to the inside of the transom.

A, B, C denote respectively the areas of the cross-sections at the quarter-length forward, amidships, and the quarter-length aft, which correspond to the three points obtained by dividing L into four equal parts. (The areas corresponding to the two ends of the lifeboat are considered negligible.)

The areas A, B, C shall be deemed to be given in square metres (or square feet) by the successive application of the following formula to each of the three cross-sections:

Area =

h

(a + 4b + 2c +4d + e)

12

h being the depth measured in metres (or in feet) inside the planking or plating from the keel to the level of the gunwale, or, in certain cases, to a lower level as determined hereafter.

a, b, c, d, e denote the horizontal breadths of the lifeboat measured in metres (or in feet) at the upper and lower points of the depth and at the three points obtained by dividing h into four equal parts (a and e being the breadths at the extreme point, and c at the middle point of h).

(c) If the sheer of the gunwale, measure at the two points situated at a quarter of the length of the lifeboat from the ends, exceeds 1 per cent of the length of the lifeboat the depth employed in calculating the area of the cross-sections A or C shall be deemed to be the depth amidships plus 1 per cent of the length of the lifeboat.

(d) If the depth of the lifeboat amidships exceeds 45 per cent of the breadth, the depth employed in calculating the area of the amidship cross-section B shall be deemed to be equal to 45 per cent of the breadth, and the depth employed in calculating the areas of the quarter-length sections A and C is obtained by increasing this last figure by an amount equal to 1 per cent of the length of the lifeboat, provided that in no case shall the depths employed in the calculation exceed the actual depths at these points.

(e) If the depth of the lifeboat is greater than 1.22 metres (4 feet) the number of persons given by the application of this Rule shall be reduced in proportion to the ratio of 1.22 metres (4 feet) to the actual depth, until the lifeboat has been satisfactorily tested afloat with that number of persons on board, all wearing life-jackets.

(f) The Administration shall impose, by suitable formulae, a limit for the number of persons allowed in lifeboats with very fine ends and in lifeboats very full in form.

(g) The Administration may assign to a lifeboat constructed of wooden planks capacity equal to the product of the length, the breadth and the depth multiplied by 0.6 if it is evident that this formula does not give a greater capacity than that obtained by the above method. The dimensions shall then be measured in the following manner:

Length—From the intersection of the outside of the planking with the stem to the corresponding point at the stern post or, in the case of a square-sterned boat, to the after side of the transom.

Breadth—From the outside of the planking at the point where the breadth of the boat is greatest.

Depth—Amidships inside the planking from the keel to the level of the gunwale, but the depth used in calculating the cubic capacity may not in any case exceed 45 per cent of the breadth.

In all cases the shipowner has the right to require that the cubic capacity of the lifeboat shall be determined by exact measurement.

(h) The cubic capacity of a motor lifeboat or a lifeboat fitted with other propelling gear shall be obtained from the gross capacity by deducting a volume equal to that occupied by the motor and its accessories or the gearbox of the other propelling gear, and, when carried, the radiotelegraph installation and searchlight with their accessories.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

Regulation 7

Carrying Capacity of Lifeboats

The number of persons which a lifeboat shall be permitted to accommodate shall be equal to the greatest whole number obtained by dividing the capacity in cubic metres by:

In the case of a lifeboat of 7.3 metres (24 feet) in length or over

0.283 (or where the capacity is measured in cubic feet 10);

in the case of lifeboats of 4.9 metres (16 feet) in length

0.396 (or where the capacity is measured in cubic feet 14); and

in the case of lifeboats of 4.9 metres (16 feet) in length or over but under 7.3 metres (24 feet)

a number between 0.396 and 0.283 (or where the capacity is measured in cubic feet between 14 and 10), to be obtained by interpolation;

provided that the number shall in no case exceed the number of adult persons wearing life-jackets which can be seated without in any way interfering with the use of oars or the operation of other propulsion equipment.

Regulation 8

Number of Motor Lifeboats to be carried

(a) In every passenger ship there shall be carried on each side of the ship at least one motor lifeboat complying with the requirements of Regulation 9 of this Chapter.

Provided that in passenger ships in which the total number of persons which the ship is certified to carry, together with the crew, does not exceed 30, only one such motor lifeboat shall be required.

(b) In every cargo ship of 1,600 tons gross tonnage and upwards, except tankers, ships employed as whale factory ships, ships employed as fish processing or canning factory ships, and ships engaged in the carriage of persons in the whaling, fish processing or canning industries, there shall be carried at least one motor lifeboat complying with the requirements of Regulation 9 of this Chapter.

(c) In every tanker of 1,600 tons gross tonnage and upwards, in every ship employed as a whale factory ship, in every ship employed as a fish processing or canning factory ship and in every ship engaged in the carriage of persons employed in the whaling, fish processing or canning industries, there shall be carried on each side at least one motor lifeboat complying with the requirements of Regulation 9 of this Chapter.

Regulation 9

Specification of Motor Lifeboats

(a) A motor lifeboat shall comply with the following conditions:

(i) It shall be fitted with a compression ignition engine and kept so as to be at all times ready for use; it shall be capable of being readily started in all conditions; sufficient fuel for 24 hours continuous operation at the speed specified in sub-paragraph (iii) of this paragraph shall be provided.

(ii) The engine and its accessories shall be suitably enclosed to ensure operation under adverse weather conditions, and the engine casing shall be fire-resisting. Provision shall be made for going astern.

(iii) The speed ahead in smooth water when loaded with its full complement of persons and equipment shall be:

(1) In the case of motor lifeboats required by Regulation 8 of this Chapter to be carried in passenger ships, tankers, ships employed as whale factory ships, ships employed as fish processing or canning factory ships and ships engaged in the


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

carriage of persons employed in the whaling, fish processing or canning industries, at least six knots.

(2) In the case of any other motor lifeboat, at least four knots.

(b) The volume of the internal buoyancy appliances of a motor lifeboat shall be increased above that required by Regulation 5 of this Chapter by the amount, if any, by which the volume of the internal buoyancy appliances required to support the engine and its accessories, and, if fitted, the searchlight and radio-telegraph installation and their accessories, exceeds the volume of the internal buoyancy appliances required, at the rate of 0.0283 cubic metres (one cubic foot) per person, to support the additional persons which the lifeboat could accommodate if the motor and its accessories, and, if fitted, the searchlight and radio-telegraph installation and their accessories, were removed.

Regulation 10

Specification of Mechanically Propelled Lifeboats other than Motor Lifeboats

A mechanically propelled lifeboat, other than a motor lifeboat, shall comply with the following conditions:

(a) The propelling gear shall be of an approved type and shall have sufficient power to enable the lifeboat to be readily cleared from the ship’s side when launched and to be able to hold course under adverse weather conditions. If the gear is manually operated it shall be capable of being worked by persons untrained in its use and shall be capable of being operated when the lifeboat is flooded.

(b) A device shall be fitted by means of which the helmsman can cause the lifeboat to go astern at any time when the propelling gear is in operation.

(c) The volume of the internal buoyancy of a mechanically propelled lifeboat other than a motor lifeboat, shall be increased to compensate for the weight of the propelling gear.

Regulation 11

Equipment of Lifeboats

(a) The normal equipment of every lifeboat shall consist of:

(i) a single banked complement of buoyant oars, two spare buoyant oars, and a buoyant steering oar; one set and a half of thole pins or crutches, attached to the lifeboat by lanyard or chain; a boat hook;

(ii) two plugs for each plug hole (plugs are not required when proper automatic valves are fitted) attached to the lifeboat by lanyards or chains; a baler, and two buckets of approved material;

(iii) a rudder attached to the lifeboat and a tiller;

(iv) two hatchets, one at each end of the lifeboat;

(v) a lamp, with oil sufficient for 12 hours; two boxes of suitable matches in a watertight container;

(vi) a mast or masts, with galvanized wire stays together with sails (coloured orange);

(vii) an efficient compass in binnacle, to be luminised or fitted with suitable means of illumination;

(viii) a lifeline becketed round the outside of the lifeboat;

(ix) a sea-anchor of approved size;

(x) two painters of sufficient length. One shall be secured to the forward end of the lifeboat with strop and toggle so that it can be released, and the other shall be firmly secured to the stem of the lifeboat and be ready for use;

(xi) a vessel containing 4½ litres (1 gallon) of vegetable, fish or animal oil. The vessel shall be so constructed that the oil can be easily distributed on the water, and so arranged that it can be attached to the sea-anchor;

(xii) a food ration, determined by the Administration, for each person the lifeboat is certified to carry. These rations shall be kept in airtight receptacles which are to be stowed in a watertight container;


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(xiii) watertight receptacles containing 3 litres (6 pints) of fresh water for each person the lifeboat is certified to carry, or watertight receptacles containing 2 litres (4 pints) of fresh water for each person together with an approved de-salting apparatus capable of providing 1 litre (2 pints) of drinking water per person; a rustproof dipper with lanyard; a rustproof graduated drinking vessel;

(xiv) four parachute signals of approved type capable of giving a bright red light at a high altitude; six hand flares of an approved type giving a bright red light;

(xv) two buoyant smoke signals of an approved type (for day-time use) capable of giving off a volume of orange-coloured smoke;

(xvi) approved means to enable persons to cling to the boat should it be upturned, in the form of bilge keels or keel rails, together with grab lines secured from gunwale to gunwale under the keel, or other approved arrangements;

(xvii) an approved first-aid outfit in a watertight case;

(xviii) a waterproof electric torch suitable for signalling in the Morse Code together with one spare set of batteries and one spare bulb in a waterproof container;

(xix) a daylight-signalling mirror of an approved type;

(xx) a jack-knife fitted with a tin-opener to be kept attached to the boat with a lanyard;

(xxi) two light buoyant heaving lines;

(xxii) a manual pump of an approved type;

(xxiii) a suitable locker for stowage of small items of equipment;

(xxiv) one whistle or equivalent sound signal;

(xxv) one set of fishing tackle;

(xxvi) one approved cover of a highly visible colour capable of protecting the occupants against injury by exposure; and

(xxvii) one copy of the illustrated table of life-saving signals referred to in Regulation 16 of Chapter V.

(b) In the case of ships engaged on voyages of such duration that in the opinion of the Administration the items specified in sub-paragraphs (vi), (xii), (xix), (xx) and (xxv) of paragraph (a) of this Regulation are unnecessary, the Administration may allow them to be dispensed with.

(c) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (a) of this Regulation, motor lifeboats or other approved mechanically propelled lifeboats need not carry a mast or sails or more than half the complement of oars, but they shall carry two boat hooks.

(d) All lifeboats shall be fitted with suitable means to enable persons in the water to climb into the lifeboat.

(e) Every motor lifeboat shall carry portable fire-extinguishing equipment of an approved type capable of discharging froth or other suitable substance for extinguishing oil fires.

Regulation 12

Security of Lifeboat Equipment

All items of life boat equipment, with the exception of the boat hook which shall be kept free for fending off purposes, shall be suitably secured within the lifeboat. The lashing shall be carried out in such a manner as to ensure the security of the equipment and so as not to interfere with the lifting hooks or to prevent ready embarkation. All items of lifeboat equipment shall be as small and light in weight as possible and shall be packed in suitable and compact form.

Regulation 13

Portable Radio Apparatus for Survival Craft

(a) An approved portable radio apparatus for survival craft complying with the requirements set out in Regulation 14 of Chapter IV shall be carried in all ships except those on which there is carried on each side of the ship a motor lifeboat fitted with a radio telegraph installation complying with the provisions of Regulation 14 of this Chapter and


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

of Regulation 13 of Chapter IV. All this equipment shall be kept together in the chartroom or other suitable place ready to be moved to one or other of the lifeboats in the event of an emergency. However, in tankers of 3,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards in which lifeboats are fitted amidships and aft this equipment shall be kept in a suitable place in the vicinity of those lifeboats which are furthest away from the ship’s main transmitter.

(b) In the case of ships engaged on voyages of such duration that in the opinion of the Administration portable radio apparatus for survival craft is unnecessary, the Administration may allow such equipment to be dispensed with.

Regulation 14

Radio Apparatus and Searchlights in Motor Lifeboats

(a) (i) Where the total number of persons on board a passenger ship engaged on international voyages which are not short international voyages, a ship employed as a whale factory ship, a ship employed as a fish processing or canning factory ship or a ship engaged in the carriage of persons employed in the whaling, fish processing or canning industries, is more than 199 but less than 1,500, a radiotelegraph apparatus complying with the requirements set out in this Regulation and in Regulation 13 of Chapter IV shall be fitted in at least one of the motor lifeboats required under Regulation 8 of this Chapter to be carried in that ship.

(ii) Where the total number of persons on board such a ship is 1,500 or more, such a radiotelegraph apparatus shall be fitted in every motor lifeboat required under Regulation 8 of this Chapter to be carried in that ship.

(b) The radio apparatus shall be installed in a cabin large enough to accommodate both the equipment and the person using it.

(c) The arrangements shall be such that the efficient operation of the transmitter and receiver shall not be interfered with by the engine while it is running, whether a battery is on charge or not.

(d) The radio battery shall not be used to supply power to any engine starting motor or ignition system.

(e) The motor lifeboat engine shall be fitted with a dynamo for recharging the radio battery, and for other services.

(f) A searchlight shall be fitted in each motor lifeboat required to be carried under paragraph (a) of Regulation 8 of this Chapter in passenger ships and under paragraph (c) of that Regulation in ships employed as whale factory ships, fish processing or canning factory ships and ships engaged in the carriage of persons employed in the whaling, fish processing or canning industries.

(g) The searchlight shall include a lamp of at least 80 watts, an efficient reflector and a source of power which will give effective illumination of a light-coloured object having a width of about 18 metres (60 feet) at a distance of 180 metres (200 yards) for a total period of six hours and shall be capable of working for at least three hours continuously.

Regulation 15

Requirements for Inflatable Liferafts

(a) Every inflatable liferaft shall be so constructed that, when fully inflated and floating with the cover uppermost, it shall be stable in a seaway.

(b) The liferaft shall be so constructed that if it is dropped into the water from a height of 18 metres (60 feet) neither the liferaft nor its equipment will be damaged. If the raft is to be stowed on the ship at a height above the water of more than 18 metres (60 feet), it shall be of a type which has been satisfactorily drop-tested from a height of at least equal to the height at which it is to be stowed.

(c) The construction of the liferaft shall include a cover which shall automatically be set in place when the liferaft is inflated. This cover shall be capable of protecting the occupants against injury from exposure, and means shall be provided for collecting rain. The top of the cover shall be fitted with a lamp which derives its luminosity from a sea-activated cell and a similar lamp shall also be fitted inside the liferaft. The cover of the liferaft shall be of a highly visible colour.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(d) The liferaft shall be fitted with a painter and shall have a line securely becketed round the outside. A lifeline shall also be fitted around the inside of the liferaft.

(e) The liferaft shall be capable of being readily righted by one person if it inflates in an inverted position.

(f) The liferaft shall be fitted at each opening with efficient means to enable persons in the water to climb on board.

(g) The liferaft shall be contained in a valise or other container so constructed as to be capable of withstanding hard wear under conditions met with at sea. The liferaft in its valise or other container shall be inherently buoyant.

(h) The buoyancy of the liferaft shall be so arranged as to ensure by a division into an even number of separate compartments, half of which shall be capable of supporting out of the water the number of persons which the liferaft is permitted to accommodate, or by some other equally efficient means, that there is a reasonable margin of buoyancy if the raft is damaged or partially fails to inflate.

(i) The total weight of the liferaft, its valise or other container and its equipment shall not exceed 180 kilograms (400 lbs.).

(j) The number of persons which an inflatable liferaft shall be permitted to accommodate shall be equal to:

(i) the greatest whole number obtained by dividing by 96 the volume, measured in cubic decimetres (or by 3.4 the volume, measured in cubic feet) of the main buoyancy tubes (which for this purpose shall include neither the arches nor the thwart or thwarts if fitted) when inflated; or

(ii) the greatest whole number obtained by dividing by 3,720 the area measured in square centimetres (or by 4 the area, measured in square feet) of the floor (which for this purpose may include the thwart or thwarts if fitted) of the liferaft when inflated whichever number shall be the less.

(k) The floor of the liferaft shall be waterproof and shall be capable of being sufficiently insulated against cold.

(l) The liferaft shall be inflated by a gas which is not injurious to the occupants and the inflation shall take place automatically either on the pulling of a line or by some other equally simple and efficient method. Means shall be provided whereby the topping-up pump or bellows required by Regulation 17 of this Chapter may be used to maintain pressure.

(m) The liferaft shall be of approved material and construction, and shall be so constructed as to be capable of withstanding exposure for 30 days afloat in all sea conditions.

(n) No liferaft shall be approved which has a carrying capacity calculated in accordance with paragraph (j) of this Regulation of less than six persons. The maximum number of persons calculated in accordance with that paragraph for which an inflatable liferaft may be approved shall be at the discretion of the Administration, but shall in no case exceed 25.

(o) The liferaft shall be capable of operating throughout a temperature range of 66°C to minus 30°C (150°F to minus 22°F).

(p) (i) The liferaft shall be so stowed as to be readily available in case of emergency. It shall be stowed in such a manner as to permit it to float free from its stowage, inflate and break free from the vessel in the event of sinking.

(ii) If used, lashings shall be fitted with an automatic release system of a hydrostatic or equivalent nature approved by the Administration.

(iii) The liferaft required by paragraph (c) of Regulation 35 of this Chapter may be securely fastened.

(q) The liferaft shall be fitted with arrangements enabling it to be readily towed.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

Regulation 16

Requirements for Rigid Liferafts

(a) Every rigid liferaft shall be so constructed that if it is dropped into the water from its stowed position neither the liferaft nor its equipment will be damaged.

(b) The deck area of the liferaft shall be situated within that part of the liferaft which affords protection to its occupants. The area of that deck shall be at least 0.3720 square metres (4 square feet) for every person the liferaft is permitted to carry. The nature of the deck shall be such as to prevent so far as practicable the ingress of water and it shall effectively support the occupants out of the water.

(c) The liferaft shall be fitted with a cover or equivalent arrangement of a highly visible colour, which shall be capable of protecting the occupants against injury from exposure whichever way up the liferaft is floating.

(d) The equipment of the liferaft shall be so stowed as to be readily available whichever way up the liferaft is floating.

(e) The total weight of a liferaft and its equipment carried in passenger ships shall not exceed 180 kilogrammes (400 lbs.). Liferafts carried in cargo ships may exceed 180 kilogrammes (400 lbs.) in weight if they are capable of being launched from both sides of the ship or if there are provided means for putting them into the water mechanically.

(f) The liferaft must at all times be effective and stable when floating either way up.

(g) The liferaft shall have at least 96 cubic decimetres (3.4 cubic feet) of air cases or equivalent buoyancy for each person it is permitted to carry which must be placed as near as possible to the sides of the raft.

(h) The liferaft shall have a painter attached and a lifeline securely becketed round the outside. A lifeline shall also be fitted around the inside of the raft.

(i) The liferaft shall be fitted at each opening with efficient means to enable persons in the water to climb on board.

(j) The liferaft shall be so constructed as not to be affected by oil or oil products.

(k) A buoyant light of the electric battery type shall be attached to the liferaft by a lanyard.

(l) The liferaft shall be fitted with arrangements enabling it to be readily towed.

(m) The liferafts shall be so stowed as to float free in the event of the ship sinking.

Regulation 17

Equipment of Inflatable and Rigid Liferafts

(a) The normal equipment of every liferaft shall consist of:

(i) One buoyant rescue quoit, attached to at least 30 metres (100 feet) of buoyant line.

(ii) For liferafts which are permitted to accommodate not more than 12 persons: one knife and one baler; for liferafts which are permitted to accommodate 13 persons or more: two knives and two balers.

(iii) Two sponges.

(iv) Two sea-anchors, one permanently attached to the liferaft and one spare.

(v) Two paddles.

(vi) One repair outfit capable of repairing punctures in buoyancy compartments.

(vii) One topping-up pump or bellows, unless the liferaft complies with Regulation 16 of this Chapter.

(viii) Three tin-openers.

(ix) One approved first-aid outfit in a waterproof case.

(x) One rustproof graduated drinking vessel.

(xi) One waterproof electric torch suitable for signalling in the Morse Code, together with one spare set of batteries and one spare bulb in a waterproof container.

(xii) One daylight-signalling mirror and one signalling whistle.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(xiii) Two parachute distress signals of an approved type, capable of giving a bright red light at a high altitude.

(xiv) Six hand flares of an approved type, capable of giving a bright red light.

(xv) One set of fishing tackle.

(xvi) A food ration, determined by the Administration, for each person the liferaft is permitted to accommodate.

(xvii) Watertight receptacles containing 1½ litres (3 pints) of fresh water for each person the liferaft is permitted to accommodate, of which ½ litre (1 pint) per person may be replaced by a suitable de-salting apparatus capable of producing an equal amount of fresh water.

(xviii) Six anti-seasickness tablets for each person the liferaft is deemed fit to accommodate.

(xix) Instructions on how to survive in the liferaft; and

(xx) one copy of the illustrated table of life-saving signals referred to in Regulation 16 of Chapter V.

(b) In the case of passenger ships engaged on short international voyages of such duration that in the opinion of the Administration all the items specified in paragraph (a) of this Regulation are unnecessary, the Administration may allow one or more liferafts, not being less than one-sixth of the number of liferafts carried in any such ship, to be provided with the equipment specified in sub-paragraphs (i) to (vii) inclusive, (xi) and (xix) of paragraph (a) of this Regulation, and with one-half of the equipment specified in sub-paragraphs (xiii) and (xiv) of that paragraph and the remainder of the liferafts carried to be provided with the equipment specified in sub-paragraphs (i) to (vii) inclusive and (xix) of that paragraph.

Regulation 18

Training in the use of Liferafts

The Administration shall so far as is practicable and reasonable take steps with a view to ensuring that crews of ships in which liferafts are carried are trained in their launching and use.

Regulation 19

Embarkation into Lifeboats and Liferafts

(a) Suitable arrangements shall be made for embarkation into the lifeboats, which shall include:

(i) a ladder at each set of davits to afford access to the lifeboats when waterborne, except that in passenger ships, ships employed as whale factory ships, ships employed as fish processing or canning factory ships and ships engaged in the carriage of persons employed in the whaling, fish processing or canning industries, the Administration may permit such ladders to be replaced by approved devices provided that there shall not be less than one ladder on each side of the ship;

(ii) means for illuminating the lifeboats and their launching gear during preparation for and the process of launching, and also for illuminating the water into which the lifeboats are launched until the process of launching is completed;

(iii) arrangements for warning the passengers and crew that the ship is about to be abandoned; and

(iv) means for preventing any discharge of water into the lifeboats.

(b) Suitable arrangements shall also be made for embarkation into the liferafts, which shall include:

(i) sufficient ladders to facilitate embarkation into the liferafts when waterborne except that in passenger ships, ships employed as whale factory ships, ships employed as fish processing or canning factory ships, and ships engaged in the carriage of persons employed in the whaling, fish processing or fish canning industries, the Administration may permit the replacement of some or all of such ladders by approved devices;


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(ii) where there are carried liferafts for which approved launching devices are provided, means for illuminating those liferafts and launching devices during the preparation for and the process of launching, and also for illuminating the water into which those liferafts are launched until the process of launching is completed;

(iii) means for illuminating the stowage position of liferafts for which approved launching devices are not provided;

(iv) arrangements for warning the passengers and crew that the ship is about to be abandoned; and

(v) means for preventing any discharge of water into the liferafts at fixed launching positions, including those under approved launching devices.

Regulation 20

Marking of Lifeboats, Liferafts and Buoyant Apparatus

(a) The dimensions of a lifeboat and the number of persons which it is permitted to carry shall be marked on it in clear permanent characters. The name and port of registry of the ship to which the lifeboat belongs shall be painted on each side of the bow.

(b) Buoyant apparatus shall be marked with the number of persons in the same manner.

(c) The number of persons shall be marked in the same manner on inflatable liferafts and also on the valise or container in which the inflatable liferaft is contained. Every inflatable liferaft shall also bear a serial number and the manufacturer’s name so that the owner of the liferaft can be ascertained.

(d) Every rigid liferaft shall be marked with the name and port of registry of the ship in which it is carried, and with the number of persons it is permitted to carry.

(e) No lifeboat, liferaft or buoyant apparatus shall be marked for a greater number of persons than that obtained in the manner specified in this Chapter.

Regulation 21

Specification of a Lifebuoy

(a) A lifebuoy shall satisfy the following requirements:

(i) it shall be of solid cork or any other equivalent material;

(ii) it shall be capable of supporting in fresh water for 24 hours at least 14.5 kilogrammes (32 lbs.) of iron;

(iii) it shall not be adversely affected by oil or oil products;

(iv) it shall be of a highly visible colour;

(v) it shall be marked in block letters with the name and port of registry of the ship in which it is carried.

(b) Lifebuoys filled with rushes, cork shavings or granulated cork, or any other loose granulated material, or whose buoyancy depends upon air compartments which require to be inflated, are prohibited.

(c) Lifebuoys made of plastic or other synthetic compounds shall be capable of retaining their buoyant properties and durability in contact with sea water or oil products, or under variations of temperature or climatic changes prevailing in open sea voyages.

(d) Lifebuoys shall be fitted with beckets securely seized. At least one lifebuoy on each side of the ship shall be fitted with a buoyant lifeline of at least 27.5 metres (15 fathoms) in length.

(e) In passenger ships not less than one-half of the total number of lifebuoys, and in no case less than six, and in cargo ships at least one-half of the total number of lifebuoys, shall be provided with efficient self-igniting lights.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(f) The self-igniting lights required by paragraph (e) of this Regulation shall be such that they cannot be extinguished by water. They shall be capable of burning for not less than 45 minutes and shall have a luminous intensity of not less than 2 candelas in all directions of the upper hemisphere. The lights shall be kept near the lifebuoys to which they belong, with the necessary means of attachment. Self-igniting lights used in tankers shall be of an approved electric battery type.*

(g) All lifebuoys shall be so placed as to be readily accessible to the persons on board, and at least two of the lifebuoys provided with self-igniting lights in accordance with paragraph (e) of this Regulation shall also be provided with an efficient self-activating smoke signal capable of producing smoke of a highly visible colour for at least 15 minutes, and shall be capable of quick release from the navigating bridge.

(h) Lifebuoys shall always be capable of being rapidly cast loose and shall not be permanently secured in any way.

Regulation 22

Life-jackets

(a) Ships shall carry for every person on board a life-jacket of an approved type and, in addition, unless these life-jackets can be adapted for use by children, a sufficient number of life-jackets suitable for children. Each life-jacket shall be suitably marked showing that it has been approved by the Administration.

(b) In addition to the life-jackets required by paragraph (a) of this Regulation there shall be carried on passenger ships life-jackets for 5 per cent of the total number of persons on board. These life-jackets shall be stowed in a conspicuous place on deck.

(c) An approved life-jacket shall comply with the following requirements:

(i) it shall be constructed with proper workmanship and materials;

(ii) it shall be so constructed as to eliminate so far as possible all risk of its being put on incorrectly, except that it shall be capable of being worn inside out;

(iii) it shall be capable of lifting the face of an exhausted or unconscious person out of the water and holding it above the water with the body inclined backwards from its vertical position;

(iv) it shall be capable of turning the body in the water from any position to a safe floating position with the body inclined backwards from its vertical position;

(v) it shall not be adversely affected by oil or oil products;

(vi) it shall be of a highly visible colour;

(vii) it shall be fitted with an approved whistle, firmly secured by a cord;

(viii) the buoyancy of the life-jacket required to provide the foregoing performance shall not be reduced by more than 5 per cent after 24 hours’ submergence in fresh water.

(d) A life-jacket, the buoyancy of which depends on inflation, may be permitted for use by the crews of all ships except passenger ships and tankers provided that:

(i) it has two separate inflatable compartments;

(ii) it is capable of being inflated both mechanically and by mouth; and

* The following ranges of visibilities of the light might be expected in given atmospheric conditions.

Atmospheric transmissivity factor

Meteorological range of visibility (miles)

Range of visibility of the light (miles)

0.3

2.4

0.96

0.4

3.3

1.05

0.5

4.3

1.15

0.6

5.8

1.24

0.7

8.4

1.34

0.8

13.4

1.45

0.9

28.9

1.57


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1continued

(iii) it complies with the requirements of paragraph (c) of this Regulation with either compartment inflated separately.

(e) Life-jackets shall be so placed as to be readily accessible and their position shall be plainly indicated.

Regulation 23

Line-throwing Appliances

(a) Ships shall carry a line-throwing appliance of an approved type.

(b) The appliance shall be capable of carrying a line not less than 230 metres (250 yards) with reasonable accuracy, and shall include not less than four projectiles and four lines.

Regulation 24

Ships’ Distress Signals

Ships shall be provided, to the satisfaction of the Administration, with means of making effective distress signals by day and by night, including at least twelve parachute signals capable of giving a bright red light at a high altitude.

Regulation 25

Muster List and Emergency Procedure

(a) Special duties to be undertaken in the event of an emergency shall be allotted to each member of the crew.

(b) The muster list shall show all the special duties and shall indicate, in particular, the station to which each member must go, and the duties that he has to perform.

(c) The muster list for each passenger ship shall be in a form approved by the Administration.

(d) Before the vessel sails, the muster list shall be completed. Copies shall be posted in several parts of the ship, and in particular in the crew’s quarters.

(e) The muster list shall show the duties assigned to the different members of the crew in connexion with:

(i) the closing of the watertight doors, valves and closing mechanisms of scuppers, ash-shoots and fire doors;

(ii) the equipping of the lifeboats (including the portable radio apparatus for survival craft) and the other life-saving appliances;

(iii) the launching of the lifeboat;

(iv) the general preparation of the other life-saving appliances;

(v) the muster of the passengers; and

(vi) the extinction of fire, having regard to the ship’s fire control plans.

(f) The muster list shall show the several duties assigned to the members of the stewards department in relation to the passengers in case of emergency. These duties shall include:

(i) warning the passengers;

(ii) seeing that they are suitably clad and have put on their life-jackets in a proper manner;

(iii) assembling the passengers at muster stations;

(iv) keeping order in the passages and on the stairways, and, generally, controlling the movements of the passengers; and

(v) ensuring that a supply of blankets is taken to the lifeboats.

(g) The duties shown by the muster list in relation to the extinction of fire pursuant to sub-paragraph (e) (vi) of this Regulation shall include particulars of:

(i) the manning of the fire parties assigned to deal with fires;

(ii) the special duties assigned in respect of the operation of fire-fighting equipment and installations.

(h) The muster list shall specify definite signals for calling all the crew to their boat, liferaft and fire stations, and shall give full particulars of these signals. These signals shall be


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

made on the whistle or siren and, except on passenger ships on short international voyages and on cargo ships of less than 45.7 metres (150 feet) in length, they shall be supplemented by other signals which shall be electrically operated. All these signals shall be operable from the bridge.

Regulation 26

Practice Musters and Drills

(a) (i) In passenger ships, musters of the crew for boat drill and fire drill shall take place weekly when practicable and there shall be such a muster when a passenger ship leaves the final port of departure on an international voyage which is not a short international voyage.

(ii) In cargo ships, a muster of the crew for boat drill and fire drill shall take place at intervals of not more than one month, provided that a muster of the crew for boat drill and fire drill shall take place within 24 hours of leaving a port if more than 25 per cent of the crew have been replaced at that port.

(iii) On the occasion of the monthly muster in cargo ships the boat’s equipment shall be examined to ensure that it is complete.

(iv) The date upon which musters are held, and details of any training and drills in fire fighting which are carried out on board shall be recorded in such log book as may be prescribed by the Administration. If in any week (for passenger ships) or month (for cargo ships) no muster or a part muster only is held, an entry shall be made stating the circumstances and extent of the muster held. A report of the examination of the boat’s equipment on cargo ships shall be entered in the log book, which shall also record the occasions on which the lifeboats are swung out and lowered in compliance with paragraph (c) of this Regulation.

(b) In passenger ships, except those engaged on short international voyages, a muster of the passengers shall be held within 24 hours after leaving port.

(c) Different groups of lifeboats shall be used in turn at successive boat drills and every lifeboat shall be swung out and, if practicable and reasonable, lowered at least once every four months. The musters and inspections shall be so arranged that the crew thoroughly understand and are practised in the duties they have to perform, including instructions in the handling and operation of liferafts where these are carried.

(d) The emergency signal for summoning passengers to muster stations shall be a succession of seven or more short blasts followed by one long blast on the whistle or siren. This shall be supplemented in passenger ships, except those engaged on short international voyages, by other signals, which shall be electrically operated, throughout the ship operable from the bridge. The meaning of all signals affecting passengers, with precise instructions on what they are to do in an emergency, shall be clearly stated in appropriate languages on cards posted in their cabins and in conspicuous places in other passenger quarters.

PART B—PASSENGER SHIPS ONLY

Regulation 27

Lifeboats, Liferafts and Buoyant Apparatus

(a) Passenger ships shall carry two boats attached to davits—one on each side of the ship—for use in an emergency. These boats shall be of an approved type and shall be not more than 8.5 metres (28 feet) in length. They may be counted for the purposes of paragraphs (b) and (c) of this Regulation, provided that they comply fully with the requirements for lifeboats of this Chapter, and for the purposes of Regulation 8 provided that in addition they comply fully with the requirements of Regulation 9 and where appropriate Regulation 14 of this Chapter. They shall be kept ready for immediate use while the ship is at sea. In ships in which the requirements of paragraph (h) of Regulation 29 are met by means of appliances fitted to the sides of the lifeboats, such appliances shall not be required to be fitted to the two boats provided to meet the requirements of this Regulation.

(b) Passenger ships engaged on international voyages which are not short international voyages shall carry:


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(i) Lifeboats on each side of such aggregate capacity as will accommodate half the total number of persons on board. Provided that the Administration may permit the substitution of lifeboats by liferafts of the same total capacity so however that there shall never be less than sufficient lifeboats on each side of the ship to accommodate 37½ per cent of all on board.

(ii) Liferafts of sufficient aggregate capacity to accommodate 25 per cent of the total number of persons on board, together with buoyant apparatus for 3 per cent of that number. Provided that ships which have a factor of subdivision of 0.33 or less shall be permitted to carry, in lieu of liferafts for 25 per cent of all on board and buoyant apparatus for 3 per cent of all on board, buoyant apparatus for 25 per cent of that number.

(c) (i) A passenger ship engaged on short international voyages shall be provided with sets of davits in accordance with its length as specified in Column A of the Table in Regulation 28 of this Chapter. Each set of davits shall have a lifeboat attached to it and these lifeboats shall provide at least the minimum capacity required by Column C of the Table or the capacity required to provide accommodation for all on board if this is less.

Provided that when in the opinion of the Administration it is impracticable or unreasonable to place on a ship engaged on short international voyages the number of sets of davits required by Column A of the Table in Regulation 28, the Administration may authorize, under exceptional conditions, a smaller number of davits, except that this number shall never be less than the minimum number fixed by Column B of the Table, and that the total capacity of the lifeboats on the ship will be at least equal to the minimum capacity required by Column C or the capacity required to provide for all persons on board if this is less.

(ii) If the lifeboats so provided are not sufficient to accommodate all on board, additional lifeboats under davits or liferafts shall be provided so that the accommodation provided in the lifeboats and the liferafts in the ship shall be sufficient for all on board.

(iii) Notwithstanding the provisions of sub-paragraph (ii) of this paragraph in any ship engaged on short international voyages the number of persons carried shall not exceed the total capacity of the lifeboats provided in accordance with sub-paragraphs (i) and (ii) of this paragraph unless the Administration considers that this is necessitated by the volume of traffic and then only if the ship complies with the provisions of paragraph (d) of Regulation 1 of Chapter II-1.

(iv) Where under the provisions of sub-paragraph (iii) of this paragraph the Administration has permitted the carriage of persons in excess of the lifeboat capacity and is satisfied that it is impracticable in that ship to stow the liferafts carried in accordance with sub-paragraph (ii) of this paragraph it may permit a reduction in the number of lifeboats.

Provided that:

(1) the number of lifeboats shall, in the case of ships of 58 metres (190 feet) in length and over, never be less than four, two of which shall be carried on each side of the ship, and in the case of ships of less than 58 metres (190 feet) in length, shall never be less than two, one of which shall be carried on each side of the ship; and

(2) the number of lifeboats and liferafts shall always be sufficient to accommodate the total number of persons on board.

(v) Every passenger ship engaged on short international voyages shall carry in addition to the lifeboats and liferafts required by the provisions of this paragraph, liferafts sufficient to accommodate 10 per cent of the total number of persons for whom there is accommodation in the lifeboats carried in that ship.

(vi) Every passenger ship engaged on short international voyages shall also carry buoyant apparatus for at least 5 per cent of the total number of persons on board.

(vii) The Administration may permit individual ships or classes of ships with short international voyage certificates to proceed on voyages in excess of 600 miles but not exceeding 1,200 miles if such ships comply with the provisions of paragraph (d) of


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

Regulation 1 of Chapter II-1, if they carry lifeboats which provide for 75 per cent of the persons on board and otherwise comply with the provisions of this paragraph.

Regulation 28

Table relating to Davits and Lifeboat Capacity for Ships on Short International Voyages

The following table fixes according to the length of the ship:

(A) the minimum number of sets of davits to be provided on a ship engaged on short international voyages to each of which must be attached a lifeboat in accordance with Regulation 27 of this Chapter;

(B) the smaller number of sets of davits which may be authorized exceptionally on a ship engaged on short international voyages under Regulation 27 of this Chapter; and

(C) the minimum lifeboat capacity required for a ship engaged on short international voyages.

Registered length of ship

(A)

(B)

(C)

Minimum number of sets of davits

Smaller number of sets of davits authorized exceptionally

Minimum capacity of life boats

Cubic metres

Cubic feet

Metres

Feet

31 and under

37

100 and under

120

2

2

11

400

37       ,,

43

120       ,,

140

2

2

18

650

43       ,,

49

140       ,,

160

2

2

26

900

49       ,,

53

160       ,,

175

3

3

33

1,150

53       ,,

58

175       ,,

190

3

3

38

1,350

58       ,,

63

190       ,,

205

4

4

44

1,550

63       ,,

67

205       ,,

220

4

4

50

1,750

67       ,,

70

220       ,,

230

5

4

52

1,850

70       ,,

75

230       ,,

245

5

4

61

2,150

75       ,,

78

245       ,,

255

6

5

68

2,400

78       ,,

82

255       ,,

270

6

5

76

2,700

82       ,,

87

270       ,,

285

7

5

85

3,000

87       ,,

91

285       ,,

300

7

5

94

3,300

91       ,,

96

300       ,,

315

8

6

102

3,600

96       ,,

101

315       ,,

330

8

6

110

3,900

101       ,,

107

330       ,,

350

9

7

122

4,300

107       ,,

113

350       ,,

370

9

7

135

4,750

113       ,,

119

370       ,,

390

10

7

146

5,150

119       ,,

125

390       ,,

410

10

7

157

5,550

125       ,,

133

410       ,,

435

12

9

171

6,050

133       ,,

140

435       ,,

460

12

9

185

6,550

140       ,,

149

460       ,,

490

14

10

202

7,150

149       ,,

159

490       ,,

520

14

10

221

7,800

159       ,,

168

520       ,,

550

16

12

238

8,400

Note on (C): Where the length of the ship is under 31 metres (100 feet) or over 168 metres (550 feet) the minimum number of sets of davits and the cubic capacity of the lifeboats shall be prescribed by the Administration.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

Regulation 29

Stowage and Handling of Lifeboats, Liferafts and Buoyant Apparatus

(a) Lifeboats and liferafts shall be stowed to the satisfaction of the Administration in such a way that:

(i) they can all be launched in the shortest possible time and in not more than 30 minutes;

(ii) they will not impede in any way the prompt handling of any of the other lifeboats, liferafts or buoyant apparatus or the marshalling of the persons on board at the launching stations, or their embarkation;

(iii) the lifeboats, and the liferafts for which approved launching devices are required to be carried, shall be capable of being put into the water loaded with their full complement of persons and equipment even in unfavourable conditions of trim and of 15 degrees of list either way; and

(iv) the liferafts for which approved launching devices are not required to be carried, and the buoyant apparatus, shall be capable of being put into the water even in unfavourable conditions of trim and of 15 degrees of list either way.

(b) Every lifeboat shall be attached to a separate set of davits.

(c) Lifeboats may only be stowed on more than one deck if proper measures are taken to prevent lifeboats on a lower deck being fouled by those stowed on a deck above.

(d) Lifeboats, and liferafts for which approved launching devices are required to be carried, shall not be placed in the bow of the ship. They shall be stowed in such positions as to ensure safe launching having particular regard to clearance from the propeller and steeply overhanging portions of the hull aft.

(e) Davits shall be of approved design and shall be suitably placed to the satisfaction of the Administration. They shall be so disposed on one or more decks that the lifeboats placed under them can be safely lowered without interference from the operation of any other davits.

(f) Davits shall be as follows:

(i) luffing or gravity type for operating lifeboats weighing not more than 2,300 kilogrammes (2¼ tons) in their turning out condition;

(ii) gravity type for operating lifeboats weighing more than 2,300 kilogrammes (2¼ tons) in their turning out condition.

(g) Davits, falls, blocks and all other gear shall be of such strength that the lifeboats can be turned out manned by a launching crew and then safely lowered with the full complement of persons and equipment, with the ship listed to 15 degrees either way and with a 10 degrees trim.

(h) Skates or other suitable means shall be provided to facilitate launching the lifeboats against a list of 15 degrees.

(i) Means shall be provided for bringing the lifeboats against the ship’s side and there holding them so that persons may be safely embarked.

(j) Lifeboats, together with the emergency boats required by Regulation 27 of this Chapter, shall be served by wire rope falls, together with winches of an approved type which, in the case of the emergency boats, shall be capable of quick recovery of those boats. Exceptionally, the Administration may allow manila rope falls or falls of another approved material with or without winches (except that the emergency boats shall be required to be served by winches which are capable of quick recovery of those boats) where they are satisfied that manila rope falls or falls of another approved material are adequate.

(k) At least two lifelines shall be fitted to the davit span, and the falls and lifelines shall be long enough to reach the water with the ship at its lightest sea-going draught and listed to 15 degrees either way. Lower fall blocks shall be fitted with a suitable ring or long link for attaching to the sling hooks unless an approved type of disengaging gear is fitted.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(l) Where mechanically-powered appliances are fitted for the recovery of the lifeboats, efficient hand gear shall also be provided. Where davits are recovered by action of the falls by power, safety devices shall be fitted which will automatically cut off the power before the davits come against the stops in order to avoid overstressing the wire rope falls or davits.

(m) Lifeboats attached to davits shall have the falls ready for service and arrangements shall be made for speedily, but not necessarily simultaneously, detaching the lifeboats from the falls. The point of attachment of the lifeboats to the falls shall be at such height above the gunwale as to ensure stability when lowering the lifeboats.

(n) (i) In passenger ships engaged on international voyages which are not short international voyages in which there are carried lifeboats and liferafts in accordance with sub-paragraph (b) (i) of Regulation 27 of this Chapter, there shall be provided approved launching devices sufficient in number in the opinion of the Administration to enable that number of liferafts which, together with the lifeboats, is required in accordance with that sub-paragraph to provide accommodation for all on board, to be put into the water loaded with the number of persons they are permitted to accommodate, in not more than thirty minutes in calm conditions. Approved launching devices so provided shall, so far as practicable, be distributed equally on each side of the ship and there shall never be less than one such device on each side. No such devices need, however, be provided for the additional liferafts required to be carried by sub-paragraph (b) (ii) of Regulation 27 of this Chapter for 25 per cent of all on board, but every liferaft carried in accordance with that sub-paragraph shall, where an approved launching device is provided in the ship, be of a type which is capable of being launched from such a device.

(ii) In passenger ships engaged on short international voyages, the number of approved launching devices to be provided shall be at the discretion of the Administration. The number of liferafts allocated to each such device carried shall not be more than the number which, in the opinion of the Administration, can be put into the water fully loaded with the number of persons they are permitted to carry by that device in not more than 30 minutes in calm conditions.

Regulation 30

Lighting for Decks, Lifeboats, Liferafts, etc.

(a) Provision shall be made for an electric or equivalent system of lighting sufficient for all the requirements of safety in the different parts of a passenger ship, and particularly for decks on which the lifeboats and liferafts are stowed. The self-contained emergency source of electrical power required by Regulation 25 of Chapter II-1 shall be capable of supplying where necessary this lighting system and also the lighting required by sub-paragraphs (a) (ii), (b) (ii) and (b) (iii) of Regulation 19 of this Chapter.

(b) The exit from every main compartment occupied by passengers or crew shall be continuously lighted by an emergency lamp. The power for these emergency lamps shall be so arranged that they will be supplied from the emergency source of power referred to in paragraph (a) of this Regulation in the event of failure of the main generating plant.

Regulation 31

Manning of Lifeboats and Liferafts

(a) A deck officer or certified lifeboatman shall be placed in charge of each lifeboat and a second-in-command shall also be nominated. The person in charge shall have a list of the lifeboat’s crew, and shall see that the men placed under his orders are acquainted with their several duties.

(b) A man capable of working the motor shall be assigned to each motor lifeboat.

(c) A man capable of working the radio and searchlight installations shall be assigned to each lifeboat carrying this equipment.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(d) A man practised in the handling and operation of liferafts shall be assigned to each liferaft carried, except where in ships engaged on short international voyages the Administration is satisfied that this is not practicable.

Regulation 32

Certificated Lifeboatmen

(a) In passenger ships there shall be, for every lifeboat carried in order to comply with this Chapter, a number of lifeboatmen at least equal to that specified in the following table:

Prescribed complement of lifeboat

The minimum number of certificated lifeboatmen shall be

Less than 41 persons............

2

From 41 to 61 persons...........

3

From 62 to 85 persons...........

4

Above 85 persons..............

5

(b) The allocation of the certificated lifeboatmen to each lifeboat remains within the discretion of the master.

(c) Certificates of efficiency shall be issued under the authority of the Administration. In order to obtain such a certificate an applicant shall prove that he has been trained in all the operations connected with launching lifeboats and other life-saving appliances and in the use of oars and propelling gear; that he is acquainted with the practical handling of lifeboats and of other life-saving equipment, and further, that he is capable of understanding and answering the orders relative to all kinds of life-saving appliances.

Regulation 33

Buoyant Apparatus

(a) No type of buoyant apparatus shall be approved unless it satisfies the following conditions:

(i) It shall be of such size and strength that it can be thrown from the place where it is stowed into the water without being damaged.

(ii) It shall not exceed 180 kilogrammes (400 lbs.) in weight unless suitable means to the satisfaction of the Administration are provided to enable it to be launched without lifting by hand.

(iii) It shall be of approved material and construction.

(iv) It shall be effective and stable when floating either way up.

(v) The air cases or equivalent buoyancy shall be placed as near as possible to the sides of the apparatus, and such buoyancy shall not be dependent upon inflation.

(vi) It shall be fitted with a painter and have a line securely becketed round the outside.

(b) The number of persons for which buoyant apparatus is certified shall be the number

(i) ascertained by dividing the number of kilogrammes of iron which it is capable of supporting in fresh water by 14.5 (or the number of pounds divided by 32), or

(ii) equal to the number of millimetres in the perimeter divided by 305 (or the number of feet in the perimeter), whichever is the less.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

Regulation 34

Number of Lifebuoys to be Provided

The minimum number of lifebuoys with which passenger ships are provided shall be fixed by the following table:

Length of ship

Minimum number of buoys

in metres

in feet

Under 61..........

Under 200........

8

61 and under 122....

200 and under 400...

12

122 and under 183....

400 and under 600...

18

183 and under 244....

600 and under 800...

24

244 and over.......

800 and over.......

30

PART C—CARGO SHIPS ONLY

Regulation 35

Number and Capacity of Lifeboats and Liferafts

(a) (i) Every cargo ship, except ships employed as whale factory ships, fish processing or canning factory ships, and ships engaged in the carriage of persons employed in the whaling, fish processing or canning industries, shall carry lifeboats on each side of the ship of such aggregate capacity as will accommodate all persons on board, and in addition shall carry liferafts sufficient to accommodate half that number.

Provided that, in the case of such cargo ships engaged on international voyages between near neighbouring countries, the Administration, if it is satisfied that the conditions of the voyage are such as to render the compulsory carriage of liferafts unreasonable or unnecessary, may to that extent exempt individual ships or classes of ships from this requirement.

(ii) (1) Subject to the provisions of sub-paragraph (ii) (2) of this paragraph, every tanker of 3,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards shall carry not less than four lifeboats, two of which shall be carried aft and two amidships, except that in tankers which have no amidships superstructure all lifeboats shall be carried aft.

(2) A tanker of 3,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards which has no amidships superstructure may be permitted by the Administration to carry two lifeboats only, provided that:

(aa) one lifeboat is carried aft on each side of the ship;

(bb) each such lifeboat shall not exceed 8.5 metres (28 feet) in length;

(cc) each such lifeboat shall be stowed as far forward as practicable, but at least so far forward that the after end of the lifeboat is one-and-a-half times the length of the lifeboat forward of the propeller; and

(dd) each such lifeboat shall be stowed as near sea level as is safe and practicable.

(b) (i) Every ship employed as a whale factory ship, every ship employed as a fish processing or canning factory ship and every ship engaged in the carriage of persons employed in the whaling, fish processing or canning industries shall carry:

(1) Lifeboats on each side of such aggregate capacity as will accommodate half the total number of persons on board; provided that the Administration may permit the substitution of lifeboats by liferafts of the same total capacity so however that there shall never be less than sufficient lifeboats on each side of the ship to accommodate 37½ per cent of all on board.

(2) Liferafts of sufficient aggregate capacity to accommodate half the total number of persons on board; provided that, if in ships employed as fish processing or canning factory ships, it is impracticable to carry lifeboats which comply fully with the requirements of this Chapter, the Administration may permit instead the carriage of other boats, which shall however provide not less than the accommodation required by this Regulation and shall have at least the buoyancy and equipment required by this Chapter for lifeboats.


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

(ii) Every ship employed as a whale factory ship, every ship employed as a fish processing or canning factory ship and every ship engaged in the carriage of persons employed in the whaling, fish processing or canning industries shall carry two boats—one on each side—for use in an emergency. These boats shall be of an approved type and shall be not more than 8.5 metres (28 feet) in length. They may be counted for the purposes of this paragaph provided that they comply fully with the requirements for lifeboats of this Chapter and for the purposes of Regulation 8 provided that in addition they comply with the requirements of Regulation 9, and, where appropriate, Regulation 14 of this Chapter. They shall be kept ready for immediate use while the ship is at sea. In ships in which the requirements of paragraph (g) of Regulation 36 of this Chapter are met by means of appliances fitted to the sides of the lifeboats, such appliances shall not be required to be fitted to the two boats provided to meet the requirements of this Regulation.

(c) Every cargo ship with no amidships superstructure having a registered length of 150 metres (492 feet) and upwards shall carry, in addition to the liferafts required under sub-paragraph (a) (i) of this Regulation, a liferaft capable of accommodating at least six persons which shall be stowed as far forward as is reasonable and practicable.

Regulation 36

Davits and Launching Arrangements

(a) In cargo ships lifeboats and liferafts shall be stowed to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(b) Every lifeboat shall be attached to a separate set of davits.

(c) Lifeboats and liferafts for which approved launching devices are required to be carried shall preferably be positioned as close to accommodation and service spaces as possible. They shall be stowed in such positions as to ensure safe launching, having particular regard to clearance from the propeller and steeply overhanging portions of the hull, with the object of ensuring so far as practicable that they can be launched down the straight side of the ship. If positioned forward they shall be stowed abaft the collision bulkhead in a sheltered position and in this respect the Administration shall give special consideration to the strength of the davits.

(d) Davits shall be of approved design and shall be suitably placed to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(e) In tankers of 1,600 tons gross tonnage and upwards, ships employed as whale factory ships, ships employed as fish processing or canning factory ships and ships engaged in the carriage of persons employed in the whaling, fish processing or canning industries, all davits shall be of the gravity type. In other ships, davits shall be as follows:

(i) luffing or gravity type for operating lifeboats weighing not more than 2,300 kilogrammes (2¼ tons) in their turning out condition;

(ii) gravity type for operating lifeboats weighing more than 2,300 kilogrammes (2¼ tons) in their turning out condition.

(f) Davits, falls, blocks and all other gear shall be of such strength that the lifeboats can be turned out manned by a launching crew and then safely lowered with the full complement of persons and equipment, with the ship listed to 15 degrees either way, and with a 10 degrees trim.

(g) Skates or other suitable means shall be provided to facilitate launching the lifeboats against a list of 15 degrees.

(h) Means shall be provided for bringing the lifeboats against the ship’s side and there holding them so that persons may be safely embarked.

(i) Lifeboats, together with the emergency boats required by sub-paragraph (b) (ii) of Regulation 35 of this Chapter, shall be served by wire rope falls, together with winches of an approved type which, in the case of the emergency boats, shall be capable of quick recovery of those boats. Exceptionally, the Administration may allow manila rope falls or falls of another approved material with or without winches (except that the emergency


SCHEDULE 3—continued

“SCHEDULE 1—continued

boats shall be required to be served by winches which are capable of quick recovery of those boats) where they are satisfied that manila rope falls or falls of another approved material are adequate.

(j) At least two lifelines shall be fitted to the davit spans, and the falls and lifelines shall be long enough to reach the water with the ship at its lightest seagoing draught and listed to 15 degrees either way. Lower fall blocks shall be fitted with a suitable ring or long link for attaching to the sling hooks unless an approved type of disengaging gear is fitted.

(k) Where mechanically powered appliances are fitted for the recovery of the lifeboats, efficient hand gear shall also be provided. Where davits are recovered by action of the falls by power, safety devices shall be fitted which will automatically cut off the power before the davits come against the stops in order to avoid overstressing the wire rope falls or davits.

(l) Lifeboats shall have the falls ready for service, and arrangements shall be made for speedily, but not necessarily simultaneously, detaching the lifeboats from the falls. The point of attachment of the lifeboats to the falls shall be at such height above the gunwale as to ensure stability when lowering the lifeboats.

(m) In ships employed as whale factory ships, ships employed as fish processing or canning factory ships and ships engaged in the carriage of persons employed in the whaling, fish processing or canning industries, in which there are carried lifeboats and liferafts in accordance with sub-paragraph (b) (i) (2) of Regulation 35 no approved launching devices need be provided for the liferafts, but there shall be provided such devices sufficient in number, in the opinion of the Administration, to enable the liferafts carried in accordance with sub-paragraph (b) (i) (1) of that Regulation to be put into the water loaded with the number of persons they are permitted to accommodate, in not more than 30 minutes in calm conditions. Approved launching devices so provided shall, so far as practicable, be distributed equally on each side of the ship. Every liferaft carried on ships in which an approved launching device is required to be provided shall be of a type which is capable of being launched by such a device.

Regulation 37

Number of Lifebuoys to be Provided

At least eight lifebuoys of a type which satisfies the requirements of Regulation 21 of this Chapter shall be carried.

Regulation 38

Emergency Lighting

The lighting required by sub-paragraphs (a) (ii), (b) (ii) and (b) (iii) of Regulation 19 of this Chapter shall be capable of being supplied for at least three hours by the emergency source of power required by Regulation 26 of Chapter II-1. In cargo ships of 1,600 tons gross tonnage and upwards the Administration shall ensure that the lighting of the alleyways, stairways and exists is such that the access of all persons on board to the launching stations and stowage position of lifeboats and liferafts is not impeded.

CHAPTER IV

RADIOTELEGRAPHY AND RADIOTELEPHONY

PART A—APPLICATION AND DEFINITIONS

Regulation 1

Application

(a) Unless expressly provided otherwise, this Chapter applies to all ships to which the present Regulations apply.


SCHEDULE 3continued

“SCHEDULE 1continued

(b) This Chapter does not apply to ships to which present Regulations would otherwise apply while such ships are being navigated within the Great Lakes of North America and their connecting and tributary waters as far east as the lower exit of the St. Lambert Lock at Montreal in the Province of Quebec, Canada.*

(c) No provision in this Chapter shall prevent the use by a ship or survival craft in distress of any means at its disposal to attract attention, make known its position and obtain help.

Regulation 2

Terms and Definitions

For the purpose of this Chapter the following terms shall have the meanings defined below. All other terms which are used in this Chapter and which are also defined in the Radio Regulations shall have the same meanings as defined in those Regulations:

(a) “Radio Regulations” means the Radio Regulations annexed to, or regarded as being annexed to, the most recent International Telecommunication Convention which may be in force at any time.

(b) “Radiotelegraph auto alarm” means an automatic alarm receiving apparatus which responds to the radiotelegraph alarm signal and has been approved.

(c) “Radiotelephone auto alarm” means an automatic alarm receiving apparatus which responds to the radiotelephone alarm signal and has been approved.

(d) “Radiotelephone station”, “Radiotelephone installation” and “Watches-radiotelephone” shall be considered as relating to the medium frequency band, unless expressly provided otherwise.

(e) “Radio Officer” means a person holding at least a first or second class radiotelegraph operator’s certificate, or a radiocommunication operator’s general certificate for the maritime mobile service, complying with the provisions of the Radio Regulations, who is employed in the radiotelegraph station of a ship which is provided with such a station in compliance with the provisions of Regulation 3 or Regulation 4 of this Chapter.

(f) “Radiotelephone operator” means a person holding an appropriate certificate complying with the provisions of the Radio Regulations.

(g) “Existing installation” means:

(i) an installation wholly installed on board a ship before the date on which the present Convention enters into force irrespective of the date on which acceptance by the respective Administration takes effect; and

(ii) an installation part of which was installed on board a ship before the date of entry into force of the present Convention and the rest of which consists either of parts installed in replacement of identical parts, or parts which comply with the requirements of this Chapter.

(h) “New installation” means any installation which is not an existing installation.

Regulation 3

Radiotelegraph Station

Passenger ships irrespective of size and cargo ships of 1,600 tons gross tonnage and upwards, unless exempted under Regulation 5 of this Chapter, shall be fitted with a radiotelegraph station complying with the provisions of Regulations 9 and 10 of this Chapter.

* Such ships are subject to special requirements relative to radio for safety purposes, as contained in the relevant agreement between Canada and the United States of America.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

Regulation 4

Radiotelephone Station

Cargo ships of 300 tons gross tonnage and upwards but less than 1,600 tons gross tonnage, unless fitted with a radiotelegraph station complying with the provisions of Regulations 9 and 10 of this Chapter shall, provided they are not exempted under Regulation 5 of this Chapter, be fitted with a radiotelephone station complying with the provisions of Regulations 15 and 16 of this Chapter.

Regulation 5

Exemptions from Regulations 3 and 4

(a) The Contracting Governments consider it highly desirable not to deviate from the application of Regulations 3 and 4 of this Chapter; nevertheless the Administration may grant to individual passenger or cargo ships exemptions of a partial and/or conditional nature, or complete exemption from the requirements of Regulation 3 or Regulation 4 of this Chapter.

(b) The exemptions permitted under paragraph (a) of this Regulation shall be granted only to a ship engaged on a voyage where the maximum distance of the ship from the shore, the length of the voyage, the absence of general navigational hazards, and other conditions affecting safety are such as to render the full application of Regulation 3 or Regulation 4 of this Chapter unreasonable or unnecessary. When deciding whether or not to grant exemptions to individual ships, Administrations shall have regard to the effect that exemptions may have upon the general efficiency of the distress service for the safety of all ships. Administrations should bear in mind the desirability of requiring ships which are exempted from the requirement of Regulation 3 of this Chapter to be fitted with a radiotelephone station which complies with the provisions of Regulations 15 and 16 of this Chapter as a condition of exemption.

(c) Each Administration shall submit to the Organization as soon as possible after the first of January in each year a report showing all exemptions granted under paragraphs (a) and (b) of this Regulation during the previous calendar year and giving the reasons for granting such exemptions.

PART B–WATCHES

Regulation 6

Watches—Radiotelegraph

(a) Each ship which in accordance with Regulation 3 or Regulation 4 of this Chapter is fitted with a radiotelegraph station shall, while at sea, carry at least one radio officer and, if not fitted with a radiotelegraph auto alarm shall, subject to the provisions of paragraph (d) of this Regulation, listen continuously on the radiotelegraph distress frequency by means of a radio officer using headphones or a loudspeaker.

(b) Each passenger ship which in accordance with Regulation 3 of this Chapter is fitted with a radiotelegraph station, if fitted with a radiotelegraph auto alarm, shall, subject to the provisions of paragraph (d) of this Regulation, and while at sea, listen on the radiotelegraph distress frequency by means of a radio officer using headphones or a loudspeaker, as follows:

(i) if carrying or certificated to carry 250 passengers or less, at least 8 hours listening a day in the aggregate;

(ii) if carrying or certificated to carry more than 250 passengers and engaged on a voyage exceeding 16 hours’ duration between two consecutive ports, at least 16 hours’ listening a day in the aggregate. In this case the ship shall carry at least two radio officers;

(iii) if carrying or certificated to carry more than 250 passengers and engaged on a voyage of less than 16 hours’ duration between two consecutive ports, at least 8 hours’ listening a day in the aggregate.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

(c) (i) Each cargo ship which in accordance with Regulation 3 of this Chapter is fitted with a radiotelegraph station, if fitted with a radiotelegraph auto alarm, shall, subject to the provisions of paragraph (d) of this Regulation, and while at sea, listen on the radiotelegraph distress frequency by means of a radio officer using headphones or a loudspeaker, for at least 8 hours a day in the aggregate.

(ii) Each cargo ship of 300 tons gross tonnage and upwards but less than 1,600 tons gross tonnage which is fitted with a radiotelegraph station as a consequence of Regulation 4 of this Chapter, if fitted with a radiotelegraph auto alarm shall, subject to the provisions of paragraph (d) of this Regulation, and while at sea, listen on the radiotelegraph distress frequency by means of a radio officer using headphones or a loudspeaker, during such periods as may be determined by the Administration. Administrations shall, however, have regard to the desirability of requiring, whenever practicable, a listening watch of at least 8 hours a day in the aggregate.

(d) (i) During the period when a radio officer is required by this Regulation to listen on the radiotelegraph distress frequency, the radio officer may discontinue such listening during the time when he is handling traffic on other frequencies, or performing other essential radio duties, but only if it is impracticable to listen by split headphones or loudspeaker. The listening watch shall always be maintained by a radio officer using headphones or a loudspeaker during the silence periods provided for by the Radio Regulations.

The term “essential radio duties” in this paragraph includes urgent repairs of:

(1) equipment for radiocommunication used for safety;

(2) radio navigational equipment by order of the master.

(ii) In addition to the provisions of sub-paragraph (i) of this paragraph, on ships other than multi-radio officer passenger ships, the radio officer may, in exceptional cases, i.e. when it is impractical to listen by split headphones or loudspeaker, discontinue listening by order of the master in order to carry out maintenance required to prevent imminent malfunction of:

- equipment for radiocommunication used for safety;

- radio navigational equipment;

- other electronic navigational equipment including its repair;

provided that:

(1) the radio officer, at the discretion of the Administration concerned, is appropriately qualified to perform these duties; and

(2) the ship is fitted with a receiving selector which meets the requirements of the Radio Regulations;

(3) the listening watch is always maintained by a radio officer using headphones or loudspeaker during the silence periods provided for by the Radio Regulations.

(e) In all ships fitted with a radiotelegraph auto alarm this radiotelegraph auto alarm shall, while the ship is at sea, be in operation whenever there is no listening being kept under paragraphs (b), (c) or (d) of this Regulation and, whenever practicable, during direction-finding operations.

(f) The listening periods provided for by this Regulation, including those which are determined by the Administration, should be maintained preferably during periods prescribed for the radiotelegraph service by the Radio Regulations.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

Regulation 7

Watches—Radiotelephone

(a) Each ship which is fitted with a radiotelephone station in accordance with Regulation 4 of this Chapter shall, for safety purposes, carry at least one radiotelephone operator (who may be the master, an officer or a member of the crew holding a certificate for radio-telephony) and shall, while at sea, maintain continuous watch on the radiotelephone distress frequency in the place on board from which the ship is usually navigated, by use of a radiotelephone distress frequency watch receiver, using a loudspeaker, a filtered loudspeaker or radiotelephone auto alarm.

(b) Each ship which in accordance with Regulation 3 or Regulation 4 of this Chapter is fitted with a radiotelegraph station shall, while at sea, maintain continuous watch on the radiotelephone distress frequency in a place to be determined by the Administration, by use of a radiotelephone distress frequency watch receiver, using a loudspeaker, a filtered loudspeaker or radiotelephone auto alarm.

Regulation 8

WatchesVHF Radiotelephone

Each ship provided with a Very High Frequency (VHF) radiotelephone station, in accordance with Regulation 18 of Chapter V, shall maintain a listening watch on the bridge for such periods and on such channels as may be required by the Contracting Government referred to in that Regulation.

PART C–TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

Regulation 9

Radiotelegraph Stations

(a) The radiotelegraph station shall be so located that no harmful interference from extraneous mechanical or other noise will be caused to the proper reception of radio signals. The station shall be placed as high in the ship as is practicable, so that the greatest possible degree of safety may be secured.

(b) The radiotelegraph operating room shall be of sufficient size and of adequate ventilation to enable the main and reserve radiotelegraph installations to be operated efficiently, and shall not be used for any purpose which will interfere with the operation of the radiotelegraph station.

(c) The sleeping accommodation of at least one radio officer shall be situated as near as practicable to the radiotelegraph operating room. In new ships, this sleeping accommodation shall not be within the radiotelegraph operating room.

(d) There shall be provided between the radiotelegraph operating room and the bridge and one other place, if any, from which the ship is navigated, an efficient two-way system for calling and voice communication which shall be independent of the main communication system on the ship.

(e) The radiotelegraph installation shall be installed in such a position that it will be protected against the harmful effects of water or extremes of temperature. It shall be readily accessible both for immediate use in case of distress and for repair.

(f) A reliable clock with a dial not less than 12.5 centimetres (5 inches) in diameter and a concentric seconds hand the face of which is marked to indicate the silence periods prescribed for the radiotelegraph service by the Radio Regulations, shall be provided. It shall be securely mounted in the radiotelegraph operating room in such a position that the entire dial can be easily an accurately observed by the radio officer from the radiotelegraph operating position and from the position for testing the radiotelegraph auto alarm receiver.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

(g) A reliable emergency light shall be provided in the radiotelegraph operating room, consisting of an electric lamp permanently arranged so as to provide satisfactory illumination of the operating controls of the main and reserve radiotelegraph installations and of the clock required by paragraph (f) of this Regulation. In new installations, this lamp shall, if supplied from the reserve source of energy required by sub-paragraph (a) (iii) of Regulation 10 of this Chapter, be controlled by two-way switches placed near the main entrance to the radiotelegraph operating room and at the radiotelegraph operating position, unless the layout of the radiotelegraph operating room does not warrant it. These switches shall be clearly labelled to indicate their purpose.

(h) Either an electric inspection lamp, operated from the reserve source of energy required by sub-paragraph (a) (iii) of Regulation 10 of this Chapter and provided with a flexible lead of adequate length, or a flashlight shall be provided and kept in the radiotelegraph operating room.

(i) The radiotelegraph station shall be provided with such spare parts, tools and testing equipment as will enable the radiotelegraph installation to be maintained in efficient working condition while at sea. The testing equipment shall include an instrument or instruments for measuring A.C. volts, D.C. volts and ohms.

(j) If a separate emergency radiotelegraph operating room is provided the requirements of paragraphs (d), (e), (f), (g) and (h) of this Regulation shall apply to it.

Regulation 10

Radiotelegraph Installations

(a) Except as otherwise expressly provided in this Regulation:

(i) The radiotelegraph station shall include a main installation and reserve installation, electrically separate and electrically independent of each other.

(ii) The main installation shall include a main transmitter, main receiver, radiotelephone distress frequency watch receiver, and main source of energy.

(iii) The reserve installation shall include a reserve transmitter, reserve receiver and reserve source of energy.

(iv) A main and a reserve antenna shall be provided and installed, provided that the Administration may except any ship from the provision of a reserve antenna if it is satisfied that the fitting of such an antenna is impracticable or unreasonable, but in such case a suitable spare antenna completely assembled for immediate installation shall be carried. In addition, sufficient antenna wire and insulators shall in all cases be provided to enable a suitable antenna to be erected. The main antenna, if suspended between supports liable to whipping, shall be suitably protected against breakage.

(b) In installations on cargo ships (except those on cargo ships of 1,600 tons gross tonnage and upwards installed on or after 19 November 1952), if the main transmitter complies with all the requirements for the reserve transmitter, the latter is not obligatory.

(c) (i) The main and reserve transmitters shall be capable of being quickly connected with and tuned to the main antenna, and the reserve antenna if one is fitted.

(ii) The main and reserve receivers shall be capable of being quickly connected with any antenna with which they are required to be used.

(d) All parts of the reserve installation shall be placed as high in the ship as is practicable, so that the greatest possible degree of safety may be secured.

(e) The main and reserve transmitters shall be capable of transmitting on the radiotelegraph distress frequency using a class of emission assigned by the Radio Regulations for that frequency. In addition, the main transmitter shall be capable of transmitting on at least two working frequencies in the authorized bands between 405 kHz and 535 kHz, using classes of emission assigned by the Radio Regulations for these frequencies. The reserve transmitter may consist of a ship’s emergency transmitter, as defined in and limited in use by the Radio Regulations.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

(f) The main and reserve transmitters shall, if modulated emission is prescribed by the Radio Regulations, have a depth of modulation of not less than 70 per cent and a note frequency between 450 and 1,350 Hz.

(g) The main and reserve transmitters shall, when connected to the main antenna, have a minimum normal range as specified below, that is to say, they must be capable of transmitting clearly perceptible signals from ship to ship by day and under normal conditions and circumstances over the specified ranges.* (Clearly perceptible signals will normally be received if the R.M.S. value of the field strength at the receiver is at least 50 microvolts per metre.)

Minimum normal range in miles

 

Main transmitter

Reserve transmitter

All passenger ships, and cargo ships of 1,600 tons gross tonnage and upwards 

150

100

Cargo ships below 1,600 tons gross tonnage...........

100

75

(h) (i) The main and reserve receivers shall be capable of receiving the radiotelegraph distress frequency and the classes of emission assigned by the Radio Regulations for that frequency.

(ii) In addition, the main receiver shall permit the reception of such of the frequencies and classes of emission used for the transmission of time signals, meteorological messages and such other communications relating to safety of navigation as may be considered necessary by the Administration.

(iii) The radiotelephone distress frequency watch receiver shall be preset to this frequency. It shall be provided with a filtering unit or a device to silence the loudspeaker if on the bridge in the absence of a radiotelephone alarm signal. The device shall be capable of being easily switched in and out and may be used when, in the opinion of the master, conditions are such that maintenance of the listening watch would interfere with the safe navigation of the ship.

* In the absence of a direct measurement of the field strength the following data may be used as a guide for approximately determining the normal range:

Normal range in miles

Metre-amperes1

Total antenna power (watts)2

200

128

200

175

102

125

150

76

71

125

58

41

100

45

25

75

34

14

1 This figure represents the product of the maximum height of the antenna above the deepest load water-line in metres and the antenna current in amperes (R.M.S. value).

The values given in the second column of the table correspond to an average value of the ratio

effective antenna height

= 0.47

maximum antenna height

This ratio varies with local conditions of the antenna and may vary between about 0.3 and 0.7.

1 The values given in the third column of the table correspond to an average value of the ratio

radiated antenna power

=0.08

total antenna power

This ratio varies considerably according to the values of effective antenna height and antenna resistance.

SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

(iv) (1) A radiotelephone transmitter, if provided, shall be fitted with an automatic device for generating the radiotelephone alarm signal, so designed as to prevent actuation by mistake, and complying with the requirements of paragraph (e) of Regulation 16 of this Chapter. The device shall be capable of being taken out of operation at any time in order to permit the immediate transmission of a distress message.

(2) Arrangements shall be made to check periodically the proper functioning of the automatic device for generating the radiotelephone alarm signal on frequencies other than the radiotelephone distress frequency using a suitable artificial antenna.

(i) The main receiver shall have sufficient sensitivity to produce signals in headphones or by means of a loudspeaker when the receiver input is as low as 50 microvolts. The reserve receiver shall have sufficient sensitivity to produce such signals when the receiver input is as low as 100 microvolts.

(j) There shall be available at all times, while the ship is at sea, a supply of electrical energy sufficient to operate the main installation over the normal range required by paragraph

(g) of this Regulation as well as for the purpose of charging any batteries forming part of the radiotelegraph station. The voltage of the supply for the main installation shall, in the case of new ships, be maintained within ± 10 per cent of the rated voltage. In the case of existing ships, it shall be maintained as near the rated voltage as possible and, if practicable, within ±10 per cent.

(k) The reserve installation shall be provided with a source of energy independent of the propelling power of the ship and of the ship’s electrical system.

(l) (i) The reserve source of energy shall preferably consist of accumulator batteries, which may be charged from the ship’s electrical system, and shall under all circumstances be capable of being put into operation rapidly and of operating the reserve transmitter and receiver for at least six hours continuously under normal working conditions besides any of the additional loads mentioned in paragraphs (m) and (n) of this Regulation.*

(ii) The reserve source of energy is required to be of a capacity sufficient to operate simultaneously the reserve transmitter and the VHF installation, when fitted, for at least six hours unless a switching device is fitted to ensure alternate operation only. VHF usage of the reserve source of energy shall be limited to distress, urgency and safety communications. Alternatively, a separate reserve source of energy may be provided for the VHF installation.

(m) The reserve source of energy shall be used to supply the reserve installation and the automatic alarm signal keying device specified in paragraph (r) of this Regulation if it is electrically operated.

The reserve source of energy may also be used to supply:

(i) the radiotelegraph auto alarm;

(ii) the emergency light specified in paragraph (g) of Regulation 9 of this Chapter;

(iii) the direction-finder;

(iv) the VHF installation;

(v) the device for generating the radiotelephone alarm signal, if provided;

(vi) any device, prescribed by the Radio Regulations, to permit changeover from transmission to reception and vice versa.

Subject to the provisions of paragraph (n) of this Regulation, the reserve source of energy shall not be used other than for the purposes specified in this paragraph.

(n) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (m) of this Regulation, the Administration may authorize the use in cargo ships of the reserve source of energy for a small number of low-power emergency circuits which are wholly confined to the upper part of the ship,

* For the purpose of determining the electrical load to be supplied by the reserve source of energy, the following formula is recommended as a guide:

½ of the transmitter current consumption with the key down (mark)

+ ½ of the transmitter current consumption with the key up (space)

+ current consumption of receiver and additional circuits connected to the reserve source of energy.

SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

such as emergency lighting on the boat deck, on condition that these can be readily disconnected if necessary, and that the source of energy is of sufficient capacity to carry the additional load or loads.

(o) The reserve source of energy and its switchboard shall be as high as practicable in the ship and readily accessible to the radio officer. The switchboard shall, wherever possible, be situated in a radio room; if it is not, it shall be capable of being illuminated.

(p) While the ship is at sea, accumulator batteries, whether forming part of the main installation or reserve installation, shall be brought up to the normal fully-charged condition daily.

(q) All steps shall be taken to eliminate so far as is possible the causes of, and to suppress, radio interference from electrical and other apparatus on board. If necessary, steps shall be taken to ensure that the antennae attached to broadcast receivers do not cause interference to the efficient or correct working of the radiotelegraph installation. Particular attention shall be paid to this requirement in the design of new ships.

(r) In addition to a means for manually transmitting the radiotelegraph alarm signal, an automatic radiotelegraph alarm signal keying device shall be provided, capable of keying the main and the reserve transmitters so as to transmit the radiotelegraph alarm signal. The device shall be capable of being taken out of operation at any time in order to permit immediate manual operation of the transmitter. If electrically operated, this keying device shall be capable of operation from the reserve source of energy.

(s) At sea, the reserve transmitter, if not used for communications, shall be tested daily using a suitable artificial antenna, and at least once during each voyage using the reserve antenna if installed. The reserve source of energy shall also be tested daily.

(t) All equipment forming part of the radiotelegraph installation shall be reliable, and shall be so constructed that it is readily accessible for maintenance purposes.

(u) Notwithstanding the provision of Regulation 4 of this Chapter, the Administration may, in the case of cargo ships of less than 1,600 tons gross tonnage, relax the full requirements of Regulation 9 of this Chapter and the present Regulation, provided that the standard of the radiotelegraph station shall in no case fall below the equivalent of that prescribed under Regulation 15 and Regulation 16 of this Chapter for radiotelephone stations, so far as applicable. In particular, in the case of cargo ships of 300 tons gross tonnage and upwards but less than 500 tons gross tonnage, the Administration need not require:

(i) a reserve receiver;

(ii) a reserve source of energy in existing installations;

(iii) protection of the main antenna against breakage by whipping;

(iv) the means of communication between the radiotelegraph station and the bridge to be independent of the main communication system;

(v) the range of the transmitter to be greater than 75 miles.

Regulation 11

Radiotelegraph Auto Alarms

(a) Any radiotelegraph auto alarm installed after 26 May 1965 shall comply with the following minimum requirements:

(i) In the absence of interference of any kind it shall be capable of being actuated, without manual adjustment, by any radiotelegraph alarm signal transmitted on the radiotelegraph distress frequency by any coast station, ship’s emergency or survival craft transmitter operating in accordance with the Radio Regulations, provided that the strength of the signal at the receiver input is greater than 100 microvolts and less than 1 volt.

(ii) In the absence of interference of any kind, it shall be actuated by either three or four consecutive dashes when the dashes vary in length from 3.5 to as near 6 seconds as possible and the spaces vary in length between 1.5 seconds and the lowest practicable value, preferably not greater than 10 milliseconds.

SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

(iii) It shall not be actuated by atmospherics or by any signal other than the radiotelegraph alarm signal, provided that the received signals do not in fact constitute a signal falling within the tolerance limits indicated in sub-paragraph (ii) above.

(iv) The selectivity of the radiotelegraph auto alarm shall be such as to provide a practically uniform sensitivity over a band extending not less than 4 kHz and not more than 8 kHz on each side of the radiotelegraph distress frequency and to provide outside this band a sensitivity which decreases as rapidly as possible in conformity with the best engineering practice.

(v) If practicable, the radiotelegraph auto alarm shall, in the presence of atmospherics or interfering signals, automatically adjust itself so that within a reasonably short time it approaches the condition in which it can most readily distinguish the radiotelegraph alarm signal.

(vi) When actuated by a radiotelegraph alarm signal, or in the event of failure of the apparatus, the radiotelegraph auto alarm shall cause a continuous audible warning to be given in the radiotelegraph operating room, in the radio officer’s sleeping accommodation and on the bridge. If practicable, warning shall also be given in the case of failure of any part of the whole alarm receiving system. Only one switch for stopping the warning shall be provided and this shall be situated in the radiotelegraph operating room.

(vii) For the purpose of regularly testing the radiotelegraph auto alarm, the apparatus shall include a generator pre-tuned to the radiotelegraph distress frequency and a keying device by means of which a radiotelegraph alarm signal of the minimum strength indicated in sub-paragraph (i) above is produced. A means shall also be provided for attaching headphones for the purpose of listening to signals received on the radiotelegraph auto alarm.

(viii) The radiotelegraph auto alarm shall be capable of withstanding vibration, humidity and changes of temperature, equivalent to severe conditions experienced on board ships at sea, and shall continue to operate under such conditions.

(b) Before a new type of radiotelegraph auto alarm is approved, the Administration concerned shall be satisfied, by practical tests made under operating conditions equivalent to those obtaining in practice, that the apparatus complies with paragraph (a) of this Regulation.

(c) In ships fitted with a radiotelegraph auto alarm, its efficiency shall be tested by a radio officer at least once every 24 hours while at sea. If it is not in working order, the radio officer shall report that fact to the master or officer on watch on the bridge.

(d) A radio officer shall periodically check the proper functioning of the radiotelegraph auto alarm receiver, with its normal antenna connected, by listening to signals and by comparing them with similar signals received on the radiotelegraph distress frequency on the main installation.

(e) As far as practicable, the radiotelegraph auto alarm, when connected to an antenna shall not affect the accuracy of the direction-finder.

Regulation 12

Direction-Finders

(a) (i) The direction-finding apparatus required by Regulation 12 of Chapter V shall be efficient and capable of receiving signals with the minimum of receiver noise and of taking bearings from which the true bearing and direction may be determined.

(ii) It shall be capable of receiving signals on the radiotelegraph frequencies assigned by the Radio Regulations for the purposes of distress and direction-finding and for maritime radio beacons.

(iii) In the absence of interference the direction-finding apparatus shall have a sensitivity sufficient to permit accurate bearings being taken on a signal having a field strength as low as 50 microvolts per metre.

(iv) As far as is practicable, the direction-finding apparatus shall be so located that as little interference as possible from mechanical or other noise will be caused to the efficient determination of bearings.

SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

(v) As far as is practicable, the direction-finding antenna system shall be erected in such a manner that the efficient determination of bearings will be hindered as little as possible by the close proximity of other antennae, derricks, wire halyards or other large metal objects.

(vi) An efficient two-way means of calling and voice communication shall be provided between the direction-finder and the bridge.

(vii) All direction-finders shall be calibrated to the satisfaction of the Administration on first installation. The calibration shall be verified by check bearings or by a further calibration whenever any changes are made in the position of any antennae or of any structures on deck which might affect appreciably the accuracy of the direction-finder. The calibration particulars shall be checked at yearly intervals, or as near thereto as possible. A record shall be kept of the calibrations and of any checks made of their accuracy.

(b) (i) Radio equipment for homing on the radiotelephone distress frequency shall be capable of taking direction-finding bearings on that frequency without ambiguity of sense within an arc of 30 degrees on either side of the bow.

(ii) When installing and testing the equipment referred to in this paragraph due regard should be given to the relevant recommendation of the International Radio Consultative Committee (CCIR).

(iii) All reasonable steps shall be taken to ensure the homing capability required by this paragraph. In cases where due to technical difficulties the homing capability cannot be achieved, Administrations may grant to individual ships exemptions from the requirements of this paragraph.

Regulation 13

Radiotelegraph Installation for Fitting in Motor Lifeboats

(a) The radiotelegraph installation required by Regulation 14 of Chapter III shall include a transmitter, a receiver and a source of energy. It shall be so designed that it can be used in an emergency by an unskilled person.

(b) The transmitter shall be capable of transmitting on the radiotelegraph distress frequency using a class of emission assigned by the Radio Regulations for that frequency. The transmitter shall also be capable of transmitting on the frequency, and of using a class of emission, assigned by the Radio Regulations for use by survival craft in the bands between 4,000 kHz and 27,500 kHz.

(c) The transmitter shall, if modulated emission is prescribed by the Radio Regulations, have a depth of modulation of not less than 70 per cent and a note frequency between 450 and 1,350 Hz.

(d) In addition to a key for manual transmissions, the transmitter shall be fitted with an automatic keying device for the transmission of the radiotelegraph alarm and distress signals.

(e) On the radiotelegraph distress frequency the transmitter shall have a minimum normal range (as specified in paragraph (g) of Regulation 10 of this Chapter) of 25 miles using the fixed antenna.*

(f) The receiver shall be capable of receiving the radiotelegraph distress frequency and the classes of emission assigned by the Radio Regulations for that frequency.

(g) The source of energy shall consist of an accumulator battery with sufficient capacity to supply the transmitter for four hours continuously under normal working conditions. If the battery is of a type that requires charging, means shall be available for charging it from the ship’s power supply. In addition there shall be a means for charging it after the lifeboat has been launched.

(h) When the power for the radiotelegraph installation and the searchlight required by Regulation 14 of Chapter III are drawn from the same battery, it shall have sufficient capacity to provide for the additional load of the searchlight.

* In the absence of a measurement of the field strength, it may be assumed that this range will be obtained if the product of the height of the antenna above the water-line and the antenna current (R.M.S. value) is 10 metreamperes.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

(i) A fixed-type antenna will be provided together with means for supporting it at the maximum practicable height. In addition an antenna supported by a kite or balloon shall be provided if practicable.

(j) At sea a radio officer shall at weekly intervals test the transmitter using a suitable artificial antenna, and shall bring the battery up to full charge if it is of a type which requires charging.

Regulation 14

Portable Radio Apparatus for Survival Craft

(a) The apparatus required by Regulation 13 of Chapter III shall include a transmitter, a receiver, an antenna and a source of energy. It shall be so designed that it can be used in an emergency by an unskilled person.

(b) The apparatus shall be readily portable, watertight, capable of floating in sea water and capable of being dropped into the sea without damage. New equipment shall be as lightweight and compact as practicable and shall preferably be capable of use in both lifeboats and liferafts.

(c) The transmitter shall be capable of transmitting on the radiotelegraph distress frequency using a class of emission assigned by the Radio Regulations for that frequency, and, in the bands between 4,000 kHz and 27,500 kHz, of transmitting on the radiotelegraph frequency, and of using a class of emission assigned by the Radio Regulations for survival craft. However, the Administration may permit the transmitter to be capable of transmitting on the radiotelephone distress frequency, and of using a class of emission assigned by the Radio Regulations for that frequency, as an alternative or in addition to transmission on the radiotelegraph frequency assigned by the Radio Regulations for survival craft in the bands between 4,000 kHz and 27,500 kHz.

(d) The transmitter shall, if modulated emission is prescribed by the Radio Regulations, have a depth of modulation of not less than 70 per cent and in the case of radiotelegraph emission have a note frequency between 450 and 1,350 Hz.

(e) In addition to a key for manual transmissions, the transmitter shall be fitted with an automatic keying device for the transmission of the radiotelegraph alarm and distress signals. If the transmitter is capable of transmitting on the radiotelephone distress frequency, it shall be fitted with an automatic device, complying with the requirements of paragraph (e) of Regulation 16 of this Chapter, for transmitting the radiotelephone alarm signal.

(f) The receiver shall be capable of receiving the radiotelegraph distress frequency and the classes of emission assigned by the Radio Regulations for that frequency. If the transmitter is capable of transmitting on the radiotelephone distress frequency the receiver shall also be capable of receiving that frequency and a class of emission assigned by the Radio Regulations for that frequency.

(g) The antenna shall be either self-supporting or capable of being supported by the mast of a lifeboat at the maximum practicable height. In addition it is desirable that an antenna supported by a kite or balloon shall be provided if practicable.

(h) The transmitter shall supply an adequate radio frequency power* to the antenna required by paragraph (a) of this Regulation and shall preferably derive its supply from a hand generator. If operated from a battery, the battery shall comply with conditions laid down by the Administration to ensure that it is of a durable type and is of adequate capacity.

(i) At sea a radio officer or a radiotelephone operator, as appropriate, shall at weekly intervals test the transmitter, using a suitable artificial antenna and shall bring the battery up to full charge if it is of a type which requires charging.

(j) For the purpose of this Regulation, new equipment means equipment supplied to a ship after the date of entry into force of the present Convention.

*It may be assumed that the purposes of this Regulation will be satisfied by the following performance:

At least 10 watts input to the anode of the final stage or a radio-frequency output of at least 2.0 watts (A2 emission) at 500 kHz into an artificial antenna having an effective resistance of 15 ohms and 100 × 10—12 farads capacitance in series. The depth of modulation shall be at least 70 per cent.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

Regulation 15

Radiotelephone Stations

(a) The radiotelephone station shall be in the upper part of the ship and so located that it is sheltered to the greatest possible extent from noise which might impair the correct reception of messages and signals.

(b) There shall be efficient communication between the radiotelephone station and the bridge.

(c) A reliable clock shall be securely mounted in such a position that the entire dial can be easily observed from the radiotelephone operating position.

(d) A reliable emergency light shall be provided, independent of the system which supplies the normal lighting of the radiotelephone installation, and permanently arranged so as to be capable of providing adequate illumination of the operating controls of the radiotelephone installation, of the clock required by paragraph (c) of this Regulation and of the card of instructions required by paragraph (f).

(e) Where a source of energy consists of a battery or batteries, the radiotelephone station shall be provided with a means of assessing the charge condition.

(f) A card of instructions giving a clear summary of the radiotelephone distress procedure shall be displayed in full view of the radiotelephone operating position.

Regulation 16

Radiotelephone Installations

(a) The radiotelephone installation shall include transmitting and receiving equipment, and appropriate sources of energy (referred to in the following paragraphs as “the transmitter”, “the receiver”, “the radiotelephone distress frequency watch receiver”, and “the source of energy respectively).

(b) The transmitter shall be capable of transmitting on the radiotelephone distress frequency and on at least one other frequency in the bands between 1,605 kHz and 2,850 kHz, using the classes of emission assigned by the Radio Regulations for these frequencies. In normal operation a double sideband transmission or a single sideband transmission with full carrier (i.e., A3H) shall have a depth of modulation of at least 70 per cent at peak intensity. Modulation of a single sideband transmission with reduced or suppressed carrier (A3A, A3J) shall be such that the intermodulation products shall not exceed the values given in the Radio Regulations.

(c) (i) In the case of cargo ships of 500 tons gross tonnage and upwards but less than 1,600 tons gross tonnage the transmitter shall have a minimum normal range of 150 miles, i.e., it shall be capable of transmitting clearly perceptible signals from ship to ship by day and under normal conditions and circumstances over this range.* (Clearly perceptible signals will normally be received if the R.M.S. value of the field strength produced at the receiver by the unmodulated carrier is at least 25 microvolts per metre.)

(ii) In the case of cargo ships of 300 tons gross tonnage and upwards but less than 500 tons gross tonnage:

(1) for existing installations the transmitter shall have a minimum normal range of at least 75 miles; and

(2) for new installations the transmitter shall produce a power in the antenna of at least 15 watts (unmodulated carrier).

(d) The transmitter shall be fitted with a device for generating the radiotelephone alarm signal by automatic means so designed as to prevent actuation by mistake. The device shall be capable of being taken out of operation at any time in order to permit the immediate transmission of a distress message. Arrangements shall be made to check periodically the proper functioning of the device on frequencies other than the radiotelephone distress frequency using a suitable artificial antenna.

*In the absence of field strength measurements, it may be assumed that this range will be obtained by a power in the antenna of 15 watts (unmodulated carrier) with an antenna efficiency of 27 per cent.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

(e) The device required by paragraph (d) of this Regulation shall comply with the following requirements:

(i) The tolerance of the frequency of each tone shall be ± 1.5 per cent.

(ii) The tolerance on the duration of each tone shall be ± 50 milliseconds.

(iii) The interval between successive tones shall not exceed 50 milliseconds.

(iv) The ratio of the amplitude of the stronger tone to that of the weaker shall be within the range 1 to 1.2.

(f) The receiver required by paragraph (a) of this Regulation shall be capable of receiving the radiotelephone distress frequency and at least one other frequency available for maritime radiotelephone stations in the bands between 1,605 kHz and 2,850 kHz, using the classes of emission assigned by the Radio Regulations for these frequencies. In addition the receiver shall permit the reception of such other frequencies, using the classes of emission assigned by the Radio Regulations, as are used for the transmission by radiotelephony of meteorological messages and such other communications relating to the safety of navigation as may be considered necessary by the Administration. The receiver shall have sufficient sensitivity to produce signals by means of a loudspeaker when the receiver input is as low as 50 microvolts.

(g) The radiotelephone distress frequency watch receiver shall be preset to this frequency. It shall be provided with a filtering unit or a device to silence the loudspeaker in the absence of a radiotelephone alarm signal. The device shall be capable of being easily switched in and out and may be used when, in the opinion of the master, conditions are such that maintenance of the listening watch would interfere with the safe navigation of the ship.

(h) To permit rapid change-over from transmission to reception when manual switching is used, the control for the switching device shall, where practicable, be located on the microphone or the telephone handset.

(i) While the ship is at sea, there shall be available at all times a main source of energy sufficient to operate the installation over the normal range required by paragraph (c) of this Regulation. If batteries are provided they shall under all circumstances have sufficient capacity to operate the transmitter and receiver for at least six hours continuously under normal working conditions.* In installations in cargo ships of 500 tons gross tonnage and upwards but less than 1,600 tons gross tonnage made on or after 19 November 1952, a reserve source of energy shall be provided in the upper part of the ship unless the main source of energy is so situated.

(j) The reserve source of energy, if provided, may be used only to supply:

(i) the radiotelephone installation;

(ii) the emergency light required by paragraph (d) of Regulation 15 of this Chapter;

(iii) the device required by paragraph (d) of this Regulation, for generating the radiotelephone alarm signal; and

(iv) the VHF installation.

(k) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (j) of this Regulation, the Administration may authorize the use of the reserve source of energy, if provided, for a direction-finder, if fitted, and for a number of low-power emergency circuits which are wholly confined to the upper part of the ship, such as emergency lighting on the boat deck, on condition that the additional loads can be readily disconnected, and that the source of energy is of sufficient capacity to carry them.

(l) While at sea, any battery provided shall be kept charged so as to meet the requirements of paragraph (i) of this Regulation.

(m) An antenna shall be provided and installed and, if suspended between supports liable to whipping, shall in the case of cargo ships of 500 tons gross tonnage and upwards but less

*For the purpose of determining the electrical load to be supplied by batteries required to have six hours reserve capacity, the following formula is recommended as a guide:

½ of the current consumption necessary for speech transmission

+ current consumption of receiver

+ current consumption of all additional loads to which the batteries may supply energy in time of distress or emergency.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

than 1,600 tons gross tonnage be protected against breakage. In addition, there shall be a spare antenna completely assembled for immediate replacement or, where this is not practicable, sufficient antenna wire and insulators to enable a spare antenna to be erected. The necessary tools to erect an antenna shall also be provided.

Regulation 17

VHF Radiotelephone Stations

(a) When a VHF radiotelephone station is provided in accordance with Regulation 18 of Chapter V, it shall be in the upper part of the ship and include a VHF radiotelephone installation complying with the provisions of this Regulation and comprising a transmitter and receiver, a source of power capable of actuating them at their rated power levels, and an antenna suitable for efficient radiating and receiving signals at the operating frequencies.

(b) Such a VHF installation shall conform to the requirements laid down in the Radio Regulations for equipment used in the VHF Maritime Mobile Radiotelephone Service and shall be capable of operation on those channels specified by the Radio Regulations and as may be required by the Contracting Government referred to in Regulation 18 of Chapter V.

(c) The Contracting Government shall not require the transmitter R.F. carrier power output to be greater than 10 watts. The antenna shall, in so far as is practicable, have an unobstructed view in all directions.*

(d) Control of the VHF channels required for navigational safety shall be immediately available on the bridge convenient to the conning position and, where necessary, facilities should also be available to permit radiocommunications from the wings of the bridge.

Regulation 18

Radiotelephone Auto Alarms

(a) The radiotelephone auto alarm shall comply with the following minimum requirements:

(i) the frequencies of maximum response of the tuned circuits, and other tone selecting devices, shall be subject to a tolerance of ± 1.5 per cent in each instance; and the response shall not fall below 50 per cent of the maximum response for frequencies within 3 per cent of the frequency of maximum response;

(ii) in the absence of noise and interference, the automatic receiving equipment shall be capable of operating from the alarm signal in a period of not less than four and not more than six seconds;

(iii) the automatic receiving equipment shall respond to the alarm signal, under conditions of intermittent interference caused by atmospherics and powerful signals other than the alarm signal, preferably without any manual adjustment being required during any period of watch maintained by the equipment;

(iv) the automatic receiving equipment shall not be actuated by atmospherics or by strong signals other than the alarm signal;

(v) the automatic receiving equipment shall be effective beyond the range at which speech transmission is satisfactory;

(vi) the automatic receiving equipment shall be capable of withstanding vibration, humidity, changes of temperature and variations in power supply voltage equivalent to the severe conditions experienced on board ships at sea, and shall continue to operate under such conditions;

(vii) the automatic receiving equipment should, as far as practicable, give warning of faults that would prevent the apparatus from performing its normal functions during watch hours.

(b) Before a new type of radiotelephone auto alarm is approved, the Administration concerned shall be satisfied by practical tests, made under operating conditions equivalent to

* For guidance purposes, it is assumed that each ship would be fitted with a vertically polarized unity gain antenna at a nominal height of 9.15 metres (30 feet) above water, a transmitter R.F. power output of 10 watts, and a receiver sensitivity of 2 microvolts across the input terminals for 20 db signal-to-noise ratio.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

those obtained in practice, that the apparatus complies with paragraph (a) of this Regulation.

PART DRADIO LOGS

Regulation 19

Radio Logs

(a) The radio log (diary of the radio service) required by the Radio Regulations for a ship which is fitted with a radiotelegraph station in accordance with Regulation 3 or Regulation 4 of this Chapter shall be kept in the radiotelegraph operating room during the voyage. Every radio officer shall enter in the log his name, the times at which he goes on and off watch, and all incidents connected with the radio service which occur during his watch which may appear to be of importance to safety of life at sea. In addition, there shall be entered in the log:

(i) the entries required by the Radio Regulations;

(ii) details of the maintenance, including a record of the charging of the batteries, in such form as may be prescribed by the Administration;

(iii) a daily statement that the requirement of paragraph (p) of Regulation 10 of this Chapter has been fulfilled;

(iv) details of the tests of the reserve transmitter and reserve source of energy made under paragraph (s) of Regulation 10 of this Chapter;

(v) in ships fitted with a radiotelegraph auto alarm details of tests made under paragraph (c) of Regulation 11 of this Chapter;

(vi) details of the maintenance of the batteries, including a record of the charging (if applicable) required by paragraph (j) of Regulation 13 of this Chapter, and details of the tests required by that paragraph in respect of the transmitters fitted in motor lifeboats;

(vii) details of the maintenance of the batteries, including a record of the charging (if applicable) required by paragraph (i) of Regulation 14 of this Chapter, and details of the tests required by that paragraph in respect of portable radio apparatus for survival craft;

(viii) the time at which the listening watch was discontinued in accordance with paragraph (d) of Regulation 6 of this Chapter, together with the reason and the time at which the listening watch was resumed.

(b) The radio log (diary of the radio service) required by the Radio Regulations for a ship which is fitted with a radiotelephone station in accordance with Regulation 4 of this Chapter shall be kept at the place where listening watch is maintained. Every qualified operator, and every master, officer or crew member carrying out a listening watch in accordance with Regulation 7 of this Chapter, shall enter in the log, with his name, the details of all incidents connected with the radio service which occur during his watch which may appear to be of importance to safety of life at sea. In addition, there shall be entered in the log:

(i) the details required by the Radio Regulations;

(ii) the time at which listening watch begins when the ship leaves port, and the time at which it ends when the ship reaches port;

(iii) the time at which listening watch is for any reason discontinued, together with the reason, and the time at which listening watch is resumed;

(iv) details of the maintenance of the batteries (if provided), including a record of the charging required by paragraph (1) of Regulation 16 of this Chapter;

(v) details of the maintenance of the batteries, including a record of the charging (if applicable) required by paragraph (i) of Regulation 14 of this Chapter, and details of the tests required by that paragraph in respect of portable radio apparatus for survival craft.

(c) Radio logs shall be available for inspection by the officers authorized by the Administration to make such inspection.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

CHAPTER V

SAFETY OF NAVIGATION

Regulation 1

Application

This Chapter, unless otherwise expressly provided in this Chapter, applies to all ships on all voyages, except ships of war and ships solely navigating the Great Lakes of North America and their connecting and tributary waters as far east as the lower exit of the St. Lambert Lock at Montreal in the Province of Quebec, Canada.

Regulation 2

Danger Messages

(a) The master of every ship which meets with dangerous ice, a dangerous derelict, or any other direct danger to navigation, or a tropical storm, or encounters sub-freezing air temperatures associated with gale force winds causing severe ice accretion on superstructures, or winds of force 10 or above on the Beaufort scale for which no storm warning has been received, is bound to communicate the information by all the means at his disposal to ships in the vicinity, and also to the competent authorities at the first point on the coast with which he can communicate. The form in which the information is sent is not obligatory. It may be transmitted either in plain language (preferably English) or by means of the International Code of Signals. It should be broadcast to all ships in the vicinity and sent to the first point on the coast to which communication can be made, with a request that it be transmitted to the appropriate authorities.

(b) Each Contracting Government will take all steps necessary to ensure that when intelligence of any of the dangers specified in paragraph (a) of this Regulation is received, it will be promptly brought to the knowledge of those concerned and communicated to other interested Governments.

(c) The transmission of messages respecting the dangers specified is free of cost to the ships concerned.

(d) All radio messages issued under paragraph (a) of this Regulation shall be preceded by the Safety Signal, using the procedure as prescribed by the Radio Regulations as defined in Regulation 2 of Chapter IV.

Regulation 3

Information required in Danger Messages

The following information is required in danger messages:

(a) Ice, Derelicts and other Direct Dangers to Navigation

(i) The kind of ice, derelict or danger observed.

(ii) The position of the ice, derelict or danger when last observed.

(iii) The time and date (Greenwich Mean Time) when danger last observed.

(b) Tropical Storms (Hurricanes in the West Indies, Typhoons in the China Sea, Cyclones in Indian waters, and storms of a similar nature in other regions)

(i) A statement that a tropical storm has been encountered. This obligation should be interpreted in a broad spirit, and information transmitted whenever the master has good reason to believe that a tropical storm is developing or exists in his neighbourhood.

(ii) Time, date (Greenwich Mean Time) and position of ship when the observation was taken.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

(iii) As much of the following information as is practicable should be included in the message:

–barometric pressure, preferably corrected (stating millibars, millimetres, or inches, and whether corrected or uncorrected);

–barometric tendency (the change in barometric pressure during the past three hours);

–true wind direction;

–wind force (Beaufort scale);

–state of the sea (smooth, moderate, rough, high);

–swell (slight, moderate, heavy) and the true direction from which it comes. Period or length of swell (short, average, long) would also be of value;

–true course and speed of ship.

(c) Sub-sequent Observations

When a master has reported a tropical or other dangerous storm, it is desirable, but not obligatory, that further observations be made and transmitted hourly, if practicable, but in any case at intervals of not more than three hours, so long as the ship remains under the influence of the storm.

(d) Winds of force 10 or above on the Beaufort scale for which no storm warning has been received

This is intended to deal with storms other than the tropical storms referred to in paragraph (b) of this Regulation; when such a storm is encountered, the message should contain similar information to that listed under that paragraph but excluding the details concerning sea and swell.

(e) Sub-freezing air temperatures associated with gale force winds causing severe ice accretion on superstructures

(i) Time and date (Greenwich Mean Time).

(ii) Air temperature.

(iii) Sea temperature (if practicable).

(iv) Wind force and direction.

Examples

Ice

TTT Ice. Large berg sighted in 4605 N., 4410 W., at 0800 GMT. May 15.

Derelicts

TTT Derelict. Observed derelict almost submerged in 4006 N., 1243 W., at 1630 GMT. April 21.

Danger to Navigation

TTT Navigation. Alpha lightship not on station. 1800 GMT. January 3.

Tropical Storm

TTT Storm. 0030 GMT. August 18.2004 N., 11354 E. Barometer corrected 994 millibars, tendency down 6 millibars. Wind NW., force 9, heavy squalls. Heavy easterly swell. Course 067, 5 knots.

TTT Storm. Appearances indicate approach of hurricane. 1300 GMT. September 14.2200 N., 7236 W. Barometer corrected 29.64 inches, tendency down .015 inches. Wind NE., force 8, frequent rain squalls. Course 035, 9 knots.

TTT Storm. Conditions indicate intense cyclone has formed. 0200 GMT. May 4, 1620 N., 9203 E. Barometer uncorrected 753 millimetres, tendency down 5 millimetres. Wind S. by W., force 5. Course 300, 8 knots.

TTT Storm. Typhoon to southeast. 0300 GMT. June 12. 1812N., 12605 E. Barometer falling rapidly. Wind increasing from N.

SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

TTT Storm. Wind force 11, no storm warning received. 0300 GMT. May 4.4830 N., 30 W. Barometer corrected 983 millibars, tendency down 4 millibars. Wind SW., force 11 veering. Course 260, 6 knots.

Icing

TTT experiencing severe icing. 1400 GMT. March 2. 69 N., 10 W. Air temperature 18. Sea temperature 29. Wind NE., force 8.

Regulation 4

Meteorological Services

(a) The Contracting Governments undertake to encourage the collection of meteorological data by ships at sea and to arrange for their examination, dissemination and exchange in the manner most suitable for the purpose of aiding navigation. Administrations shall encourage the use of instruments of a high degree of accuracy, and shall facilitate the checking of such instruments upon request.

(b) In particular, the Contracting Governments undertake to co-operate in carrying out, as far as practicable, the following meteorological arrangements:

(i) To warn ships of gales, storms and tropical storms, both by the issue of radio messages and by the display of appropriate signals at coastal points.

(ii) To issue daily, by radio, weather bulletins suitable for shipping, containing data of existing weather, waves and ice, forecasts and, where practicable, sufficient additional information to enable simple weather charts to be prepared at sea and also to encourage the transmission of suitable facsimile weather charts.

(iii) To prepare and issue such publications as may be necessary for the efficient conduct of meteorological work at sea and to arrange, if practicable, for the publication and making available of daily weather charts for the information of departing ships.

(iv) To arrange for selected ships to be equipped with tested instruments (such as a barometer, a barograph, a psychrometer, and suitable apparatus for measuring sea temperature) for use in this service, and to take meteorological observations at main standard times for surface synoptic observations (at least four times daily, whenever circumstances permit) and to encourage other ships to take observations in a modified form, particularly when in areas where shipping is sparse; these ships to transmit their observations by radio for the benefit of the various official meteorological services, repeating the information for the benefit of ships in the vicinity. When in the vicinity of a tropical storm, or of a suspected tropical storm, ships should be encouraged to take and transmit their observations at more frequent intervals whenever practicable, bearing in mind navigational preoccupations of ships’ officers during storm conditions.

(v) To arrange for the reception and transmission by coast radio stations of weather messages from and to ships. Ships which are unable to communicate direct with shore shall be encouraged to relay their weather messages through ocean weather ships or through other ships which are in contact with shore.

(vi) To encourage all masters to inform ships in the vicinity and also shore stations whenever they experience a wind speed of 50 knots or more (force 10 on the Beaufort scale).

(vii) To endeavour to obtain a uniform procedure in regard to the international meteorological services already specified, and, as far as is practicable, to conform to the Technical Regulations and recommendations made by the World Meteorological Organization, to which the Contracting Governments may refer for study and advice any meteorological question which may arise in carrying out the present Convention.

(c) The information provided for in this Regulation shall be furnished in form for transmission and transmitted in the order of priority prescribed by the Radio Regulations, and during transmission “to all stations” of meteorological information, forecasts and warnings, all ship stations must conform to the provisions of the Radio Regulations.

SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

(d) Forecasts, warnings, synoptic and other meteorological reports intended for ships shall be issued and disseminated by the national service in the best position to serve various zones and areas, in accordance with mutual arrangements made by the Contracting Governments concerned.

Regulation 5

Ice Patrol Service

(a) The Contracting Governments undertake to continue an ice patrol and a service for study and observation of ice conditions in the North Atlantic. During the whole of the ice season the south-eastern, southern and south-western limits of the regions of icebergs in the vicinity of the Grand Banks of Newfoundland shall be guarded for the purpose of informing passing ships of the extent of this dangerous region; for the study of ice conditions in general; and for the purpose of affording assistance to ships and crews requiring aid within the limits of operation of the patrol ships. During the rest of the year the study and observation of ice conditions shall be maintained as advisable.

(b) Ships and aircraft used for the ice patrol service and the study and observation of ice conditions may be assigned other duties by the managing Government, provided that such other duties do not interfere with their primary purpose or increase the cost of this service.

Regulation 6

Ice Patrol. Management and Cost

(a) The Government of the United States of America agrees to continue the management of the ice patrol service and the study and observation of ice conditions, including the dissemination of information received therefrom. The Contracting Governments specially interested in these services undertake to contribute to the expense of maintaining and operating these services; each contribution to be based upon the total gross tonnage of the vessels of each contributing Government passing through the regions of icebergs guarded by the Ice Patrol; in particular, each Contracting Government specially interested undertakes to contribute annually to the expense of maintaining and operating these services a sum determined by the ratio which the total gross tonnage of that Contracting Government’s vessels passing during the ice season through the regions of icebergs guarded by the Ice Patrol bears to the combined total gross tonnage of the vessels of all contributing Governments passing during the ice season through the regions of icebergs guarded by the Ice Patrol. Non-contracting Governments specially interested may contribute to the expense of maintaining and operating these services on the same basis. The managing Government will furnish annually to each contributing Government a statement of the total cost of maintaining and operating the Ice Patrol and of the proportionate share of each contributing Government.

(b) Each of the contributing Governments has the right to alter or discontinue its contribution, and other interested Governments may undertake to contribute to the expense. The contributing Government which avails itself of this right will continue responsible for its current contribution up to 1 September following the date of giving notice of intention to alter or discontinue its contribution. To take advantage of the said right it must give notice to the managing Government at least six months before the said 1 September.

(c) If, at any time, the United States Government should desire to discontinue these services, or if one of the contributing Governments should express a wish to relinquish responsibility for its pecuniary contribution, or to have its contribution altered, or another Contracting Government should desire to undertake to contribute to the expense, the contributing Governments shall settle the question in accordance with their mutual interests.

(d) The contributing Governments shall have the right by common consent to make from time to time such alterations in the provisions of this Regulation and of Regulation 5 of this Chapter as appear desirable.

(e) Where this Regulation provides that a measure may be taken after agreement among the contributing Governments, proposals made by any Contracting Government for effecting such a measure shall be communicated to the managing Government which shall approach the other contributing Governments with a view to ascertaining whether they accept such proposals, and the results of the enquiries thus made shall be sent to the other contributing Governments and the Contracting Government making the proposals. In particular, the arrangements relating to contributions to the cost of the services shall be

SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

reviewed by the contributing Governments at intervals not exceeding three years. The managing Government shall initiate the action necessary to this end.

Regulation 7

Speed Near Ice

When ice is reported on or near his course the master of every ship at night is bound to proceed at a moderate speed or to alter his course so as to go well clear of the danger zone.

Regulation 8

Routeing

(a) The practice of following, particularly in converging areas, routes adopted for the purpose of separation of traffic including avoidance of passage through areas designated as areas to be avoided by ships or certain classes of ships, or for the purpose of avoiding unsafe conditions, has contributed to the safety of navigation and is recommended for use by all ships concerned.

(b) The Organization is recognized as the only international body for establishing and adopting measures on an international level concerning routeing and areas to be avoided by ships or certain classes of ships. It will collate and disseminate to Contracting Governments all relevant information.

(c) The selection of the routes and the initiation of action with regard to them, and the delineation of what constitutes converging areas, will be primarily the responsibility of the Governments concerned. In the development of routeing schemes which impinge upon international waters, or such other schemes they may wish adopted by the Organization, they will give due consideration to relevant information published by the Organization.

(d) Contracting Governments will use their influence to secure the appropriate use of adopted routes and will do everything in their power to ensure adherence to the measures adopted by the Organization in connexion with routeing of ships.

(e) Contracting Governments will also induce all ships proceeding on voyages in the vicinity of the Grand Banks of Newfoundland to avoid, as far as practicable, the fishing banks of Newfoundland north of latitude 43°N and to pass outside regions known or believed to be endangered by ice.

Regulation 9

Misuse of Distress Signals

The use of an international distress signal, except for the purpose of indicating that a ship or aircraft is in distress, and the use of any signal which may be confused with an international distress signal, are prohibited on every ship or aircraft.

Regulation 10

Distress Messages—Obligations and Procedures

(a) The master of a ship at sea, on receiving a signal from any source that a ship or aircraft or survival craft thereof is in distress, is bound to proceed with all speed to the assistance of the persons in distress informing them if possible that he is doing so. If he is unable or, in the special circumstances of the case, considers it unreasonable or unnecessary to proceed to their assistance, he must enter in the logbook the reason for failing to proceed to the assistance of the persons in distress.

(b) The master of a ship in distress, after consultation, so far as may be possible, with the masters of the ships which answer his call for assistance, has the right to requisition such one or more of those ships as he considers best able to render assistance, and it shall be the duty of the master or masters of the ship or ships requisitioned to comply with the requisition by continuing to proceed with all speed to the assistance of persons in distress.

(c) The master of a ship shall be released from the obligation imposed by paragraph (a) of this Regulation when he learns that one or more ships other than his own have been requisitioned and are complying with the requisition.

(d) The master of a ship shall be released from the obligation imposed by paragraph (a) of this Regulation, and, if his ship has been requisitioned, from the obligation imposed by paragraph (b) of this Regulation, if he is informed by the persons in distress or by the

SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

master of another ship which has reached such persons that assistance is no longer necessary.

(e) The provisions of this Regulation do not prejudice the International Convention for the unification of certain rules with regard to Assistance and Salvage at Sea, signed at Brussels on 23 September 1910, particularly the obligation to render assistance imposed by Article 11 of that Convention.

Regulation 11

Signalling Lamps

All ships of over 150 tons gross tonnage, when engaged on international voyages, shall have on board an efficient daylight signalling lamp which shall not be solely dependent upon the ship’s main source of electrical power.

Regulation 12

Shipborne Navigational Equipment

(a) All ships of 1,600 tons gross tonnage and upwards shall be fitted with a radar of a type approved by the Administration. Facilities for plotting radar readings shall be provided on the bridge in those ships.

(b) All ships of 1,600 tons gross tonnage and upwards, when engaged on international voyages, shall be fitted with radio direction-finding apparatus complying with the provisions of Regulation 12 of Chapter IV. The Administration may, in areas where it considers it unreasonable or unnecessary for such apparatus to be carried, exempt any ship of less than 5,000 tons gross tonnage from this requirement, due regard being had to the fact that radio direction-finding apparatus is of value both as a navigational instrument and as an aid to locating ships, aircraft or survival craft.

(c) All ships of 1,600 tons gross tonnage and upwards, when engaged on international voyages, shall be fitted with a gyro-compass in addition to the magnetic compass. The Administration, if it considers it unreasonable or unnecessary to require a gyro-compass, may exempt any ship of less than 5,000 tons gross tonnage from this requirement.

(d) All new ships of 500 tons gross tonnage and upwards, when engaged on international voyages, shall be fitted with an echo-sounding device.

(e) Whilst all reasonable steps shall be taken to maintain the apparatus in an efficient condition, malfunction of the radar equipment, the gyro-compass or the echo-sounding device shall not be considered as making the ship unseaworthy or as a reason for delaying the ship in ports where repair facilities are not readily available.

(f) All new ships of 1,600 tons gross tonnage and upwards, when engaged on international voyages, shall be fitted with radio equipment for homing on the radiotelephone distress frequency complying with the relevant provisions of paragraph (b) of Regulation 12 of Chapter IV.

Regulation 13

Manning

The Contracting Governments undertake, each for its national ships, to maintain, or, if it is necessary, to adopt, measures for the purpose of ensuring that, from the point of view of safety of life at sea, all ships shall be sufficiently and efficiently manned.

Regulation 14

Aids to Navigation

The Contracting Governments undertake to arrange for the establishment and maintenance of such aids to navigation, including radio beacons and electronic aids as, in their opinion, the volume of traffic justifies and the degree of risk requires, and to arrange for information relating to these aids to be made available to all concerned.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

Regulation 15

Search and Rescue

(a) Each Contracting Government undertakes to ensure that any necessary arrangements are made for coast watching and for the rescue of persons in distress at sea round its coasts. These arrangements should include the establishment, operation and maintenance of such maritime safety facilities as are deemed practicable and necessary having regard to the density of the seagoing traffic and the navigational dangers and should, so far as possible, afford adequate means of locating and rescuing such persons.

(b) Each Contracting Government undertakes to make available information concerning its existing rescue facilities and the plans for changes therein, if any.

Regulation 16

Life-Saving Signals

The following signals shall be used by life-saving stations and maritime rescue units when communicating with ships or persons in distress and by ships or persons in distress when communicating with life-saving stations and maritime rescue units. The signals used by aircraft engaged in search and rescue operations to direct ships are indicated in paragraph (d) below. An illustrated table describing the signals listed below shall be readily available to the officer of the watch of every ship to which this Chapter applies.

(a) Replies from life-saving stations or maritime rescue units to distress signals made by a ship or person:

Signal

Signification

By dayOrange smoke signal or combined light and sound signal (thunderlight) consisting of three single signals which are fired at intervals of approximately one minute.

“You are seen—assistance will be given as soon as possible.”

By nightWhite star rocket consisting of three single signals which are fired at intervals of approximately one minute.

(Repetition of such signals shall have the same meaning.)

If necessary the day signals may be given at night or the night signals by day.

(b) Landing signals for the guidance of small boats with crews or persons in distress:

Signal

Signification

By dayVertical motion of a white flag or the arms or firing of a green star-signal or signalling the code letter “K”(– –) given by light or sound-signal apparatus.

 

By nightVertical motion of a white light or flare, or firing of a green star-signal or signalling the code letter “K” (– –) given by light or sound-signal apparatus. A range (indication of direction) may be given by placing a steady white light or flare at a lower level and in line with the observer.

“This is the best place to land.

By dayHorizontal motion of a white flag or arms extended horizontally or firing of a red star-signal or signalling the code letter “S” () given by light or sound-signal apparatus.

By nightHorizontal motion of a white light or flare or firing of a red star-signal or signalling the code letter “S” () given by light or sound-signal apparatus.

 

 

 

“Landing here highly dangerous.”


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

By dayHorizontal motion of a white flag, followed by the placing of the white flag in the ground and the carrying of another white flag in the direction to be indicated or firing of a red star-signal vertically and a white star-signal in the direction towards the better landing place or signalling the code letter “S”(...) followed by the code letter “R” (.—.) if a better landing place for the craft in distress is located more to the right in the direction of approach or the code letter “L” (.—..) if a better landing place for the craft in distress is located more to the left in the direction of approach.

 

By nightHorizontal motion of a white light or flare, followed by the placing of the white light or flare on the ground and the carrying of another white light or flare in the direction to be indicated or firing of a red star-signal vertically and a white star-signal in the direction towards the better landing place or signalling the code letter “S” () followed by code letter “R” (.–.) if a better landing place for the craft in distress is located more to the right in the direction of approach or the code letter “L” (.–..) if a better landing place for the craft in distress is located more to the left in the direction of approach.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

“Landing here highly dangerous. A more favourable location for landing is in the direction indicated.”

(c) Signals to be employed in connexion with the use of shore life-saving apparatus:

Signal

Signification

By dayVertical motion of a white flag or the arms or firing of a green star-signal.

By nightVertical motion of a white light or flare or firing of a green star-signal.

In general–“Affirmative.” Specifically:

“Rocket line is held.”

“Tail block is made fast.”

“Hawser is made fast.”

“Man is in the breeches buoy.”

“Haul away.”

By dayHorizontal motion of a white flag or arms extended horizontally or firing of a red star-signal.

By nightHorizontal motion of a white light or flare or firing of a red star-signal.

In general—“Negative.”

Specifically:

“Slack away.”

“Avast hauling.”

(d) Signals used by aircraft engaged on search and rescue operations to direct ships towards an aircraft, ship or person in distress (see explanatory Note below):

(i) The following procedures performed in sequence by an aircraft mean that the aircraft is directing a surface craft towards an aircraft or a surface craft in distress:

(1) circling the surface craft at least once;

(2) crossing the projected course of the surface craft close ahead at a low altitude, opening and closing the throttle or changing the propeller pitch;

(3) heading in the direction in which the surface craft is to be directed.

Repetition of such procedures has the same meaning.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

(ii) The following procedure performed by an aircraft means that the assistance of the surface craft to which the signal is directed is no longer required:

–crossing the wake of the surface craft close astern at a low altitude, opening and closing the throttle or changing the propeller pitch.

Note: Advance notification of changes in these signals will be given by the Organization as necessary.

Regulation 17

Pilot Ladders and Mechanical Pilot Hoists

Ships engaged on voyages in the course of which pilots are likely to be employed shall comply with the following requirements:

(a) Pilot Ladders

(i) The ladder shall be efficient for the purpose of enabling pilots to embark and disembark safely, kept clean and in good order and may be used by officials and other persons while a ship is arriving at or leaving a port.

(ii) The ladder shall be secured in a position so that it is clear from any possible discharges from the ship, that each step rests firmly against the ship’s side, that it is clear so far as is practicable of the finer lines of the ship and that the pilot can gain safe and convenient access to the ship after climbing not less than 1.5 metres (5 feet) and not more than 9 metres (30 feet). A single length of ladder shall be used capable of reaching the water from the point of access to the ship; in providing for this due allowance shall be made for all conditions of loading and trim of the ship and for an adverse list of 15 degrees. Whenever the distance from sea level to the point of access to the ship is more than 9 metres (30 feet), access from the pilot ladder to the ship shall be by means of an accommodation ladder or other equally safe and convenient means.

(iii) The steps of the pilot ladder shall be:

(1) of hardwood, or other material of equivalent properties, made in one piece free of knots, having an efficient non-slip surface; the four lowest steps may be made of rubber of sufficient strength and stiffness or of other suitable material of equivalent characteristics;

(2) not less than 480 millimetres (19 inches) long, 115 millimetres (4½ inches) wide, and 25 millimetres (1 inch) in depth, excluding any non-slip device;

(3) equally spaced not less than 300 millimetres (12 inches) nor more than 380 millimetres (15 inches) apart and be secured in such a manner that they will remain horizontal.

(iv) No pilot ladder shall have more than two replacement steps which are secured in position by a method different from that used in the original construction of the ladder and any steps so secured shall be replaced as soon as reasonably practicable by steps secured in position by the method used in the original construction of the ladder. When any replacement step is secured to the side ropes of the ladder by means of grooves in the sides of the step, such grooves shall be in the longer sides of the step.

(v) the side ropes of the ladder shall consist of two uncovered manila ropes not less than 60 millimetres (2¼ inches) in circumference on each side. Each rope shall be continuous with no joints below the top step. Two man-ropes properly secured to the ship and not less than 65 millimetres (2½ inches) in circumference and a safety line shall be kept at hand ready for use if required.

(vi) Battens made of hardwood, or other material of equivalent properties, in one piece and not less than 1.80 metres (5 feet 10 inches) long shall be provided at such intervals as will prevent the pilot ladder from twisting. The lowest batten shall be on the fifth step from the bottom of the ladder and the interval between any batten and the next shall not exceed 9 steps.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

(vii) Means shall be provided to ensure safe and convenient passage on to or into and off the ship between the head of the pilot ladder or of any accommodation ladder or other appliance provided. Where such passage is by means of a gateway in the rails or bulwark, adequate handholds shall be provided. Where such passage is by means of a bulwark ladder, such ladder shall be securely attached to the bulwark rail or platform and two handhold stanchions shall be fitted at the point of boarding or leaving the ship not less than 0.70 metre (2 feet 3 inches) nor more than 0.80 metre (2 feet 7 inches) apart. Each stanchion shall be rigidly secured to the ship’s structure at or near its base and also at a higher point, shall be not less than 40 millimetres (1½ inches) in diameter and shall extend not less than 1.20 metres (3 feet 11 inches) above the top of the bulwark.

(viii) Lighting shall be provided at night such that both the pilot ladder overside and also the position where the pilot boards the ship shall be adequately lit. A lifebuoy equipped with a self-igniting light shall be kept at hand ready for use. A heaving line shall be kept at hand ready for use if required.

(ix) Means shall be provided to enable the pilot ladder to be used on either side of the ship.

 (x) The rigging of the ladder and the embarkation and disembarkation of a pilot shall be supervised by a responsible officer of the ship.

(xi) Where on any ship constructional features such as rubbing bands would prevent the implementation of any of these provisions, special arrangements shall be made to the satisfaction of the Administration to ensure that persons are able to embark and disembark safely.

(b) Mechanical Pilot Hoists

(i) A mechanical pilot hoist, if provided, and its ancillary equipment shall be of a type approved by the Administration. It shall be of such design and construction as to ensure that the pilot can be embarked and disembarked in a safe manner including a safe access from the hoist to the deck and vice versa.

(ii) A pilot ladder complying with the provisions of paragraph (a) of this Regulation shall be kept on deck adjacent to the hoist and available for immediate use.

Regulation 18

VHF Radiotelephone Stations

When a Contracting Government requires ships navigating in an area under its sovereignty to be provided with a Very High Frequency (VHF) radiotelephone station to be used in conjunction with a system which it has established in order to promote safety of navigation, such station shall comply with the provisions of Regulation 17 of Chapter IV and shall be operated in accordance with Regulation 8 of Chapter IV.

Regulation 19

Use of the Automatic Pilot

(a) In areas of high traffic density, in conditions of restricted visibility and in all other hazardous navigational situations where the automatic pilot is used, it shall be possible to establish human control of the ship’s steering immediately.

(b) In circumstances as above, it shall be possible for the officer of the watch to have available without delay the services of a qualified helmsman who shall be ready at all times to take over steering control.

(c) The change-over from automatic to manual steering and vice versa shall be made by or under the supervision of a responsible officer.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

Regulation 20

Nautical Publications

All ships shall carry adequate and up-to-date charts, sailing directions, lists of lights, notices to mariners, tide tables and all other nautical publications necessary for the intended voyage.

Regulation 21

International Code of Signals

All ships which in accordance with the present convention are required to carry a radiotelegraph or a radiotelephone installation shall carry the International Code of Signals. This publication shall also be carried by any other ship which in the opinion of the Administration has a need to use it.

CHAPTER VI

CARRIAGE OF GRAIN

PART AGENERAL PROVISIONS

Regulation 1

Application

Unless expressly provided otherwise, this Chapter, including Parts A, B and C, applies to the carriage of grain in all ships to which the present Regulations apply.

Regulation 2

Definitions

(a) The term “grain” includes wheat, maize (corn), oats, rye, barley, rice, pulses, seeds and processed forms thereof, whose behaviour is similar to that of grain in its natural state.

(b) The term “filled compartment” refers to any compartment in which, after loading and trimming as required under Regulation 3, the bulk grain is at its highest possible level.

(c) The term “partly filled compartment” refers to any compartment wherein bulk grain is not loaded in the manner prescribed in paragraph (b) of this Regulation.

(d) The term “angle of flooding” (θ1) means an angle of heel at which openings in the hull, superstructures or deckhouses, which cannot be closed weathertight, immerse. In applying this definition, small openings through which progressive flooding cannot take place need not be considered as open.

Regulation 3

Trimming of Grain

All necessary and reasonable trimming shall be performed to level all free grain surfaces and to minimize the effect of grain shifting.

(a) In any “filled compartment”, the bulk grain shall be trimmed so as to fill all the spaces under the decks and hatch covers to the maximum extent possible.

(b) After loading, all free grain surfaces in “partly filled compartments” shall be level.

(c) The Administration issuing the document of authorization may, under Regulation 9 of this Chapter, grant dispensation from trimming in those cases where the underdeck void geometry resulting from free flowing grain into a compartment, which may be provided with feeding ducts, perforated decks or other similar means, is taken into account to its satisfaction when calculating the void depths.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

Regulation 4

Intact Stability Requirements

(a) The calculations required by this Regulation shall be based upon the stability information provided in accordance with Regulation 19 of Chapter II-1, of the present Convention, or with the requirements of the Administration issuing the document of authorization under Regulation 10 of this Chapter.

(b) The intact stability characteristics of any ship carrying bulk grain shall be shown to meet, throughout the voyage, at least the following criteria after taking into account in the manner described in Part B, the heeling moments due to grain shift:

(i) the angle of heel due to the shift of grain shall be not greater than 12 degrees except that an Administration giving authorization in accordance with Regulation 10 of this Chapter may require a lesser angle of heel if it considers that experience shows this to be necessary; *

(ii) in the statical stability diagram, the net or residual area between the heeling arm curve and the righting arm curve up to the angle of heel of maximum difference between the ordinates of the two curves, or 40 degrees or the “angle of flooding” (θf), whichever is the least, shall in all conditions of loading be not less than 0.075 metre-radians; and

(iii) the initial metacentric height, after correction for the free surface effects of liquids in tanks, shall be not less than 0.30 metre.

(c) Before loading bulk grain the master shall, if so required by the Contracting Government of the country of the port of loading, demonstrate the ability of the ship at all stages of any voyage to comply with the stability criteria required by paragraph (b) of this Regulation using the information approved and issued under Regulations 10 and 11 of this Chapter.

(d) After loading, the master shall ensure that the ship shall be upright before proceeding to sea.

Regulation 5

Longitudinal Divisions and Saucers

(a) In both “filled compartments” and “partly filled compartments”, longitudinal divisions may be provided as a device either to reduce the adverse heeling effect of grain shift or to limit the depth of cargo used for securing the grain surface. Such divisions shall be fitted grain-tight and constructed in accordance with the provisions of Section I of Part C of this Chapter.

(b) In a “filled compartment”, a division, if fitted to reduce the adverse effects of grain shift, shall:

(i) in a ‘tween-deck compartment extend from deck to deck; and

(ii) in a hold extend downwards from the underside of the deck or hatch covers as described in Section II of Part B of this Chapter.

Except in the case of linseed and other seeds having similar properties, a longitudinal division beneath a hatchway may be replaced by a saucer formed in the manner described in Section I of Part C of this Chapter.

(c) In a “partly filled compartment”, a division, if fitted, shall extend from one-eighth of the maximum breadth of the compartment above the level of the grain surface and to the same distance below the grain surface. When used to limit the depth of overstowing, the height of the centreline division shall be at least 0.6 metre above the level grain surface.

(d) Furthermore, the adverse heeling effects of grain shift may be reduced by tightly stowing the wings and ends of a compartment with bagged grain or other suitable cargo adequately restrained from shifting.

*For example, the permissible angle of heel might be limited to the angle of heel at which the edge of the weather deck would be immersed in still water.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

Regulation 6

Securing

(a) Unless account is taken of the adverse heeling effect due to grain shift in accordance with these Regulations, the surface of the bulk grain in any “partly filled compartment” shall be level and topped off with bagged grain tightly stowed and extending to a height of not less than one-sixteenth of the maximum breadth of the free grain surface or 1.2 metres, whichever is the greater. Instead of bagged grain, other suitable cargo exerting at least the same pressure may be used.

(b) The bagged grain or such other suitable cargo shall be supported in the manner described in Section II of Part C of this Chapter. Alternatively, the bulk grain surface may be secured by strapping or lashing as described in that Section.

Regulation 7

Feeders and Trunks

If feeders or trunks are fitted, proper account shall be taken of the effects thereof when calculating the heeling moments as described in Section III of Part B of this Chapter. The strength of the divisions forming the boundaries of such feeders shall conform with the provisions of Section I of Part C of this Chapter.

Regulation 8

Combination Arrangements

Lower holds and ‘tween-deck spaces in way thereof may be loaded as one compartment provided that, in calculating transverse heeling moments, proper account is taken of the flow of grain into the lower spaces.

Regulation 9

Application of Parts B and C

An Administration or a Contracting Government on behalf of an Administration may authorize departure from the assumptions contained in Parts B and C of this Chapter in those cases where it considers this to be justified having regard to the provisions for loading or the structural arrangements, provided the stability criteria in paragraph (b) of Regulation 4 of this Chapter are met. Where such authorization is granted under this Regulation, particulars shall be included in the document of authorization or grain loading data.

Regulation 10

Authorization

(a) A document of authorization shall be issued for every ship loaded in accordance with the Regulations of this Chapter either by the Administration or an organization recognized by it or by a Contracting Government on behalf of the Administration. It shall be accepted as evidence that the ship is capable of complying with the requirements of these Regulations.

(b) The document shall accompany and refer to the grain loading stability booklet provided to enable the master to meet the requirements of paragraph (c) of Regulation 4 of this Chapter. This booklet shall meet the requirements of Regulation 11 of this Chapter.

(c) Such a document, grain loading stability data and associated plans may be drawn up in the official language or languages of the issuing country. If the language used is neither English nor French, the text shall include a translation into one of these languages.

(d) A copy of such a document, grain loading stability data and associated plans shall be placed on board in order that the master, if so required, shall produce them for the inspection of the Contracting Government of the country of the port of loading.

(e) A ship without such a document of authorization shall not load grain until the master demonstrates to the satisfaction of the Administration or the Contracting Government of the port of loading on behalf of the Administration that the ship in its proposed loaded condition will comply with the requirements of these Regulations.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

Regulation 11

Grain Loading Information

This information shall be sufficient to allow the master to determine in all reasonable loading conditions the heeling moments due to grain shift calculated in accordance with Part B of this Chapter. It shall include the following:

(a) Information which shall be approved by the Administration or by a Contracting Government on behalf of the Administration:

(i) curves or tables of grain heeling moments for every compartment, filled or partly filled, or combination thereof, including the effects of temporary fittings;

(ii) tables of maximum permissible heeling moments or other information sufficient to allow the master to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of paragraph (c) of Regulation 4 of this Chapter;

(iii) details of the scantlings of any temporary fittings and where applicable the provisions necessary to meet the requirements of Section 1(E) of Part C of this Chapter;

(iv) typical loaded service departure and arrival conditions and where necessary, intermediate worst service conditions;

(v) a worked example for the guidance of the master;

(vi) loading instructions in the form of notes summarizing the requirements of this Chapter.

(b) Information which shall be acceptable to the Administration or to a Contracting Government on behalf of the Administration:

(i) ship’s particulars;

(ii) lightship displacement and the vertical distance from the intersection of the moulded base line and midship section to the centre of gravity (KG);

(iii) table of free surface corrections;

(iv) capacities and centres of gravity.

Regulation 12

Equivalents

Where an equivalent accepted by the Administration in accordance with Regulation 5 of Chapter I of this Convention is applied, particulars shall be included in the document of authorization or grain loading data.

Regulation 13

Exemptions for Certain Voyages

The Administration, or a Contracting Government on behalf of the Administration may, if it considers that the sheltered nature and conditions of the voyage are such as to render the application of any of the requirements of Regulations 3 to 12 of this Chapter unreasonable or unnecessary, exempt from those particular requirements individual ships or classes of ships.

 

PART BCALCULATION OF ASSUMED HEELING MOMENTS

 

SECTION I–DESCRIPTION OF THE ASSUMED VOIDS AND METHOD OF CALCULATING INTACT STABILITY

 

SECTION II–ASSUMED VOLUMETRIC HEELING MOMENT OF A FILLED COMPARTMENT

 

SECTION III–ASSUMED VOLUMETRIC HEELING MOMENT OF FEEDERS AND TRUNKS


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

SECTION IV–ASSUMED VOLUMETRIC HEELING MOMENT OF PARTLY FILLED COMPARTMENTS

SECTION V–ALTERNATIVE LOADING ARRANGEMENTS FOR EXISTING SHIPS

SECTION I–DESCRIPTION OF THE ASSUMED VOIDS AND METHOD OF CALCULATING INTACT STABILITY

(A) GENERAL

(a) For the purpose of calculating the adverse heeling moment due to a shift of cargo surface in ships carrying bulk grain it shall be assumed that:

(i) In “filled compartments” which have been trimmed in accordance with Regulation 3 of this Chapter a void exists under all boundary surfaces having an inclination to the horizontal less than 30 degrees and that the void is parallel to the boundary surface having an average depth calculated according to the formula:

Vd = Vd1 + 0.75(d 600) mm

Where:

Vd = Average void depth in mm;

Vd1 = Standard void depth from Table I below;

d = Actual girder depth in mm.

In no case shall Vd be assumed to be less than 100 mm.

TABLE I

Distance from hatchend

or hatchside to

boundary of

compartment

Standard void
depth Vd1

metres

Mm

0.5

570

1.0

530

1.5

500

2.0

480

2.5

450

3.0

440

3.5

430

4.0

430

4.5

430

5.0

430

5.5

450

6.0

470

6.5

490

7.0

520

7.5

550

8.0

590

Notes on Table I:

For distances greater than 8.0 metres the standard void depth Vd1 shall be linearly extrapolated at 80 mm increase for each 1.0 metre increase in distance. Where there is a difference in depth between the hatchside girder or its continuation and the hatchend beam the greater depth shall be used except that:


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

(1) When the hatchside girder or its continuation is shallower than the hatchend beam the voids abreast the hatchway may be calculated using the lesser depth; and

(2) when the hatchend beam is shallower than the hatchside girder or its continuation the voids fore and aft of the hatchway inboard of the continuation of the hatchside girder may be calculated using the lesser depth;

(3) where there is a raised deck clear of a hatchway the average void depth measured from the underside of the raised deck shall be calculated using the standard void depth in association with a girder depth of the hatchend beam plus the height of the raised deck.

(ii) In “filled compartments” which are not trimmed in accordance with Regulation 3 of this Chapter and where the boundary surface has an inclination to the horizontal which is less than 30 degrees, the cargo surface has an inclination of 30 degrees to the horizontal after loading.

(iii) Within filled hatchways and in addition to any open void within the hatch cover there is a void of average depth of 150 mm measured down to the grain surface from the lowest part of the hatch cover or the top of the hatchside coaming, whichever is the lower.

(b) The description of the pattern of grain surface behaviour to be assumed in “partly filled compartments” is shown in Section IV of this Part.

(c) For the purpose of demonstrating compliance with the stability criteria in paragraph (b) of Regulation 4 of this Chapter (see Figure 1), the ship’s stability calculations shall be normally based upon the assumption that the centre of gravity of cargo in a “filled compartment” is at the volumetric centre of the whole cargo space. In those cases where the Administration authorizes account to be taken of the effect of assumed underdeck voids on the vertical position of the centre of gravity of the cargo in “filled compartments” it will be necessary to compensate for the adverse effect of the vertical shift of grain surfaces by increasing the assumed heeling moment due to the transverse shift of grain as follows:

total heeling moment = 1.06 × calculated transverse heeling moment.

In all cases the weight of cargo in a “filled compartment” shall be the volume of the whole cargo space divided by the stowage factor.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

Figure 1

Notes on Figure 1:

(1) Where:

λ0 =

Assumed Volumetric Heeling Moment due to Transverse Shift;

Stowage Factor x Displacement

λ40 =

0.8 × λ0;

Stowage factor = Volume per unit weight of grain cargo;

Displacement = Weight of ship, fuel, fresh water, stores etc. and cargo.

(2) The righting arm curve shall be derived from cross-curves which are sufficient in number to accurately define the curve for the purpose of these requirements and shall include cross-curves at 12 degrees and 40 degrees.

(d) In “partly filled compartments” the adverse effect of the vertical shift of grain surfaces shall be taken into account as follows:

total heeling moment = 1.12 x calculated transverse heeling moment.

(e) Any other equally effective method may be adopted to make the compensation required in paragraphs (c) and (d) above.

SECTION II–ASSUMED VOLUMETRIC HEELING MOMENT OF A FILLED COMPARTMENT

(A) GENERAL

(a) The pattern of grain surface movement relates to a transverse section across the portion of the compartment being considered and the resultant heeling moment should be multiplied by the length to obtain the total moment for that portion.

(b) The assumed transverse heeling moment due to grain shifting is a consequence of final changes of shape and position of voids after grain has moved from the high side to the low side.

(c) The resulting grain surface after shifting shall be assumed to be at 15 degrees to the horizontal.

(d) In calculating the maximum void area that can be formed against a longitudinal structural member, the effects of any horizontal surfaces, e.g. flanges or face bars, shall be ignored.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

(e) The total areas of the initial and final voids shall be equal.

(f) A discontinuous longitudinal division shall be considered effective over its full length.

(B) ASSUMPTIONS

In the following paragraphs it is assumed that the total heeling moment for a compartment is obtained by adding the results of separate considerations of the following portions:

(a) Before and abaft hatchways:

(i) If a compartment has two or more main hatchways through which loading may take place the depth of the underdeck void for the portion(s) between such hatchways shall be determined using the fore and aft distance to the midpoint between the hatchways.

(ii) After the assumed shift of grain the final void pattern shall be as shown in Figure 2 below:

Figure 2

Notes on Figure 2:

(1) If the maximum void area which can be formed against the girder at B is less than the initial area of the void under AB, i.e. AB x Vd, the excess area shall be assumed to transfer to the final void on the high side.

(2) If the longitudinal division at C is one which has been provided in accordance with sub-paragraph (b) (ii) of Regulation 5 of this Chapter it shall extend to at least 0.6 metre below D or E whichever gives the greater depth.

(b) In and abreast hatchways:

After the assumed shift of grain the final void pattern shall be as shown in the following Figure 3 or Figure 4.

Figure 3

Notes on Figure 3:

(1) AB Any area in excess of that which can be formed against the girder at B shall transfer to the final void area in the hatchway.

(2) CD Any area in excess of that which can be formed against the girder at E shall transfer to the final void area on the high side.

SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

Figure 4

Notes on Figure 4:

(1) If the centreline division is one which has been provided in accordance with sub-paragraph (b) (ii) of Regulation 5 of this Chapter it shall extend to at least 0.6 metre below H or J whichever gives the greater depth.

(2) The excess void area from AB shall transfer to the low side half of the hatchway in which two separate final void areas will be formed viz. one against the centreline division and the other against the hatchside coaming and girder on the high side.

(3) If a bagged saucer or bulk bundle is formed in a hatchway it shall be assumed, for the purpose of calculating transverse heeling moment, that such a device is at least equivalent to the centreline division.

(C) COMPARTMENTS LOADED IN COMBINATION

The following paragraphs describe the pattern of void behaviour which shall be assumed when compartments are loaded in combination:

(a) Without effective centreline divisions:

(i) Under the upper deck—as for the single deck arrangement described in Section II (B) of this Part.

(ii) Under the second deck—the area of void available for transfer from the low side, i.e. original void area less area against the hatchside girder, shall be assumed to transfer as follows:

one half to the upper deck hatchway and one quarter each to the high side under the upper and second deck.

(iii) Under the third and lower decks—the void areas available for transfer from the low side of each of these decks shall be assumed to transfer in equal quantities to all the voids under the decks on the high side and the void in the upper deck hatchway.

(b) With effective centreline divisions which extend into the upper deck hatchway:

(i) At all deck levels abreast the division the void areas available for transfer from the low side shall be assumed to transfer to the void under the low side half of the upper deck hatchway.

(ii) At the deck level immediately below the bottom of the division the void area available for transfer from the low side shall be assumed to transfer as follows:

one half to the void under the low side half of the upper deck hatchway and the remainder in equal quantities to the voids under the decks on the high side.

(iii) At deck levels lower than those described in sub-paragraphs (i) and (ii) of this paragraph the void area available for transfer from the low side of each of those decks shall be assumed to transfer in equal quantities to the voids in each of the two halves of the upper deck hatchway on each side of the division and the voids under the decks on the high side.

(c) With effective centreline divisions which do not extend into the upper deck hatchway:

Since no horizontal transfer of voids may be assumed to take place at the same deck level as the division the void area available for transfer from the low side at this level shall be assumed to transfer above the division to voids on the high sides in accordance with the principles of paragraphs (a) and (b) above.

SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

SECTION III–ASSUMED VOLUMETRIC HEELING MOMENT OF FEEDERS AND TRUNKS

(A) SUITABLY PLACED WING FEEDERS (See Figure 5)

It may be assumed that under the influence of ship motion underdeck voids will be substantially filled by the flow of grain from a pair of longitudinal feeders provided that:

(a) the feeders extend for the full length of the deck and that the perforations therein are adequately spaced;

(b) the volume of each feeder is equal to the volume of the underdeck void outboard of the hatchside girder and its continuation.

Figure 5

(B) TRUNKS SITUATED OVER MAIN HATCHWAYS

After the assumed shift of grain the final void pattern shall be as shown in Figure 6.

Figure 6

Note on Figure 6:

If the wing spaces in way of the trunk cannot be properly trimmed in accordance with Regulation 3 of this Chapter it shall be assumed that a 25 degree surface shift takes place.

SECTION IV–ASSUMED VOLUMETRIC HEELING MOMENT OF PARTLY FILLED COMPARTMENTS

(A) GENERAL

When the free surface of the bulk grain has not been secured in accordance with Regulation 6 of this Chapter it shall be assumed that the grain surface after shifting shall be at 25 degrees to the horizontal.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

(B) DISCONTINUOUS LONGITUDINAL DIVISIONS

In a compartment in which the longitudinal divisions are not continuous between the transverse boundaries, the length over which any such divisions are effective as devices to prevent full width shifts of grain surfaces shall be taken to be the actual length of the portion of the division under consideration less two-sevenths of the greater of the transverse distances between the division and its adjacent division or ship’s side.

This correction does not apply in the lower compartments of any combination loading in which the upper compartment is either a “filled compartment” or a “partly filled compartment”.

SECTION VALTERNATIVE LOADING ARRANGEMENTS FOR EXISTING
SHIPS

(A) GENERAL

A ship loaded in accordance with either Sub-Section (B) or Sub-Section (C) below shall be considered to have intact stability characteristics at least equivalent to the requirements of paragraph (b) of Regulation 4 of this Chapter. Documents of authorization permitting such loadings shall be accepted under the provisions of paragraph (e) of Regulation 10 of this Chapter.

For the purpose of this Part, the term “Existing Ship” means a ship, the keel of which is laid before the date of coming into force of this Chapter.

(B) STOWAGE OF SPECIALLY SUITABLE SHIPS

(a) Notwithstanding anything contained in Part B of this Chapter, bulk grain may be carried without regard to the requirements specified therein in ships which are constructed with two or more vertical or sloping grain-tight longitudinal divisions suitably disposed to limit the effect of any transverse shift of grain under the following conditions:

(i) as many holds and compartments as possible shall be full and trimmed full;

(ii) for any specified arrangement of stowage the ship will not list to an angle greater than 5 degrees at any stage of the voyage where:.

(1) in holds or compartments which have been trimmed full the grain surface settled 2 per cent by volume from the original surface and shifts to an angle of 12 degrees with that surface under all boundaries of these holds and compartments which have an inclination of less than 30 degrees to the horizontal;

(2) in “partly filled compartments or holds” free grain surfaces settle and shift as in sub-paragraph (ii) (1) of this paragraph or to such larger angle as may be deemed necessary by the Administration, or by a Contracting Government on behalf of the Administration, and grain surfaces if overstowed in accordance with Regulation 5 of this Chapter shift to an angle of 8 degrees with the original levelled surfaces. For the purpose of sub-paragraph (ii) of this paragraph shifting boards, if fitted, will be considered to limit the transverse shift of the surface of the grain;

(iii) the master is provided with a grain loading plan covering the stowage arrangements to be adopted and a stability booklet, both approved by the Administration, or by a Contracting Government on behalf of the Administration, showing the stability conditions upon which the calculations given in sub-paragraph (ii) of this paragraph are based.

(b) The Administration, or a Contracting Government on behalf of the Administration, shall prescribe the precautions to be taken against shifting in all other conditions of loading of ships designed in accordance with paragraph (B) (a) of this Section which meet the requirements of sub-paragraphs (ii) and (iii) of that paragraph.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

(C) SHIPS WITHOUT DOCUMENTS OF AUTHORIZATION

A ship not having on board documents of authorization issued in accordance with Regulations 4 and 10 of this Chapter may be permitted to load bulk grain under the requirements of sub-section (B) of this Section or provided that:

(a) All “filled compartments” shall be fitted with centreline divisions extending for the full length of such compartments which extend downwards from the underside of the deck or hatch covers to a distance below the deck line of at least one-eighth of the maximum breadth of the compartment or 2.4 metres, whichever is the greater except that saucers constructed in accordance with Section II of Part C may be accepted in lieu of a centreline division in and beneath a hatchway.

(b) All hatches to “filled compartments” shall be closed and covers secured in place.

(c) All free grain surfaces in “partly filled compartments” shall be trimmed level and secured in accordance with Section II of Part C.

(d) Throughout the voyage the metacentric height after correction for the free surface effects of liquids in tanks shall be 0.3 metre or that given by the following formula, whichever is greater:

 

 

Where:

L =

total combined length of all full compartments;

B =

moulded breadth of vessel;

SF =

stowage factor;

Vd =

calculated average void depth as per paragraph (a) (i) of Section I (A) of this Part;

Δ =

displacement.

PART C–GRAIN FITTINGS AND SECURING

SECTION ISTRENGTH OF GRAIN FITTINGS

(A) General (including working stresses)

(B) Divisions loaded on both sides

(C) Divisions loaded on one side only

(D) Saucers

(E) Bundling of bulk

(F) Securing hatch covers of filled compartments

SECTION II–SECURING OF PARTLY FILLED COMPARTMENTS

(A) Strapping or lashing

(B) Overstowing arrangements

(C) Bagged grain

SECTION ISTRENGTH OF GRAIN FITTINGS

(A) GENERAL

(a) Timber

All timber used for grain fittings shall be of good sound quality and of a type and grade which has been proved to be satisfactory for this purpose. The actual finished dimensions of the timber shall be in accordance with the dimensions hereinafter specified in this Part. Plywood of an exterior type bonded with waterproof glue and fitted so that the direction of the grain in the face plies is perpendicular to the supporting uprights or binder may be used provided that its strength is equivalent to that of solid timber of the appropriate scantlings.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

(b) Working Stresses

When calculating the dimensions of divisions loaded on one side, using the Tables in paragraphs (a) and (b) of Sub-Section (C) of this Section, the following working stresses should be adopted:

For divisions of steel..................

2000 kg per square cm

For divisions of wood..................

160 kg per square cm

(c) Other Materials

Materials other than wood or steel may be approved for such divisions provided that proper regard has been paid to their mechanical properties.

(d) Uprights

(i) Unless means are provided to prevent the ends of uprights being dislodged from their sockets, the depth of housing at each end of each upright shall be not less than 75 mm. If an upright is not secured at the top, the uppermost shore or stay shall be fitted as near thereto as is practicable.

(ii) The arrangements provided for inserting shifting boards by removing a part of the cross-section of an upright shall be such that the local level of stresses is not unduly high.

(iii) The maximum bending moment imposed upon an upright supporting a division loaded on one side shall normally be calculated assuming that the ends of the uprights are freely supported. However, if an Administration is satisfied that any degree of fixity assumed will be achieved in practice, account may be taken of any reduction in the maximum bending moment arising from any degree of fixity provided at the ends of the upright.

(e) Composite Section

Where uprights, binders or any other strength members are formed by two separate sections, one fitted on each side of a division and inter-connected by through bolts at adequate spacing, the effective section modules shall be taken as the sum of the two moduli of the separate sections.

(f) Partial Division

Where divisions do not extend to the full depth of the hold such divisions and their uprights shall be supported or stayed so as to be as efficient as those which do extend to the full depth of the hold.

(B) DIVISIONS LOADED ON BOTH SIDES

(a) Shifting Boards

(i) Shifting boards shall have a thickness of not less than 50 mm and shall be fitted grain-tight and where necessary supported by uprights.

(ii) The maximum unsupported span for shifting boards of various thicknesses shall be as follows:

Thickness

Maximum Unsupported Span

50 mm.................

2.5 metres

60 mm.................

3.0 metres

70 mm.................

3.5 metres

80 mm.................

4.0 metres

If thickness greater than these are provided the maximum unsupported span will vary directly with the increase in thickness.

(iii) the ends of all shifting boards shall be securely housed with 75 mm minimum bearing length.

SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

(b) Other Materials

Divisions formed by using materials other than wood shall have a strength equivalent to the shifting boards required in paragraph (a) of this Sub-Section.

(c) Uprights

(i) Steel uprights used to support divisions loaded on both sides shall have a section modulus given by

W = a × W1

Where:

W = section modulus in cm3;

a = horizontal span between uprights in metres.

The section modulus per metre span W, shall be not less than that given by the formula:

W1 = 14.8 (h1 1.2) cm3 per metre;

Where:

h1 is the vertical unsupported span in metres and shall be taken as the maximum value of the distance between any two adjacent stays or between the stay or either end of the upright. Where this distance is less than 2.4 metres the respective modulus shall be calculated as if the actual value was 2.4 metres.

(ii) The moduli of wood uprights shall be determined by multiplying by 12.5 the corresponding moduli for steel uprights. If other materials are used their moduli shall be at least that required for steel increased in proportion to the ratio of the permissible stresses for steel to that of the material used. In such cases attention shall be paid also to the relative rigidity of each upright to ensure that the deflection is not excessive.

(iii) The horizontal distance between uprights shall be such that the unsupported spans of the shifting boards do not exceed the maximum span specified in sub-paragraph (ii) of paragraph (a) of this Sub-Section.

(d) Shores

(i) Wood shores, when used, shall be in a single piece and shall be securely fixed at each end and heeled against the permanent structure of the ship except that they shall not bear directly against the side plating of the ship.

(ii) Subject to the provisions of sub-paragraphs (iii) and (iv) below, the minimum size of wood shores shall be as follows:

Length of Shore in metres

Rectangular

Section

Diameter of

Circular Section

 

mm

mm

Not exceeding 3 m…………………

150 × 100

140

Over 3 m but not exceeding 5 m…...

150 × 150

165

Over 5 m but not exceeding 6 m…...

150 × 150

180

Over 6 m but not exceeding 7 m…...

200 × 150

190

Over 7 m but not exceeding 8 m…...

200 × 150

200

Exceeding 8 m……………………..

200 × 150

215

Shores of 7 metres or more in length shall be securely bridged at approximately mid-length.

(iii) When the horizontal distance between the uprights differs significantly from 4 metres, the moments of inertia of the shores may be changed in direct proportion.

(iv) Where the angle of the shore to the horizontal exceeds 10 degrees the next larger shore to that required by sub-paragraph (ii) of this paragraph shall be fitted provided that in no case shall the angle between any shore and the horizontal exceed 45 degrees.

(e) Stays

Where stays are used to support divisions loaded on both sides, they shall be fitted horizontally or as near thereto as practicable, well secured at each end and formed of steel wire rope. The sizes of the wire rope shall be determined assuming that the divisions and upright which the stay supports are uniformly loaded at 500 kg/m2. The working load so assumed in the stay shall not exceed one-third of its breaking load.

SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

(C) DIVISIONS LOADED ON ONE SIDE ONLY

(a) Longitudinal Divisions

The load in kg per metre length of the division shall be taken to be as follows:

TABLE I

B (m)

h

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

10

(m)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1.5........

850

900

1,010

1,225

1,500

1,770

2,060

2,645

2.0........

1,390

1,505

1,710

1,985

2,295

2,605

2,930

3,590

2.5........

1,985

2,160

2,430

2,740

3,090

3,435

3,800

4,535

3.0........

2,615

2,845

3,150

3,500

3,885

4,270

4,670

5,480

3.5........

3,245

3,525

3,870

4,255

4,680

5,100

5,540

6,425

4.0........

3,890

4,210

4,590

5,015

5,475

5,935

6,410

7,370

4.5........

4,535

4,890

5,310

5,770

6,270

6,765

7,280

8,315

5.0........

5,185

5,570

6,030

6,530

7,065

7,600

8,150

9,260

6.0........

6,475

6,935

7,470

8,045

8,655

9,265

9,890

11,150

7.0........

7,765

8,300

8,910

9,560

10,245

10,930

11,630

13,040

8.0........

9,055

9,665

10,350

11,075

11,835

12,595

13,370

14,930

9.0........

10,345

11,030

11,790

12,590

13,425

14,260

15,110

16,820

10.0........

11,635

12,395

13,230

14,105

15,015

15,925

16,850

18,710

h = height of grain in metres from the bottom of the division2

B = transverse extent of the bulk grain in metres

For other values of h or B the loads shall be determined by linear interpolation or extrapolation as necessary.

(b) Transverse Divisions

The load in kg per metre length of the divisions shall be taken to be as follows:

TABLE II1

L(m)

h

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

10

12

14

16

(m)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1.5

670

690

730

780

835

890

935

1,000

1,040

1,050

1,050

2.0

1,040

1,100

1,170

1,245

1,325

1,400

1,470

1,575

1,640

1,660

1,660

2.5

1,460

1,565

1,675

1,780

1,880

1,980

2,075

2,210

2,285

2,305

2,305

3.0

1,925

2,065

2,205

2,340

2,470

2,590

2,695

2,845

2,925

2,950

2,950

3.5

2,425

2,605

2,770

2,930

3,075

3,205

3,320

3,480

3,570

3,595

3,595

4.0

2,950

3,160

3,355

3,535

3,690

3,830

3,950

4,120

4,210

4,235

4,240

4.5

3,495

3,725

3,940

4,130

4,295

4,440

4,565

4,750

4,850

4,880

4,885

5.0

4,050

4,305

4,535

4,735

4,910

5,060

5,190

5,385

5,490

5,525

5,530

6.0

5,175

5,465

5,720

5,945

6,135

6,300

6,445

6,655

6,775

6,815

6,825

7.0

6,300

6,620

6,905

7,150

7,365

7,445

7,700

7,930

8,055

8,105

8,115

8.0

7,425

7,780

8,090

8,360

8,590

8,685

8,950

9,200

9,340

9,395

9,410

9.0

8,550

8,935

9,275

9,565

9,820

9,930

10,205

10,475

10,620

10,685

10,705

10.0

9,680

10,095

10,460

10,770

11,045

11,270

11,460

11,745

11,905

11,975

11,997

h = height of grain in metres from the bottom of the division2

L = longitudinal extent of the bulk grain in metres

For other values of h or L the loads shall be determined by linear interpolation or extrapolation as necessary.

1 For the purpose of converting the above loads into British units (ton/ft) 1 kg per metre length shall be taken to be equivalent to 0.0003 ton per foot length.

2 Where the distance from a division to a feeder or hatchway is 1 metre or less, the height—h—shall be taken to the level of the grain within that hatchway or feeder. In all cases the height shall be taken to the overhead deck in way of the division.

SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

(c) Vertical Distribution of the Loads

The total load per unit length of divisions shown in the Tables I and II above may, if considered necessary, be assumed to have a trapezoidal distribution with height. In such cases, the reaction loads at the upper and lower ends of a vertical member or upright are not equal. The reaction loads at the upper end expressed as percentages of the total load supported by the vertical member or upright shall be taken to be those shown in Tables III and IV below.

TABLE III

LONGITUDINAL DIVISIONS LOADED ON ONE SIDE ONLY

Bearing Reaction at the Upper End of Upright as Percentage of Load (Table I)

B (m)

h

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

10

(m)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1.5………....

43.3

45.1

45.9

46.2

46.2

46.2

46.2

46.2

2……………

44.5

46.7

47.6

47.8

47.8

47.8

47.8

47.8

2.5………….

45.4

47.6

48.6

48.8

48.8

48.8

48.8

48.8

3……………

46.0

48.3

49.2

49.4

49.4

49.4

49.4

49.4

3.5………….

46.5

48.8

49.7

49.8

49.8

49.8

49.8

49.8

4……………

47.0

49.1

49.9

50.1

50.1

50.1

50.1

50.1

4.5………….

47.4

49.4

50.1

50.2

50.2

50.2

50.2

50.2

5……………

47.7

49.4

50.1

50.2

50.2

50.2

50.2

50.2

6……………

47.9

49.5

50.1

50.2

50.2

50.2

50.2

50.2

7……………

47.9

49.5

50.1

50.2

50.2

50.2

50.2

50.2

8……………

47.9

49.5

50.1

50.2

50.2

50.2

50.2

50.2

9……………

47.9

49.5

50.1

50.2

50.2

50.2

50.2

50.2

10……………

47.9

49.5

50.1

50.2

50.2

50.2

50.2

50.2

B = transverse extent of the bulk grain in metres

For other values of h or B the reaction loads shall be determined by linear interpolation or extrapolation as necessary.

TABLE IV

TRANSVERSE DIVISIONS LOADED ON ONE SIDE ONLY

Bearing Reaction at the Upper End of Upright as Percentage of Load (Table II)

L (m)

h

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

10

12

14

16

(m)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1.5

37.3

38.7

39.7

40.6

41.4

42.1

42.6

43.6

44.3

44.8

45.0

2

39.6

40.6

41.4

42.1

42.7

43.1

43.6

44.3

44.7

45.0

45.2

2.5

41.0

41.8

42.5

43.0

43.5

43.8

44.2

44.7

45.0

45.2

45.2

3

42.1

42.8

43.3

43.8

44.2

44.5

44.7

45.0

45.2

45.3

45.3

3.5

42.9

43.5

43.9

44.3

44.6

44.8

45.0

45.2

45.3

45.3

45.3

4

43.5

44.0

44.4

44.7

44.9

45.0

45.2

45.4

45.4

45.4

45.4

5

43.9

44.3

44.6

44.8

45.0

45.2

45.3

45.5

45.5

45.5

45.5

6

44.2

44.5

44.8

45.0

45.2

45.3

45.4

45.6

45.6

45.6

45.6

7

44.3

44.6

44.9

45.1

45.3

45.4

45.5

45.6

45.6

45.6

45.6

8

44.3

44.6

44.9

45.1

45.3

45.4

45.5

45.6

45.6

45.6

45.6

9

44.3

44.6

44.9

45.1

45.3

45.4

45.5

45.6

45.6

45.6

45.6

10

44.3

44.6

44.9

45.1

45.3

45.4

45.5

45.6

45.6

45.6

45.6

L = longitudinal extent of the bulk grain in metres

For other values of h or L the reaction loads shall be determined by linear interpolation or extrapolation as necessary.

SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

The strength of the end connexions of such vertical members or uprights may be calculated on the basis of the maximum load likely to be imposed at either end. These loads are as follows:

Longitudinal Divisions

 

Maximum load at the top..........

50% of the appropriate total load from Table I

Maximum load at the bottom.......

55% of the appropriate total load from Table I

Transverse Divisions

 

Maximum load at the top..........

45% of the appropriate total load from Table II

Maximum load at the bottom.......

60% of the appropriate total load from Table II

The thickness of horizontal wooden boards may also be determined having regard to the vertical distribution of the loading represented by Tables III and IV above and in such cases

Where:

t = thickness of board in mm;

a = horizontal span of the board i.e. distance between uprights in metres;

h = head of grain to the bottom of the division in metres;

p = total load per unit length derived from Table I or II in kilogrammes;

k = factor dependent upon vertical distribution of the loading.

When the vertical distribution of the loading is assumed to be uniform, i.e. rectangular, k shall be taken as equal to 1.0. For a trapezoidal distribution

k = 1.0 + 0.06(50R)

Where:

R is the upper end bearing reaction taken from Table III or IV.

(d) Stays or Shores

The sizes of stays and shores shall be so determined that the loads derived from Tables I and II in the preceding paragraphs (a) and (b) shall not exceed one-third of the breaking loads.

(D) SAUCERS

When a saucer is used to reduce the heeling moments in a “filled compartment”, its depth, measured from the bottom of the saucer to the deck line, shall be as follows:

For ships with a moulded breadth of up to 9.1 metres, not less than 1.2 metres.

For ships with a moulded breadth of 18.3 metres or more, not less than 1.8 metres.

For ships with a moulded breadth between 9.1 metres and 18.3 metres, the minimum depth of the saucer shall be calculated by interpolation.

The top (mouth) of the saucer shall be formed by the underdeck structure in the way of the hatchway, i.e. hatchside girders or coamings and hatchend beams. The saucer and hatchway above shall be completely filled with bagged grain or other suitable cargo laid down on a separation cloth or its equivalent and stowed tightly against adjacent structures and the portable hatchway beams if the latter are in place.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

(E) BUNDLING OF BULK

As an alternative to filling the saucer with bagged grain or other suitable cargo a bundle of bulk grain may be used provided that:

(a) The saucer is lined with a material acceptable to the Administration having a tensile strength of not less than 274 kg per 5 cm strip and which is provided with suitable means for securing at the top.

(b) As an alternative to paragraph (a) above a material acceptable to the Administration having a tensile strength of not less than 137 kg per 5 cm strip may be used if the saucer is constructed as follows:

Athwartship lashings acceptable to the Administration shall be placed inside the saucer formed in the bulk grain at intervals of not more than 2.4 metres. These lashings shall be of sufficient length to permit being drawn up tight and secured at the top of the saucer.

Dunnage not less than 25 mm in thickness or other suitable material of equal strength and between 150 to 300 mm in width shall be placed for and aft over these lashings to prevent the cutting or chafing of the material which shall be placed thereon to line the saucer.

(c) The saucer shall be filled with bulk grain and secured at the top except that when using material approved under paragraph (b) above further dunnage shall be laid on top after lapping the material before the saucer is secured by setting up the lashings.

(d) If more than one sheet of material is used to line the saucer they shall be joined at the bottom either by sewing or a double lap.

(e) The top of the saucer shall be coincidental with the bottom of the beams when these are in place and suitable general cargo or bulk grain may be placed between the beams on top of the saucer.

(F) SECURING HATCH COVERS OF FILLED COMPARTMENTS

If there is no bulk grain or other cargo above a “filled compartment” the hatch covers shall be secured in an approved manner having regard to the weight and permanent arrangements provided for securing such covers.

The documents of authorization issued under Regulation 10 of this Chapter shall include reference to the manner of securing considered necessary by the Administration issuing such documents.

SECTION II-SECURING OF PARTLY FILLED COMPARTMENTS

(A) STRAPPING OR LASHING

(a) When, in order to eliminate heeling moments in “partly filled compartments”, strapping or lashing is utilized, the securing shall be accomplished as follows:

(i) The grain shall be trimmed and levelled to the extent that it is very slightly crowned and covered with burlap separation cloths, tarpaulins or the equivalent.

(ii) The separation cloths and/or tarpaulins shall overlap at least 1.8 metres.

(iii) Two solid floors of rough 25 mm by 150 mm to 300 mm lumber shall be laid with the top floor running longitudinally and nailed to an athwartships bottom floor. Alternatively, one solid floor of 50 mm lumber, running longitudinally and nailed over the top of a 50 mm bottom bearer not less than 150 mm wide, may be used. The bottom bearers shall extend the full breadth of the compartment and shall be spaced not more than 2.4 metres apart. Arrangements utilizing other materials and deemed by an Administration to be equivalent to the foregoing may be accepted.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

(iv) Steel wire rope (19 mm diameter or equivalent), doubled steel strapping (50 mm × 1.3 mm and having a breaking load of at least 5,000 kg), or chain of equivalent strength, each of which shall be set tight by means of a 32 mm turnbuckle, may be used for lashings. A winch tightener, used in conjunction with a locking arm, may be substituted for the 32 mm turnbuckle when steel strapping is used, provided suitable wrenches are available for setting up as necessary. When steel strapping is used, not less than three crimp seals shall be used for securing the ends. When wire is used, not less than four clips shall be used for forming eyes in the lashings.

(v) Prior to the completion of loading the lashing shall be positively attached to the framing at a point approximately 450 mm below the anticipated final grain surface by means of either a 25 mm shackle or beam clamp of equivalent strength.

(vi) The lashings shall be spaced not more than 2.4 metres apart and each shall be supported by a bearer nailed over the top of the fore and aft floor. This bearer shall consist of not less than 25 mm by 150 mm lumber or its equivalent and shall extend the full breadth of the compartment.

(vii) During the voyage the strapping shall be regularly inspected and set up where necessary.

(B) OVERSTOWING ARRANGEMENTS

Where bagged grain or other suitable cargo is utilized for the purpose of securing “partly filled compartments”, the free grain surface shall be covered with a separation cloth or equivalent or by a suitable platform. Such platforms shall consist of bearers spaced not more than 1.2 metres apart and 25 mm boards laid thereon spaced not more than 100 mm apart. Platforms may be constructed of other materials provided they are deemed by an Administration to be equivalent.

(C) BAGGED GRAIN

Bagged grain shall be carried in sound bags which shall be well filled and securely closed.

CHAPTER VII

CARRIAGE OF DANGEROUS GOODS

Regulation 1

Application

(a) Unless expressly provided otherwise, this Chapter applies to the carriage of dangerous goods in all ships to which the present Regulations apply.

(b) The provisions of this Chapter do not apply to ship’s stores and equipment or to particular cargoes carried in ships specially built or converted as a whole for that purpose, such as tankers.

(c) The carriage of dangerous goods is prohibited except in accordance with the provisions of this Chapter.

(d) To supplement the provisions of this Chapter each Contracting Government shall issue, or cause to be issued, detailed instructions on the safe packing and stowage of specific dangerous goods or categories of dangerous goods which shall include any precautions necessary in their relation to other cargo.

Regulation 2

Classification

Dangerous goods shall be divided into the following classes:

Class 1–Explosives.

Class 2–Gases: compressed, liquefied or dissolved under pressure.

Class 3–Inflammable* liquids.

Class 4.1–Inflammable solids.

Class 4.2–Inflammable solids, or substances, liable to spontaneous combustion.

* “Inflammable” has the same meaning as “flammable”.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

Class 4.3Inflammable solids, or substances, which in contact with water emit inflammable gases.

Class 5.1–Oxidizing substances.

Class 5.2–Organic peroxides.

Class 6.1–Poisonous (toxic) substances.

Class 6.2–Infectious substances.

Class 7–Radioactive substances.

Class 8–Corrosives.

Class 9–Miscellaneous dangerous substances, that is any other substance which experience has shown, or may show, to be of such a dangerous character that the provisions of this Chapter should apply to it.

Regulation 3

Packing

(a) The packing of dangerous goods shall be:

(i) well made and in good condition;

(ii) of such a character that any interior surface with which the contents may come in contact is not dangerously affected by the substance being conveyed; and

(iii) capable of withstanding the ordinary risks of handling and carriage by sea.

(b) Where the use of absorbent or cushioning material is customary in the packing of liquids in receptacles that material shall be:

(i) capable of minimizing the dangers to which the liquid may give rise;

(ii) so disposed as to prevent movement and ensure that the receptacle remains surrounded; and

(iii) where reasonably possible of sufficient quantity to absorb the liquid in the event of breakage of the receptacle.

(c) Receptacles containing dangerous liquids shall have an ullage at the filling temperature sufficient to allow for the highest temperature during the course of normal carriage.

(d) Cylinders or receptacles for gases under pressure shall be adequately constructed, tested, maintained and correctly filled.

(e) Empty receptacles which have been used previously for the carriage of dangerous goods shall themselves be treated as dangerous goods unless they have been cleaned and dried or, when the nature of the former contents permit with safety, have been closed securely.

Regulation 4

Marking and Labelling

Each receptacle containing dangerous goods shall be marked with the correct technical name (trade names shall not be used) and identified with a distinctive label or stencil of the label so as to make clear the dangerous character. Each receptacle shall be so labelled except receptacles containing chemicals packed in limited quantities and large shipments which can be stowed, handled and identified as a unit.

Regulation 5

Documents

(a) In all documents relating to the carriage of dangerous goods by sea where the goods are named the correct technical name of the goods shall be used (trade names shall not be used) and the correct description given in accordance with the classification set out in Regulation 2 of this Chapter.

(b) The shipping documents prepared by the shipper shall include, or be accompanied by, a certificate or declaration that the shipment offered for carriage is properly packed, marked and labelled and in proper condition for carriage.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

(c) Each ship carrying dangerous goods shall have a special list or manifest setting forth, in accordance with Regulation 2 of this Chapter, the dangerous goods on board and the location thereof. A detailed stowage plan which identifies by class and sets out the location of all dangerous goods on board may be used in place of such special list or manifest.

Regulation 6

Stowage Requirements

(a) Dangerous goods shall be stowed safely and appropriately according to the nature of the goods. Incompatible goods shall be segregated from one another.

(b) Explosives (except ammunition) which present a serious risk shall be stowed in a magazine which shall be kept securely closed while at sea. Such explosives shall be segregated from detonators. Electrical apparatus and cables in any compartment in which explosives are carried shall be designed and used so as to minimize the risk of fire or explosion.

(c) Goods which give off dangerous vapours shall be stowed in a well ventilated space or on deck.

(d) In ships carrying inflammable liquids or gases special precautions shall be taken where necessary against fire or explosion.

(e) Substances which are liable to spontaneous heating or combustion shall not be carried unless adequate precautions have been taken to prevent the outbreak of fire.

Regulation 7

Explosives in Passenger Ships

(a) In passenger ships the following explosives only may be carried:

(i) safety cartridges and safety fuses;

(ii) small quantities of explosives not exceeding 9 kilogrammes (20 pounds) total net weight;

(iii) distress signals for use in ships or aircraft, if the total weight of such signals does not exceed 1,016 kilogrammes (2,240 pounds);

(iv) except in ships carrying unberthed passengers, fireworks which are unlikely to explode violently.

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (a) of this Regulation additional quantities or types of explosives may be carried in passenger ships in which there are special safety measures approved by the Administration.

CHAPTER VIII

NUCLEAR SHIPS

Regulation 1

Application

This Chapter applies to all nuclear ships except ships of war.

Regulation 2

Application of other Chapters

The Regulations contained in the other Chapters of the present Convention apply to nuclear ships except as modified by this Chapter.

Regulation 3

Exemptions

A nuclear ship shall not, in any circumstances, be exempted from compliance with any Regulations of this Convention.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

Regulation 4

Approval of Reactor Installation

The design, construction and standards of inspection and assembly of the reactor installation shall be subject to the approval and satisfaction of the Administration and shall take account of the limitations which will be imposed on surveys by the presence of radiation.

Regulation 5

Suitability of Reactor Installation for Service on Board Ship

The reactor installation shall be designed having regard to the special conditions of service on board ship both in normal and exceptional circumstances of navigation.

Regulation 6

Radiation Safety

The Administration shall take measures to ensure that there are no unreasonable radiation or other nuclear hazards, at sea or in port, to the crew, passengers or public, or to the waterways or food or water resources.

Regulation 7

Safety Assessment

(a) A Safety Assessment shall be prepared to permit evaluation of the nuclear power plant and safety of the ship to ensure that there are no unreasonable radiation or other hazards, at sea or in port, to the crew, passengers or public, or to the waterways or food or water resources. The Administration, when satisfied, shall approve such Safety Assessment which shall always be kept up-to-date.

(b) The Safety Assessment shall be made available sufficiently in advance to the Contracting Governments of the countries which a nuclear ship intends to visit so that they may evaluate the safety of the ship.

Regulation 8

Operating Manual

A fully detailed Operating Manual shall be prepared for the information and guidance of the operating personnel in their duties on all matters relating to the operation of the nuclear power plant and having an important bearing on safety. The Administration, when satisfied, shall approve such Operating Manual and a copy shall be kept on board the ship. The Operating Manual shall always be kept up-to-date.

Regulation 9

Surveys

Survey of nuclear ships shall include the applicable requirements of Regulation 7 of Chapter I, or of Regulations 8, 9 and 10 of Chapter I, except in so far as surveys are limited by the presence of radiation. In addition, the surveys shall include any special requirements of the Safety Assessment. They shall in all cases, notwithstanding the provisions of Regulations 8 and 10 of Chapter I, be carried out not less frequently than once a year.

Regulation 10

Certificates

(a) The provisions of paragraph (a) of Regulation 12 of Chapter I and of Regulation 14 of Chapter I shall not apply to nuclear ships.

(b) A Certificate, called a Nuclear Passenger Ship Safety Certificate shall be issued after inspection and survey to a nuclear passenger ship which complies with the requirements of Chapters II-1, II-2, III, IV and VIII and any other relevant requirements of the present Regulations.


SCHEDULE 3-continued

“SCHEDULE 1-continued

(c) A Certificate, called a Nuclear Cargo Ship Safety Certificate shall be issued after inspection and survey to a nuclear cargo ship which satisfies the requirements for cargo ships on survey set out in Regulation 10 of Chapter I, and complies with the requirements of Chapters II-1, II-2, III, IV and VIII and any other relevant requirements of the present Regulations.

(d) Nuclear Passenger Ship Safety Certificates and Nuclear Cargo Ship Safety Certificates shall state: “That the ship, being a nuclear ship, complied with all requirements of Chapter VIII of the Convention and conformed to the Safety Assessment approved for the ship”.

(e) Nuclear Passenger Ship Safety Certificates and Nuclear Cargo Ship Safety Certificates shall be valid for a period of not more than 12 months.

(f) Nuclear Passenger Ship Safety Certificates and Nuclear Cargo Ship Safety Certificates shall be issued either by the Administration or by any person or organization duly authorized by it. In every case, that Administration assumes full responsibility for the certificate.

 

Regulation 11

Special Control

In addition to the control established by Regulation 19 of Chapter I, nuclear ships shall be subject to special control before entering the ports and in the ports of Contracting Governments, directed towards verifying that there is on board a valid Nuclear Ship Safety Certificate and that there are no unreasonable radiation or other hazards at sea or in port, to the crew, passengers or public, or to the waterways or food or water resources.

Regulation 12

Casualties

In the event of any accident likely to lead to an environmental hazard the master of a nuclear ship shall immediately inform the Administration. The master shall also immediately inform the competent Governmental authority of the country in whose waters the ship may be, or whose waters the ship approaches in a damaged condition.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

APPENDIX

Form of Safety Certificate for Passenger Ships

PASSENGER SHIP SAFETY CERTIFICATE

(Official Seal)           (Country)

for

an

international voyage.

a short

Issued under the provisions of the

INTERNATIONAL CONVENTION FOR THE SAFETY OF LIFE AT SEA, 1974

Name of Ship

Distinctive Number or Letters

Port of Registry

Gross Tonnage

Particulars of voyages, if any, sanctioned under Regulation 27 (c) (vii) of Chapter III

Date on which keel was laid (see NOTE below)

 

 

 

 

 

 

The

(Name) Government certifies

I, the undersigned

(Name) certify

I. That the above-mentioned ship has been duly surveyed in accordance with the provisions of the Convention referred to above.

II. That the survey showed that the ship complied with the requirements of the Regulations annexed to the said Convention as regards:

(1) the structure, main and auxiliary boilers and other pressure vessels and machinery;

(2) the watertight subdivision arrangements and details;

(3) the following subdivision load lines:

Subdivision load lines assigned and marked on the ship’s side at amidships (Regulation 11 of Chapter II-1)

Freeboard

To apply when the spaces in which passengers are carried include the following alternative spaces

C.1

....................................

C.2

....................................

C.3

....................................

III. That the life-saving appliances provide for a total number of…………persons and no more, viz.:

................ lifeboats (including................motor lifeboats) capable of accommodating persons, and................motor lifeboats fitted with radiotelegraph installation and searchlight (included in the total lifeboats shown above) and................motor lifeboats fitted with searchlight only (also included in the total lifeboats shown above), requiring ................certificated lifeboatmen;

................ liferafts, for which approved launching devices are required, capable of accommodating................persons; and


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

........ liferafts, for which approved launching devices are not required, capable of accommodating........persons;

........ buoyant apparatus capable of supporting........persons;

........ lifebuoys;

........ life-jackets.

IV. That the lifeboats and liferafts were equipped in accordance with the provisions of the Regulations.

V. That the ship was provided with a line-throwing appliance and portable radio apparatus for survival craft in accordance with the provisions of the Regulations.

VI. That the ship complied with the requirements of the Regulations as regards radiotelegraph installations, viz.:

 

Requirements of Regulations

Actual provision

Hours of listening by operator....................

.......................

Number of operators...........................

.......................

Whether auto alarm fitted.......................

.......................

Whether main installation fitted...................

.......................

Whether reserve installation fitted..................

.......................

Whether main and reserve transmitters electrically separated or combined 

.......................

Whether direction-finder fitted....................

.......................

Whether radio equipment for homing on the radiotelephone distress frequency fitted 

.......................

Whether radar fitted...........................

.......................

Number of passengers for which certificated...........

.......................

VII. That the functioning of the radiotelegraph installations for motor lifeboats and/or the portable radio apparatus for survival craft, if provided, complied with the provisions of the Regulations.

 

VIII. That the ship complied with the requirements of the Regulations as regards fire-detecting and fire-extinguishing appliances, radar, echo-sounding device and gyro-compass and was provided with navigation lights and shapes, pilot ladder, and means of making sound signals, and distress signals in accordance with the provisions of the Regulations and also the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea in force.

IX. That in all other respects the ship complied with the requirements of the Regulations, so far as these requirements apply thereto.

This certificate is issued under the authority of the Government. It will remain in force until

Issued at   the   day of    19

Here follows the seal or signature of the authority entitled to issue the certificate.

(Seal)

If signed, the following paragraph is to be added:

The undersigned declares that he is duly authorized by the said Government to issue this certificate.

(Signature)

NOTE: It will be sufficient to indicate the year in which the keel was laid or when the ship was at a similar stage of construction except for 1952, 1965 and the year of the coming into force of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974, in which cases the actual date should be given.

In the case of a ship which is converted as provided in Regulation 1 (b) (i) of Chapter II-1 or Regulations 1 (a) (i) of Chapter II-2 of the Convention, the date on which the work of conversion was begun should be given.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

Form of Safety Construction Certificate for Cargo Ships

CARGO SHIP SAFETY CONSTRUCTION CERTIFICATE

(Official Seal)           (Country)

Issued under the provisions of the

INTERNATIONAL CONVENTION FOR THE SAFETY OF LIFE AT SEA, 1974

Name of ship

Distinctive Number or Letters

Port of Registry

Gross Tonnage

Date on which keel was laid (see NOTE below)

 

 

 

 

 

The

(Name) Government certifies

I, the undersigned

(Name) certify

That the above-mentioned ship has been duly surveyed in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 10 of Chapter I of the Convention referred to above, and that the survey showed that the condition of the hull, machinery and equipment, as defined in the above Regulation, was in all respects satisfactory and that the ship complied with the applicable requirements of Chapter II-1 and Chapter II-2 (other than that relating to fire-extinguishing appliances and fire control plans).

This certificate is issued under the authority of the                              Government. It will remain in force until

Issued at   the   day of    19

Here follows the seal or signature of the authority entitled to issue the certificate.

(Seal)

If signed, the following paragraph is to be added:

The undersigned declares that he is duly authorized by the said Government to issue this certificate.

(Signature)

NOTE: It will be sufficient to indicate the year in which the keel was laid or when the ship was at a similar stage of construction except for 1952, 1965 and the year of the coming into force of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974, in which cases the actual date should be given.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

Form of Safety Equipment Certificate for Cargo Ships

CARGO SHIP SAFETY EQUIPMENT CERTIFICATE

(Official Seal)           (Country)

Issued under the provisions of the

INTERNATIONAL CONVENTION FOR THE SAFETY OF LIFE AT SEA, 1974

Name of ship

Distinctive Number or Letters

Port of Registry

Gross Tonnage

Date on which keel was laid (see NOTE below)

 

 

 

 

 

The

(Name) Government certifies

I, the undersigned

(Name) certify

I. That the above-mentioned ship has been duly inspected in accordance with the provisions of the Convention referred to above.

II. That the inspection showed that the life-saving appliances provided for a total number of......persons and no more viz.:

............ lifeboats on port side capable of accommodating............persons;

............ lifeboats on starboard side capable of accommodating............persons;

............ motor lifeboats (included in the total lifeboats shown above), including............motor lifeboats fitted with radiotelegraph installation and searchlight, and motor lifeboats fitted with searchlight only;

............ liferafts, for which approved launching devices are required, capable of accommodating............persons; and

............ liferafts, for which approved launching devices are not required, capable of accommodating............persons;

............ lifebuoys;

............ life-jackets.

III. That the lifeboats and liferafts were equipped in accordance with the provisions of the Regulations annexed to the Convention.

IV. That the ship was provided with a line-throwing apparatus and portable radio apparatus for survival craft in accordance with the provisions of the Regulations.

V. That the inspection showed that the ship complied with the requirements of the said Convention as regards fire-extinguishing appliances and fire control plans, echo-sounding device and gyro-compass and was provided with navigation lights and shapes, pilot ladder, and means of making sound signals and distress signals, in accordance with the provisions of the Regulations and the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea in force.

VI. That in all other respects the ship complied with the requirements of the Regulations so far as these requirements apply thereto.

NOTE: It will be sufficient to indicate the year in which the keel was laid or when the ship was at a similar stage of construction except for 1952, 1965 and the year of the coming into force of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974, in which cases the actual date should be given.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

This certificate is issued under the authority of the   Government. It will remain in force until

Issued at   the   day of   19

Here follows the seal or signature of the authority entitled to issue the certificate.

(Seal)

If signed, the following paragraph is to be added:

The undersigned declares that he is duly authorized by the said Government to issue this certificate.

(Signature)


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

Form of Safety Radiotelegraphy Certificate for Cargo Ships

CARGO SHIP SAFETY RADIOTELEGRAPHY CERTIFICATE

(Official Seal)           (Country)

Issued at   the   day of   19

INTERNATIONAL CONVENTION FOR THE SAFETY OF LIFE AT SEA, 1974

Name of ship

Distinctive Number or Letters

Port of Registry

Gross Tonnage

Date on which keel was laid (see NOTE below)

 

 

 

 

 

The

(Name) Government certifies

I, the undersigned

(Name) certify

I. That the above-mentioned ship complies with the provisions of the Regulations annexed to the Convention referred to above as regards radiotelegraphy and radar

 

Requirements of Regulations

Actual provision

Hours of listening by operator........................

....................

Number of operators..............................

....................

Whether auto alarm fitted...........................

....................

Whether main installation fitted.......................

....................

Whether reserve installation fitted......................

....................

Whether main and reserve transmitters electrically separated or combined 

....................

Whether direction-finder fitted........................

....................

Whether radio equipment for homing on the radiotelephone distress frequency fitted 

....................

Whether radar fitted...............................

....................

II. That the functioning of the radiotelegraphy installation for motor lifeboats and/or the portable radio apparatus for survival craft, if provided, complies with the provisions of the said Regulations.

This certificate is issued under the authority of the Government. It will remain in force until

Issued at   the   day of   19

Here follows the seal or signature of the authority entitled to issue this certificate:

(Seal)

If signed, the following paragraph is to be added:

The undersigned declares that he is duly authorized by the said Government to issue this certificate.

(Signature)

NOTE: It will be sufficient to indicate the year in which the keel was laid or when the ship was at a similar stage of construction except for 1952, 1963 and the year of the coming into force of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974, in which cases the actual date should be given.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

Form of Safety Radiotelephony Certificate for Cargo Ships

CARGO SHIP SAFETY RADIOTELEPHONY CERTIFICATE

(Official Seal)           (Country)

Issued under the provisions of the

INTERNATIONAL CONVENTION FOR THE SAFETY OF LIFE AT SEA, 1974

Name of ship

Distinctive Number or Letters

Port of Registry

Gross Tonnage

Date on which keel was laid (see NOTE below)

 

 

 

 

 

The

(Name) Government certifies

I, the undersigned

(Name) certify

I. That the above-mentioned ship complies with the provisions of the Regulations annexed to the Convention referred to above as regards Radiotelephony:

 

Requirements of Regulations

Actual provision

Hours of listening.............................

 

Number of operators...........................

 

II. That the functioning of the portable radio apparatus for survival craft, if provided, complies with the provisions of the said Regulations.

This certificate is issued under the authority of the                         Government. It will remain in force until

Issued at   the   day of   19

Here follows the seal or signature of the authority entitled to issue this certificate.

(Seal)

If signed, the following paragraph is to be added:

The undersigned declares that he is duly authorized by the said Government to issue this certificate.

(Signature)

NOTE: It will be sufficient to indicate the year in which the keel was laid or when the ship was at a similar stage of construction except for 1952, 1965 and the year of the coming into force of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974, in which cases the actual date should be given.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

Form of Exemption Certificate

EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE

(Official Seal)           (Country)

Issued under the provisions of the

INTERNATIONAL CONVENTION FOR THE SAFETY OF LIFE AT SEA, 1974

Name of ship

Distinctive Number or Letters

Port of Registry

Gross Tonnage

 

 

 

 

The

(Name) Government certifies

I, the undersigned

(Name) certify

That the above-mentioned ship is, under the authority conferred by Regulation...............of Chapter...............of the Regulations annexed to the Convention referred to above, exempted from the requirements of*........................................................................................................................ of the Convention on the voyages .......................................................................................... to...............................................................................................................................................

* Insert here the conditions,

if any, on which the exemption

certificate is granted.

This certificate is issued under the authority of the    Government. It will remain in force until

Issued at   the   day of   19

Here follows the seal or signature of the authority entitled to issue this certificate.

(Seal)

If signed, the following paragraph is to be added:

The undersigned declares that he is duly authorized by the said Government to issue this certificate.

(Signature)

* Insert here references to Chapters and Regulations, specifying particular paragraphs.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

Form of Safety Certificate for Nuclear Passenger Ships

NUCLEAR PASSENGER SHIP SAFETY CERTIFICATE

(Official Seal)           (Country)

Issued under the provisions of the

INTERNATIONAL CONVENTION FOR THE SAFETY OF LIFE AT SEA, 1974

Name of ship

Distinctive Number or Letters

Port of Registry

Gross Tonnage

Particulars of voyages, if any, sanctioned under Regulation 27 (c) (vii) of Chapter III

Date on which keel was laid (see NOTE below)

 

 

 

 

 

 

The

(Name) Government certifies

I, the undersigned

(Name) certify

I. That the above-mentioned ship has been duly surveyed in accordance with the provisions of the Convention referred to above.

II. That the ship, being a nuclear ship, complied with all requirements of Chapter VIII of the Convention and conformed to the Safety Assessment approved for the ship.

III. That the survey showed that the ship complied with the requirements of the Regulations annexed to the said Convention as regards:

(1) the structure, main and auxiliary boilers and other pressure vessels and machinery;

(2) the watertight subdivision arrangements and details;

(3) the following subdivision load lines:

Subdivision load lines assigned and marked on the ship’s side at amidships (Regulation 11 of Chapter II-1)

Freeboard

To apply when the spaces in which passengers are carried include the following alternative spaces

C.1

.......................................

C.2

.......................................

C.3

.......................................

IV. That the life-saving appliances provided for a total number of............persons and no more, viz.:

............ lifeboats (including............motor lifeboats) capable of accommodating............persons, and............motor lifeboats fitted with radiotelegraph installation and searchlight (included in the total lifeboats shown above) and............motor lifeboats fitted with searchlight only (also included in the total lifeboats shown above), requiring ............certificated lifeboatmen;

............ liferafts, for which approved launching devices are required, capable of accommodating persons; and

............ liferafts, for which approved launching devices are not required, capable of accommodating............persons;


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

............ buoyant apparatus capable of supporting............persons;

............ lifebuoys;

............ life-jackets.

V. That the lifeboats and liferafts were equipped in accordance with the provisions of the Regulations.

VI. That the ship was provided with a line-throwing appliance and portable radio apparatus for survival craft, in accordance with the provisions of the Regulations.

VII. That the ship complied with the requirements of the Regulations as regards radiotelegraph installations, viz.:

 

Requirements of Regulations

Actual provision

Hours of listening by operator.....................

.....................

Number of operators...........................

.....................

Whether auto alarm fitted........................

.....................

Whether main installation fitted....................

.....................

Whether reserve installation fitted...................

.....................

Whether main and reserve transmitters electrically separated or combined 

.....................

Whether direction-finder fitted.....................

.....................

Whether radio equipment for homing on the radiotelephone distress frequency fitted 

.....................

Whether radar fitted............................

.....................

Number of passengers for which certificated............

.....................

VIII. That the functioning of the radiotelegraph installations for motor lifeboats and/or the portable radio apparatus for survival craft, if provided, complied with the provisions of the Regulations.

IX. That the ship complied with the requirements of the Regulations as regards fire-detecting and fire-extinguishing appliances, radar echo-sounding device and gyro-compass and was provided with navigation lights and shapes, pilot ladder, and means of making sound signals and distress signals in accordance with the provisions of the Regulations and also the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea in force.

X. That in all other respects the ship complied with the requirements of the Regulations, so far as these requirements apply thereto.

This-certificate is issued under the authority of the   Government. It will remain in force until

Issued at   the   day of   19

Here follows the seal or signature of the authority entitled to issue the certificate.

(Seal)

If signed, the following paragraph is to be added:

The undersigned declares that he is duly authorized by the said Government to issue this certificate.

(Signature)

NOTE: It will be sufficient to indicate the year in which the keel was laid or when the ship was at a similar stage of construction except for 1965 and the year of the coming into force of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974, in which cases the actual date should be given.

In the case of a ship which is converted as provided in Regulation 1 (b) (i) of Chapter II-1 or Regulation 1 (a) (i) of Chapter 11-2, the date on which the work of conversion was begun should be given.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

Form of Safety Certificate for Nuclear Cargo Ships

NUCLEAR CARGO SHIP SAFETY CERTIFICATE

(Official Seal)           (Country)

Issued under the provisions of the

INTERNATIONAL CONVENTION FOR THE SAFETY OF LIFE AT SEA, 1974

Name of ship

Distinctive Number or Letters

Port of Registry

Gross Tonnage

Date on which keel was laid (see NOTE below)

 

 

 

 

 

The

(Name) Government certifies

I, the undersigned

(Name) certify

I. That the above-mentioned ship has been duly surveyed in accordance with the provisions of the Convention referred to above.

II. That the ship, being a nuclear ship, complied with all requirements of Chapter VIII of the Convention and conformed to the Safety Assessment approved for the ship.

III. That the survey showed that the ship satisfied the requirements set out in Regulation 10 of Chapter I of the Convention as to hull, machinery and equipment, and complied with the relevant requirements of Chapter II– 1 and Chapter II–2.

IV. That the life-saving appliances provide for a total number of.........persons and no more, viz.:

......... lifeboats on port side capable of accommodating.........persons;

......... lifeboats on starboard side capable of accommodating.........persons;

......... motor lifeboats (included in the total lifeboats shown above) including.........motor lifeboats fitted with radiotelegraph installation and searchlight, and.........motor lifeboats fitted with searchlight only;

......... liferafts, for which approved launching devices are required, capable of accommodating.........persons; and

......... liferafts for which approved launching devices are not required, capable of accommodating.........persons;

......... lifebuoys;

......... life-jackets.

V. That the lifeboats and liferafts were equipped in accordance with the provisions of the Regulations annexed to the Convention.

VI. That the ship was provided with a line-throwing apparatus and portable radio apparatus for survival craft in accordance with the provisions of the Regulations.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 1–continued

VII. That the ship complied with the requirements of the Regulations as regards radiotelegraph installations, viz.:

 

Requirements of Regulations

Actual provision

Hours of listening by operator......................

....................

Number of operators............................

....................

Whether auto alarm fitted.........................

....................

Whether main installation fitted.....................

....................

Whether reserve installation fitted....................

....................

Whether main and reserve transmitters electrically separated or combined 

....................

Whether direction-finder fitted......................

....................

Whether radio equipment for homing on the radiotelephone distress frequency fitted 

....................

Whether radar fitted.............................

....................

VIII. That the functioning of the radiotelegraph installations for motor lifeboats, and /or the portable radio apparatus for survival craft, if provided, complied with the provisions of the Regulations.

IX. That the inspection showed that the ship complied with the requirements of the said Convention as regards fire-extinguishing appliances, radar, echo-sounding device and gyrocompass and was provided with navigation lights and shapes, pilot ladder, and means of making sound signals and distress signals in accordance with the provisions of the Regulations and the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea in force.

X. That in all other respects the ship complied with the requirements of the Regulations so far as these requirements apply thereto.

This certificate is issued under the authority of the   Government. It will remain in force until

Issued at   the   day of   19

Here follows the seal or signature of the authority entitled to issue the certificate.

(Seal)

If signed, the following paragraph is to be added:

The undersigned declares that he is duly authorized by the said Government to issue this certificate.

(Signature)

NOTE: It will be sufficient to indicate the year in which the keel was laid or when the ship was at a similar stage of construction except for the year 1965 and the year of the coming into force of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974, in which cases the actual date should be given.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 2– Sub-section 187a (1)

PROTOCOL OF 1978 RELATING TO THE INTERNATIONAL CONVENTION FOR THE SAFETY OF LIFE AT SEA, 1974

ARTICLE I

General Obligations

The Parties to the present Protocol undertake to give effect to the provisions of the present Protocol and the Annex hereto which shall constitute an integral part of the present Protocol. Every reference to the present Protocol constitutes at the same time a reference to the Annex hereto.
 

ARTICLE II

Application

1. The provisions of Articles II, III (other than paragraph (a)), IV, VI (b), (c) and (d), VII and VIII of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974 (hereinafter referred to as “the Convention”) are incorporated in the present Protocol, provided that references in those Articles to the Convention and to Contracting Governments shall be taken to mean references to the present Protocol and to the Parties to the present Protocol, respectively.

2. Any ship to which the present Protocol applies shall comply with the provisions of the Convention, subject to the modifications and additions set out in the present Protocol.

3. With respect to the ships of non-parties to the Convention and the present Protocol, the Parties to the present Protocol shall apply the requirements of the Convention and the present Protocol as may be necessary to ensure that no more favourable treatment is given to such ships.
 

ARTICLE III

Communication of Information

The Parties to the present Protocol undertake to communicate to, and deposit with, the Secretary-General of the Inter-Governmental Maritime Consultative Organization (hereinafter referred to as “the Organization”), a list of nominated surveyors or recognized organizations which are authorized to act on their behalf in the administration of measures for safety of life at sea for circulation to the Parties for information of their officers. The Administration shall therefore notify the Organization of the specific responsibilities and conditions of the authority delegated to the nominated surveyors or recognized organizations.

ARTICLE IV

Signature, Ratification, Acceptance, Approval and Accession

1. The present Protocol shall be open for signature at the Headquarters of the organization from 1 June 1978 to 1 March 1979 and shall thereafter remain open for accession. Subject to the provisions of paragraph 3 of this Article, States may become Parties to the present Protocol by:

(a) signature without reservation as to ratification, acceptance or approval; or

(b) signature subject to ratification, acceptance or approval, followed by ratification, acceptance or approval; or

(c) accession.

2. Ratification, acceptance, approval or accession shall be effected by the deposit of an instrument to that effect with the Secretary-General of the Organization.

3. The present Protocol may be signed without reservation, ratified, accepted, approved or acceded to only by States which have signed without reservation, ratified, accepted, approved or acceded to the Convention.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 2–continued

ARTICLE V

Entry into Force

1. The present Protocol shall enter into force six months after the date on which not less than fifteen States, the combined merchant fleets of which constitute not less than fifty per cent of the gross tonnage of the world’s merchant shipping, have become Parties to it in accordance with Article IV of the present Protocol, provided however that the present Protocol shall not enter into force before the Convention has entered into force.

2. Any instrument of ratification, acceptance, approval or accession deposited after the date on which the present Protocol enters into force shall take effect three months after the date of deposit.

3. After the date on which an amendment to the present Protocol is deemed to have been accepted under Article VIII of the Convention, any instrument of ratification, acceptance, approval or accession deposited shall apply to the present Protocol as amended.

ARTICLE VI

Denunciation

1. The present Protocol may be denounced by any Party at any time after the expiry of five years from the date on which the present Protocol enters into force for that Party.

2. Denunciation shall be effected by the deposit of an instrument of denunciation with the Secretary-General of the Organization.

3. A denunciation shall take effect one year, or such longer period as may be specified in the instrument of denunciation, after its receipt by the Secretary-General of the Organization.

4. A denunciation of the Convention by a Party shall be deemed to be a denunciation of the present Protocol by that Party.

ARTICLE VII

Depositary

1. The present Protocol shall be deposited with the Secretary-General of the Organization (hereinafter referred to as “the Depositary”).

2. The Depositary shall:

(a) inform all States which have signed the present Protocol or acceded thereto of:

(i) each new signature or deposit of an instrument of ratification, acceptance, approval or accession, together with the date thereof;

(ii) the date of entry into force of the present Protocol;

(iii) the deposit of any instrument of denunciation of the present Protocol together with the date on which it was received and the date on which the denunciation takes effect;

(b) transmit certified true copies of the present Protocol to all States which have signed the present Protocol or acceded thereto.

3. As soon as the present Protocol enters into force, a certified true copy thereof shall be transmitted by the Depositary to the Secretariat of the United Nations for registration and publication in accordance with Article 102 of the Charter of the United Nations.
 

ARTICLE VIII

Languages

The present Protocol is established in a single original in the Chinese, English, French, Russian and Spanish languages, each text being equally authentic. Official translations in the Arabic, German and Italian languages shall be prepared and deposited with the signed original.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 2–continued

ANNEX

MODIFICATIONS AND ADDITIONS TO THE INTERNATIONAL CONVENTION FOR THE SAFETY OF LIFE AT SEA, 1974

CHAPTER I

GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART A–APPLICATION, DEFINITIONS, ETC.

Regulation 2

Definitions

The following paragraph is added to the existing text:

(n) “Age of a ship” means the elapsed period of time determined from the year of build as indicated on the ship’s registry papers.

PART B–SURVEYS AND CERTIFICATES

Regulation 6

Inspection and Survey

The existing text of Regulation 6 is replaced by the following:

(a) The inspection and survey of ships, so far as regards the enforcement of the provisions of the present Regulations and the granting of exemptions therefrom, shall be carried out by officers of the Administration. The Administration may, however, entrust the inspections and surveys either to surveyors nominated for the purpose or to organizations recognized by it.

(b) The Administration shall institute arrangements for unscheduled inspections to be carried out during the period of validity of the certificate. Such inspections shall ensure that the ship and its equipment remain in all respects satisfactory for the service for which the ship is intended. These inspections may be carried out by the Administration’s own inspection services, or by nominated surveyors, or by recognized organizations, or by other Parties upon request of the Administration. Where the Administration, under the provisions of Regulations 8 and 10 of this Chapter, establishes mandatory annual surveys, the above unscheduled inspections shall not be obligatory.

(c) An Administration nominating surveyors or recognizing organizations to conduct inspections and surveys as set forth in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this Regulation shall as a minimum empower any nominated surveyor or recognized organization to:

(i) require repairs to a ship, and

(ii) carry out inspections and surveys if requested by the appropriate authorities of a Port State.

The Administration shall notify the Organization of the specific responsibilities and conditions of the authority delegated to nominated surveyors or recognized organizations.

(d) When a nominated surveyor or recognized organization determines that the condition of the ship or its equipment does not correspond substantially with the particulars of the certificate or is such that the ship is not fit to proceed to sea without danger to the ship, or persons on board, such surveyor or organization shall immediately ensure that corrective action is taken and shall in due course notify the Administration. If such corrective action is not taken the relevant certificate should be withdrawn and the Administration shall be notified immediately; and, if the ship is in the port of another Party, the appropriate authorities of the Port State shall also be notified immediately. When an officer of the Administration, a nominated surveyor or recognized organization has notified the appropriate authorities of the Port State, the


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 2–continued

Government of the Port State concerned shall give such officer, surveyor or organization any necessary assistance to carry out their obligations under this Regulation. When applicable, the Government of the Port State concerned shall ensure that the ship shall not sail until it can proceed to sea, or leave port for the purpose of proceeding to the appropriate repair yard, without danger to the ship or persons on board.

(e) In every case, the Administration shall fully guarantee the completeness and efficiency of the inspection and survey, and shall undertake to ensure the necessary arrangements to satisfy this obligation.

Regulation 7

Surveys of Passenger Ships

The existing text of paragraph (b) (iii) is replaced by the following:

(iii) A survey either general or partial, according to the circumstances, shall be made after a repair resulting from investigations prescribed in Regulation 11 of this Chapter, or whenever any important repairs or renewals are made. The survey shall be such as to ensure that the necessary repairs or renewals have been effectively made, that the material and workmanship of such repairs or renewals are in all respects satisfactory, and that the ship complies in all respects with the provisions of the Convention and the present Protocol and of the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea in force, and of the laws, decrees, orders and regulations promulgated as a result thereof by the Administration.

Regulation 8

Surveys of Life-Saving Appliances and other Equipment of Cargo Ships

The existing text of Regulation 8 is replaced by the following:

(a) The life-saving appliances, except a radiotelegraph installation in a motor lifeboat or a portable radio apparatus for survival craft, the echo-sounding device, the gyrocompass, the fire-extinguishing appliances and the inert gas system of cargo ships to which Chapters II-1, II-2, III and V of the Convention and the present Protocol apply, shall be subject to initial and sub-sequent surveys as prescribed for passenger ships in Regulation 7 of Chapter I of the Convention and the present Protocol with the substitution of 24 months for 12 months in sub-paragraph (a) (ii) of that Regulation. The fire control plans in new ships and the pilot ladders, mechanical pilot hoists, lights, shapes and means of making sound signals carried by new and existing ships shall be included in the surveys for the purpose of ensuring that they comply fully with the requirements of the Convention and the present Protocol and, where applicable, the International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea in force.

(b) Intermediate surveys shall be made for tankers of ten years of age and over, within three months before or after the anniversary date of the Cargo Ship Safety Equipment Certificate, to ensure that equipment specified in paragraph (a) of this Regulation has been maintained in accordance with Regulation 11 of this Chapter and that it is in good working condition. Such intermediate surveys shall be endorsed on the Cargo Ship Safety Equipment Certificate issued in accordance with Regulation 12 (a) (iii) of Chapter I of the Convention.

Regulation 10

Surveys of Hull, Machinery and Equipment of Cargo Ships

The existing text of Regulation 10 is replaced by the following:

(a) The hull, machinery and equipment (other than items in respect of which Cargo Ship Safety Equipment Certificates, Cargo Ship Safety Radiotelegraphy Certificates or Cargo Ship Radiotelephony Certificates are issued) of a cargo ship shall be surveyed on completion and thereafter in such a manner as the Administration may consider necessary in order to ensure that their condition is in all respects satisfactory and at the following intervals:


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 2–continued

(i) at intervals specified by the Administration but not exceeding five years (periodical surveys);

(ii) in addition to such periodical surveys a tanker of ten years of age and over shall undergo a minimum of one intermediate survey during the period of validity of its Cargo Ship Safety Construction Certificate. In cases where only one such intermediate survey is carried out in any one certificate validity period, it shall be held not before six months prior to, nor later than six months after, the half-way date of the certificate’s period of validity.

(b) The initial and periodical survey shall be such as to ensure that the arrangements material and scantlings of the structure, boilers and other pressure vessels, their appurtenances, main and auxiliary machinery including steering gear and associated control systems, electrical installation and other equipment are in all respects satisfactory for the service for which the ship is intended. Such surveys shall, in the case of tankers, also include inspection of the outside of the ship’s bottom, pump rooms, cargo and bunker piping systems, vent piping, pressure vacuum valves and flame screens.

(c) The intermediate survey of tankers of ten years of age and over shall include inspection of steering gear equipment and associated control systems, pump rooms, cargo and bunker piping systems on deck and in pump rooms, vent piping, pressure vacuum valves and flame screens, the electrical installations in dangerous zones, and the outside of the ship’s bottom. In addition to the visual inspection of the electrical installation, the insulation resistance of the electrical equipment in dangerous zones is to be tested. If, upon examination, there should be any doubt as to the condition of the piping, extra measures, such as pressure tests and thickness determination, shall be taken as necessary. Such intermediate surveys shall be endorsed on the Cargo Ship Safety Construction Certificate issued in accordance with Regulation 12 (a) (ii) of Chapter I of the Convention.

(d) A survey, either general or partial according to the circumstances, shall be made when required after an investigation prescribed in Regulation 11 of this Chapter, or whenever any important repairs or renewals are made. The survey shall be such as to ensure that the necessary repairs or renewals have been effectively made, that the material and workmanship of such repairs or renewals are in all respects satisfactory, and that the ship is fit to proceed to sea without danger to the ship or persons on board.
 

Regulation 11

Maintenance of Conditions after Survey

The existing text of Regulation 11 is replaced by the following:

(a) The condition of the ship and its equipment shall be maintained to conform with the provisions of the Convention and the present Protocol to ensure that the ship in all respects will remain fit to proceed to sea without danger to the ship or persons on board.

(b) After any survey of the ship under Regulations 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 of Chapter I of the Convention and the present Protocol has been completed, no change shall be made in the structural arrangement, machinery, equipment and other items covered by the survey, without the sanction of the Administration.

(c) Whenever an accident occurs to a ship or a defect is discovered, either of which affects the safety of the ship or the efficiency or completeness of its life-saving appliances or other equipment, the master or owner of the ship shall report at the earliest opportunity to the Administration, the nominated surveyor or recognized organization responsible for issuing the relevant certificate, who shall cause investigations to be initiated to determine whether a survey, as required by Regulations 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 of Chapter I of the Convention and the present Protocol, is necessary. If the ship is in a port of another Party, the master or owner shall also report immediately to the appropriate authorities of the Port State and the nominated surveyor or recognized organization shall ascertain that such a report has been made.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 2–continued

Regulation 14

Duration and Validity of Certificates

The existing text of Regulation 14 is replaced by the following:

(a) Certificates other than the Cargo Ship Safety Construction Certificate, the Cargo Ship Safety Equipment Certificate and any Exemption Certificate shall be issued for a period not exceeding 12 months. The Cargo Ship Safety Construction Certificate shall be issued for a period not exceeding five years. The Cargo Ship Safety Equipment Certificate shall be issued for a period not exceeding 24 months. Exemption Certificates shall not be valid for longer than the period of the certificates to which they refer.

(b) No extension of the five-year period of validity of the Cargo Ship Safety Construction Certificate shall be permitted.

(c) If a survey takes place within two months before the end of the period for which a Cargo Ship Safety Radiotelegraphy Certificate or a Cargo Ship Safety Radiotelephony Certificate issued in respect of cargo ships of 300 tons gross tonnage and upwards, but less than 500 tons gross tonnage, was originally issued, that certificate may be withdrawn, and a new certificate may be issued which shall expire 12 months after the end of the said period.

(d) If the ship at the time when a certificate, other than that referred to in paragraph (b) of this Regulation, expires is not in a port of the country in which it is registered or is to be surveyed, the Administration may extend the certificate, but such extension shall be granted only for the purpose of allowing the ship to complete its voyage to the country in which it is registered or is to be surveyed, and then only in cases where it appears proper and reasonable to do so.

(e) No certificate shall be extended under the provisions of paragraph (d) of this Regulation for a longer period than five months, and a ship to which an extension is granted shall not, on its arrival in the country in which it is registered or the port in which it is to be surveyed, be entitled by virtue of such extension to leave that port or country without having obtained a new certificate.

(f) A certificate, other than that referred to in paragraph (b) of this Regulation, which has not been extended under the foregoing provisions of this Regulation, may be extended by the Administration for a period of grace up to one month from the date of expiry stated on it.

(g) A certificate shall cease to be valid:

(i) if the inspections and surveys are not carried out within the periods specified under Regulation 7 (a), 8, 9 and 10 (a) of Chapter I of the Convention and the present Protocol or as they may have been extended in accordance with paragraphs (d), (e) or (f) of this Regulation, or

(ii) upon transfer of the ship to the flag of another Government. A new certificate shall only be issued when the Government issuing the new certificate is fully satisfied that the ship is in compliance with the requirements of Regulation 11 (a) and (b) of this Chapter. In the case of a transfer between Parties, if requested within three months after the transfer has taken place, the Government of the Party whose flag the ship was formerly entitled to fly shall, as soon as possible, transmit to the Administration copies of the certificates carried by the ship before the transfer and, if available, copies of the relevant survey reports.

Regulation 19

Control

The existing text of Regulation 19 is replaced by the following:

(a) Every ship when in a port of another Party is subject to control by officers duly authorized by such Government in so far as this control is directed towards verifying that the certificates issued under Regulation 12 or Regulation 13 of Chapter I of the Convention are valid.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 2–continued

(b) Such certificates, if valid, shall be accepted unless there are clear grounds for believing that the condition of the ship or of its equipment does not correspond substantially with the particulars of any of the certificates or that the ship and its equipment are not in compliance with the provisions of Regulation 11 (a) and (b) of this Chapter.

(c) In the circumstances given in paragraph (b) of this Regulation or where a certificate has expired or ceased to be valid, the officer carrying out the control shall take steps to ensure that the ship shall not sail until it can proceed to sea or leave the port for the purpose of proceeding to the appropriate repair yard without danger to the ship or persons on board.

(d) In the event of this control giving rise to an intervention of any kind, the officer carrying out the control shall forthwith inform, in writing, the Consul or, in his absence, the nearest diplomatic representative of the State whose flag the ship is entitled to fly of all the circumstances in which intervention was deemed necessary. In addition, nominated surveyors or recognized organizations responsible for the issue of the certificates shall also be notified. The facts concerning the intervention shall be reported to the Organization.

(e) The Port State authority concerned shall notify all relevant information about the ship to the authorities of the next port of call, in addition to parties mentioned in paragraph (d) of this Regulation, if it is unable to take action as specified in paragraphs (c) and (d) of this Regulation or if the ship has been allowed to proceed to the next port of call.

(f) When exercising control under this Regulation all possible efforts shall be made to avoid a ship being unduly detained or delayed. If a ship is thereby unduly detained or delayed it shall be entitled to compensation for any loss or damage suffered.

CHAPTER II-1

CONSTRUCTION–SUBDIVISION AND STABILITY, MACHINERY AND ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

PART A–GENERAL

Regulation 1

Application

The following sub-paragraphs are added to the existing text of paragraph (b):

(iii) Notwithstanding the provisions of sub-paragraph (ii) of this paragraph and sub-paragraph (a)(iii) of this Regulation, for the purposes of paragraph (d) of Regulation 29 of this Chapter, a new tanker means a tanker:

(1) for which the building contract is placed after 1 June 1979; or

(2) in the absence of a building contract, the keel of which is laid, or which is at a similar stage of construction after 1 January 1980; or

(3) the delivery of which is after 1 June 1982; or

(4) which has undergone an alteration or modification of a major character

(a) for which the contract is placed after 1 June 1979; or

(b) in the absence of a contract, the construction work of which is begun after 1 January 1980; or

(c) which is completed after 1 June 1982.

(iv) For the purposes of paragraph (d) of Regulation 29 of this Chapter, an existing tanker is a tanker which is not a new tanker as defined in sub-paragraph (iii) of this paragraph.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 2–continued

(v) For the purposes of sub-paragraph (iii) of this paragraph, conversion of an existing tanker of 20,000 metric tons deadweight and upwards to meet the requirements of the present Protocol or the Protocol of 1978 Relating to the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships, 1973, shall not be deemed to constitute an alteration or modification of a major character.

Regulation 2

Definitions

The following paragraphs are added to the existing text:

(k) The remote steering gear control system is the means by which required rudder movements are transmitted from the navigating bridge to the steering gear power unit controls.

(1) The main steering gear is the machinery, the steering gear power units, if any, and ancillary equipment and the means of applying torque to the rudder stock (e.g. tiller or quadrant) necessary for effecting movement of the rudder for the purpose of steering the ship under normal service conditions.

(m) The steering gear power unit is:

(i) in the case of electric steering gear, an electric motor and its associated electrical equipment;

(ii) in the case of electro-hydraulic steering gear, an electric motor and its associated electrical equipment and connected pump;

(iii) in the case of other hydraulic steering gear, a driving engine and connected pump.

(n) The auxiliary steering gear is that equipment which is provided for effecting movement of the rudder for the purpose of steering the ship in the event of failure of the main steering gear.

PART C–MACHINERY AND ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

Regulation 29

Steering Gear

The following paragraph is added to the existing text:

(d) Tankers only

(i) The following shall apply to every new tanker of 10,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards and, not later than two years from the date of entry into force of the present Protocol, to every existing tanker of 10,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards:

(1) two remote steering gear control systems shall be provided, each of which shall be operable separately from the navigating bridge. This does not require duplication of the steering wheel or steering lever. In the event of failure of the remote steering gear control system in operation, the other system shall be capable of being brought into immediate operation from a position on the navigating bridge. Each remote steering gear control system, if electric, shall be served by its own separate circuit supplied from the steering gear power circuit from a point within the steering gear compartment. In the event of failure of electrical power supply to a remote steering gear control system an alarm shall be given on the navigating bridge. The alarms required in this sub-paragraph shall be both audible and visual and situated in a position on the navigating bridge where they can be readily observed;

(2) control of the main steering gear shall also be provided in the steering gear compartment;


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 2–continued

(3) means shall be provided in the steering gear compartment to disconnect the remote steering gear control system from the power circuit;

(4) a means of communication shall be provided between the navigating bridge and the steering gear compartment;

(5) the exact angular position of the rudder shall be indicated on the navigating bridge. The rudder angle indication shall be independent of the remote steering gear control system; and

(6) the angular position of the rudder shall be recognizable in the steering gear compartment.

(ii) In every new tanker of 10,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards, in addition to the requirements of paragraph (a) and sub-paragraph (d) (i) of this Regulation, the following shall apply:

(1) the main steering gear shall comprise two or more identical power units and it shall be capable of operating the rudder as required by sub-paragraph (d) (ii) (2) of this Regulation while operating with one or more power units. As far as reasonable and practicable, the main steering gear shall be so arranged that a single failure in its piping or in one of the power units will not impair the integrity of the remaining part of the steering gear. All mechanical couplings which are part of the steering gear and the mechanical connexion with any remote steering gear control system, if any, shall be of sound and reliable construction to the satisfaction of the Administration;

(2) the main steering gear shall, with the ship at its deepest sea-going draught, be capable of putting the rudder over from 35 degrees on one side to 35 degrees on the other side with the ship running ahead at maximum service speed. The rudder shall be capable of being put over from 35 degrees on either side to 30 degrees on the other side in not more than 28 seconds, under the same conditions;

(3) the main steering gear shall be operated by power where necessary to fulfil the requirements of sub-paragraph (d) (ii) (2) of this Regulation;

(4) the main steering gear power units shall be arranged to start automatically when power is restored after a power failure;

(5) in the event of failure of any of the steering gear power units an alarm shall be given on the navigating bridge. Every steering gear power unit shall be capable of being brought into operation either automatically or manually from a position on the navigating bridge; and

(6) an alternative power supply, at least sufficient to supply a steering gear power unit so as to enable it to move the rudder as specified below, and also to supply its associated remote steering gear control system and the rudder angle indicator, shall be provided, automatically, within 45 seconds, either from the emergency source of electrical power, or from another independent source of power located in the steering gear compartment. This independent source of power shall be used only for this purpose and shall have a capacity sufficient for half an hour of continuous operation. The steering gear power unit, when being supplied by the alternative power supply, shall at least be capable of putting the rudder over from 15 degrees on one side to 15 degrees on the other side in not more than 60 seconds with the ship at its deepest sea-going draught while running at one half of its maximum service speed ahead or 7 knots, whichever is the greater.

SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 2–continued

CHAPTER II-2

CONSTRUCTION–FIRE PROTECTION, FIRE DETECTION AND FIRE EXTINCTION

PART A–GENERAL

Regulation 1

Application

The following sub-paragraphs are added to the existing text of paragraph (a):

(iv) Notwithstanding the provisions of sub-paragraphs (ii) and (iii) of this paragraph, for the purposes of paragraph (a) (ii) of Regulation 55 and of Regulation 60 of this Chapter, a new tanker means a tanker:

(1) for which the building contract is placed after 1 June 1979; or

(2) in the absence of a building contract, the keel of which is laid, or which is at a similar stage of construction after 1 January 1980; or

(3) the delivery of which is after 1 June 1982; or

(4) which has undergone an alteration or modification of a major character:

(a) for which the contract is placed after 1 June 1979; or

(b) in the absence of a contract, the construction work of which is begun after 1 January 1980; or

(c) which is completed after 1 June 1982.

(v) For the purposes of paragraph (a) (ii) of Regulation 55 and of Regulation 60 of this Chapter, an existing tanker is a tanker which is not a new tanker as defined in sub-paragraph (iv) of this paragraph.

(vi) For the purposes of sub-paragraph (iv) of this paragraph, conversion of an existing tanker of 20,000 metric tons deadweight and upwards to meet the requirements of the present Protocol or the Protocol of 1978 Relating to the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships, 1973 shall not be deemed to constitute an alteration or modification of a major character.

Regulation 3

Definitions

The existing text of paragraph (v) is replaced by the following:

(v) “Lightweight” means the displacement of a ship in metric tons without cargo, fuel, lubricating oil, ballast water, fresh water and feed water in tanks, consumable stores, and passengers and crew and their effects.

The following paragraph is added to the existing text:

(x) “Crude oil” means any oil occurring naturally in the earth whether or not treated to render it suitable for transportation and includes:

(i) crude oil from which certain distillate fractions may have been removed; and

(ii) crude oil to which certain distillate fractions may have been added.

PART E–FIRE SAFETY MEASURES FOR TANKERS

Regulation 55

Application

The existing text of this Regulation is replaced by the following:

(a) Unless expressly provided otherwise:

(i) this Part shall apply to all new tankers carrying crude oil and petroleum products having a flashpoint not exceeding 60°C (140°F) (closed cup test) as determined by an approved flashpoint apparatus and a Reid vapour pressure which is below atmospheric pressure and other liquid products having a similar fire hazard; and

SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 2–continued

(ii) in addition, all ships covered by this Part shall comply with the requirements of Regulations 52, 53 and 54 of Chapter II-2 of the Convention except that fixed gas fire-extinguishing systems for cargo spaces shall not be used for new tankers and for those existing tankers complying with Regulation 60 of this Chapter. For existing tankers not required to comply with Regulation 60, the Administration, in applying the requirements of paragraph (f) of Regulation 52, may accept a froth system capable of discharging froth internally or externally to the tanks. The details of the installation shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(b) Where cargoes other than those referred to in sub-paragraph (a) (i) of this Regulation which introduce additional fire hazards are intended to be carried, additional safety measures shall be required to the satisfaction of the Administration.

(c) Combination carriers shall not carry solid cargoes unless all cargo tanks are empty of oil and gas freed or unless, in each case, the administration is satisfied with the arrangements provided.

Regulation 60

Cargo Tank Protection

The existing text of this Regulation is replaced by the following:

(a) For new tankers of 20,000 metric tons deadweight and upwards, the protection of the cargo tanks deck area and cargo tanks shall be achieved by a fixed deck froth system and a fixed inert gas system in accordance with the requirements of Regulations 61 and 62 of Chapter II-2 of the Convention except that in lieu of the above installations the Administration, after having given consideration to the ship’s arrangement and equipment, may accept other combinations of fixed installations if they afford protection equivalent to the above, in accordance with Regulation 5 of Chapter I of the Convention.

(b) To be considered equivalent, the system proposed in lieu of the deck froth system shall:

(i) be capable of extinguishing spill fires and also preclude ignition of spilled oil not yet ignited; and

(ii) be capable of combating fires in ruptured tanks.

(c) To be considered equivalent, the system proposed in lieu of the fixed inert gas system shall:

(i) be capable of preventing dangerous accumulations of explosive mixtures in intact cargo tanks during normal service throughout the ballast voyage and necessary in-tank operations; and

(ii) be so designed as to minimize the risk of ignition from the generation of static electricity by the system itself.

(d) Any existing tanker of 20,000 metric tons deadweight and upwards engaged in the trade of carrying crude oil shall be fitted with an inert gas system, complying with the requirements of paragraph (a) of this Regulation, not later than a date:

(i) for a tanker of 70,000 metric tons deadweight and upwards, two years after the date of entry into force of the present Protocol; and

(ii) for a tanker of less than 70,000 metric tons deadweight, four years after the date of entry into force of the present Protocol, except that for tankers less than 40,000 tons deadweight not fitted with tank washing machines having an individual throughput of greater than 60 cubic metres per hour, the Administration may exempt existing tankers from the requirements of this paragraph, if it would be unreasonable and impracticable to apply these requirements, taking into account the ship’s design characteristics.

SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 2–continued

(e) Any existing tanker of 40,000 metric tons deadweight and upwards engaged in the trade of carrying oil other than crude oil and any such tanker of 20,000 metric tons deadweight and upwards engaged in the trade of carrying oil other than crude oil fitted with tank washing machines having an individual throughput of greater than 60 cubic metres per hour shall be fitted with an inert gas system, complying with the requirements of paragraph (a) of this Regulation, not later than a date:

(i) for a tanker of 70,000 metric tons deadweight and upwards, two years after the date of entry into force of the present Protocol; and

(ii) for a tanker of less than 70,000 metric tons deadweight, four years after the date of entry into force of the present Protocol.

(f) Any tanker operating with a cargo tank cleaning procedure using crude oil washing shall be fitted with an inert gas system complying with the requirements of Regulation 62 of Chapter II–2 of the Convention and with fixed tank washing machines.

(g) All tankers fitted with a fixed inert gas system shall be provided with a closed ullage system.

(h) Any new tanker of 2,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards not covered by paragraph (a) of this Regulation shall be provided with a froth system, capable of discharging froth internally or externally, to the tanks. The details of such installation shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration.

CHAPTER V

SAFETY OF NAVIGATION

Regulation 12

Shipborne Navigational Equipment

The existing text of paragraph (a) is replaced by the following:

(a) All ships of 1,600 tons gross tonnage and upwards but less than 10,000 tons gross tonnage shall be fitted with at least one radar. All ships of 10,000 tons gross tonnage and upwards shall be fitted with at least two radars, each capable of operating independently of the other. All radars fitted in compliance with this Regulation shall be of a type approved by the Administration and shall conform to operational standards not inferior to those adopted by the Organization. Facilities for plotting radar readings shall be provided on the bridge in those ships.

Regulation 19

Use of the Automatic Pilot

The following paragraph is added to the existing text:

(d) The manual steering shall be tested after prolonged use of the automatic pilot, and before entering areas where navigation demands special caution.

The following new Regulations are added to this Chapter:

Regulation 19-1

Operation of Steering Gear

In areas where navigation demands special caution, ships shall have more than one steering gear power unit in operation when such units are capable of simultaneous operation.

Regulation 19-2

Steering Gear– Testing and Drills

(a) Within 12 hours before departure, the ship’s steering gear shall be checked and tested by the ship’s crew. The test procedure shall include, where applicable, the operation of the following.

(i) the main steering gear;

(ii) the auxiliary steering gear;

SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 2–continued

(iii) the remote steering gear control systems;

(iv) the steering positions located on the navigating bridge;

(v) the emergency power supply;

(vi) the rudder angle indicators in relation to the actual position of the rudder;

(vii) the remote steering gear control system power failure alarms; and

(viii) the steering gear power unit failure alarms.

(b) The checks and tests shall include:

(i) the full movement of the rudder according to the required capabilities of the steering gear;

(ii) a visual inspection of the steering gear and its connecting linkage; and

(iii) the operation of the means of communication between the navigating bridge and steering gear compartment.

(c) (i) Simple operating instructions with a block diagram showing the change-over procedures for remote steering gear control systems and steering gear power units shall be permanently displayed on the navigating bridge and in the steering gear compartment.

(ii) All officers concerned with the operation and/or maintenance of steering gear shall be familiar with the operation of the steering systems fitted on the ship and with the procedures for changing from one system to another.

(d) In addition to the routine checks and tests prescribed in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this Regulation, emergency steering drills shall take place at least once every three months in order to practise emergency steering procedures. These drills shall include direct control from within the steering gear compartment, the communications procedure with the navigating bridge and, where applicable, the operation of alternative power supplies.

(e) The Administration may waive the requirement to carry out the checks and tests prescribed in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this Regulation for ships which regularly ply on voyages of short duration. Such ships shall carry out these checks and tests at least once every week.

(f) The date upon which the checks and tests prescribed in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this Regulation are carried out and the date and details of emergency steering drills carried out under paragraph (d) of this Regulation, shall be recorded in the log book as may be prescribed by the Administration.


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 2–continued

APPENDIX

Form of Safety Construction Certificate for Cargo Ships

The following form of Supplement is added to the existing form:

SUPPLEMENT TO THE CARGO SHIP SAFETY CONSTRUCTION CERTIFICATE

(Official Seal)           (Country)

Issued under the provisions of the

PROTOCOL OF 1978 RELATING TO THE INTERNATIONAL CONVENTION FOR THE SAFETY OF LIFE AT SEA, 1974

Name of Ship

Distinctive Number or Letters

Port of Registry

Deadweight of Ship (metric tons)

Year of Build

Type of ship:

Tanker engaged in the trade of carrying crude oil*

Tanker engaged in the trade of carrying oil other than crude oil*

Tanker engaged in the trade of carrying crude/other oil*

Cargo ship other than a tanker engaged in the trade of carrying oil*

Date of contract for building or alteration or modification of a major character.....................................

Date on which keel was laid or ship was at a similar stage of construction or on which an alteration or modification of a major character was commenced..................................................................................

Date of delivery or completion of an alteration or modification of a major character...............................

*Delete as appropriate.

This Supplement shall be permanently attached to the Cargo Ship Safety Construction Certificate.

THIS IS TO CERTIFY:

That the ship has been surveyed in accordance with Regulation 10 of Chapter I of the Protocol of 1978 Relating to the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974; and

that the survey showed that the condition of the hull, machinery and equipment as defined in the above Regulation was in all respects satisfactory and that the ship complied with the requirements of that Protocol.

This certificate is valid until.............................................subject to intermediate survey(s) at intervals of. .............................................

Issued at.............................................................................................................................................

(Place of issue of certificate)

     .............................................     19...............     .......................................................................

(Signature of duly authorized official issuing the certificate)

(Seal or stamp of the issuing Authority, as appropriate)


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 2–continued

INTERMEDIATE SURVEY

This is to certify that at an intermediate survey required by Regulation 10 of Chapter I of the Protocol of 1978 Relating to the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974, this ship was found to comply with the relevant provisions of that protocol.

Signed ...............................................................................................................................................

(Signature of duly authorized official)

Place..................................................................................................................................................

Date ..................................................................................................................................................

Next intermediate survey due ...........................................................................................................

(Seal or stamp of the Authority, as appropriate)

Signed ...............................................................................................................................................

(Signature of duly authorized official)

Place .................................................................................................................................................

Date ..................................................................................................................................................

Next intermediate survey due ...........................................................................................................

(Seal or stamp of the Authority, as appropriate)

Signed ...............................................................................................................................................

(Signature of duly authorized official)

Place .................................................................................................................................................

Date ..................................................................................................................................................

Next intermediate survey due ..........................................................................................................

(Seal or stamp of the Authority, as appropriate)

Signed ..............................................................................................................................................

(Signature of duly authorized official)

Place .................................................................................................................................................

Date ..................................................................................................................................................

(Seal or stamp of the Authority, as appropriate)

Form of Safety Equipment Certificate for Cargo Ships

The following form of Supplement is added to existing form:

SUPPLEMENT TO THE CARGO SHIP SAFETY EQUIPMENT CERTIFICATE

(Official Seal)           (Country)

Issued under the provisions of the

PROTOCOL OF 1978 RELATING TO THE INTERNATIONAL CONVENTION FOR THE SAFETY OF LIFE AT SEA, 1974

Name of Ship

Distinctive Number or Letters

Port of Registry

Deadweight of Ship (metric tons)

Year of Build

Type of ship:

Tanker engaged in the trade of carrying crude oil*

Tanker engaged in the trade of carrying oil other than crude oil*

Tanker engaged in the trade of carrying crude/other oil*

Cargo ship other than a tanker engaged in the trade of carrying oil*


SCHEDULE 3–continued

“SCHEDULE 2–continued

Date of contract for building or alteration or modification of a major character ......................

Date on which keel was laid or ship was at a similar stage of construction or on which an alteration or modification of a major character was commenced ..................................................................

Date of delivery or completion of an alteration or modification of a major character ......................

* Delete as appropriate.

This Supplement shall be permanently attached to the Cargo Ship Safety Equipment Certificate.

THIS IS TO CERTIFY:

That the ship has been surveyed in accordance with Regulation 8 of Chapter I of the Protocol of 1978 Relating to the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974; and

that the survey showed that the condition of the safety equipment as defined in the above Regulation was in all respects satisfactory and that the ship complied with the requirements of that Protocol.

This certificate is valid until............................................................................................subject to intermediate survey(s) at intervals of.......................................................................................................

Issued at.............................................................................................................................................

(Place of issue of certificate)

 ...................... 19............    ...................................................................................................................

(Signature of duly authorized official issuing the certificate)

(Seal or stamp of the issuing Authority, as appropriate)

INTERMEDIATE SURVEY

This is to certify that at an intermediate survey required by Regulation 8 of Chapter I of the Protocol of 1978 Relating to the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974, the ship was found to comply with the relevant provisions of that Protocol.

Signed....................................................................................................................................

(Signature of duly authorized official)

Place.......................................................................................................................................

Date........................................................................................................................................

Next intermediate survey due.................................................................................................

(Seal or stamp of the Authority, as appropriate)

Signed.....................................................................................................................................

(Signature of duly authorized official)

Place........................................................................................................................................

Date.........................................................................................................................................

(Seal or stamp of the Authority, as appropriate)

Under the provisions of Regulation 14 of Chapter I of the Protocol the validity of this Certificate is extended until..........................................................................................................................

Signed......................................................................................................................................

(Signature of duly authorized official)

Place.........................................................................................................................................

Date..........................................................................................................................................

(Seal or stamp of the Authority, as appropriate)

 


SCHEDULE 4     Section 95

SCHEDULE TO BE INSERTED IN PRINCIPAL ACT BY THIS ACT

“SCHEDULE 5  Sub-section 187a (1)

INTERNATIONAL CONVENTION FOR SAFE CONTAINERS

ARTICLE I

General Obligation under the present Convention

The Contracting Parties undertake to give effect to the provisions of the present Convention and the Annexes hereto, which shall constitute an integral part of the present Convention.

ARTICLE II

Definitions

For the purpose of the present Convention, unless expressly provided otherwise:

1. “Container” means an article of transport equipment:

(a) of a permanent character and accordingly strong enough to be suitable for repeated use;

(b) specially designed to facilitate the transport of goods, by one or more modes of transport, without intermediate reloading;

(c) designed to be secured and/or readily handled, having corner fittings for these purposes;

(d) of a size such that the area enclosed by the four outer bottom corners is either:

(i) at least 14 sq.m. (150 sq.ft.) or

(ii) at least 7 sq. m. (75 sq. ft.) if it is fitted with top corner fittings;

the term “container” includes neither vehicles nor packaging; however, containers when carried on chassis are included.

2. “Corner fittings” means an arrangement of apertures and faces at the top and/or bottom of a container for the purposes of handling, stacking and/or securing.

3. “Administration” means the Government of a Contracting Party under whose authority containers are approved.

4. “Approved” means approved by the Administration.

5. “Approval” means the decision by an Administration that a design type or a container is safe within the terms of the present Convention.

6. “International transport” means transport between points of departure and destination situated in the territory of two countries to at least one of which the present Convention applies. The present Convention shall also apply when part of a transport operation between two countries takes place in the territory of a country to which the present Convention applies.

7. “Cargo” means any goods, wares, merchandise and articles of every kind whatsoever carried in the containers.

8. “New container” means a container the construction of which was commenced on or after the date of entry into force of the present Convention.

9. “Existing container” means a container which is not a new container.

10. “Owner” means the owner as provided for under the national law of the Contracting Party or the lessee or bailee, if an agreement between the parties provides for the exercise of the owner’s responsibility for maintenance and examination of the container by such lessee or bailee.

11. “Type of container” means the design type approved by the Administration.

12. “Type-series container” means any container manufactured in accordance with the approved design type.

13. “Prototype” means a container representative of those manufactured or to be manufactured in a design type series.


SCHEDULE 4–continued

“SCHEDULE 5–continued

14. “Maximum Operating Gross Weight or Rating” or “R” means the maximum allowable combined weight of the container and its cargo.

15. “Tare Weight” means the weight of the empty container including permanently affixed ancillary equipment.

16. “Maximum Permissible Payload” or “P” means the difference between maximum operating gross weight or rating and tare weight.

ARTICLE III

Application

1. The present Convention applies to new and existing containers used in international transport, excluding containers specially designed for air transport.

2. Every new container shall be approved either in accordance with the provisions for type-testing or for individual testing as contained in Annex 1.

3. Every existing container shall be approved in accordance with the relevant provisions for approval of existing containers set out in Annex I within 5 years from the date of entry into force of the present Convention.

ARTICLE IV

Testing, Inspection, Approval and Maintenance

1. For the enforcement of the provisions in Annex I every Administration shall establish an effective procedure for the testing, inspection and approval of containers in accordance with the criteria established in the present Convention, provided however that an Administration may entrust such testing, inspection and approval to organizations duly authorized by it.

2. An Administration which entrusts such testing, inspection and approval to an organization shall inform the Secretary-General of the Inter-Governmental Maritime Consultative Organization (hereinafter referred to as “the Organization”) for communication to Contracting Parties.

3. Application for approval may be made to the Administration of any Contracting Party.

4. Every container shall be maintained in a safe condition in accordance with the provisions of Annex I.

5. If an approved container does not in fact comply with the requirements of Annexes I and II. the Administration concerned shall take such steps as it deems necessary to bring the container into compliance with such requirements or to withdraw the approval.

ARTICLE V

Acceptance of Approval

1. Approval under the authority of a Contracting Party, granted under the terms of the present Convention, shall be accepted by the other Contracting Parties for all purposes covered by the present Convention. It shall be regarded by the other Contracting Parties as having the same force as an approval issued by them.

2. A Contracting Party shall not impose any other structural safety requirements or tests on containers covered by the present Convention, provided however that nothing in the present Convention shall preclude the application of provisions of national regulations or legislation or of international agreements, prescribing additional structural safety requirements or tests for containers specially designed for the transport of dangerous goods, or for those features unique to containers carrying bulk liquids or for containers when carried by air. The term “dangerous goods” shall have that meaning assigned to it by international agreements.

ARTICLE VI

Control

1. Every container which has been approved under article III shall be subject to control in the territory of the Contracting Parties by officers duly authorized by such Contracting Parties. This control shall be limited to verifying that the container carries a valid Safety Approval


SCHEDULE 4–continued

“SCHEDULE 5–continued

Plate as required by the present Convention, unless there is significant evidence for believing that the condition of the container is such as to create an obvious risk to safety. In that case the officer carrying out the control shall only exercise it in so far as it may be necessary to ensure that the container is restored to a safe condition before it continues in service.

2. Where the container appears to have become unsafe as a result of a defect which may have existed when the container was approved, the Administration responsible for that approval shall be informed by the Contracting Party which detected the defect.

ARTICLE VII

Signature, ratification, acceptance, approval and accession

1. The present Convention shall be opened for signature until 15 January 1973 at the Office of the United Nations at Geneva and sub-sequently from 1 February 1973 until 31 December 1973 inclusive at the Headquarters of the Organization at London by all States Members of the United Nations or Members of any of the Specialized Agencies or of the International Atomic Energy Agency or parties to the Statute of the International Court of Justice, and by any other State invited by the General Assembly of the United Nations to become a Party to the present Convention.

2. The present Convention is subject to ratification, acceptance or approval by States which have signed it.

3. The present Convention shall remain open for accession by any State referred to in paragraph 1.

4. Instruments of ratification, acceptance, approval or accession shall be deposited with the Secretary-General of the Organization (hereinafter referred to as “the Secretary-General”).

ARTICLE VIII

Entry into force

1. The present Convention shall enter into force twelve months from the date of the deposit of the tenth instrument of ratification, acceptance, approval or accession.

2. For each State ratifying, accepting, approving or acceding to the present Convention after the deposit of the tenth instrument of ratification, acceptance, approval or accession, the present Convention shall enter into force twelve months after the date of the deposit by such State of its instrument of ratification, acceptance, approval or accession.

3. Any State which becomes a Party to the present Convention after the entry into force of an amendment shall, failing an expression of a different intention by that State,

(a) be considered as a Party to the Convention as amended; and

(b) be considered as a Party to the unamended Convention in relation to any Party to the Convention not bound by the amendment.

ARTICLE IX

Procedure for amending any part or parts of the present Convention

1. The present Convention may be amended upon the proposal of a Contracting Party by any of the procedures specified in this article.

2. Amendment after consideration in the Organization:

(a) Upon the request of a Contracting Party, any amendment proposed by it to the present Convention shall be considered in the Organization. If adopted by a majority of two-thirds of those present and voting in the Maritime Safety Committee of the Organization, to which all Contracting Parties shall have been invited to participate and vote, such amendment shall be communicated to all Members of the Organization and all Contracting Parties at least six months prior to its consideration by the Assembly of the Organization. Any Contracting Party which is not a Member of the Organization shall be entitled to participate and vote when the amendment is considered by the Assembly.

SCHEDULE 4–continued

“SCHEDULE 5–continued

(b) If adopted by a two-thirds majority of those present and voting in the Assembly, and if such majority includes a two-thirds majority of the Contracting Parties present and voting, the amendment shall be communicated by the Secretary-General to all Contracting Parties for their acceptance.

(c) such amendment shall come into force twelve months after the date on which it is accepted by two-thirds of the Contracting Parties. The amendment shall come into force with respect to all Contracting Parties except those which, before it comes into force, make a declaration that they do not accept the amendment.

3. Amendment by a Conference:

Upon the request of a Contracting Party, concurred in by at least one-third of the Contracting Parties, a Conference to which the States referred to in article VII shall be invited will be convened by the Secretary-General.

ARTICLE X

Special procedure for amending the Annexes

1. Any amendment to the Annexes proposed by a Contracting Party shall be considered in the Organization at the request of that Party.

2. If adopted by a two-thirds majority of those present and voting in the Maritime Safety Committee of the Organization to which all Contracting Parties shall have been invited to participate and to vote, and if such majority includes a two-thirds majority of the Contracting Parties present and voting, such amendment shall be communicated by the Secretary-General to all Contracting Parties for their acceptance.

3. Such an amendment shall enter into force on a date to be determined by the Maritime Safety Committee at the time of its adoption unless by a prior date determined by the Maritime Safety Committee at the same time, one-fifth or five of the Contracting Parties, whichever number is less, notify the Secretary-General of their objection to the amendment. Determination by the Maritime Safety Committee of the dates referred to in this paragraph shall be by a two-thirds majority of those present and voting, which majority shall include a two-thirds majority of the Contracting Parties present and voting.

4. On entry into force any amendment shall, for all Contracting Parties which have not objected to the amendment, replace and supersede any previous provision to which the amendment refers; an objection made by a Contracting Party shall not be binding on other Contracting Parties as to acceptance of containers to which the present Convention applies.

5. The Secretary-General shall inform all Contracting Parties and Members of the Organization of any request and communication under this article and the date on which any amendment enters into force.

6. Where a proposed amendment to the Annexes has been considered but not adopted by the Maritime Safety Committee, any Contracting Party may request the convening of a Conference to which the States referred to in article VII shall be invited. Upon receipt of notification of concurrence by at least one-third of the other Contracting Parties such a Conference shall be convened by the Secretary-General to consider amendments to the Annexes.

ARTICLE XI

Denunciation

1. Any Contracting Party may denounce the present Convention by effecting the deposit of an instrument with the Secretary-General. The denunciation shall take effect one year from the date of such deposit with the Secretary-General.

2. A Contracting Party which has communicated an objection to an amendment to the Annexes may denounce the present Convention and such denunciation shall take effect on the date of entry into force of such an amendment.

ARTICLE XII

Termination

The present Convention shall cease to be in force if the number of Contracting Parties is less than five for any period of twelve consecutive months.

SCHEDULE 4–continued

“SCHEDULE 5–continued

ARTICLE XIII

Settlement of Disputes

1. Any dispute between two or more Contracting Parties concerning the interpretation or application of the present Convention which cannot be settled by negotiation or other means of settlement shall, at the request of one of them, be referred to an arbitration tribunal composed as follows: each party to the dispute shall appoint an arbitrator and these two arbitrators shall appoint a third arbitrator, who shall be the Chairman. If, three months after receipt of a request, one of the parties has failed to appoint an arbitrator or if the arbitrators have failed to elect the Chairman, any of the parties may request the Secretary-General to appoint an arbitrator or the Chairman of the arbitration tribunal.

2. The decision of the arbitration tribunal established under the provisions of paragraph 1 shall be binding on the parties to the dispute.

3. The arbitration tribunal shall determine its own rules of procedure.

4. Decisions of the arbitration tribunal, both as to its procedure and its place of meeting and as to any controversy laid before it, shall be taken by majority vote.

5. Any controversy which may arise between the parties to the dispute as regards the interpretation and execution of the award may be submitted by any of the parties for judgment to the arbitration tribunal which made the award.

ARTICLE XIV

Reservations

1. Reservations to the present Convention shall be permitted, excepting those relating to the provisions of articles I–VI, XIII, the present article and the Annexes, on condition that such reservations are communicated in writing and, if communicated before the deposit of the instrument of ratification, acceptance, approval or accession, are confirmed in that instrument. The Secretary-General shall communicate such reservations to all States referred to in article VII.

2. Any reservations made in accordance with paragraph 1:

(a) modifies for the Contracting Party which made the reservation the provisions of the present Convention to which the reservation relates to the extent of the reservation; and

(b) modifies those provisions to the same extent for the other Contracting Parties in their relations with the Contracting Party which entered the reservation.

3. Any Contracting Party which has formulated a reservation under paragraph 1 may withdraw it at any time by notification to the Secretary-General.

ARTICLE XV

Notification

In addition to the notifications and communications provided for in articles IX, X and XIV, the Secretary-General shall notify all the States referred to in article VII of the following:

(a) signatures, ratifications, acceptances, approvals and accessions under article VII;

(b) the dates of entry into force of the present Convention in accordance with article VIII;

(c) the date of entry into force of amendments to the present Convention in accordance with articles IX and X;

(d) denunciations under article XI;

(e) the termination of the present Convention under article XII.

ARTICLE XVI

Authentic texts

The original of the present Convention, of which the Chinese, English, French, Russian and Spanish texts are equally authentic, shall be deposited with the Secretary-General, who shall communicate certified true copies to all States referred to in article VII.


SCHEDULE 4–continued

“SCHEDULE 5–continued

ANNEX I

REGULATIONS FOR THE TESTING, INSPECTION, APPROVAL AND MAINTENANCE OF CONTAINERS

CHAPTER I–REGULATIONS COMMON TO ALL SYSTEMS OF APPROVAL

Regulation 1

Safety Approval Plate

1. A Safety Approval Plate conforming to the specifications set out in the Appendix to this Annex shall be permanently affixed to every approved container at a readily visible place, adjacent to any other approval plate issued for official purposes, where it would not be easily damaged.

2. (a) The Plate shall contain the following information in at least the English or French language:

“CSC SAFETY APPROVAL”

Country of approval and approval reference

Date (month and year) of manufacture

Manufacturer’s identification number of the container or, in the case of existing containers for which that number is unknown, the number allotted by the Administration

Maximum operating gross weight (kilogrammes and lbs)

Allowable stacking weight for 1.8 g (kilogrammes and lbs)

Transverse racking test load value (kilogrammes and lbs).

(b) A blank space should be reserved on the Plate for insertion of end-wall and/or side-wall strength values (factors) in accordance with paragraph 3 of this Regulation and Annex II, tests 6 and 7. A blank space should also be reserved on the Plate for the first and sub-sequent maintenance examination dates (month and year) when used.

3. Where the Administration considers that a new container satisfies the requirements of the present Convention in respect of safety and if, for such container, the end-wall and/or side-wall strength values (factors) are designed to be greater or less than those stipulated in Annex II, such values shall be indicated on the Safety Approval Plate.

4. The presence of the Safety Approval Plate does not remove the necessity of displaying such labels or other information as may be required by other regulations which may be in force.

Regulation 2

Maintenance

1. The owner of the container shall be responsible for maintaining it in safe condition.

2. The owner of an approved container shall examine the container or have it examined in accordance with the procedure either prescribed or approved by the Contracting Party concerned, at intervals appropriate to operating conditions. The date (month and year) before which a new container shall undergo its first examination shall be marked on the Safety Approval Plate.

3. The date (month and year) before which the container shall be re-examined shall be clearly marked on the container on or as close as practicable to the Safety Approval Plate and in a manner acceptable to that Contracting Party which prescribed or approved the particular maintenance procedure involved.

4. The interval from the date of manufacture to the date of the first examination shall not exceed five years. Sub-sequent examination of new containers and re-examination of existing containers shall be at intervals of not more than 24 months. All examinations shall determine whether the container has any defects which could place any person in danger.

5. For the purpose of this Regulation “the Contracting Party concerned” is the Contracting Party of the territory in which the owner is domiciled or has his head office.


SCHEDULE 4–continued

“SCHEDULE 5–continued

CHAPTER II–REGULATIONS FOR APPROVAL OF NEW CONTAINERS BY DESIGN TYPE

Regulation 3

Approval of New Containers

To qualify for approval for safety purposes under the present Convention all new containers shall comply with the requirements set out in Annex II.

Regulation 4

Design Type Approval

In the case of containers for which an application for approval has been submitted, the Administration will examine designs and witness testing of a prototype container to ensure that the containers will conform with the requirements set out in Annex II. When satisfied, the Administration shall notify the applicant in writing that the container meets the requirements of the present Convention and this notification shall entitle the manufacturer to affix the Safety Approval Plate to every container of the design type series.

Regulation 5

Provisions for Approval by Design Type

1. Where the containers are to be manufactured by design type series, application made to an Administration for approval by design type shall be accompanied by drawings, a design specification of the type of container to be approved and such other data as may be required by the Administration.

2. The applicant shall state the identification symbols which will be assigned by the manufacturer to the type of container to which the application for approval relates.

3. The application shall also be accompanied by an assurance from the manufacturer that he will:

(a) produce to the Administration such containers of the design type concerned as the Administration may wish to examine;

(b) advise the Administration of any change in the design or specification and await its approval before affixing the Safety Approval Plate to the container;

(c) affix the Safety Approval Plate to each container in the design type series and to no others;

(d) keep a record of containers manufactured to the approved design type. This record shall at least contain the manufacturer’s identification numbers, dates of delivery and names and addresses of customers to whom the containers are delivered.

4. Approval may be granted by the Administration to containers manufactured as modifications of an approved design type if the Administration is satisfied that the modifications do not affect the validity of tests conducted in the course of design type approval.

5. The Administration shall not confer on a manufacturer authority to affix Safety Approval Plates on the basis of design type approval unless satisfied that the manufacturer has instituted internal production-control features to ensure that the containers produced will conform to the approved prototype.

Regulation 6

Examination during Production

In order to ensure that containers of the same design type series are manufactured to the approved design, the Administration shall examine or test as many units as it considers necessary, at any stage during production of the design type series concerned.

Regulation 7

Notification of Administration

The manufacturer shall notify the Administration prior to commencement of production of each new series of containers to be manufactured in accordance with an approved design type.


SCHEDULE 4–continued

“SCHEDULE 5–continued

CHAPTER IIIREGULATIONS FOR APPROVAL OF NEW CONTAINERS BY INDIVIDUAL APPROVAL

Regulation 8

Approval of Individual Containers

Approval of individual containers may be granted where the Administration, after examination and witnessing of tests, is satisfied that the container meets the requirements of the present Convention; the Administration, when so satisfied, shall notify the applicant in writing of approval and this notification shall entitle him to affix the Safety Approval Plate to such container.

CHAPTER IVREGULATIONS FOR APPROVAL OF EXISTING CONTAINERS

Regulation 9

Approval of Existing Containers

1. If, within 5 years from the date of entry into force of the present Convention, the owner of an existing container presents the following information to an Administration:

(a) date and place of manufacture;

(b) manufacturer’s identification number of the container if available;

(c) maximum operating gross weight capability;

(d) (i) evidence that a container of this type has been safely operated in maritime and /or inland transport for a period of at least two years, or

(ii) evidence to the satisfaction of the Administration that the container was manufactured to a design type which had been tested and found to comply with the technical conditions set out in Annex II, with the exception of those technical conditions relating to the end-wall and side-wall strength tests, or

(iii) evidence that the container was constructed to standards which, in the opinion of the Administration, were equivalent to the technical conditions set out in Annex II, with the exception of those technical conditions relating to the end-wall and side-wall strength tests;

(e) allowable stacking weight for 1.8 g (kilogrammes and lbs); and

(f) such other data as required for the Safety Approval Plate,

then the Administration, after investigation, shall notify the owner in writing whether approval is granted; and if so, this notification shall entitle the owner to affix the Safety Approval Plate after an examination of the container concerned has been carried out in accordance with Regulation 2.

2. Existing containers which do not qualify for approval under paragraph 1 of this Regulation may be presented for approval under the provisions of Chapter II or Chapter III of this Annex. For such containers the requirements of Annex II relating to end-wall and/or side-wall strength tests shall not apply. The Administration may, if it is satisfied that the containers in question have been in service, waive such of the requirements in respect of presentation of drawings and testing, other than the lifting and floor-strength tests, as it may deem appropriate.

APPENDIX

The Safety Approval Plate, conforming to the model reproduced below, shall take the form of a permanent, non-corrosive, fire-proof rectangular plate measuring not less than 200 mm by 100 mm. The words “CSC Safety Approval” of a minimum letter height of 8 mm and all other words and numbers of a minimum height of 5 mm shall be stamped into, embossed on or indicated on the surface of the Plate in any other permanent and legible way.


SCHEDULE 4–continued

“SCHEDULE 5–continued

1. Country of Approval and Approval Reference as given in the example on line 1. (The country of Approval should be indicated by means of the distinguishing sign used to indicate country of registration of motor vehicles in international road traffic).

2. Date (month and year) of manufacture.

3. Manufacturer’s identification number of the container or, in the case of existing containers for which that number is unknown, the number allotted by the Administration.

4. Maximum Operating Gross Weight (kilogrammes and lbs.).

5. Allowable Stacking Weight for 1.8 g (kilogrammes and lbs.).

6. Transverse Racking Test Load Value (kilogrammes and lbs.).

7. End Wall Strength to be indicated on plate only if end walls are designed to withstand a load of less or greater than 0.4 times the maximum permissible payload, i.e. 0.4 P.

8. Side Wall Strength to be indicated on plate only if the side walls are designed to withstand a load of less or greater than 0.6 times the maximum permissible payload, i.e. 0.6 P.

9. First maintenance examination date (month and year) for new containers and sub-sequent maintenance examination dates (month and year) if Plate used for this purpose.

ANNEX II

STRUCTURAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS AND TESTS

Introduction

In setting the requirements of this Annex, it is implicit that in all phases of the operation of containers the forces as a result of motion, location, stacking and weight of the loaded container and external forces will not exceed the design strength of the container. In particular, the following assumptions have been made:

(a) the container will so be restrained that it is not subjected to forces in excess of those for which it has been designed;

(b) the container will have its cargo stowed in accordance with the recommended practices of the trade so that the cargo does not impose upon the container forces in excess of those for which it has been designed.

Construction

1. A container made from any suitable material which satisfactorily performs the following tests without sustaining any permanent deformation or abnormality which would render it incapable of being used for its designed purpose shall be considered safe.

2. The dimensions, positioning and associated tolerances of corner fittings shall be checked having regard to the lifting and securing systems in which they will function.


SCHEDULE 4–continued

“SCHEDULE 5–continued

3. When containers are provided with special fittings for use only when such containers are empty, this restriction shall be marked on the container.

Test loads and test procedures

Where appropriate to the design of the container, the following test loads and test procedures shall be applied to all kinds of containers under test:

Test loadings and applied forces

Test procedures

1. LIFTING

The container, having the prescribed INTERNAL LOADING, shall be lifted in such a way that no significant acceleration forces are applied. After lifting, the container shall be suspended or supported for five minutes and then lowered to the ground.

(A) Lifting from corner fittings

Internal loading:

A uniformly distributed load such that the combined weight of container and test load is equal to 2 R

(i) Lifting from top corner fittings:

Containers greater than 3,000 mm (10ft.) (nominal) in length shall have lifting forces applied vertically at all four top corner fittings. Containers of 3,000 mm (10 ft.) (nominal) in length or less shall have lifting forces applied at all four top corner fittings, in such a way that the angle between each lifting device and the vertical shall be 30°.

Externally applied forces:

Such as to lift the combined weight of 2 R in the manner prescribed (under the heading TEST PROCEDURES).

(ii) Lifting from bottom corner fittings:

Containers shall have lifting forces applied in such a manner that the lifting devices bear on the bottom corner fittings only. The lifting forces shall be applied at angles to the horizontal of:

30° for containers of length 12,000 mm (40 ft.) (nominal) or greater;

37° for containers of length 9,000 mm (30 ft.) (nominal) and up to but not including 12,000 mm (40 ft.) (nominal),

45° for containers of length 6,000 mm (20 ft.) (nominal) and up to but not including 9,000 mm (30 ft.) (nominal),

60° for containers of less than 6,000 mm (20 ft.) (nominal).

(B) Lifting by any other additional methods

Internal loading:

A uniformly distributed load such that the combined weight of container and test load is equal to 1.25 R.

Externally applied forces:

Such as to lift the combined weight of 1.25 R in the manner prescribed (under the heading TEST PROCEDURES).

(i) Lifting from fork lift pockets:

The container shall be placed on bars which are in the same horizontal plane, one bar centred within each fork lift pocket which is used for lifting the loaded container. The bars shall be of the same width as the forks intended to be used in the handling, and shall project into the fork pocket 75 per cent of the length of the fork pocket.

Internal loading:

A uniformly distributed load such that the combined weight of containers and test load is equal to 1.25 R.

(ii) Lifting from grappler arm positions:

The container shall be placed on pads in the same horizontal plane, one under each grappler arm position. These pads shall be of the same sizes as the lifting area of the grappler arms intended to be used.


SCHEDULE 4–continued

“SCHEDULE 5–continued

Test loadings and applied forces

Test procedures

Externally applied forces:

Such as to lift the combined weight of 1.25 R, in the manner prescribed (under the heading TEST PROCEDURES).

(iii) Other Methods

Where containers are designed to be lifted in the loaded condition by any method not mentioned in (A) or (B) (i) and (ii) they shall also be tested with the INTERNAL LOADING AND EXTERNALLY APPLIED FORCES representative of the acceleration conditions appropriate to that method.

2. STACKING

1. For conditions of international transport where the maximum vertical acceleration forces vary significantly from 1.8 g and when the container is reliably and effectively limited to such conditions of transport, the stacking load may be varied by the appropriate ratio of acceleration forces.

2. On successful completion of this test the container may be rated for the allowable superimposed static stacking weight which should be indicated on the Safety Approval Plate against the heading “Allowable stacking weight for 1.8 g (kilogrammes and lbs)”.

Internal loading:

 

A uniformly distributed load such that the combined weight of container and test load is equal to 1.8 R.

The container, having the prescribed INTERNAL LOADING, shall be placed on four level pads which are in turn supported on a rigid horizontal surface, one under each bottom corner fitting or equivalent corner structure. The pads shall be centralized under the fittings and shall be of approximately the same plan dimensions as the fittings.

Externally applied forces:

 

Such as to subject each of the four top corner fittings to a vertical downward force equal to ¼ × 1.8 × the allowable superimposed static stacking weight.

Each EXTERNALLY APPLIED FORCE shall be applied to each of the corner fittings through a corresponding test corner fitting or through a pad of the same plan dimensions. The test corner fitting or pad shall be offset with respect to the top corner fitting of the container by 25 mm (1 in.) laterally and 38 mm (1½ in.) longitudinally.

3. CONCENTRATED LOADS

 

(a) On roof

Internal loading:

None.

 

Externally applied forces:

 

A concentrated load of 300 kg (660 lb.) uniformly distributed over an area of 600 mm × 300 mm (24 in. × 12 in.).

The EXTERNALLY APPLIED FORCES shall be applied vertically downwards to the outer surface of the weakest area of the roof of the container.

3. CONCENTRATED LOADS

 

(b) On floor

Internal loading:

 

Two concentrated loads each of 2,730 kg (6,000 lb.) and each applied to the container floor through a contact area of 142 cm2 (22 sq in.).

The test should be made with the container resting on four level supports under its four bottom corners in such a manner that the base structure of the container is free to deflect.


SCHEDULE 4–continued

“SCHEDULE 5–continued

Test loadings and applied forces

Test procedures

 

A testing device loaded to a weight of 5,460 kg (12,000 lb.) that is 2,730 kg (6,000 lb.) on each of two surfaces having, when loaded, a total contact area of 284 cm2 (44 sq in.) that is 142 cm2 (22 sq in.) on each surface, the surface width being 180 mm (7 in.) spaced 760 mm (30 in.) apart, centre to centre, should be manoeuvred over the entire floor area of the container.

Externally applied forces:

None.

 

4. TRANSVERSE RACKING

Internal loading:

None.

The container in tare condition shall be placed on four level supports one under each bottom corner and shall be restrained against lateral and vertical movement by means of anchor devices so arranged that the lateral restraint is provided only at the bottom corners diagonally opposite to those at which the forces are applied.

Externally applied forces:

Such as to rack the end structures of the container sideways. The forces shall be equal to those for which the container was designed.

The EXTERNALLY APPLIED FORCES shall be applied either separately or simultaneously to each of the top corner fittings on one side of the container in lines parallel both to the base and to the planes of the ends of the container. The forces shall be applied first towards and then away from the top corner fittings. In the case of containers in which each end is symmetrical about its own vertical centreline, one side only need be tested, but both sides of containers with asymmetric ends shall be tested.

5. LONGITUDINAL RESTRAINT (STATIC TEST)

When designing and constructing containers, it must be borne in mind that containers, when carried by inland modes of transport may sustain accelerations of 2 g applied horizontally in a longitudinal direction.

Internal loading:

 

A uniformly distributed load, such that the combined weight of a container and test load is equal to the maximum operating gross weight or rating, R.

The container having the prescribed INTERNAL LOADING shall be restrained longitudinally by securing the two bottom corner fittings or equivalent corner structures at one end to suitable anchor points.

Externally applied forces:

 

Such as to subject each side of the container to longitudinal compressive and tensile forces of magnitude R, that is, a combined force of 2R on the base of the container as a whole.

The EXTERNALLY APPLIED FORCES shall be applied first towards and then away from the anchor points. Each side of the container shall be tested.

6. END-WALLS

The end-walls should be capable of withstanding a load of not less than 0.4 times the maximum permissible payload. If, however, the end-walls are designed to withstand a load of less or greater than 0.4 times the maximum permissible payload such a strength factor shall be indicated on the Safety Approval Plate in accordance with Annex I, Regulation 1.


SCHEDULE 4–continued

“SCHEDULE 5–continued

Test loadings and applied forces

Test procedures

Internal loading:

 

Such as to subject the inside of an end-wall to a uniformly distributed load of 0.4P or such other load for which the container may be designed.

The prescribed INTERNAL LOADING shall be applied as follows:

Both ends of a container shall be tested except where the ends are identical only one end need be tested. The end-walls of containers which do not have open sides or side doors may be tested separately or simultaneously. The end-walls of containers which do have open sides or side doors should be tested separately. When the ends are tested separately the reactions to the forces applied to the end-wall shall be confined to the base structure of the container.

Externally applied forces:

None.

 

7. SIDE-WALLS

The side-walls should be capable of withstanding a load of not less than 0.6 times the maximum permissible payload. If, however, the side-walls are designed to withstand a load of less or greater than 0.6 times the maximum permissible payload, such a strength factor shall be indicated on the Safety Approval Plate in accordance with Annex I, Regulation 1.

Internal loading:

 

Such as to subject the inside of a side-wall to a uniformly distributed load of 0.6P or such other load for which the container may be designed.

The prescribed INTERNAL LOADING shall be applied as follows:

Both sides of a container shall be tested except where the sides are identical only one side need be tested. Side-walls shall be tested separately and the reactions to the internal loading shall be confined to the corner fittings or equivalent corner structures. Open topped containers shall be tested in the condition in which they are designed to be operated, for example, with removable top members in position.

Externally applied forces:

None.

 

 


SCHEDULE 5    Section 97

SCHEDULE TO BE INSERTED IN PRINCIPAL ACT BY THIS ACT

“SCHEDULE 8   Section 405b

INTERNATIONAL CONVENTION ON TONNAGE MEASUREMENT OF SHIPS, 1969

ARTICLE 1

General Obligation under the Convention

The Contracting Governments undertake to give effect to the provisions of the present Convention and the Annexes hereto which shall constitute an integral part of the present Convention. Every reference to the present Convention constitutes at the same time a reference to the Annexes.

ARTICLE 2

Definitions

For the purpose of the present Convention, unless expressly provided otherwise:

(1) “Regulations” means the Regulations annexed to the present Convention;

(2) “Administration” means the Government of the State whose flag the ship is flying;

(3) “international voyage” means a sea voyage from a country to which the present Convention applies to a port outside such country, or conversely. For this purpose, every territory for the international relations of which a Contracting Government is responsible or for which the United Nations are the administering authority is regarded as a separate country;

(4) “gross tonnage” means the measure of the overall size of a ship determined in accordance with the provisions of the present Convention;

(5) “net tonnage” means the measure of the useful capacity of a ship determined in accordance with the provisions of the present Convention;

(6) “new ship” means a ship the keel of which is laid, or which is at a similar stage of construction, on or after the date of coming into force of the present Convention;

(7) “existing ship” means a ship which is not a new ship;

(8) “length” means 96 per cent of the total length on a waterline at 85 per cent of the least moulded depth measured from the top of the keel, or the length from the fore side of the stem to the axis of the rudder stock on that waterline, if that be greater. In ships designed with a rake of keel the waterline on which this length is measured shall be parallel to the designed waterline;

(9) “Organization” means the Inter-Governmental Maritime Consultative Organization.

ARTICLE 3

Application

(1) The present Convention shall apply to the following ships engaged on international voyages:

(a) ships registered in countries the Governments of which are Contracting Governments;

(b) ships registered in territories to which the present Convention is extended under Article 20; and

(c) unregistered ships flying the flag of a State, the Government of which is a Contracting Government.


SCHEDULE 5–continued

“SCHEDULE 8–continued

(2) The present Convention shall apply to:

(a) new ships;

(b) existing ships which undergo alterations or modifications which the Administration deems to be a substantial variation in their existing gross tonnage;

(c) existing ships if the owner so requests; and

(d) all existing ships, twelve years after the date on which the Convention comes into force, except that such ships, apart from those mentioned in (b) and (c) of this paragraph, shall retain their then existing tonnages for the purpose of the application to them of relevant requirements under other existing International Conventions.

(3) Existing ships to which the present Convention has been applied in accordance with sub-paragraph (2) (c) of this Article shall not sub-sequently have their tonnages determined in accordance with the requirements which the Administration applied to ships on international voyages prior to the coming into force of the present Convention.

ARTICLE 4

Exceptions

(1) The present Convention shall not apply to:

(a) ships of war; and

(b) ships of less than 24 metres (79 feet) in length.

(2) Nothing herein shall apply to ships solely navigating:

(a) the Great Lakes of North America and the River St. Lawrence as far east as a rhumb line drawn from Cap des Rosiers to West Point, Anticosti Island, and, on the north side of Anticosti Island, the meridian of longitude 63°W;

(b) the Caspian Sea; or

(c) the Plate, Parana and Uruguay Rivers as far east as a rhumb line drawn between Punta Rasa (Cabo San Antonio), Argentina, and Punta del Este, Uruguay.

ARTICLE 5

Force Majeure

(1) A ship which is not subject to the provisions of the present Convention at the time of its departure on any voyage shall not become subject to such provisions on account of any deviation from its intended voyage due to stress of weather or any other cause of force majeure.

(2) In applying the provisions of the present Convention, the Contracting Governments shall give due consideration to any deviation or delay caused to any ship owing to stress of weather or any other cause of force majeure.

ARTICLE 6

Determination of Tonnages

The determination of gross and net tonnages shall be carried out by the Administration which may, however, entrust such determination either to persons or organizations recognized by it. In every case the Administration concerned shall accept full responsibility for the determination of gross and net tonnages.

ARTICLE 7

Issue of Certificate

(1) An International Tonnage Certificate (1969) shall be issued to every ship, the gross and net tonnages of which have been determined in accordance with the present Convention.


SCHEDULE 5–continued

“SCHEDULE 8–continued

(2) Such certificate shall be issued by the Administration or by any person or organization duly authorized by it. In every case, the Administration shall assume full responsibility for the certificate.

ARTICLE 8

Issue of Certificate by another Government

(1) A Contracting Government may, at the request of another Contracting Government, determine the gross and net tonnages of a ship and issue or authorize the issue of an International Tonnage Certificate (1969) to the ship in accordance with the present Convention.

(2) A copy of the certificate and a copy of the calculations of the tonnages shall be transmitted as early as possible to the requesting Government.

(3) A certificate so issued shall contain a statement to the effect that it has been issued at the request of the Government of the State whose flag the ship is or will be flying and it shall have the same validity and receive the same recognition as a certificate issued under Article 7.

(4) No International Tonnage Certificate (1969) shall be issued to a ship which is flying the flag of a State the Government of which is not a Contracting Government.

ARTICLE 9

Form of Certificate

(1) The certificate shall be drawn up in the official language or languages of the issuing country. If the language used is neither English nor French, the text shall include a translation into one of these languages.

(2) The form of the certificate shall correspond to that of the model given in Annex II.

ARTICLE 10

Cancellation of Certificate

(1) Subject to any exceptions provided in the Regulations, an International Tonnage Certificate (1969) shall cease to be valid and shall be cancelled by the Administration if alterations have taken place in the arrangement, construction, capacity, use of spaces, total number of passengers the ship is permitted to carry as indicated in the ship’s passenger certificate, assigned load line or permitted draught of the ship, such as would necessitate an increase in gross tonnage or net tonnage.

(2) A certificate issued to a ship by an Administration shall cease to be valid upon transfer of such a ship to the flag of another State, except as provided in paragraph (3) of this Article.

(3) Upon transfer of a ship to the flag of another State the Government of which is a Contracting Government, the International Tonnage Certificate (1969) shall remain in force for a period not exceeding three months, or until the Administration issues another International Tonnage Certificate (1969) to replace it, whichever is the earlier. The Contracting Government of the State whose flag the ship was flying hitherto shall transmit to the Administration as soon as possible after the transfer takes place a copy of the certificate carried by the ship at the time of transfer and a copy of the relevant tonnage calculations.

ARTICLE 11

Acceptance of Certificate

The certificate issued under the authority of a Contracting Government in accordance with the present Convention shall be accepted by the other Contracting Governments and regarded for all purposes covered by the present Convention as having the same validity as certificates issued by them.


SCHEDULE 5–continued

“SCHEDULE 8–continued

ARTICLE 12

Inspection

(1) A ship flying the flag of a State the Government of which is a Contracting Government shall be subject, when in the ports of other Contracting Governments, to inspection by officers duly authorized by such Governments. Such inspection shall be limited to the purpose of verifying:

(a) that the ship is provided with a valid International Tonnage Certificate (1969); and

(b) that the main characteristics of the ship correspond to the data given in the certificate.

(2) In no case shall the exercise of such inspection cause any delay to the ship.

(3) Should the inspection reveal that the main characteristics of the ship differ from those entered on the International Tonnage Certificate (1969) so as to lead to an increase in the gross tonnage or the net tonnage, the Government of the State whose flag the ship is flying shall be informed without delay.

ARTICLE 13

Privileges

The privileges of the present Convention may not be claimed in favour of any ship unless it holds a valid certificate under the Convention.

ARTICLE 14

Prior Treaties, Conventions and Arrangements

(1) All other treaties, conventions and arrangements relating to tonnage matters at present in force between Governments Parties to the present Convention shall continue to have full and complete effect during the terms thereof as regards:

(a) ships to which the present Convention does not apply; and

(b) ships to which the present Convention applies, in respect of matters for which it has not expressly provided.

(2) To the extent, however, that such treaties, conventions or arrangements conflict with the provisions of the present Convention, the provisions of the present Convention shall prevail.

ARTICLE 15

Communication of Information

The Contracting Governments undertake to communicate to and deposit with the Organization:

(a) a sufficient number of specimens of their certificates issued under the provisions of the present Convention for circulation to the Contracting Governments;

(b) the text of the laws, orders, decrees, regulations and other instruments which shall have been promulgated on the various matters within the scope of the present Convention; and

(c) a list of non-governmental agencies which are authorized to act in their behalf in matters relating to tonnages for circulation to the Contracting Governments.

ARTICLE 16

Signature, Acceptance and Accession

(1) The present Convention shall remain open for signature for six months from 23 June 1969, and shall thereafter remain open for accession. Governments of States Members of the United Nations, or of any of the Specialized Agencies, or of the International Atomic Energy Agency, or parties to the Statute of the International Court of Justice may become Parties to the Convention by;


SCHEDULE 5–continued

“SCHEDULE 8–continued

(a) signature without reservation as to acceptance;

(b) signature subject to acceptance followed by acceptance; or

(c) accession.

(2) Acceptance or accession shall be effected by the deposit of an instrument of acceptance or accession with the Organization. The Organization shall inform all Governments which have signed the present Convention or acceded to it of each new acceptance or accession and of the date of its deposit. The Organization shall also inform all Governments which have already signed the Convention of any signature effected during the six months from 23 June 1969.

ARTICLE 17

Coming into Force

(1) The present Convention shall come into force twenty-four months after the date on which not less than twenty-five Governments of States the combined merchant fleets of which constitute not less than sixty-five per cent of the gross tonnage of the world’s merchant shipping have signed without reservation as to acceptance or deposited instruments of acceptance or accession in accordance with Article 16. The Organization shall inform all Governments which have signed or acceded to the present Convention of the date on which it comes into force.

(2) For Governments which have deposited an instrument of acceptance of or accession to the present Convention during the twenty-four months mentioned in paragraph (1) of this Article, the acceptance or accession shall take effect on the coming into force of the present Convention or three months after the date of deposit of the instrument of acceptance or accession, whichever is the later date.

(3) For Governments which have deposited an instrument of acceptance of or accession to the present Convention after the date on which it comes into force, the Convention shall come into force three months after the date of the deposit of such instrument.

(4) After the date on which all the measures required to bring an amendment to the present Convention into force have been completed, or all necessary acceptances are deemed to have been given under sub-paragraph (b) of paragraph (2) of Article 18 in case of amendment by unanimous acceptance, any instrument of acceptance or accession deposited shall be deemed to apply to the Convention as amended.

ARTICLE 18

Amendments

(1) The present Convention may be amended upon the proposal of a Contracting Government by any of the procedures specified in this Article.

(2) Amendment by unanimous acceptance:

(a) Upon the request of a Contracting Government, any amendment proposed by it to the present Convention shall be communicated by the Organisation to all Contracting Governments for consideration with a view to unanimous acceptance.

(b) Any such amendment shall enter into force twelve months after the date of its acceptance by all Contracting Governments unless an earlier date is agreed upon. A Contracting Government which does not communicate its acceptance or rejection of the amendment to the Organization within twenty-four months of its first communication by the latter shall be deemed to have accepted the amendment.

(3) Amendment after consideration in the Organization:

(a) Upon the request of a Contracting Government, any amendment proposed by it to the present Convention will be considered in the Organization. If adopted by a majority of two-thirds of those present and voting in the Maritime Safety Committee of the Organization, such amendment shall be communicated to all Members of the Organization and all Contracting Governments at least six months prior to its consideration by the Assembly of the Organization.


SCHEDULE 5–continued

“SCHEDULE 8–continued

(b) If adopted by a two-thirds majority of those present and voting in the Assembly, the amendment shall be communicated by the Organization to all Contracting Governments for their acceptance.

(c) Such amendment shall come into force twelve months after the date on which it is accepted by two-thirds of the Contracting Governments. The amendment shall come into force with respect to all Contracting Governments except those which, before it comes into force, make a declaration that they do not accept the amendment.

(d) The Assembly, by a two-thirds majority of those present and voting, including two-thirds of the Governments represented on the Maritime Safety Committee and present and voting in the Assembly, may propose a determination at the time of its adoption that an amendment is of such an important nature that any Contracting Government which makes a declaration under sub-paragraph (c) of this paragraph and which does not accept the amendment within a period of twelve months after it comes into force, shall cease to be a party to the present Convention upon the expiry of that period. This determination shall be subject to the prior acceptance of two-thirds of the Contracting Governments.

(e) Nothing in this paragraph shall prevent the Contracting Government which first proposed action under this paragraph on an amendment to the present Convention from taking at any time such alternative action as it deems desirable in accordance with paragraphs (2) or (4) of this Article.

(4) Amendment by a conference:

(a) Upon the request of a Contracting Government, concurred in by at least one-third of the Contracting Governments, a conference of Governments will be convened by the Organization to consider amendments to the present Convention.

(b) Every amendment adopted by such a conference by a two-thirds majority of those present and voting of the Contracting Governments shall be communicated by the Organization to all Contracting Governments for their acceptance.

(c) Such amendment shall come into force twelve months after the date on which it is accepted by two-thirds of the Contracting Governments. The amendment shall come into force with respect to all Contracting Governments except those which, before it comes into force, make a declaration that they do not accept the amendment.

(d) By a two-thirds majority of those present and voting, a conference convened under sub-paragraph (a) of this paragraph may determine at the time of its adoption that an amendment is of such an important nature that any Contracting Government which makes a declaration under sub-paragraph (c) of this paragraph, and which does not accept the amendment within a period of twelve months after it comes into force, shall cease to be a party to the present Convention upon the expiry of that period.

(5) The Organization shall inform all Contracting Governments of any amendments which may come into force under this Article, together with the date on which each such amendment will come into force.

(6) Any acceptance or declaration under this Article shall be made by the deposit of an instrument with the Organization which shall notify all Contracting Governments of the receipt of the acceptance or declaration.

ARTICLE 19

Denunciation

(1) The present Convention may be denounced by any Contracting Government at any time after the expiry of five years from the date on which the Convention comes into force for that Government.

(2) Denunciation shall be effected by the deposit of an instrument with the Organization which shall inform all the other Contracting Governments of any such denunciation received and of the date of its receipt.


SCHEDULE 5–continued

“SCHEDULE 8–continued

(3) A denunciation shall take effect one year, or such longer period as may be specified in the instrument of denunciation, after its receipt by the Organization.

ARTICLE 20

Territories

(1) (a) The United Nations, in cases where they are the administering authority for a territory, or any Contracting Government responsible for the international relations of a territory, shall as soon as possible consult with such territory or take such measures as may be appropriate in an endeavour to extend the present Convention to that territory and may at any time by notification in writing to the Organization declare that the present Convention shall extend to such territory.

(b) The present Convention shall, from the date of receipt of the notification or from such other date as may be specified in the notification, extend to the territory named therein.

(2) (a) The United Nations, or any Contracting Government which has made a declaration under sub-paragraph (a) of paragraph (1) of this Article at any time after the expiry of a period of five years from the date on which the Convention has been so extended to any territory, may by notification in writing to the Organization declare that the present Convention shall cease to extend to any such territory named in the notification.

(b) The present Convention shall cease to extend to any territory mentioned in such notification one year, or such longer period as may be specified therein, after the date of receipt of the notification by the Organization.

(3) The Organization shall inform all the Contracting Governments of the extension of the present Convention to any territories under paragraph (1) of this Article, and of the termination of any such extension under the provisions of paragraph (2) stating in each case the date from which the present Convention has been or will cease to be so extended.

ARTICLE 21

Deposit and Registration

(1) The present Convention shall be deposited with the Organization and the Secretary-General of the Organization shall transmit certified true copies thereof to all Signatory Governments and to all Governments which accede to the present Convention.

(2) As soon as the present Convention comes into force, the text shall be transmitted by the Secretary-General of the Organization to the Secretariat of the United Nations for registration and publication, in accordance with Article 102 of the Charter of the United Nations.

ARTICLE 22

Languages

The present Convention is established in a single copy in the English and French languages, both texts being equally authentic. Official translations in the Russian and Spanish languages shall be prepared and deposited with the signed original.


SCHEDULE 5–continued

“SCHEDULE 8–continued

ANNEX I

REGULATIONS FOR DETERMINING GROSS AND NET TONNAGES OF SHIPS

Regulation 1

General

(1) The tonnage of a ship shall consist of gross tonnage and net tonnage.

(2) The gross tonnage and the net tonnage shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of these Regulations.

(3) The gross tonnage and the net tonnage of novel types of craft whose constructional features are such as to render the application of the provisions of these Regulations unreasonable or impracticable shall be as determined by the Administration. Where the tonnage is so determined, the Administration shall communicate to the Organization details of the method used for that purpose, for circulation to the Contracting Governments for their information.

Regulation 2

Definitions of Terms used in the Annexes

(1) Upper Deck

The upper deck is the uppermost complete deck exposed to weather and sea, which has permanent means of weathertight closing of all openings in the weather part thereof, and below which all openings in the sides of the ship are fitted with permanent means of watertight closing. In a ship having a stepped upper deck, the lowest line of the exposed deck and the continuation of that line parallel to the upper part of the deck is taken as the upper deck.

(2) Moulded Depth

(a) The moulded depth is the vertical distance measured from the top of the keel to the underside of the upper deck at side. In wood and composite ships the distance is measured from the lower edge of the keel rabbet. Where the form at the lower part of the midship section is of a hollow character, or where thick garboards are fitted, the distance is measured from the point where the line of the flat of the bottom continued inwards cuts the side of the keel.

(b) In ships having rounded gunwales, the moulded depth shall be measured to the point of intersection of the moulded lines of the deck and side shell plating, the lines extending as though the gunwales were of angular design.

(c) Where the upper deck is stepped and the raised part of the deck extends over the point at which the moulded depth is to be determined, the moulded depth shall be measured to a line of reference extending from the lower part of the deck along a line parallel with the raised part.

(3) Breadth

The breadth is the maximum breadth of the ship, measured amidships to the moulded line of the frame in a ship with a metal shell and to the outer surface of the hull in a ship with a shell of any other material.

(4) Enclosed Spaces

Enclosed spaces are all those spaces which are bounded by the ship’s hull, by fixed or portable partitions or bulkheads, by decks or coverings other than permanent or movable awnings. No break in a deck, nor any opening in the ship’s hull, in a deck or in a covering of a space, or in the partitions or bulkheads of a space, nor the absence of a partition or bulkhead, shall preclude a space from being included in the enclosed space.

(5) Excluded Spaces

Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (4) of this Regulation, the spaces referred to in sub-paragraphs (a) to (e) inclusive of this paragraph shall be called excluded spaces and shall not be included in the volume of enclosed spaces, except that any such. space which fulfils at least one of the following three conditions shall be treated as an enclosed space:

- the space is fitted with shelves or other means for securing cargo or stores;


SCHEDULE 5–continued

“SCHEDULE 8–continued

- the openings are fitted with any means of closure;

- the construction provides any possibility of such openings being closed:

(a) (i) A space within an erection opposite an end opening extending from deck to deck except for a curtain plate of a depth not exceeding by more than 25 millimetres (one inch) the depth of the adjoining deck beams, such opening having a breadth equal to or greater than 90 per cent of the breadth of the deck at the line of the opening of the space. This provision shall be applied so as to exclude from the enclosed spaces only the space between the actual end opening and a line drawn parallel to the line or face of the opening at a distance from the opening equal to one half of the width of the deck at the line of the opening (Figure 1 in Appendix 1).

(a) (ii) Should the width of the space because of any arrangement except by convergence of the outside plating, become less than 90 per cent of the breadth of the deck, only the space between the line of the opening and a parallel line drawn through the point where the athwartships width of the space becomes equal to, or less than, 90 per cent of the breadth of the deck shall be excluded from the volume of enclosed spaces (Figures 2, 3 and 4 in Appendix 1).

(a) (iii) Where an interval which is completely open except for bulwarks or open rails separates any two spaces, the exclusion of one or both of which is permitted under sub-paragraphs (a) (i) and/or (a) (ii), such exclusion shall not apply if the separation between the two spaces is less than the least half breadth of the deck in way of the separation (Figures 5 and 6 in Appendix 1).

(b) A space under an overhead deck covering open to the sea and weather, having no other connexion on the exposed sides with the body of the ship than the stanchions necessary for its support. In such a space, open rails or a bulwark and curtain plate may be fitted or stanchions fitted at the ship’s side, provided that the distance between the top of the rails or the bulwark and the curtain plate is not less than 0.75 metres (2.5 feet) or one-third of the height of the space, whichever is the greater (Figure 7 in Appendix 1).

(c) A space in a side-to-side erection directly in way of opposite side openings not less in height than 0.75 metres (2.5 feet) or one-third of the height of the erection, whichever is the greater. If the opening in such an erection is provided on one side only, the space to be excluded from the volume of enclosed spaces shall be limited inboard from the opening to a maximum of one-half of the breadth of the deck in way of the opening (Figure 8 in Appendix 1).

(d) A space in an erection immediately below an uncovered opening in the deck overhead, provided that such an opening is exposed to the weather and the space excluded from enclosed spaces is limited to the area of the opening (Figure 9 in Appendix 1).

(e) A recess in the boundary bulkhead of an erection which is exposed to the weather and the opening of which extends from deck to deck without means of closing, provided that the interior width is not greater than the width at the entrance and its extension into the erection is not greater than twice the width of its entrance (Figure 10 in Appendix 1).

(6) Passenger

A passenger is every person other than:

(a) the master and the members of the crew or other persons employed or engaged in any capacity on board a ship on the business of that ship; and

(b) a child under one year of age.


SCHEDULE 5–continued

“SCHEDULE 8–continued

(7) Cargo Spaces

Cargo spaces to be included in the computation of net tonnage are enclosed spaces appropriated for the transport of cargo which is to be discharged from the ship, provided that such spaces have been included in the computation of gross tonnage. Such cargo spaces shall be certified by permanent marking with the letters CC (cargo compartment) to be so positioned that they are readily visible and not to be less than 100 millimetres (4 inches) in height.

(8) Weathertight

Weathertight means that in any sea conditions water will not penetrate into the ship.

Regulation 3

Gross Tonnage

The gross tonnage (GT) of a ship shall be determined by the following formula:

GT = K1V

where: V = Total volume of all enclosed spaces of the ship in cubic metres,

 K1 = 0.2 + 0.02 log10V (or as tabulated in Appendix 2).

Regulation 4

Net Tonnage

(1) The net tonnage (NT) of a ship shall be determined by the following formula:

NT = K2VC

4d2

+K3 N1+

N2

3d

10 ,

in which formula:

(a) the factor 4d  2 shall not be taken as greater than unity;

   3d

(b) the term K2Vc  4d    2  shall not be taken as less than 0.25 GT; and

    3d

(c) NT shall not be taken as less than 0.30 GT, and in which:

Vc = total volume of cargo spaces in cubic metres,

K2 =0.2 + 0.02 log10Vc (or as tabulated in Appendix 2),

K3 = 1.25

GT + 10,000

10,000

D = moulded depth amidships in metres as defined in Regulation 2 (2),

d = moulded draught amidships in metres as defined in paragraph (2) of this Regulation,

N1 = number of passengers in cabins with not more than 8 berths,

N2 = number of other passengers,

N1 + N2 = total number of passengers the ship is permitted to carry as indicated in the ship’s passenger certificate; when N1 + N2 is less than 13, N1 and N2 shall be taken as zero,

GT = gross tonnage of the ship as determined in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 3.

(2) The moulded draught (d) referred to in paragraph (1) of this Regulation shall be one of the following draughts:

(a) for ships to which the International Convention on Load Lines in force applies, the draught corresponding to the Summer Load Line (other than timber load lines) assigned in accordance with that Convention;


SCHEDULE 5–continued

“SCHEDULE 8–continued

(b) for passenger ships, the draught corresponding to the deepest subdivision load line assigned in accordance with the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea in force or other international agreement where applicable;

(c) for ships to which the International Convention on Load Lines does not apply but which have been assigned a load line in compliance with national requirements, the draught corresponding to the summer load line so assigned;

(d) for ships to which no load line has been assigned but the draught of which is restricted in compliance with national requirements, the maximum permitted draught;

(e) for other ships, 75 per cent of the moulded depth amidships as defined in Regulation 2 (2).

Regulation 5

Change of Net Tonnage

(1) When the characteristics of a ship, such as V, Vc, d, N1 or N2 as defined in Regulations 3 and 4, are altered and where such an alteration results in an increase in its net tonnage as determined in accordance with the provisions of Regulations 4, the net tonnage of the ship corresponding to the new characteristics shall be determined and shall be applied without delay.

(2) A ship to which load lines referred to in sub-parargaphs (2) (a) and (2) (b) of Regulation 4 are concurrently assigned shall be given only one net tonnage as determined in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 4 and that tonnage shall be the tonnage applicable to the appropriate assigned load line for the trade in which the ship is engaged.

(3) When the characteristics of a ship such as V, Vc, d, N1 or N2 as denned in Regulations 3 and 4 are altered or when the appropriate assigned load line referred to in paragraph (2) of this Regulation is altered due to the change of the trade in which the ship is engaged, and where such an alteration results in a decrease in its net tonnage as determined in accordance with the provisions of Regulation 4, a new International Tonnage Certificate (1969) incorporating the net tonnage so determined shall not be issued until twelve months have elapsed from the date on which the current Certificate was issued; provided that this requirement shall not apply:

(a) if the ship is transferred to the flag of another State, or

(b) if the ship undergoes alterations or modifications which are deemed by the Administration to be of a major character, such as the removal of a superstructure which requires an alteration of the assigned load line, or

(c) to passenger ships which are employed in the carriage of large numbers of unberthed passengers in special trades, such, for example, as the pilgrim trade.

Regulation 6

Calculation of Volumes

(1) All volumes included in the calculation of gross and net tonnages shall be measured, irrespective of the fitting of insulation or the like, to the inner side of the shell or structural boundary plating in ships constructed of metal, and to the outer surface of the shell or to the inner side of structural boundary surfaces in ships constructed of any other material.

(2) Volumes of appendages shall be included in the total volume.

(3) Volumes of spaces open to the sea may be excluded from the total volume.

Regulation 7

Measurement and Calculation

(1) All measurement used in the calculation of volumes shall be taken to the nearest centimetre or one-twentieth of a foot.

(2) The volumes shall be calculated by generally accepted methods for the space concerned and with an accuracy acceptable to the Administration.

(3) The calculation shall be sufficiently detailed to permit easy checking.


SCHEDULE 5–continued

“SCHEDULE 8–continued

ANNEX II

CERTIFICATE

INTERNATIONAL TONNAGE CERTIFICATE (1969)

(Official seal)

Issued under the provisions of the International Convention on Tonnage Measurement of Ships, 1969, under the authority of the Government of................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................................................

(full official designation of country)

for which the Convention came into force on.................................................................19......................

by..............................................................................................................................................................

(full official designation of the competent person or organization recognized under the provisions of the International Convention on Tonnage Measurement of Ships, 1969)

Name of Ship

Distinctive Number or Letters

Port of Registry

*Date

 

 

 

 

* Date on which the keel was laid or the ship was at a similar stage of construction (Article 2 (6)), or date on which the ship underwent alterations or modifications of a major character (Article 3 (2) (b)), as appropriate.

MAIN DIMENSIONS

Length (Article 2 (8))

Breadth (Regulation 2 (3))

Moulded Depth amidships to Upper Deck (Regulation 2 (2))

 

 

 

THE TONNAGES OF THE SHIP ARE:

GROSS TONNAGE..................................................

NET TONNAGE.......................................................

This is to certify that the tonnages of this ship have been determined in accordance with the provisions of the International Convention of Tonnage Measurement of Ships, 1969.

Issued at...............................................................................................................................19.................

  (place of issue of certificate)    (date of issue)

....................................................................................

(signature of official issuing the certificate)

and/or

(seal of issuing authority)

If signed, the following paragraph is to be added:

The undersigned declares that he is duly authorized by the said Government to issue this certificate.

..................................................

(Signature)


SCHEDULE 5–continued

“SCHEDULE 8–continued

SPACES INCLUDED IN TONNAGE

GROSS TONNAGE

NET TONNAGE

Name of Space

Location

Length

Name of Space

Location

Length

Underdeck

-

-

 

 

 

NUMBER OF PASSENGERS

(Regulation 4(1))

Number of passengers in cabins

with not more than 8 berths....................

Number of other passengers...................

EXCLUDED SPACES      MOULDED DRAUGHT

(Regulation 2 (5))       (Regulation 4 (2))

An asterisk (*) should be added to those spaces listed above which comprise both enclosed and excluded spaces.

Date and place of original measurement...................................................................................................

Date and place of last previous remeasurement

REMARKS:


SCHEDULE 5–continued

“SCHEDULE 8–continued

APPENDIX 1

Figures referred to in Regulation 2(5)

In the following figures:

O =

excluded space.

 

C =

enclosed space.

 

I =

space to be considered as an enclosed space.

Hatched in parts to be included as enclosed spaces.

B = breadth of the deck in way of the opening.

In ships with rounded gunwales the breadth is measured as indicated in Figure 11.


SCHEDULE 5–continued

“SCHEDULE 8–continued


SCHEDULE 5–continued

“SCHEDULE 8–continued


SCHEDULE 5–continued

“SCHEDULE 8–continued

APPENDIX 2

COEFFICIENTS K1 AND K2 REFERRED TO IN REGULATIONS 3 AND 4 (1)

V or Vc = Volume in cubic metres

V or Vc

K1 or K2

V or Vc

K1 or K2

V or Vc

K1 or K2

V or Vc

K1 or K2

10

0.2200

45 000

0.2931

330 000

0.3104

670 000

0.3165

20

0.2260

50 000

0.2940

340 000

0.3106

680 000

0.3166

30

0.2295

55 000

0.2948

350 000

0.3109

690 000

0.3168

40

0.2320

60 000

0.2956

360 000

0.3111

700 000

0.3169

50

0.2340

65 000

0.2963

370 000

0.3114

710 000

0.3170

60

0.2356

70 000

0.2969

380 000

0.3116

720 000

0.3171

70

0.2369

75 000

0.2975

390 000

0.3118

730 000

0.3173

80

0.2381

80 000

0.2981

400 000

0.3120

740 000

0.3174

90

0.2391

85 000

0.2986

410 000

0.3123

750 000

0.3175

100

0.2400

90 000

0.2991

420 000

0.3125

760 000

0.3176

200

0.2460

95 000

0.2996

430 000

0.3127

770 000

0.3177

300

0.2495

100 000

0.3000

440 000

0.3129

780 000

0.3178

400

0.2520

110 000

0.3008

450 000

0.3131

790 000

0.3180

500

0.2540

120 000

0.3016

460 000

0.3133

800 000

0.3181

600

0.2556

130 000

0.3023

470 000

0.3134

810 000

0.3182

700

0.2569

140 000

0.3029

480 000

0.3136

820 000

0.3183

800

0.2581

150 000

0.3035

490 000

0.3138

830 000

0.3184

900

0.2591

160 000

0.3041

500 000

0.3140

840 000

0.3185

1 000

0.2600

170 000

0.3046

510 000

0.3142

850 000

0.3186

2 000

0.2660

180 000

0.3051

520 000

0.3143

860 000

0.3187

3 000

0.2695

190 000

0.3056

530 000

0.3145

870 000

0.3188

4 000

0.2720

200 000

0.3060

540 000

0.3146

880 000

0.3189

5 000

0.2740

210 000

0.3064

550 000

0.3148

890 000

0.3190

6 000

0.2756

220 000

0.3068

560 000

0.3150

900 000

0.3191

7 000

0.2769

230 000

0.3072

570 000

0.3151

910 000

0.3192

8 000

0.2781

240 000

0.3076

580 000

0.3153

920 000

0.3193

9 000

0.2791

250 000

0.3080

590 000

0.3154

930 000

0.3194

10 000

0.2800

260 000

0.3083

600 000

0.3156

940 000

0.3195

15 000

0.2835

270 000

0.3086

610 000

0.3157

950 000

0.3196

20 000

0.2860

280 000

0.3089

620 000

0.3158

960 000

0.3196

25 000

0.2880

290 000

0.3092

630 000

0.3160

970 000

0.3197

30 000

0.2895

300 000

0.3095

640 000

0.3161

980 000

0.3198

35 000

0.2909

310 000

0.3098

650 000

0.3163

990 000

0.3199

40 000

0.2920

320 000

0.3101

660 000

0.3164

1 000 000

0.3200

Coefficients K1 or K2 at intermediate values of V or Vc shall be obtained by linear interpolation.”.


SCHEDULE 6     Section 98

AMENDMENTS OF SCHEDULE 4 TO PRINCIPAL ACT

Provision of Schedule 4

Amendment

Heading to Schedule .......

Omit the heading, substitute “ARTICLES OF, AND ANNEXES TO, THE LOAD LINE CONVENTION”.

Article 281).............

Omit “the States”, substitute “States”.

Regulation 2(2) of Annex I...

Omit “Regulations 41–45”, substitute “Regulations 41-45 inclusive”.

Figure 1 of Annex I........

Omit “1”, substitute “25 mm (1)”.

Figure 1 of Annex I........

Omit “12”, substitute “300 mm (12)”.

Figure 2 of Annex I........

Omit “1” (wherever occurring), substitute “25 mm (1)”.

Figure 2 of Annex I........

Omit “9” (wherever occurring), substitute “230 mm (9)”.

Figure 2 of Annex I........

Omit “12substitute “300 mm (12)”.

Figure 2 of Annex I........

Omit “18”, substitute “450 mm (18)”.

Figure 2 of Annex I........

Omit “21”, substitute “540 mm (21)”.

Regulation 6(4)(f) of Annex I..

Omit “The Fresh Water Timber Load Line in the Tropical Zone”, substitute “The Tropical Fresh Water Timber Load Line”.

Regulation 15(5) of Annex I...

(a) Omit “24 metres”, substitute “of 24 metres”.

(b) Omit “100 metres”, substitute “of 100 metres”.

Regulation 15(6) of Annex I...

Omit “shall be” (last occurring), substitute “are”.

Regulation 27(3) of Annex I...

(a) Omit “her summer load waterline”, substitute “its summer load waterline”.

(b) Omit “over 225 metres”, substitute “if over 225 metres”.

(c) Omit “15°”, substitute “15 degrees”.

Regulation 27(7) of Annex I...

(a) Omit “her summer load waterline”, substitute “its summer load waterline”.

(b) Omit “over 225 metres”, substitute “if over 225 metres”.

Regulation 27(9) of Annex I...

Omit “her summer load waterline”, substitute “its summer load waterline”.

Regulation 38(1) of Annex I...

Omit “at amidships”, substitute “ amidships”.

Regulation 44(11) of Annex I..

Omit “33 centimetres”, substitute “330 millimetres”.

Regulation 45(1) of Annex I...

Omit “freeboards are”, substitute “freeboard shall be”.

Regulation 46(3) of Annex II..

Omit “Kurilion”, substitute “Cape Kril’on”.

 SCHEDULE 7     Section 99

AMENDMENTS OF PRINCIPAL ACT IN RELATION TO TONNAGE

1. The following provisions of the Principal Act are amended by omitting the words “gross registered tonnage” (wherever occurring) and substituting the words “gross tonnage”:

Sections 41(1), 54, 206b, 206n(2), 206t and 227b.

2. The Principal Act is further amended as set out in the following table:

Provision

Amendment

Schedule I.................

(a) Omit “gross registered tonnage” (wherever occurring), substitute “gross tonnage”.

(b) Omit “Net Registered Tonnage”, substitute “Register Tonnage”.

Schedule II.................

(a) Omit “gross register” (wherever occurring), substitute “gross tonnage”.

(b) Omit “net register” (wherever occurring), substitute “register tonnage”.

 


  SCHEDULE 8     Section 100

FORMAL AND OTHER MINOR AMENDMENTS OF PRINCIPAL ACT

1. The following provisions of the Principal Act are amended by omitting any number expressed in words that is used, whether with or without the addition of a letter, to identify a section of that Act or of another Act or of an Imperial Act, and substituting that number expressed in figures:

Sections 6(1) (definitions of “Medical Inspector of Seamen”, “official log-book”, “superintendent”, “surveyor” and “the Marine Council”), 6e(3), 14(4), 25(2), 42(2), 43(4), 45a(1), (2)(a), (5) and (11), 45b(5)(a)(i), 46(2a), 48(2), 50(1), 60a(1), 66(2), 78, 105(3), 111(1), 115(1), 132(1) and (2), 132a(1)(a), 132b(1), (2), (3)(b) and (4), 138b (definition of “the Committee”), 148d(3)(a)(i), 149(1) (definition of “property”), 155a, 168(3), 173(1), 187a(1) (definitions of “cargo ship safety construction certificate”, “cargo ship safety equipment certificate”, “cargo ship safety radiotelegraphy certificate”, “cargo ship safety radiotelephony certificate”, “nuclear cargo ship safety certificate” and “nuclear passenger ship safety certificate”), 190aa(2), 190a(2)(d), 204a, 206n(1), (3), (4) and (5), 206w(1)(b), 218(1) (definition of “international load line exemption certificate”), 222, 227(2), 227e, 265(8), 268(e), 281(b), 329b(1), 329j(1), 329k(2), 335(2), 355a, 375b(2) and (6), 389a(6), 407a(2)(h), 409(1) and 420(1), (5), (6) and (7).

2. The following provisions of the Principal Act are amended by omitting “of this Act”, “to this Act”, “of this Part”, “of this section” and “of this sub-section” (wherever occurring):

Sections 6(1) (definitions of “Medical Inspector of Seamen”, “official log-book”, “superintendent”, “surveyor” and “the Marine Council”), 6e(3), 14(1), (2)(a), (4), (5), (6), (7)(a), (8) and (9), 20(6), 42(2), 43(1), (2)(a), (4), (5), (6), (7)(a), (9), (10), (11) and (12), 45a(1), (2)(a), (6), (7)(b) and (11), 45b(3) and (5)(a)(i), 46(2a), 48(2), 50(1), (2) and (5), 60a(1), 62a(1)(a), 66(2), 72(1), 77(5), 78, 81(3), 85(3)(a), 105(3), 115(1), (9)(a) and (11), 116(5), 126(1), 127(1), 132(1), (2), (4) and (5), 132a(1)(a) and (3), 132b(1), (2), (3)(b) and (4), 138b (definition of “the Committee”), 148c(1)(c) and (3), 148d(3)(a)(i), 149(1) (definition of “property”), 155a, 173(1), 177, 180(1), 183, 184(1), 185, 187, 187a(1) (definitions of “cargo ship safety construction certificate”, “cargo ship safety equipment certificate”, “cargo ship safety radiotelegraphy certificate”, “cargo ship safety radiotelephony certificate”, “nuclear cargo ship safety certificate”, “nuclear passenger ship safety certificate” and “the Safety Convention”), 190a, 193(3), 204a, 206b, 206n(1), (3), (4) and (5), 206p(3), 206w(2), 218(1) (definition of “international load line exemption certificate”), 221(8), 222, 227(2), 227a(3), 227b(3), 227e, 230(2), 258(3), (4) and (5), 265(3), (4), (5) and (8), 269a(3) and (6), 273, 274(1), 276, 278(3), 281(b), 284, 288(3)(a), 291, 294, 296(1), 329b(1), 329c(3)(d), 329e(4) and (5), 329j(1), 329k(2), (3) and (5), 335(2), 355a, 366(2), 374(3), 375b(2) and (6), 389a(3), (5) and (6), 407b(3), 409(1), 418a(2) and 420(1), (5), (6) and (7).

3. The following provisions of the Principal Act are amended by omitting “she” (wherever occurring) and substituting “it”:

Sections 7(1), 174(1), 187a(1) (definition of “subdivision load line”), 187c(4), 190a(2), 203(1), 207(1), 209, 212, 217(1)(a), 228, 231(b)(ii), 261(1), 264(1)(b) and (c), 282(1)(b), 288(3), 332(1), 364(1)(g) and 410a(1).

4. The following provisions of the Principal Act are amended by omitting “her” (wherever occurring) and substituting “its”:

Sections 2, 50(2) and (3), 54, 106(b), 128(2)(b), 132(6)(d), 133, 144, 145(1)(a), 154(3), 171(5), 180(1), 195(2), 204(5)(b), 204a, 210(2)(a) and (c), (4) and (5), 231b, 231d, 254(1), 259(2), 264(1)(a), 272(a), 288(3), 317a(1) and 399.

5. The Principal Act is further amended as set out in the following table:

Provision

Amendment

Section 1................

Repeal, substitute the following section:

Short “1. This Act may be cited as the Navigation Act

title 1912.”.

SCHEDULE 8-continued

Provision

Amendment

Section 3................

Omit “the naval, military or air forces of the Commonwealth or of any other country, including a foreign country”, substitute “an arm of the Defence Force of Australia or to the naval, military or air forces of a country other than Australia”.

Section 6(1) (paragraph (c) of definition of “Commonwealth country”)

Omit “of this definition” (wherever occurring).

Section 6(1) (paragraph (b) of definition of “river and bay ship”)

Omit “three”, substitute “3”.

Section 6b(b).............

Omit “forty-eight”, substitute “48”.

Section 6d(1).............

Omit “the next succeeding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (2)”.

Section 6e(1)..............

Omit “the next succeeding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (2)”.

Section 7(1)..............

(a) Omit “ten thousand”, substitute “10,000”.

 

(b) Omit “fourteen”, substitute “14”.

Section 10...............

Omit “of this Act”.

Section 14(2).............

Omit “the next succeeding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (3)”.

Section 14(2)(a)............

Omit “Schedule I”, substitute “Schedule Ia”.

Section 14(4).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (3)”.

Section 14(5).............

Omit “Statutory Rule within the meaning of the Rules Publication Act 1903-1939”, substitute “statutory rule within the meaning of the Statutory Rules Publication Act 1903”.

Section 14(7).............

Omit “the next succeeding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (8)”.

Section 14(8).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (7)”.

Section 14a(1) (a)...........

Omit “(1) of the last preceding section”, substitute “14(1)”.

Section 14a(2).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 18(1).............

Omit “and the next succeeding section”, substitute “section and to section 18a”.

Section 18(3)(c)............

Omit “(2) of section fifteen of this Act”, substitute “15(2)”.

Section 18a(2).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 18a(3).............

Omit “of this section”.

Section 18a(4).............

Omit “of this section “.

Section 18b(1), (2) and (3).....

Omit “Commonwealth Naval Forces”, substitute “Australian Navy”.

Section 19(2).............

Insert “by instrument in writing” after “directs”.

Section 25(2).............

Omit “of this Act”.

Section 29(2).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 29(4).............

(a) Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (3)”.

(b) Omit “three”.substitute “3”.

Section 31...............

Omit “three”, substitute “3”.

Section 35(1)(b)...........

Omit “sixteen”, substitute “16”.

Section 35(2).............

Omit “twenty-one”, substitute “21”.

Section 35(3).............

Insert “by instrument in writing” after “Minister”.

Section 37...............

Omit “six”, substitute “6”.

Section 38(2).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 39b(1)(a), (2)(a) and (3)

Omit “eighteen”, substitute “18”.

Section 39b(1)(b) and (2)(b)....

Omit “six”, substitute “6”.

Section 40a(1).............

Omit “sixteen”, substitute “16”.

Section 40a (2)............

Omit “eighteen”, substitute “18”.

Section 41(1).............

Omit “fifty”, substitute “50”.

SCHEDULE 8-continued

Provision

Amendment

Section 43(2).............

Omit “the next succeeding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (3)”.

Section 43(2)(a)............

Omit “Schedule II”, substitute “Schedule IIa”.

Section 43(4).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (3)”.

Section 43(5).............

Omit “Statutory Rule within the meaning of the Rules Publication Act 1903-1939”, substitute “statutory rule within the meaning of the Statutory Rules Publication Act 1903”.

Section 43(7).............

Omit “the next succeeding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (8)”.

Section 43(8).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (7)”.

Section 43(11).............

(a) Omit “(a) of the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “(10) (a)”.

(b) Omit “six”, substitute “6”.

Section 43(12).............

Omit “ten” (wherever occurring), substitute “10”.

Section 44(1)(a)............

Omit “(1) of the last preceding section”, substitute “43 (1)”.

Section 44(2).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 45(1a).............

Omit “either of the last two preceding sub-sections: Two hundred dollars”, substitute “sub-section (1) or (1a): $200”.

Section 45a(2)(a)...........

(a) Omit “three, substitute “3”.

(b) Omit “five”, substitute “5”.

Section 45a(2)(b)...........

Omit “six”, substitute “6”.

Section 45a(3).............

(a) Omit “two” (wherever occurring), substitute “2”.

(b) Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (2)”.

Section 45a(5).............

Omit “of this Act”.

Section 45a(7).............

(a) Omit “two”, substitute “2”.

(b) Omit “six” (wherever occurring), substitute “6”.

(c) Omit “one hundred and twenty-five” (wherever occurring), substitute “125.

Section 45b(1).............

(a) Omit “the last preceding section”, substitute “section 45a”.

(b) Omit “fourteen”, substitute “14”.

(c) Omit “Commonwealthsubstitute “Australian”.

Section 45b(2).............

Omit “seven, substitute “7”.

Section 45b(5)(a)...........

(a) Omit “(2) of the last preceding section”, substitute “45a(2)”.

(b) Omit “three” (wherever occurring), substitute “3”.

Section 45b(5)(b)...........

(a) Omit “(7) of the last preceding section”, substitute “45a(7)”.

(b) Omit “one hundred and twenty-five”, substitute “125.

(c) Omit “six”, substitute “6”.

Section 46(1).............

(a) Omit “the next succeeding section”, substitute “section 47”.

(b) Omit “, after the commencement of this section,”.

Section 46(2)(a)............

Omit “the next succeeding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (2a)”.

Section 46(2a).............

Omit “(a) of the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “(2)(a)”.

Section 47...............

Omit(1) of the last preceding section”, substitute “46(1)”.

Section 47(a)(ii)...........

Omit “twenty-four”, substitute “24”.

Section 47(c)(i)............

Omit “(a) of sub-section (2) of the last preceding section”, substitute “46(2)(a)”.

Section 48(1).............

Omit after the commencement of this section,”.

Section 50(1), (2) and (3).....

Omit “six months”, substitute “6 months”.

Section 50(1).............

Omit “two” (wherever occurring), substitute “2”.

Section 50(4).............

(a) Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (3)”.

(b) Omit “twenty-four” (wherever occurring), substitute “24”.

Section 50(5)(c)............

Omit “Two dollars”, substitute “$2”.

SCHEDULE 8-continued

Provision

Amendment

Section 50(5)(d)...........

Omit “One dollar fifty cents”, substitute “$1.50”.

Section 53(2).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 54...............

(a) Omit “forty-eight”, substitute “48”.

(b) Omit “fifty”, substitute “50”.

Section 59...............

Omit “her” (wherever occurring), substitute “the ship”.

Section 60a(1).............

Omit “Four hundred dollars”, substitute “$400”.

Section 60a(1a)............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”

Section 62a(2).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”

Section 62a(4).............

(a) Omit “(5) of section fifty of this Act”, substitute “50(5)”.

(b) Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (3) of this section”.

(c) Omit “(3) of that section”, substitute “50(3)”.

Section 62a(5)(b)...........

Omit “(1) of section thirty-eight of this Act”, substitute “38(1)”.

Section 66(2).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 67(1).............

Omit “the next succeeding section”, substitute “section 68”.

Section 68(2).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”

Section 77(1).............

Omit “the next succeeding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (2)”.

Section 77(2).............

(a) Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

(b) Omit “twenty-four”, substitute “24”.

Section 77(3).............

(a) Omit “of this section”(first occurring).

(b) Omit “two”, substitute “2”.

(c) Omit “fourteen”, substitute “14”.

Section 77(4).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (3)”.

Section 81(2).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 85(3).............

Omit “two”(wherever occurring), substitute “2”.

Section 85(4).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (3)”.

Section 87...............

Omit “Four dollars”, substitute “$4”.

Section 88(2).............

(a) Omit “(5) and (6) of section fifty of this Act”, substitute “50(5) and (6)”.

(b) Omit “(3) of that section”, substitute “50(3)”.

Section 100...............

(a) Omit “three” (wherever occurring), substitute “3”.

(b) Omit “six”, substitute “6”.

(c) Omit “nine, substitute “9”.

(d) Omit “Two hundred dollars”, substitute “$200”.

Section 102...............

Omit “three”, substitute “3”.

Section 104(1).............

Omit “four”, substitute “4”.

Section 105(3).............

Omit “Eighty dollars”, substitute “$80”.

Section 110(1).............

Omit “twenty-four”, substitute “24”.

Section 111(1).............

(a) Omit “, after the commencement of this section,”.

(b) Omit “of this Act”.

Section 111(1)(b)...........

Omit “twenty-four”, substitute “24”.

Section 112(1)(b)...........

Omit “her”, substitute “the ship”.

Section 115(3)(b)...........

(a) Omit “(i) of the last preceding paragraph”, substitute “(a)(i)”.

(b) Omit “twenty-four”, substitute “24”.

Section 115(3)(c)...........

Omit “the last preceding paragraph”, substitute “paragraph (b)”.

Section 115(5).............

Omit “Four dollars”, substitute “$4”.

Section 115(7).............

Omit “either of the last two preceding sub-sections”, substitute “sub-section (5) or (6)”.

Section 116(1).............

Omit “three”, substitute “3”.

SCHEDULE 8-continued

Provision

Amendment

Section 118(1).............

(a) Omit “Forty”, substitute “40”.

(b) Omit “Eighty”, substitute “80”.

(c) Omit “One dollar twenty cents”, substitute “$1.20”.

Section 120(5).............

Omit “officer”, substitute “official”.

Section 121(b).............

(a) Omit “two”, substitute “2”.

(b) Omit “six”, substitute “6”.

Section 124(2).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 125(2).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 127(2).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 127(3).............

Omit “the next succeeding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (4)”.

Section 128(2).............

Omit “Crown”, substitute “Commonwealth”.

Section 132(1)(b)...........

Omit “three”, substitute “3”.

Section 132(2)(a)(ii).........

Omit “three”, substitute “3”.

Section 132(3).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (2)”.

Section 132(5).............

Omit “Four hundred dollars”, substitute “$400”.

Section 132(6)(c)...........

Omit “seven”, substitute “7”.

Section 132(7).............

Omit “(a) of the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “(6)(a)”.

Section 132a(1)(a)...........

Omit “under the last preceding section”, substitute “section 132”.

Section 132a(2)............

(a) Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

(b) Omit “Four hundred dollars”, substitute “$400”.

Section 132b(2)............

Omit “forty-eight” (wherever occurring), substitute “48”.

Section 133(1).............

(a) Omit “two”, substitute “2”.

(b) Omit “one hundred”, substitute “100”.

Section 133(2).............

(a) Omit “two”, substitute “2”.

(b) Omit “ten”, substitute “10”.

(c) Omit “one hundred”, substitute “100”.

Section 138(4).............

Omit “two”, substitute “2”.

Section 138(7).............

Omit “the last two preceding sub-sections”, substitute “sub-sections (5) and (6)”.

Section 138(9)(b)...........

Omit “Statutory Rule within the meaning of the Rules Publication Act 1903-1939”, substitute “statutory rule within the meaning of the Statutory Rules Publication Act 1903”.

Section 139(2).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 144...............

Omit “twenty-four” (wherever occurring), substitute “24”.

Section 145(1).............

(a) Insert “or Territory” after “State”.

(b) Omit “three” substitute “3”.

Section 148b(2)............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 148c(1)(c)..........

Omit “the last preceding paragraph”, substitute “paragraph (b)”.

Section 148c(2)............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 148d(1) and (4).......

Omit “the last preceding section”, substitute “section 148c”.

Section 148d(4)............

Omit “the next succeeding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (5) of this section”.

Section 148d(5)............

Omit “six”, substitute “6”.

Section 149(1) (definition of

“property”)...............

Omit “the next succeeding section”, substitute “section 150”.

Section 151(1).............

Omit “twenty-four”, substitute “24”.

Section 151(3) and (4).......

Omit “forty-eight”, substitute “48 “.

Section 152(1).............

Omit “Two hundred dollars”, substitute “$200”.

Section 153(b).............

Omit “six”, substitute “6”.

Section 154(2).............

Omit “six”, substitute “6”.

Section 155...............

(a) Omit “after the commencement of this section”.

SCHEDULE 8-continued

Provision

Amendment

Section 155(b).............

(b) Omit “forty-eight (wherever occurring), substitute “48”. Omit “(2) of section one hundred and fifty-one of this Act”, substitute “151(2)”.

Section 156(1)(c)...........

Omit “Consul”, substitute “consul”.

Section 157(1).............

Omit “the last preceding section”, substitute “section 156”.

Section 157(1)(b)...........

Omit “two”, substitute “2”.

Section 158(2).............

(a) Omit “three”, substitute “3”.

(b) Omit “two”, substitute “2”.

Section 158(3).............

Insert “by instrument in writing” after “Minister” (second occurring).

Section 158(7).............

Omit “Consul”, substitute “consul”.

Section 158a..............

Omit “six”, substitute “6”.

Section 159...............

Omit “six”, substitute “6”.

Section 161(1)(b)...........

Omit “two”, substitute “2”.

Section 162(1).............

Omit “twenty-one”, substitute “21”.

Section 163a(2)............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 164(1).............

Omit “Officer”, substitute “officer”.

Section 164(2)(a)...........

Omit “Officer”, substitute “officer”.

Section 165...............

Omit “twenty-four”, substitute “24”.

Section 167(3).............

Omit “of this Act”.

Section 168(3).............

Omit “of this Act”.

Section 171(5).............

Omit “twenty-four”, substitute “24”.

Section 171(7).............

Omit “Courts”, substitute “courts”.

Section 172(2).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 173(2).............

Omit “(b) of the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “(1)(b)”.

Section 174(1).............

Omit “six”, substitute “6”.

Section 175(1).............

Insert “by instrument in writing” after “Minister”.

Section 175(2).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 177...............

Omit “Seaman”, substitute “seaman”.

Section 178...............

Omit “Consul”, substitute “consul”.

Section 179...............

Omit “three”, substitute “3”.

Section 180(1)(b)...........

Omit “twenty-four”, substitute “24”.

Section 183(a).............

Omit “Consul”, substitute “consul”.

Section 183(b).............

Omit “Government”, substitute “government”.

Section 184(2).............

Omit “Consul”, substitute “consul”.

Section 185...............

Omit “Consul”, substitute “consul”.

Section 187a(1) (definition
of “certificate of equipment”)

Omit “(4) of section one hundred and ninety-four of this Act”, substitute “194(4)”.

Section 187a(1) (definition
of “certificate of survey”)

Omit “(4) of section one hundred and ninety-four of this Act”, substitute”194(4)”.

Section 187a(1) (definition
of “country to which the
Safety Convention applies”)

Omit “the next succeeding section”, substitute “section 187b”.

Section 187a(1) (definition
of “exemption certificate”)

Omit “(1) of section two hundred and six h of this Act”, substitute “206h (1)”

Section 187a(1) (definition
of “international voyage”)

Omit “of this Part” (first occurring).

Section 187a(1) (definition
of “passenger certificate “)

Omit “(4) of section one hundred and ninety-four of this Act”, substitute “194(4)”.

Section 187a(1) (definition
of “passenger ship”)

Omit “twelve”, substitute “12”.

Section 187a(1) (definition
of “passenger ship
safety certificate”)

Omit “(1) of section two hundred and six d of this Act”, substitute “206d(1)”.

Section 187a(1) (definition
of “passenger ship short
voyage safety certificate”)

Omit “(2) of section two hundred and six d of this Act”, substitute “206d(2)”.

Section 187a(1) (definition
of “passenger steamship”)

Omit “twelve”, substitute “12”.

SCHEDULE 8-continued

Provision

Amendment

Section 187a (1) (definition of
“short international voyage”)

(a) Omit “two hundred “, substitute “200”.

(b) Omit “six hundred”, substitute “600”.

Section 187a(1) (definition
of “the Safety Convention”)

Omit “Schedule VI”, substitute “Schedule 1”.

Section 187a(4)(a)..........

Omit “two hundred”, substitute “200”.

Section 187a(4)(b)..........

(a) Omit “six hundred”, substitute “600”.

(b) Omit “twelve hundred”, substitute”1,200”.

Section 187c(1)............

Omit “of this section”.

Section 187c(2)............

Omit “of this section”.

Section 187c(3)............

Omit “the next succeeding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (4)”.

Section 190aa(2)...........

(a) Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

(b) Omit “of this Act” (first occurring).

Section 190aa(5)...........

Omit “Five hundred dollars”, substitute “$500”.

Section 190a(1)............

Omit “her”, substitute “the ship’s”.

Section 190a(2) (c)..........

Omit “her”, substitute “the ship’s”.

Section 190a(2)............

Omit “her” (last occurring), substitute “its”.

Section 190b(2)............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 191b(1) and (2).......

Omit “One thousand dollars”, substitute “$1,000”.

Section 192a(2)............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 192c(2)............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 192c(4)............

(a) Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (3)”.

(b) Omit “Two thousand dollars”, substitute “$2,000 “.

Section 193(1).............

Omit “Five hundred dollars”, substitute “$500”.

Section 193(2).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 193(2)(a)...........

Omit “twelve”, substitute “12”.

Section 194(5).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (4)”.

Section 202(1).............

(a) Omit “Two hundred dollars”, substitute “$200”.

(b) Omit “Fifty”, substitute “50”.

Section 204(4).............

(a) Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (3)”.

(b) Omit “the next succeeding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (5)”.

Section 206b..............

Omit “fifty”, substitute “50”.

Section 206c (definition of “nuclear passenger ship”) 

Omit “twelve”, substitute “12”.

Section 206f..............

Omit “the last preceding section”, substitute “section 206e”.

Section 206n(1)............

Omit “the next succeeding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (2)”.

Section 206n(2)............

(a) Omit “two”, substitute “2”.

(b) Omit “three hundred”, substitute “300”.

(c) Omit “five hundred”, substitute “500”.

Section 206n(3)............

Omit “five”, substitute “5”.

Section 206n(4)............

Omit “two”, substitute “2”.

Section 206p(1)............

Omit “five”, substitute “5”.

Section 206p(2)............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 206s(2)(b)..........

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 206s(2)............

Omit “One thousand dollars”, substitute “$1,000”.

Section 206t(1)............

Omit “five hundred”, substitute “500”.

Section 206t(2)............

Omit “five hundred”, substitute “500”.

Section 206t(2)(b)..........

Omit “three hundred”, substitute “300”.

Section 206t(3)(c)..........

Omit “five hundred”, substitute “500”.

SCHEDULE 8–continued

Provision

Amendment

Section 206t(3)(d)..........

Omit “either of the last two preceding sub-sections”, substitute “sub-section (1) or (2)”.

Section 206t(3)............

Omit “One thousand dollars”, substitute “$1,000”.

Section 206u..............

Omit “One thousand dollars”, substitute “$1,000”.

Section 206v(1)............

(a) Omit “the next succeeding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (2)”.

(b) Omit “One thousand dollars”, substitute “$1,000”.

Section 206w(2)...........

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 207(1).............

Omit “the next succeeding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (2)”.

Section 207(2)(b)...........

Omit “(2) of section two hundred and six w of this Act”, substitute “206w(2)”.

Section 209...............

Omit “her” (wherever occurring), substitute “the ship”.

Section 210(2)(d)...........

Omit “seven”, substitute “7”.

Section 210(2)(f)...........

Omit.

Section 210(5).............

Omit “she”, substitute “the ship”.

Section 213(2).............

Omit “three”, substitute “3”.

Section 215(2).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 217(1).............

Omit “Two thousand dollars”, substitute “$2,000”.

Section 218(1) (definition of “Australian load line certificate”)

Omit “(b) of section two hundred and twenty-two of this Act”, substitute “222(b)”.

Section 218(1) (definition of “international load line certificate”) Section 218(1) (definition of “Load Line Convention Country”)

Omit “(a) of section two hundred and twenty-two of this Act”, substitute “222(a)”.

Omit “the next succeeding section”, substitute “section 219”.

Section 221(3).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (2)”.

Section 221(4).............

(a) Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (3)”.

(b) Omit “One thousand dollars”, substitute “$1,000”.

Section 221(7).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (6)”.

Section 221(8).............

Omit “One thousand dollars”, substitute “$1,000”.

Section 222(b).............

Insert “by instrument in writing” after “Minister”.

Section 223...............

Omit “(2) or (5) of section two hundred and twenty-one of this Act”, substitute “221(2) or (5)”.

Section 224(1).............

(a) Omit “(2) of section two hundred and twenty-one of this Act”, substitute “221(2)”.

(b) Omit “five”, substitute “5”.

Section 224(2) (a)...........

Omit “(2) of section two hundred and twenty-one of this Act “, substitute “221(2)”.

Section 227a(1)............

Omit “One thousand dollars”, substitute “$1,000”.

Section 227a(2)............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 227b(1)............

Omit “Two thousand dollars”, substitute “$2,000”.

Section 227b(2)............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 227d(1) and (2).......

Omit “One thousand dollars”, substitute “$1,000”.

Section 228...............

Omit “her” (wherever occurring), substitute “the ship”.

Section 230(1).............

Omit “the last preceding section”, substitute “section 229”.

Section 230(2).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 231a..............

Omit “Five hundred dollars”, substitute “$500”.

Section 231b..............

Omit “Five hundred dollars”, substitute “$500”.

Section 231c(2)............

Omit “Five hundred dollars”, substitute “$500”.

Section 231d(a)............

Omit “(b) of section two hundred and thirty-one of this Act”, substitute “231(b)”.

Section 231f(2)............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

SCHEDULE 8-continued

Provision

Amendment

Section 232(2).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 233...............

Omit “Five hundred dollars”, substitute “$500”.

Section 235(1).............

Omit “Five hundred dollars”, substitute “$500”.

Section 235(2).............

Omit “the next succeeding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (3)”.

Section 235(3).............

Omit “twenty-four”, substitute “24”.

Section 249(1).............

Omit “Two thousand dollars”, substitute “$2,000”.

Section 249(2).............

Omit “The last preceding sub-section”, substitute “Sub-section (1)”.

Section 252...............

Omit “King”, substitute “Commonwealth”.

Section 253(1).............

Omit “Two thousand dollars”, substitute “$2,000”.

Section 253(2).............

Omit “One thousand dollars”, substitute “$1,000”.

Section 253a(2)............

Omit “Six hundred dollars”, substitute “$600”.

Section 254(1).............

Omit “Two thousand dollars”, substitute “$2,000”.

Section 255...............

Omit “One thousand dollars”, substitute “$1,000”.

Section 256...............

Omit “One thousand dollars”, substitute “$1,000”.

Section 257(2).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 257(3).............

Omit “Two thousand dollars”, substitute “$2,000”.

Section 258(2).............

(a) Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

(b) Omit “Two hundred dollars”, substitute “$200”.

Section 258(5).............

Omit “two”, substitute “2”.

Section 259(1).............

Omit “two”, substitute “2”.

Section 261(2).............

Omit “of this section”.

Section 261a..............

(a) Omit “the last three preceding sections”, substitute “sections 259, 260 and 261”.

(b) Omit “Commonwealth Naval Forces”, substitute “Australian Navy”.

Section 263(1).............

Omit “(4) of section four hundred and nineteen”, substitute “419 (4)”.

Section 263(2).............

Omit.

Section 264(1).............

Omit “two”, substitute “2”.

Section 264(3).............

(a) Omit “(2) of section four hundred and twenty-two”, substitute “422(2)”.

(b) Omit “two” (second occurring), substitute “2”.

Section 264(4).............

Omit.

Section 265(7).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (6)”.

Section 274(2).............

Omit “of this Act” (wherever occurring).

Section 285...............

Omit.

Section 286(1a)............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 286(4).............

Omit “six”, substitute “6”.

Section 286(5).............

Omit “fourteen”, substitute “14”.

Section 287(1).............

(a) Omit “twelve”, substitute “12”.

(b) Omit “One thousand dollars”, substitute “$1,000”.

Section 288(1).............

Omit “One thousand dollars”, substitute “$1,000”.

Section 288(2).............

Omit “three”, substitute “3”.

Section 288(4).............

(a) omit “(a) or (b) of the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “(3)(a) or (b)”.

(b) Omit “One thousand dollars”, substitute “$1,000”.

(c) Omit “(c) of that sub-section”, substitute “(3)(c)”.

Section 288(5).............

Omit “of this Act”.

Section 293...............

Omit “of this Act” (wherever occurring).

Section 293a(2)............

Omit “the preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 294...............

(a) Omit “Historic”, substitute “historic”.

(b) Omit “Wreck”, substitute “wreck”.

(c) Omit “Salvage”, substitute “salvage”.

(d) Omit “Receiver”, substitute “receiver”.

(e) Omit “Tidal”, substitute “tidal”.

SCHEDULE 8-continued

Provision

Amendment

Section 295...............

Omit “of this Act”.

Section 300(1).............

Omit “of Transport”, substitute “that deals with matters arising under this Act”.

Section 301...............

(a) Omit “The” (wherever occurring), substitute “the”.

(b) Omit “Such”, substitute “such”.

Section 304...............

Omit “Forty-eight”, substitute “48”.

Section 306(1) (a)..........

Omit “Forty dollars”, substitute “$40”.

Section 310...............

Omit “of this Act”.

Section 314...............

Omit “Two hundred dollars”, substitute “$200”.

Section 317a(1)............

Omit “the King”, substitute “Australia”.

Section 318(1) (b)..........

Omit “Two thousand dollars”, substitute “$2,000”.

Section 318(1) (c)..........

Omit “Six hundred dollars”, substitute “$600”.

Section 318(2).............

Omit “Six hundred dollars”, substitute “$600”.

Section 320(1).............

Omit “Two hundred dollars”, substitute “$200”.

Section 320(2).............

Omit “thirty”, substitute “30”.

Section 323(1) (a) and (b).....

Omit “twenty”, substitute “20”.

Section 323(1) (c)..........

Omit “thirty”, substitute “30”.

Section 324(1).............

Omit “two”, substitute “2”.

Section 325(1).............

Omit “Four hundred dollars”, substitute “$400”.

Section 326...............

Omit “Four hundred dollars”, substitute “$400”.

Section 329a..............

Omit “Postal and Telegraph Act 1901-1950”, substitute “Postal Services Act 1975”.

Section 329b(1)............

(a) Omit “the next succeeding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (2) of this section”.

(b) Omit “after the commencement of this Division”.

Section 329b(2)............

Insert “or the Australian Postal Commission” after “the Commonwealth”.

Section 329c(1)............

Omit “, after the commencement of this Division,”.

Section 329c(3)............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (2)”.

Section 329c(3)(c)...........

Omit “the last preceding paragraph”, substitute “paragraph (b)”.

Section 329d(1) (definition of “continental shelf”) 

Omit “the twenty-ninth day of April, One thousand nine hundred and fifty-eight”, substitute “29 April 1958”.

Section 329d(1) (definition of “external Territory”)

Omit.

Section 329e(1)............

Omit “the next succeeding section”, substitute “section 329f”.

Section 329e(2)............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section” substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 329e(3)............

(a) Omit “(a) of sub-section (1) of this section”, substitute “(1) (a)”

(b) Omit “sub-section” (second occurring), substitute “paragraph”.

Section 329e(5)............

Omit “the next succeeding section”, substitute “section 329f”.

Section 329f..............

Omit “the last preceding section”, substitute “section 329e”.

Section 329g(1)............

(a) Omit “(1) of section three hundred and twenty-nine e of this Act”, substitute “329e(1)”.

(b) Omit “twenty-four, substitute “24”.

(c) Omit “of this section” (wherever occurring).

Section 329g(2)............

(a) Omit “(1) of section three hundred and twenty-nine e of this Act”, substitute “329e(1)”.

(b) Omit “the next succeeding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (3)”.

Section 329g(3) (definition of “the default period”) 

Omit “(1) of section three hundred and twenty-nine e of this Act”, substitute “329e(1)”.

Section 329g(3) (definition of “the prescribed amount”) 

(a) Omit “Two thousand dollars”, substitute “$2,000.

(b) Omit “five-thousand”, substitute “5,000”.

Section 329g(4)............

(a) Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (3)”.

(b) Omit “(1) of section three hundred and twenty-nine e of this Act”, substitute “329e(1)”.

SCHEDULE 8-continued

Provision

Amendment

Section 329j(2)............

(a) Omit “(1) of section three hundred and twenty-nine e of this Act”, substitute “329e(1)”.

(b) Omit “the next succeeding section”, substitute “section 329k”.

Section 329j(3)............

(a) Omit “the next succeeding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (4)”.

(b) Omit “either of the last two preceding sub-sections”,  substitute “sub-section (1) or (2)”.

Section 329j(4)............

(a) Omit “The last preceding sub-section”, substitute “Sub-section (3)”.

(b) Omit “of this section”.

(c) Omit “(1) of section three hundred and twenty-nine e of this Act”, substitute “329e(1)”.

Section 329k(3)............

(a) Omit “the next succeeding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (4)”.

(b) Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (2)”.

Section 329k(4)............

Omit “The last preceding sub-section”, substitute “Sub-section (3)”.

Section 329k(5)(a)..........

Omit “One hundred and twenty dollars”, substitute “$120”.

Section 329k(5)(b)..........

Omit “Twelve million six hundred thousand dollars”, substitute “$12,600,000”.

Section 329k(6)............

(a) Omit “two”, substitute “2”.

(b) Omit “of this section” (last occurring).

Section 330(1).............

Omit.

Section 332(1).............

(a) Omit “the last preceding section”, substitute “section 331”.

(b) Omit “her”, substitute “the ship”.

Section 332(2).............

(a) Omit “The last preceding sub-section”, substitute “Sub-section (1)”.

(b) Omit “her” (first occurring), substitute “its”.

(c) Omit “her”(last occurring), substitute “the ship”.

(d) Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 332(3).............

(a) Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (2)”.

(b) Omit “her”, substitute “the ship”.

Section 333...............

Omit “her”, substitute “the ship”.

Section 335(2).............

(a) Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

(b) Omit “the next succeeding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (3)”.

Section 335(3).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (2)”.

Section 359...............

Omit “two”, substitute “2”.

Section 360(2).............

Omit “two”, substitute “2”.

Section 361...............

Omit “two”, substitute “2”.

Section 363(1) and (2).......

Omit “Regulations”, substitute “regulations”.

Section 364(1)(a)...........

Omit “Where”, substitute “where”.

Section 370(2).............

Omit “(b) of the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “(1Mb)”.

Section 370b(3)............

(a) Omit “Two hundred dollars”, substitute “$200”.

(b) Omit “three”, substitute “3”.

Section 375b(1)............

Omit “the next succeeding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (2)”.

Section 375b(6)............

Omit “two”, substitute “2”.

Section 377a(2)............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 384(2).............

Omit “three”, substitute “3”.

Section 389a(2)............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 389a(4)............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (3)”.

Section 391(2).............

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

SCHEDULE 8-continued

Provision

Amendment

Section 392(1)(a).........

Omit “four”, substitute “4”.

Section 392(2)...........

Omit.

Section 395.............

Repeal.

Section 396(1)...........

(a) Omit “her” (first and second occurring), substitute “its”.

(b) Omit “her” (third and fourth occurring), substitute “the ship”.

(c) Omit “two”, substitute “2”.

Section 403(3)...........

Omit “Courts”, substitute “courts”.

Section 406.............

(a) Omit “six”, substitute “6”.

(b) Omit “five”, substitute “5”.

(c) Omit “King”, substitute “Queen”.

Section 407(2)...........

Omit “The last preceding sub-section”, substitute “Sub-section (1)”.

Section 407a(2)..........

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (1)”.

Section 407a(3)..........

Omit “Schedule VIII to this Act”, substitute “Schedule 7”.

Section 407a(4)..........

Omit.

Section 407b(1)..........

(a) Omit “the last preceding section”, substitute “section 407a”.

(b) Omit “the next succeeding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (2)”.

Section 407b(2)..........

(a) Omit “the next succeeding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (3)”.

(b) Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (2) of this section”.

Section 407b(3)..........

Omit “the last preceding section”, substitute “section 407a”.

Section 410a(1)..........

(a) Omit “her” (wherever occurring), substitute “the ship”.

(b) Omit “Two hundred dollars”, substitute “$200”.

Section 416.............

(a) Omit “her” (first occurring), substitute “its”.

(b) Omit “her” (second occurring), substitute “the ship”.

Section 417(4)...........

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (3)”.

Section 418a(1)..........

(a) insert “by instrument in writing” after “Minister”.

(b) Omit “two”, substitute “2”.

Section 418a(2)..........

Omit “The form of security in Schedule V”, substitute “The prescribed form of security”.

Section 419.............

Insert “by instrument in writing” after “Minister” (last occurring).

Section 420(3)...........

Omit “the last preceding sub-section”, substitute “sub-section (2)”.

Section 420(6)...........

Omit “Government”, substitute “government”.

Section 421(2)...........

Omit “the naval, military or air forces of the Commonwealth or of any other country, including a foreign country”, substitute “an arm of the Defence Force of Australia or of the naval, military or air forces of a country other than Australia”.

Section 424(2)(a).........

Omit “of Transport”, substitute “that deals with matters arising under this Act”.

Section 424(2)(b).........

Omit “four”, substitute “4”.

Section 424(2)(c) and (d)....

Omit “one”, substitute “a”.

Section 424(2) (e)........

Omit “two”, substitute “2”.

Section 424(4)...........

Omit “(a) of sub-section (2) of this section”, substitute “(2)(a)”.

Section 424(6)...........

Omit “(2) of section fourteen, sub-section (2) of section forty-three or section one hundred and seventeen of this Act”, substitute “14(2) or 43(2) or section 117”.

Heading to Schedule I......

Omit “SCHEDULE I”, substitute “SCHEDULE Ia”.

Heading to Schedule II.....

Omit “SCHEDULE II”, substitute “SCHEDULE IIa”.

Schedule II.............

Omit “Schedule I”, substitute “Schedule Ia”.

Schedule V.............

Repeal.

Heading to Schedule VI....

Omit “SCHEDULE VI”, substitute “SCHEDULE 1”.

Heading to Schedule VII....

Omit “SCHEDULE VII”, substitute “SCHEDULE 4”.

Heading to Schedule VIII...

Omit “SCHEDULE VIII”, substitute “SCHEDULE 7”.

SCHEDULE 9    Section 101

AMENDMENTS OF PRINCIPAL ACT IN RELATION TO PRESCRIBED COUNTRY

1. The following provisions of the Principal Act are amended by omitting “Commonwealth” (wherever occurring) and substituting “prescribed”: Sections 62a(3) and 400(1).

2. The following provisions of the Principal Act are amended by omitting “Commonwealth country other than Australia” and substituting “prescribed country”: Sections 329c(1), (2) and (3)(d) and (e), 364(2)(a) and (d), 366(2) and 383(1)(a).

3. The Principal Act is further amended as set out in the following table:

Provision

Amendment

Section 6(1) (definition of “proper authority”)

(a) Omit from paragraph (b) “Commonwealth country other than Australia”, substitute “prescribed country”.

(b) Omit from paragraph (c) “Commonwealth” (wherever occurring), substitute “prescribed”.

(c) Omit from paragraph (c) “other” (last occurring).

Section 128(2)(c)..........

Insert “or a citizen of a prescribed country “ after “subject”.

Section 383(1)(a)..........

Omit “Commonwealth” (last occurring), substitute “prescribed”.

SCHEDULE 10    Section 102

AMENDMENTS OF PRINCIPAL ACT CONSEQUENTIAL ON INCREASE IN GENERAL PENALTY FOR OFFENCES

Provision

Amendment

Section 14(1).............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 20(2).............

Omit “Penalty: Fifty dollars.”.

Section 25(1).............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 29(4).............

Omit “One hundred dollars”, substitute “$200”.

Section 31...............

Omit “One hundred dollars”, substitute “$200”.

Section 32...............

Omit “Penalty: One hundred dollars.”.

Section 43(1).............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 49...............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 54...............

Omit “Penalty: One hundred dollars.”.

Section 62a(6).............

Omit “Penalty: One hundred dollars.”.

Section 63...............

Omit “Penalty: One hundred dollars.”.

Section 66(1).............

Omit “Penalty: One hundred dollars.”.

Section 68(1).............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 100...............

(a) Omit “Eighty dollars” (wherever occurring), substitute “$200”.

(b) Omit “Forty dollars” (wherever occurring), substitute “$200”.

(c) Omit “Twenty dollars” (wherever occurring), substitute “$100”.

Section 102...............

(d) Omit “One hundred dollars”, substitute “$200”.

Section 102...............

Omit “Eighty dollars”, substitute “$200”.

Section 104(1).............

Omit “Forty dollars”, substitute “$200”.

Section 111(1).............

Omit “Penalty: One hundred dollars.”.

Section 115(12)............

Omit “punishable upon conviction by a fine not exceeding One hundred dollars”.

Section 116(2).............

Omit “Penalty: One hundred dollars.”.

Section 117...............

Omit” Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 120(3).............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 120(4).............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 120(5).............

Omit “Penalty: Fifty dollars.”.


SCHEDULE 10-continued

Provision

Amendment

Section 125(1).............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 126(2).............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 133(1).............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 133(2).............

Omit “Penalty: One hundred dollars.”.

Section 138a..............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 139(1).............

Omit “Penalty: One hundred dollars.”.

Section 144...............

Omit “Penalty: Fifty dollars.”.

Section 145(1).............

Omit “One hundred dollars”, substitute “$200”.

Section 148c(5)............

Omit “punishable upon conviction by a line not exceeding One hundred dollars.”.

Section 155...............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 156(2).............

Omit “Penalty: One hundred dollars.”.

Section 164(2).............

Omit “Penalty: One hundred dollars.”.

Section 167(1).............

Omit “Penalty: One hundred dollars.”.

Section 168(1).............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 169...............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 171(1).............

Omit “Penalty: One hundred dollars.”.

Section 171(4).............

Omit “Penalty: Sixty dollars.”.

Section 174(2).............

Omit “Fifty dollars”, substitute “$200”.

Section 179...............

(a) Omit “Eighty dollars” (wherever occurring), substitute “$200”.

(b) Omit “Forty dollars” (wherever occurring), substitute “$200”.

(c) Omit “Twenty dollars”, substitute “$100”.

Section 182...............

Omit “Penalty: Forty dollars for the first offence and One hundred dollars for a second or sub-sequent offence.”.

Section 190a(1)............

Omit “punishable upon conviction by a fine not exceeding One hundred dollars.”.

Section 202(2).............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 205...............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 206h(2)............

Omit “punishable upon conviction by a fine not exceeding Two hundred dollars”.

Section 228...............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 231e..............

Omit “Penalty: One hundred dollars.”.

Section 235(2).............

Omit “Twenty dollars”, substitute “$100”.

Section 258a..............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 265(6).............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 268...............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 269...............

Omit “Penalty: One hundred dollars.”.

Section 269a(1)............

Omit “Penalty: One hundred dollars.”.

Section 275...............

Omit “One hundred dollars”, substitute “$200”.

Section 277...............

Omit “Penalty: One hundred dollars.”.

Section 278(3).............

Omit “Penalty: One hundred dollars.”.

Section 280(1).............

Omit “Penalty: One hundred dollars.”.

Section 288(4).............

Omit “Forty dollars”, substitute “$200”.

Section 293...............

Omit “, and where no penalty is provided shall be liable in respect of any such breach or contravention to a penalty of not more than Two hundred dollars”.

Section 296(2).............

Omit “Penalty: One hundred dollars.”.

Section 297(2).............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 298(3).............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 302...............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 303(1).............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 313(1).............

Omit “Penalty: One hundred dollars.”.

Section 374(3).............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 375...............

Omit “Penalty: One hundred dollars.”.

Section 377a(2)............

Omit “Penalty: One hundred dollars.”.

Section 386...............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 387a..............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 388(1).............

Omit “Penalty: One hundred dollars.”.

Section 389a(4)............

Omit “Penalty: Fifty dollars.”.

Section 393...............

Add at the end thereof the following sub-section:

SCHEDULE 10-continued

Provision

Amendment

 

“(2) An offence against a provision of this Act for which a penalty is not expressly provided (other than an offence created by sub-section (1) or an indictable offence) is punishable upon conviction by a fine not exceeding $200.”.

Section 410a(2)............

Omit “One hundred dollars”, substitute “$200”.

Section 413(2).............

Omit “Penalty: Fifty dollars.”.

Section 415(1).............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.

Section 417(1) and (2).......

Omit “Penalty: One hundred dollars.”.

Section 420(3).............

Omit “Penalty: Two hundred dollars.”.